MVS 8000/8000SF System 8000_CCP8000 V7.20 Volume 2 8000 CCP8000

User Manual: MVS-8000_CCP8000 V7.20 Volume 2

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 659 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Multi Format
Switcher System
MVS-8000/8000SF System (With CCP-8000 Series)
Multi Format
Switcher System
MVS-8000/8000SF System
(With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel)
User’s Guide [English]
Volume 2
2nd Edition (Revised 1)
3-206-017-12 (1)
User’s Guide
Volume 2
2nd Edition (Revised 1)
[ English ]
MVS-8000/8000SF System
(With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel)
User’s Guide
Multi Format Switcher System
Volume 2 [English]
2nd Edition (Revised 1)
Software Version 7.20 and Later
NOTICE TO USERS
© 2001 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This
manual or the software described herein, in whole or in
part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to
any machine readable form without prior written approval
from Sony Corporation.
SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY
WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE
OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND
HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO
THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER
INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY
CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE
THEREOF.
Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any
modification to this manual or the information contained
herein at any time without notice.
The software described herein may also be governed by
the terms of a separate user license agreement.
3Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations.......................................15
Basic Operations....................................................................................15
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display .................................................19
Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values....................................20
Graphics Display ...................................................................................21
Canceling Virtual Images......................................................................23
DME Special Effect Operations ..................................................................24
Border Settings ......................................................................................24
Crop Settings .........................................................................................28
Beveled Edge Settings...........................................................................31
Key Border Settings ..............................................................................33
Art Edge Settings...................................................................................34
Flex Shadow Settings ............................................................................44
Wipe Crop Settings ...............................................................................51
Color Mix Settings ................................................................................56
Defocus Settings....................................................................................58
Blur Settings ..........................................................................................60
Multi Move Settings..............................................................................62
Sepia Settings ........................................................................................64
Mono Settings........................................................................................65
Posterization and Solarization Settings .................................................66
Nega Settings.........................................................................................66
Contrast Settings....................................................................................67
Mosaic Settings .....................................................................................68
Sketch Settings ......................................................................................69
Metal Settings........................................................................................72
Dim and Fade Settings ..........................................................................73
Glow Settings ........................................................................................74
Mask Settings ........................................................................................76
Freeze Settings ......................................................................................79
Nonlinear Effect Settings ......................................................................81
Lighting Settings .................................................................................110
Trail Settings .......................................................................................115
4Table of Contents
Motion Decay Settings ........................................................................119
Keyframe Strobe Settings....................................................................121
Wind Settings ......................................................................................123
Spotlighting Settings ...........................................................................126
Background Settings............................................................................136
Separate Sides Settings........................................................................137
Shaped Video Settings.........................................................................138
Invert Settings......................................................................................140
Key Density Settings...........................................................................141
Key Source Selection ..........................................................................141
Interpolation Settings ..........................................................................142
Global Effect Operations ...........................................................................145
Combiner Settings ...............................................................................145
Brick Settings ......................................................................................150
Shadow Settings ..................................................................................154
Chapter 12 External Devices
Control of External Devices.......................................................................158
Control of P-Bus Devices ...........................................................................159
Creating and Editing the P-Bus Timeline............................................159
P-Bus Trigger ......................................................................................162
Control of GPI Devices ..............................................................................163
GPI Timeline Creation and Editing.....................................................163
Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders ........................166
Controlling the Tape/Disk Transport ..................................................166
Checking VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Information ...............171
Cueup & Play ......................................................................................172
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Timeline....................................180
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Operations...................................186
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Sequence of Keyframe Operations............................................................193
Displaying the Timeline Menu ..................................................................194
Interpreting the Timeline Menu ..........................................................194
Settings in the Timeline Menu ............................................................196
Recalling a Register....................................................................................198
Specifying the Region and Edit Points......................................................203
Selecting the Region in Which Editing Applies..................................203
Setting the Edit Points .........................................................................205
5Table of Contents
Creating and Editing Keyframes ..............................................................207
Creation ...............................................................................................207
Insertion...............................................................................................208
Modification ........................................................................................208
Deletion ...............................................................................................212
Movement............................................................................................213
Copying ...............................................................................................214
Pause....................................................................................................214
Keyframe Loop (Repeated Execution of a Specified Range) .............215
Undoing an Edit Operation..................................................................218
Duration Mode Setting ........................................................................218
Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME....................219
Time Settings...............................................................................................220
Setting the Keyframe Duration............................................................220
Setting the Effect Duration..................................................................221
Setting the Delay .................................................................................222
Path Setting .................................................................................................223
Basic Procedure for Path Settings .......................................................223
Executing Effects ........................................................................................227
Executing Effects in the Keyframe Control Block..............................227
Setting the Run Mode..........................................................................228
Executing an Effect in the Flexi Pad Control Block ...........................229
Saving Effects..............................................................................................231
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline...................................................233
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric
Keypad Control Block .............................................................233
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu.....................235
Register Operations in the Menus.............................................................238
Effect Attribute Settings......................................................................238
Effect Status Display ...........................................................................239
Effect Register Editing ........................................................................239
Displaying a List of Effect Registers for Editing ................................244
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block ..........248
Saving and Recalling Snapshots..........................................................248
Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block .............................254
Banks and Registers ............................................................................254
Saving and Recalling Snapshots..........................................................256
6Table of Contents
Snapshot Operations in the Menus ...........................................................260
Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a Menu............................260
Setting Snapshot Attributes.................................................................260
Snapshot Status Display ......................................................................263
Setting Key Snapshot Attributes .........................................................265
Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot..............................................265
Snapshot Register Editing ...................................................................266
Displaying a List of Snapshot Registers for Editing ...........................267
Operations in the Misc >Snapshot menu.............................................267
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Utility Execution .........................................................................................272
Executing a Utility With the User Preference Buttons (Menu Control
Block).......................................................................................272
Executing a Utility in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block...................273
Executing Utilities With the Cross-Point Buttons in the Key 2 Row .274
Shotbox Register Creation.........................................................................276
Creating a Shotbox Register in the Numeric Keypad Control Block..276
Creating a Shotbox Register Using the Menus ...................................278
Shotbox Execution ......................................................................................281
Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block...........281
Shotbox Execution in the Flexi Pad Control Block ............................282
Shotbox Execution in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block...................284
Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row Cross-Point Buttons
285
Shotbox Register Editing ...........................................................................286
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setup for the Whole System.......................................................................289
Network Settings (Network Config Menu).........................................289
System Settings (System Config Menu) .............................................290
Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu) ..........................................293
Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format Menu).................................296
Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu) ....................297
Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu)............................................299
Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) .................299
System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu).........................................315
Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel...........................321
Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)...................................321
7Table of Contents
Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) ............................................342
Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)................351
Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) ..............................356
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)..............367
Operation Settings (Operation Menu) .................................................374
Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu).......................381
Setup Relating to Switcher Processor.......................................................384
Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)...........................384
Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) .....................................................390
Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)................................................398
Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu) ...................404
Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction
(Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu) ....................................................407
Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu)...............................410
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)..............417
Setup Relating to DME ..............................................................................426
Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu).................................426
Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu) ...........................428
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)..............429
Setup Relating to DCU...............................................................................433
Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu)...................433
GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu).......................................434
Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu)..................................438
GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu) .................................439
Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) ...................................441
Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally..........................................451
Router Interface Settings (Router Menu) ............................................451
Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu)..........................................454
Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu) ..........................................................454
Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu) .................................456
Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu).............................................458
Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu)......................................459
Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu)............................................461
Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel.....463
Procedure for Simple Connection .......................................................463
Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in Simple Connection.............464
Chapter 17 Files
Operations on Individual Files ..................................................................466
8Table of Contents
Displaying the Individual File Operation Menus ................................466
Viewing Detailed File Information .....................................................466
Selecting Regions ................................................................................468
Selecting a Device for Operations.......................................................468
Saving Files .........................................................................................469
Loading Files.......................................................................................470
Copying Files ......................................................................................472
Renaming Files....................................................................................473
Deleting Files ......................................................................................475
Converting Between Frame Memory Clips and Extended Clips ........476
File Batch Operations.................................................................................479
Displaying the Batch Operation Menu................................................479
Batch Saving Files...............................................................................479
Batch Loading Files.............................................................................480
Batch Copying Files ............................................................................481
Importing and Exporting Files..................................................................482
Displaying the Import/Export Menu ...................................................482
Importing Frame Memory Data ..........................................................482
Exporting Frame Memory Data ..........................................................483
Directory Operations..................................................................................485
Displaying the Directory Menu...........................................................485
Creating a New Directory....................................................................485
Renaming a Directory .........................................................................486
Deleting a Directory ............................................................................486
Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs ...............................................487
Saving Files Recalled by Autoload............................................................489
Chapter 18 Macros
Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Key-
frame Control Block .......................................................................492
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro ...........................494
Creating and Editing a Macro .............................................................495
Saving a Macro....................................................................................502
Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block .......503
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro ...........................504
Creating and Saving a Macro ..............................................................507
Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block ...........511
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro ...........................512
Creating and Editing a Macro .............................................................513
9Table of Contents
Saving a Macro....................................................................................516
Macro Editing Using Menus......................................................................517
Macro Register Editing .......................................................................517
Online Editing of Macro Events..........................................................517
Offline Editing of Macro Events .........................................................523
Macro Attachment Assigning....................................................................529
Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment........................................529
Displaying the Macro Attachment List ...............................................533
Executing a Macro by Macro Attachment...........................................534
Menu Macros ..............................................................................................536
Recalling a Menu Macro Register and Executing a Menu Macro ......536
Recalling a Menu Macro Register.......................................................536
Menu Macro Creation and Editing......................................................538
Menu Macro Register Editing .............................................................544
Macro Timeline...........................................................................................546
Creating and editing a macro timeline ................................................546
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
Preparations................................................................................................550
Overall Color Corrector Operations ........................................................553
Enabling Color Corrector ....................................................................553
Copy and Swap Operations .................................................................553
Color Corrector Functions ........................................................................555
Input Video Processing Operations.....................................................555
Primary Color Correction Operations .................................................555
Secondary Color Correction Operations .............................................559
RGB Clip Operations ..........................................................................559
Luminance Processing Operations ......................................................560
Spot Color Adjustment........................................................................562
Output Video Processing Operations ..................................................564
YUV Clip Operations..........................................................................565
Chapter 20 DIAGNOSIS
Checking the Communications Status......................................................568
Communications Status Display .........................................................568
Appendix (Volume 2)
SpotLighting................................................................................................573
Texture Patterns...................................................................................573
10 Table of Contents
Shape Patterns .....................................................................................574
Functional Differences With Models of DME..........................................575
Menu Tree ...................................................................................................578
Recalling Menus..................................................................................578
M/E-1 to M/E-3 Menus .......................................................................578
PGM/PST Menu ..................................................................................581
Frame Memory Menu..........................................................................583
Color Bkgd Menu................................................................................584
AUX/MON Menu................................................................................584
CCR Menu...........................................................................................585
Copy/Swap Menu ................................................................................586
Misc Menu...........................................................................................586
Status Menu.........................................................................................587
DME Menu..........................................................................................588
Global Effect Menu .............................................................................589
Device Menu .......................................................................................589
Macro Menu ........................................................................................590
Key Frame Menu.................................................................................591
Effect Menu.........................................................................................592
Snapshot Menu ....................................................................................593
Shotbox Menu .....................................................................................594
File Menu ............................................................................................595
Engineering Setup Menu .....................................................................596
Diagnostic Menu .................................................................................600
Macro File Editing Rules ...........................................................................601
Macro File Syntax ...............................................................................601
Syntax of Event and Continue Statements ..........................................602
File Name ............................................................................................603
Saving and Recalling a File.................................................................603
Errors ...................................................................................................604
Correspondence Between Events and Symbols ..................................604
Symbols and Parameters .....................................................................605
Example of File Contents ....................................................................612
About the Macro Attachment List Display ..............................................613
M/E and PGM/PST Banks ..................................................................613
Auxiliary Bus Control Block...............................................................616
Other Blocks........................................................................................618
Error Messages ...........................................................................................619
Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status/Error Log Menu .........619
11Table of Contents
Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box.....................................624
Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu ......................637
Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define].......................641
Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro.................................651
Index ...........................................................................................................652
12 Table of Contents
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations .....................................15
Basic Operations ..................................................................................15
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display ...............................................19
Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values ..................................20
Graphics Display .................................................................................21
Canceling Virtual Images ....................................................................23
DME Special Effect Operations ................................................................24
Border Settings ....................................................................................24
Crop Settings .......................................................................................28
Beveled Edge Settings .........................................................................31
Key Border Settings ............................................................................33
Art Edge Settings .................................................................................34
Flex Shadow Settings ..........................................................................44
Wipe Crop Settings .............................................................................51
Color Mix Settings ..............................................................................56
Defocus Settings ..................................................................................58
Blur Settings ........................................................................................60
Multi Move Settings ............................................................................62
Sepia Settings ......................................................................................64
Mono Settings ......................................................................................65
Posterization and Solarization Settings ...............................................66
Nega Settings .......................................................................................66
Contrast Settings ..................................................................................67
Mosaic Settings ...................................................................................68
Sketch Settings ....................................................................................69
Metal Settings ......................................................................................72
Dim and Fade Settings ........................................................................73
Glow Settings ......................................................................................74
Mask Settings ......................................................................................76
Freeze Settings ....................................................................................79
Nonlinear Effect Settings ....................................................................81
Lighting Settings ...............................................................................110
Trail Settings .....................................................................................115
Motion Decay Settings ......................................................................119
Keyframe Strobe Settings ..................................................................121
Wind Settings ....................................................................................123
Spotlighting Settings .........................................................................126
Background Settings ..........................................................................136
Separate Sides Settings ......................................................................137
Shaped Video Settings .......................................................................138
Invert Settings ....................................................................................140
Key Density Settings .........................................................................141
Key Source Selection ........................................................................141
Interpolation Settings ........................................................................142
Global Effect Operations .........................................................................145
Combiner Settings .............................................................................145
Brick Settings ....................................................................................150
Shadow Settings ................................................................................154
15Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Three-Dimensional Transformation
Operations
Use the device control block to carry out three-dimensional DME
transformations.
For details of three-dimensional DME coordinate space, see “Three-
Dimensional Transformations” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Basic Operations
This section explains how to use the device control block (trackball) to carry
out three-dimensional transformations.
Device control block (trackball)
Function assignment buttons
Operating buttons Z-ring
DEVUSER
M/E1
DME1
DME5
MENU
SHIFT
M/E2
DME2
DME6
ASP
PERS
SUB
AXIS
LOC
MAIN
LOCAL
K1
CB1
GLB
K2
CB2
CLR
WORK
BUFR
M/E3
DME3
DME7
X
P/P
DME4
DME8
Y Z CTR
RUN
CTRL
LOC
SIZE
ASP
LOC
XYZ
LOC
ROT
POS
RSZR
SRC
K3
TRGT
K4
RSZR
CTRL
Region selection buttons (DME1 to 8)
Trackball
Chapter 11 DME Operations
16 Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Transforming an image in three-dimensional coordinate space
1
With the region selection buttons, select the target channel of the
operation.
You can press several of the buttons simultaneously to select several
channels. In this case, the button that you pressed first lights in green,
while buttons pressed subsequently light in amber.
2
With the function assignment buttons, select the three-dimensional
coordinate space in which to perform the transformation.
LOCAL button: Selects local coordinate space.
GLB button: Selects global coordinate space. You can select this button
and the [LOCAL] button simultaneously.
SRC button: Selects the source coordinate space.
TRGT button: Selects the target coordinate space.
([SRC] and [TRGT] cannot be selected at the same time.)
3
Press the button for the operation you want to do, turning it on, to select
the transformation mode.
The trackball and Z-ring are assigned to the selected three-dimensional
coordinate space transformation mode.
For details of the three-dimensional transformation operation modes, see
“Transformation Operation Modes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
To move the image: Press the [LOC XYZ] button, turning it on.
You can move the image on the x- and y-axes with the trackball and
move it on the z-axis with the Z-ring. Pressing the [LOC SIZE] button
instead of the [LOC XYZ] button, turning it on, makes it possible to
move the image on the x- and y-axes.
To rotate the image: Press the [ROT] button, turning it on.
You can rotate the image on the x- and y-axes with the trackball and
rotate it on the z-axis with the Z-ring.
To rotate the image in Spin mode, press the [ROT] button, turning it
on, while holding down the [SHIFT] button. You can operate in the
same way with the trackball and Z-ring.
To move an axis of rotation: With the [SRC] button selected in step 2,
press the [AXIS LOC] button, turning it on.
You can move the axis of rotation of the image on the x- and y-axes of
the image with the trackball, and on the z-axis with the Z-ring.
To magnify or shrink the image: Press the [LOC SIZE] button, turning
it on.
You can magnify and shrink the image with the Z-ring. Rotate
counterclockwise to shrink, and clockwise to magnify.
17Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To change the aspect ratio of the image: With the [SRC] button selected
in step 2, press the [ASP PERS] button, turning it on.
You can change the aspect ratio independently on the x- and y-axes
with the trackball, and change it simultaneously on both the x- and y-
axes with the Z-ring.
To change the perspective on the image: With the [TRGT] button
selected in step 2, press the [ASP PERS] button, turning it on.
You can change the perspective of the image on the x- and y-axes with
the trackball, and change the distance to the view point with the Z-
ring.
To change the skew of the image: With the [SRC] button selected in step
2, press the [ASP PERS] button, turning it on, while holding down the
[SHIFT] button.
You can change the skew of the image along the x- and y-axes with
the trackball.
4
Depending on the axis of the change, operate the trackball and Z-ring as
follows.
• To change on the x-axis, rotate the trackball horizontally.
Parameter values increase as you rotate to the right, and decrease as you
rotate to the left.
• To change on the y-axis, rotate the trackball vertically.
Parameter values increase as you rotate upward, and decrease as you
rotate downward.
• To change on the z-axis, rotate the Z-ring.
Parameter values increase as you rotate clockwise, and decrease as you
rotate counterclockwise.
However, when you have pressed the [LOC XYZ] button to move the
Chapter 11 DME Operations
18 Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
image, z-axis parameters increase as you rotate counterclockwise, and
decrease as you rotate clockwise.
To reduce the rate of change of the parameters (fine mode)
Carry out the trackball or Z-ring operations while holding down the [SRC]
or [TRGT] button.
5
To restrict the change in the transformation to a specific axis, press the [X],
[Y], or [Z] button, tuning it on.
This enables the trackball and Z-ring operations on the selected axis only.
Functions assignable to trackball and Z-ring operations
Button Usable coordinate
space
Trackball x-
direction
Trackball y-
direction
Z-ring
LOC XYZ Source, target Move image on x-
axis
Move image on y-
axis
Move image on z-
axis
ROT Source, target Rotate image on y-
axis
Rotate image on x-
axis
Rotate image on z-
axis
SHIFT+
ROT
Source, target Rotate image on y-
axis (Spin mode)
Rotate image on x-
axis (Spin mode)
Rotate image on z-
axis (Spin mode)
AXIS LOC Source Move x-axis of
rotation
Move y-axis of
rotation
Move z-axis of
rotation
LOC SIZE Source, target Move image on x-
axis
Move image on y-
axis
Magnify and shrink
image
ASP PERS Source Change aspect ratio
on x-axis
Change aspect ratio
on y-axis
Change aspect ratio
on x- and y-axes
simultaneously
Target Shift view point on x-
axis
Shift view point on y-
axis
Change distance
from view point to
image
SHIFT+ ASP
PERS
Source Change skew on x-
axis
Change skew on y-
axis
Change aspect ratio
on x- and y-axes
simultaneously
19Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display
You can check the values of the three-dimensional parameters in the DME
menu.
Displaying the three-dimensional parameters in the DME menu
In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [DME].
The DME menu appears. The status area shows the three-dimensional
parameters currently controlled by the device control block.
• When multiple DME channels are selected, this shows the parameters for the
reference channel.
• When both Global and Local are selected, the three-dimensional parameters
are shown for the channel (the reference channel) for which the button is lit
green.
Example three-dimensional parameter display (DME menu)
Viewing the three-dimensional parameter details
In the DME menu, press the menu title button (the [DME] in the upper left part
of the screen).
The Status menu appears. This menu shows the three-dimensional parameters
for the DME reference channel currently selected in the device control block.
Type of three-dimensional space a)
Operation mode for three-dimensional
transforms b)
Value of X
Value of Y
Value of Z
a) This shows one of Local Target, Local Source, Global Target, and Global
Source.
b) This shows one of Loc XYZ, Loc Size, Rot, Spin, Axis Loc, Skew, Asp, and
Pers.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
20 Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Example three-dimensional parameter details
Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values
In addition to setting three-dimensional parameter values with the trackball and
Z-ring, you can enter them directly from the numeric keypad control block.
Entering three-dimensional parameter values
1
In the device control block, press the [X], [Y], or [Z] button, turning it on.
The numeric keypad control block enters a mode in which you can enter
parameters for the selected axis.
2
Enter a parameter value with the numeric keypad.
The number of significant digits after a decimal point is 4.
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
The parameter value is changed, and the image changes.
21Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To enter difference values
You can enter difference values by pressing the [+/–] button, entering the
difference from the current value, and pressing the [TRIM] button to confirm.
The [+/–] button toggles between “+” (plus) and “–” (minus) each time it is
pressed.
Resetting three-dimensional parameter values
Pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block sets the current three-
dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points.
To reset three-dimensional parameter values to the defaults for the current
transformation operation mode, press the [CTR] button twice in rapid
succession. (For details of detents and default values, see “Three-Dimensional
Transformations” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).)
Clearing the working buffer
The working buffer is memory that holds the instantaneous state of an effect.
To clear (initialize) only the three-dimensional transform parameters in the
working buffer, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the device control
block.
To clear all of the parameters in the working buffer and initialize the DME
system, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button twice in rapid succession. It is
necessary to do this for both the local coordinate space and global coordinate
space.
As the initial DME state, you can specify whether to use the factory default
settings or user settings in the Setup menu. (See “Selecting the State After
Powering On (Start Up Menu)” (page 297).)
Graphics Display
You can display graphics such as a wire frame, coordinate axis, and a grid over
the current DME image. This makes it easier to set up transformations, because
you can operate while viewing the coordinate axes and the position of the
image in three-dimensional coordinate space. (For the types of graphics
displayed, see “Graphics Display” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).)
Use the DME menu to make graphics display settings. You can make separate
settings for separate channels. To select a target DME channel, use the device
control block.
Displaying graphics
1
In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [DME].
Chapter 11 DME Operations
22 Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
The DME menu appears.
2
Select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF4 ‘Graphic.’
The Graphic menu appears.
3
Turn [Graphic] on.
The system enters graphics display mode, enabling graphics to be
displayed in the monitor screen.
4
Turn on the buttons of the graphics you want to show.
To show axes: Turn [Axis] on.
To show axis names: Turn [Axis Name] on.
To show the channel ID: Turn [Ch ID] on.
To show a wire frame: Turn [Wire Frame] on.
To show the grid: Turn [Grid] on.
To show the flex shadow axis: Turn [Flex Shadow Axis] on.
The selected graphics appear in the monitor screen.
Note
The flex shadow axis function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
5
If you want to shrink the graphics display to show the range not displayed
on a normal monitor, turn [Scale] on and set the following parameters.
As the value of the setting grows, the monitor shrinks further toward the
center point.
6
To automatically erase the graphic display while the keyframes are
executing, press [Auto Erase], turning it on, and then set the following
parameter.
Outputting graphics to the monitor output connector
In the Graphic menu, press [Monitor Out] to turn it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scale Degree to which the graphics
display is shrunk
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Recover Time Time until graphic display
appears again after keyframe
execution
0 to 300 (frames)
23Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Graphics are displayed on the device connected to the monitor output
connector.
Note
Output to the Monitor Out connector is not supported on the MVE-8000.
When the MKE-8021A is installed in the MVE-8000A to provide an SDI
interface or when the MVE-9000 is used, it is possible to output graphics to the
Monitor Out connector.
Canceling Virtual Images
When a transformation is executed with an extreme degree of perspective, the
part of the image which is beyond the imaginary view point can wrap around
and show on the other side. The wrapped-around portion is referred to as a
virtual image.
Using the DME menu, you can make a setting not to show the virtual images.
Canceling virtual images
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF2 ‘Video/Key.’
The Video/Key menu appears.
2
Press [Wrap Around], turning it on.
The virtual image disappears.
[Wrap Around] on
Virtual image
Chapter 11 DME Operations
24 DME Special Effect Operations
DME Special Effect Operations
You can use DME to add a variety of special effects. The following types of
DME special effects are available.
For details of DME special effects, see “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
•Edge effects: Border, Crop, Beveled Edge, Key Border, Art Edge, Flex
Shadow
•Effects for entire image: Defocus, Blur, Multi Move
•Effects for video image: Sepia, Mono, Posterization, Solarization, Nega,
Contrast, Mosaic, Mask, Sketch, Metal, Dim and Fade, Glow
• Freeze effects
• Nonlinear effects: Wave, Mosaic Glass, Flag, Twist, Ripple, Rings, Broken
Glass, Flying Bar, Blind, Split, Split Slide, Mirror, Multi Mirror,
Kaleidoscope, Lens, Circle, Panorama, Page Turn, Roll, Cylinder, Sphere,
Explosion, Swirl, Melt, Character Trail
• Lighting effects: Lighting, Spotlighting
•Recursive effects: Trail, Motion Decay, Keyframe Strobe
• Background color
•Separate Sides (effects for front and back sides)
• Signal inversion (Invert effect)
• Key density adjustment
• Key source selection
Operations common to all DME special effects
In this section, explanations of the operating procedures for individual special
effects begin with selections from the DME menu. The following are common
operations that you must do prior to selecting from the DME menu.
1
In the device control block, select the target DME channel.
2
In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [DME].
The DME menu appears.
Border Settings
This effect adds a border to the image.
25DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Adding a border
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF1 ‘Border/Crop.’
The Border/Crop menu appears.
2
Press [Border], turning it on.
The Border effect is enabled. You can adjust the border width parameters
with the knobs.
3
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Border width on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Border width on top and bottom
sides
Top value shown
3 All Border width on all sides Left value shown
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Border width on top side –6.00 to +6.00
2 Left Border width on left side –8.00 to +8.00
3 Right Border width on right side –8.00 to +8.00
4 Bottom Border width on bottom side –6.00 to +6.00
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Border width on left and right
sides
Left value shown
Chapter 11 DME Operations
26 DME Special Effect Operations
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
2 V Border width on top and bottom
sides
Top value shown
3 All Border width on all sides Left value shown
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Border width on top side –4.50 to +4.50
2 Left Border width on left side –8.00 to +8.00
3 Right Border width on right side –8.00 to +8.00
4 Bottom Border width on bottom side –4.50 to +4.50
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Border width on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Border width on top and bottom
sides
Top value shown
3 All Border width on all sides Left value shown
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Border width on top side –18.00 to +18.00
2 Left Border width on left side –24.00 to +24.00
3 Right Border width on right side –24.00 to +24.00
4 Bottom Border width on bottom side –18.00 to +18.00
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Border width on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Border width on top and bottom
sides
Top value shown
27DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Setting the border color
The operation differs depending on the DME used (MVE-8000/8000A or
MVE-9000).
When the MVE-8000/8000A is used
Press [Border Color], turning it on, and set the following parameters.
When the MVE-9000 is used
Use the buttons in the <Border Fill> group to select the signal to insert in the
border.
Flat Color: single color
Mix Color: mix color signal set in the Color Mix menu (see page 56)
Ext Video: an external video signal input to the Ext IN connector
If Flat Color is selected, adjust the following parameters.
If Mix Color or Ext Video selected, the border color changes according to the
mix color signal or external video signal.
3 All Border width on all sides Left value shown
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Border width on top side –18.00 to +18.00
2 Left Border width on left side –32.00 to +32.00
3 Right Border width on right side –32.00 to +32.00
4 Bottom Border width on bottom side –18.00 to +18.00
5 Density Border density 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
28 DME Special Effect Operations
Softening the border edges
Press [Border Soft], turning it on, and set the following parameters.
Crop Settings
This effect crops the image.
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Cropping the image
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF1 ‘Border/Crop.’
The Border/Crop menu appears.
2
Press [Crop], turning it on.
The Crop effect is enabled. You can adjust degree of cropping with the
knobs.
3
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Softness of inner side of border 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Crop positions on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Crop positions on top and
bottom sides
Top value shown
3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Crop position on top side –3.00 to +3.00
2 Left Crop position on left side –4.00 to +4.00
29DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
• SD format, 16:9 mode
• HD format, 4:3 mode
3 Right Crop position on right side –4.00 to +4.00
4 Bottom Crop position on bottom side –3.00 to +3.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Crop positions on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Crop positions on top and
bottom sides
Top value shown
3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Crop position on top side –2.25 to +2.25
2 Left Crop position on left side –4.00 to +4.00
3 Right Crop position on right side –4.00 to +4.00
4 Bottom Crop position on bottom side –2.25 to +2.25
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Crop positions on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Crop positions on top and
bottom sides
Top value shown
3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Crop position on top side –9.00 to +9.00
2 Left Crop position on left side –12.00 to +12.00
3 Right Crop position on right side –12.00 to +12.00
4 Bottom Crop position on bottom side –9.00 to +9.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
30 DME Special Effect Operations
• HD format, 16:9 mode
Signs of numeric settings
For H, V, and All settings, the sign (+/–) of the setting need not be
considered. For example, in the case of an H setting, the value for Left is
automatically regarded as a negative value, and the value for Right as a
positive value, to display the image.
The following is an example of these settings.
4
To soften the edges of the image, press [Edge Soft], turning it on, and set
the following parameter.
Note
Edges cannot be softened when the Crop effect is disabled.
To specify whether to invert the crop area when inverting the video
image
In the <Invert/Crop Process> group, select either of the following.
Crop –> Invert: Set an axis of symmetry at the center of the input video, and
invert both the desired area of video and the crop area horizontally and
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Crop positions on left and right
sides
Left value shown
2 V Crop positions on top and
bottom sides
Top value shown
3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Crop position on top side –9.00 to +9.00
2 Left Crop position on left side –16.00 to +16.00
3 Right Crop position on right side –16.00 to +16.00
4 Bottom Crop position on bottom side –9.00 to +9.00
Parameter Entered
value
Setting
H 1.5 Left=–1.50
Right=1.50
–1.5 Left=–1.50
Right=1.50
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Softness of edges 0.00 to 100.00
31DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
vertically around that axis of symmetry. The order of effect application is
Crop > Invert.
Invert –> Crop: Set an axis of symmetry at the center of the input video, and
invert only the desired area of video horizontally and vertically around that
axis of symmetry. The order of effect application is Invert > Crop.
Beveled Edge Settings
This effect applies a beveled frame appearance to an image.
For sample images, see “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Applying a beveled edge
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF2 ‘Beveled Edge.’
The Beveled Edge menu appears.
2
Press [Beveled Edge], turning it on.
This enables the beveled edge, and you can now use the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
Note
When the border is enabled, the edge soft function (see page 28) is not
available.
3
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
0.00 to 4.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
0.00 to 3.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of H shown
Chapter 11 DME Operations
32 DME Special Effect Operations
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
4
In the <Edge Mode> group, select the type of edge.
Light: effect of light striking the edge
Color: colored edges. When this is selected, set the following parameters
in the <Color Adjust> group.
•To set the density
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
0.00 to 4.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
0.00 to 2.25
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of H shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
0.00 to 12.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
0.00 to 9.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of H shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
0.00 to 16.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
0.00 to 9.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of H shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Adjust luminance of top edge –100.00 to +100.00
2 Left Adjust luminance of left edge –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Adjust luminance of right edge –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Adjust luminance of bottom edge –100.00 to +100.00
5 All Simultaneously adjust luminance of
all four edges
Value of Left shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Adjust the color density 0.00 to 100.00
33DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
• To set the colors for each edge (Top, Left, Right, Bottom, All)
a) For the All adjustment, the value for Left is shown.
5
To soften the inside of the edges and the boundaries between adjacent
edges, turn on [Edge Soft], and adjust the following parameters.
Key Border Settings
This effect adds borders to a key, or makes the key an outline only.
Note
The Key Border function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Applying key borders
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF3 ‘Key Border.’
The Key Border menu appears.
2
Press [Key Border], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00 a)
3Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Inner Soft Softness of the inside of edges 0.00 to 100.00
2 Bound Soft Softness of the edge boundaries 0.00 to 100.00
Bound Soft
Inner Soft
Chapter 11 DME Operations
34 DME Special Effect Operations
This enables key borders, and you can now use the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
Note
The key border function and Glow function (see page 75) cannot be turned
on at the same time. Only the one most recently turned on is effective.
3
Set the following parameters.
4
To set the key border color, press [Flat Color] and adjust the following
parameters.
To select an outline only key
Press [Outline], turning it on.
The outline only effect is enabled.
Art Edge Settings
This effect adds edges to the inside and outside of the input picture.
Note
The Art Edge function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Applying art edges
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF4 ‘Art Edge.’
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right key borders
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom key borders
0.00 to 100.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four key borders
Value of H shown
4 Soft Softness of the key borders 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of the key borders 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
35DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
The Art Edge menu appears.
2
Press [Art Edge], turning it on.
This enables art edges, and you can now use the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
Note
The Defocus, Blur, Key Border, and Glow effects cannot be applied to the
Art Edge sections.
3
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
Value of Left shown
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
Value of Top shown
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of Left shown
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Width of top edge 0.00 to 6.00
2 Left Width of left edge 0.00 to 8.00
3 Right Width of right edge 0.00 to 8.00
4 Bottom Width of bottom edge 0.00 to 6.00
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
Value of Left shown
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
Value of Top shown
Chapter 11 DME Operations
36 DME Special Effect Operations
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of Left shown
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Width of top edge 0.00 to 4.50
2 Left Width of left edge 0.00 to 8.00
3 Right Width of right edge 0.00 to 8.00
4 Bottom Width of bottom edge 0.00 to 4.50
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
Value of Left shown
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
Value of Top shown
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of Left shown
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Width of top edge 0.00 to 18.00
2 Left Width of left edge 0.00 to 24.00
3 Right Width of right edge 0.00 to 24.00
4 Bottom Width of bottom edge 0.00 to 18.00
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left
and right edges
Value of Left shown
2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top
and bottom edges
Value of Top shown
37DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Adjusting the position of art edges
1
In the Art Edge menu, press [Edge Position], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all
four edges
Value of Left shown
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Width of top edge 0.00 to 18.00
2 Left Width of left edge 0.00 to 32.00
3 Right Width of right edge 0.00 to 32.00
4 Bottom Width of bottom edge 0.00 to 18.00
5 Density Density of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top edge –3.00 to +3.00
2 Left Position of left edge –4.00 to +4.00
3 Right Position of right edge –4.00 to +4.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom edge –3.00 to +3.00
5 All Adjust the position of all four
edges
Value of H shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top edge –2.25 to +2.25
2 Left Position of left edge –4.00 to +4.00
3 Right Position of right edge –4.00 to +4.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom edge –2.25 to +2.25
5 All Adjust the position of all four
edges
Value of H shown
Chapter 11 DME Operations
38 DME Special Effect Operations
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
Softening the inner and outer sides of art edges
1
In the Art Edge menu, press [Soft], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top edge –9.00 to +9.00
2 Left Position of left edge –12.00 to +12.00
3 Right Position of right edge –12.00 to +12.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom edge –9.00 to +9.00
5 All Adjust the position of all four
edges
Value of H shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top edge –9.00 to +9.00
2 Left Position of left edge –16.00 to +16.00
3 Right Position of right edge –16.00 to +16.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom edge –9.00 to +9.00
5 All Adjust the position of all four
edges
Value of H shown
Top
Left Right
Bottom
Example: Moving the right edge position in the “minus” direction.
Art edge portion Position before
moving
Position after
moving
Moving in the
minus direction
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Inner H Simultaneously adjust softness of
left and right inner edges
0.00 to 100.00
2 Inner V Simultaneously adjust softness of
top and bottom inner edges
0.00 to 100.00
39DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Setting the way in which art edge colors change
1
In the <Art Edge Source> group of the Art Edge menu, select the color
pattern to apply to the art edges.
Flat Color: Uses Color 1 (see page 43) as a flat color.
Gradation Matte: Color 1 changes to Color 2 (see page 43) at the border
lines (see step 2).
Rainbow Matte: The color set as Color 1 changes hue into color on the
border lines.
Radial Gradation: Color 1 on the inner side is mixed into Color 2 on the
outer side, according to the shape of the art edge.
Radial Rainbow: The hue of Color 1 on the inner side changes into Color
2 on the outer side, according to the shape of the art edge.
Rainbow Gradation: Color 3 (see page 43) overwrites Radial Rainbow,
giving a gradation effect.
2
When you select other than [Flat Color], set the gradation border lines for
the selected pattern.
Border line parameters for Gradation Matte and Rainbow Matte
3 Outer H Simultaneously adjust softness of
left and right outer edges
0.00 to 100.00
4 Outer V Simultaneously adjust softness of
top and bottom outer edges
0.00 to 100.00
5 All Simultaneously adjust softness of
all inner and outer edges.
Value of Outer H
shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Flat Color Gradation Matte Rainbow Matte
Radial Gradation Radial Rainbow Rainbow Gradation
Chapter 11 DME Operations
40 DME Special Effect Operations
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
Radial Gradation and Radial Rainbow parameters
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–8.00 to +8.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–6.00 to +6.00
3 Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–8.00 to +8.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–4.50 to +4.50
3 Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–24.00 to +24.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–18.00 to +18.00
3 Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–32.00 to +32.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–18.00 to +18.00
3 Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
41DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Rainbow Gradation parameters
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–8.00 to +8.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–6.00 to +6.00
3 RBW Soft Softness of rainbow border region 0.00 to 100.00
4 GRD Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–8.00 to +8.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–4.50 to +4.50
3 RBW Soft Softness of rainbow border region 0.00 to 100.00
4 GRD Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–24.00 to +24.00
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–18.00 to +18.00
3 RBW Soft Softness of rainbow border region 0.00 to 100.00
4 GRD Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of gradation border in
horizontal direction
–32.00 to +32.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
42 DME Special Effect Operations
3
When Gradation Matte or Rainbow Matte is selected, set modifiers as
required.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the
pattern
a) –1.00 is one rotation in counterclockwise direction. +1.00 is one rotation in clockwise
direction. 0.00 is no rotation.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a specified speed
a) –100.00 is four rotations per second in counterclockwise direction. +100.00 is four
rotations per second in clockwise direction. 0.00 is no rotation.
Setting art edge colors
1
In the Art Edge menu, turn on the button (Color 1 to Color 3) for the color
for which you want to make settings in the <Color Adjust> group.
2 V Position of gradation border in
vertical direction
–18.00 to +18.00
3 RBW Soft Softness of rainbow border region 0.00 to 100.00
4 GRD Soft Softness of gradation border
region
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Rotation angle of pattern –8.00 to +8.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation speed of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
VV
HH
Color 1Color 1
Color 2 Color 2
Position determined by
H and V values (When
Angle (see step 3) is 0.)
Determined by the value of
Angle (see step 3).
Border
43DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
2
Adjust the following parameters.
• Color 1 settings
• Color 2 settings
Note
Color 2 cannot be set when [Flat Color] is selected in the <Art Edge
Source> group.
• Color 3 settings
Note
Color 3 can be set only when [Rainbow Gradation] is selected in the <Art
Edge Source> group.
Relationship between Hue and Hue Offset
For example, when the Hue value of Color 1 is 180.00, and the Hue Offset
value of Color 2 is –540.00, the relationship is as shown below, with the
hue changing within the Hue Offset range of Color 1 and Color 2.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Offset Hue range –540.0 to +540.0
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Offset Hue range –540.0 to +540.0
Chapter 11 DME Operations
44 DME Special Effect Operations
Rounding art edge corners
Press [Round Corner], turning it on.
The art edge corners on the inner and outer sides are rounded.
Note
This function is available only when [Soft] is on.
Flex Shadow Settings
This effect applies a shadow to the picture using only one channel.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• The Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• “Mix Color” or “Ext Video”can only be applied to one of the background
(see page 136), flex shadow, trail (see page 115), and wind (see page 123)
effects.
If you select “Mix Color” or “Ext Video” in one of these settings, a selection
of “Mix Color” or “Ext Video” in any of the other effects is disabled, and
“Flat Color” is selected in its place.
• When executing combining four channels of DME images, “Mix Color” and
“Ext Video” in the flex shadow and background effects cannot be selected.
540
360
180
0
-
180
-
360
-
540
Color 1
Hue
Offset
Color 2
Hue setting
range
Hue Offset
setting range
45DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Applying a flex shadow
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF5 ‘Flex Shadow.’
The Flex Shadow menu appears.
2
Press [Flex Shadow], turning it on.
This enables flex shadows, and you can now use the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
Note
The Flex shadow function cannot be enabled when the following functions
are enabled.
• Any nonlinear effect
•Brick
• Shadow
3
Adjust the following parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
a) The Soft parameter is valid only when [Internal] is selected in the <Flex Shadow Source>
group.
• SD format, 16:9 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Move shadow horizontally –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Move shadow vertically –6.00 to +6.00
3 Size All Enlarge or shrink horizontally and
vertically
Value of Size H
(see
page 47)
shown
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Move shadow horizontally –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Move shadow vertically –4.50 to +4.50
3 Size All Enlarge or shrink horizontally and
vertically
Value of Size H
(see
page 47)
shown
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
46 DME Special Effect Operations
a) The Soft parameter is valid only when [Internal] is selected in the <Flex Shadow Source>
group.
• HD format, 4:3 mode
a) The Soft parameter is valid only when [Internal] is selected in the <Flex Shadow Source>
group.
• HD format, 16:9 mode
a) The Soft parameter is valid only when [Internal] is selected in the <Flex Shadow Source>
group.
4
In the <Flex Shadow Source> group, select the signal to use for the flex
shadow.
External: Generate the shadow using an input signal.
Internal: Generate the shadow using a full-size key signal.
5
In the <Flex Shadow Fill> group, select the signal to insert in the flex
shadow.
Flat Color: single color
Mix Color: mix color signal set in the Color Mix menu (see page 56)
Ext Video: an external video signal input to the Ext IN connector
6
Only if Flat Color is selected in step 5, adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Move shadow horizontally –24.00 to +24.00
2 V Move shadow vertically –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size All Enlarge or shrink horizontally and
vertically
Value of Size H
(see
page 47)
shown
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Move shadow horizontally –32.00 to +32.00
2 V Move shadow vertically –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size All Enlarge or shrink horizontally and
vertically
Value of Size H
(see
page 47)
shown
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
47DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Adjusting the size of the flex shadow
1
In the Flex Shadow menu, press [Size], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) The Soft parameter is valid only when [Internal] is selected in the <Flex Shadow Source>
group.
Setting the center point of the flex shadow
1
In the Flex Shadow menu, press [Axis Loc], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size H Enlarge or shrink horizontally 0.00 to 2.00
2 Size V Enlarge or shrink vertically 0.00 to 2.00
3 Size All Enlarge or shrink horizontally and
vertically
Value of Size H
shown
4Soft a) Softness of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
5 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Axis Loc H Move the shadow center axis
horizontally
–8.00 to +8.00
2 Axis Loc V Move the shadow center axis
vertically
–6.00 to +6.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Axis Loc H Move the shadow center axis
horizontally
–8.00 to +8.00
2 Axis Loc V Move the shadow center axis
vertically
–4.50 to +4.50
Chapter 11 DME Operations
48 DME Special Effect Operations
• HD format, 4:3 mode
• HD format, 16:9 mode
The flex shadow central axis appears when the [Flex Shadow Axis] function is
enabled in the Graphic menu.
For details, see “Graphics Display” (page 21).
Skewing the flex shadow
1
In the Flex Shadow menu, press [Skew], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Axis Loc H Move the shadow center axis
horizontally
–24.00 to +24.00
2 Axis Loc V Move the shadow center axis
vertically
–18.00 to +18.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Axis Loc H Move the shadow center axis
horizontally
–32.00 to +32.00
2 Axis Loc V Move the shadow center axis
vertically
–18.00 to +18.00
When the default Axis Loc setting is used
Picture
Flex shadow
Axis Loc position
Shadow skewed
with Axis Loc set at
the lower left corner
of the picture
Shadow size and
perspective adjusted
with default Axis Loc
setting
Shadow skewed with
Axis Loc set at the
midpoint on the left
edge of the picture
Axis Loc H
Axis Loc V
49DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Adding perspective to the flex shadow
1
In the Flex Shadow menu, press [Perspective], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Inverting the flex shadow
In the <Invert> group of the Flex Shadow menu, select the direction to invert
the shadow.
H: Invert the shadow in the horizontal direction. The inversion is applied
around the axis of the knob 2 parameter Axis Loc V set with [Axis Loc].
V: Invert the shadow in the vertical direction. The inversion is applied around
the axis of the knob 1 parameter Axis Loc H set with [Axis Loc].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Skew H Skew horizontally –100.00 to +100.00
2 Skew V Skew vertically –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Perspective H Add horizontal perspective –100.00 to +100.00
2 Perspective V Add vertical perspective –100.00 to +100.00
Perspective
H = –100
Perspective
H = +100
Perspective
V = –100
Perspective
V = +100
Chapter 11 DME Operations
50 DME Special Effect Operations
Setting a combine shadow
1
In the Flex Shadow menu, press [Combine Shadow], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
Notes
• The Combine Shadow effect is applied to all shadows, not only the
sections where shadows overlap.
• Combine Shadow is enabled when the Flex Shadow effect and the global
effect Combiner are enabled. In this state, Combine Shadow remains
enabled even if the global effect is disabled.
• In Combine Shadow, the settings for the channel with the lowest number
among the channels being combined are enabled.
Flex shadow creation example
The flow of flex pattern creation will be explained using the following pattern
as an example.
Picture
When H is enabled When V is enabled
Flex shadow
Before inversion
Before inversion
After inversion
After inversion
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Density of combine shadow 0.00 to 100.00
51DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
1
Press [Flex Shadow], turning it on.
2
In the <Flex Shadow> group, select [External].
3
Turn [Axis Loc] on and use knob 2 to set the Axis Loc V parameter so that
the center of the flex shadow deformation is at the bottom of the picture.
(For HD format and 16: 9 mode: Axis Loc V = –9.00)
The following steps will be easier if you display the flex shadow axis
graphic by pressing [Flex Shadow Axis] in the Graphic menu.
4
Press [V] in the <Invert> group, turning it on, to invert the flex shadow
horizontally.
5
Turn [Size] on and use knob 2 to set the Size V parameter so that the
shadow extends vertically.
(For HD format and 16: 9 mode: Size V = 1.50)
6
Press [Skew], turning it on, and use knob 1 to set the Skew H parameter so
that the parallel lines appear to emerge from the depth at the right.
(For HD format and 16:9 mode: Skew H = –50.00)
Wipe Crop Settings
This effect crops the video image to be visible only inside a wipe pattern.
For example images, see “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• The wipe crop function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When wipe crop is on, any mask that was on is turned off.
• When brick is on, wipe crop cannot be turned on. To turn wipe crop on, it is
first necessary to turn brick off.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
52 DME Special Effect Operations
• In the <Shaped Video> group of the Video/Key menu, when [Output] is off,
unless you set [Bkgd] in the HF1 ‘Bkgd’ menu to on, the wipe crop effect
will not be visible.
Applying the wipe crop effect
To select the pattern
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF6 ‘Wipe Crop.’
The Wipe Crop menu appears.
2
Press [Wipe Crop], turning it on.
3
Press [Pattern Select].
The Pattern Select menu appears.
4
From the displayed patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 and 304), press
any pattern to select it.
In this state, you can use the knobs to adjust the size of the pattern. (For
details of parameters, see the next item.)
To set the pattern size and position
1
In the Wipe Crop menu, press [Position/Size].
2
Set the following parameters.
The setting range for the parameters depends on the signal format (SD/
HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system, as follows.
•For SD format
a) For 4:3 mode
b) For 16:9 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Vertical position –6.00 to +6.00 a)
–4.50 to +4.50 b)
3 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24, 304
53DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Note
When pattern number 304 is selected, the effect of settings in the <Edge>
group varies with the Size setting.
• For HD format
a) For 4:3 mode
b) For 16:9 mode
Note
When pattern number 304 is selected, the effect of settings in the <Edge>
group varies with the Size setting.
To invert the regions of the cropping
In the Wipe Crop menu, press [Invert], turning it on.
Setting the aspect ratio of the wipe crop pattern (Aspect)
1
In the Wipe Crop menu, press [Aspect], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameter.
a) When set to a negative value, the image is stretched vertically, to become taller.
When set to a positive value, the image is stretched horizontally, to become wider.
Rotating the wipe crop pattern (Rotation)
1
In the <Rotation> group of the Wipe Crop menu, select one of the
following.
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.
Speed: Rotate the pattern at a fixed speed.
2
Depending on the selection in step 1, set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –24.00 to +24.00 a)
–32.00 to +32.00 b)
2 V Vertical position –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24, 304
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
54 DME Special Effect Operations
• When Angle is selected
a) –1.00 represents a whole turn counterclockwise, and +1.00 represents a whole turn
clockwise. 0.00 is the original state.
• When Speed is selected
a) –100.00 represents a speed of four whole turns counterclockwise per second, and +100.00
represents a speed of four whole turns clockwise per second. 0.00 is the stationary state.
Applying modulation to the wipe crop pattern (Modulation)
1
In the <Modulation> group of the Wipe Crop menu, select one of the
following.
H (horizontal modulation): Modulate the pattern to apply waving in the
horizontal direction.
V (vertical modulation): Modulate the pattern to apply waving in the
vertical direction.
2
Set the following parameters.
Replicating the wipe crop pattern (Multi)
1
In the Wipe Crop menu, press [Multi], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –8.00 to +8.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0.00 to 100.00
2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Speed Speed of waves –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of
pattern horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of
pattern vertically
1 to 63
55DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) See the following figure
Modifying the wipe crop pattern edge
You can apply a border to the wipe crop pattern, or soften the boundary.
1
In the <Edge> group of the Wipe Crop menu, select one of the following.
Border: border
Soft: soft edge
Soft Border: soft border
2
Depending on the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.
• When Border is selected
• When Soft is selected
• When Soft Border is selected
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1234
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Border width 0.00 to 100.00
2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0.00 to 100.00
3 Outer Soft Border outer softness 0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
56 DME Special Effect Operations
Selecting the signal or color to be inserted in the wipe crop
border
When you are applying a border or soft border to the wipe crop, you can select
the signal or color to be inserted in the border.
1
In the <Border Fill> group of the Wipe Crop menu, select one of the
following.
Flat Color: flat color
Mix Color: a mix color signal combining color 1 and color 2 (see the next
section, “Color Mix Settings”)
Ext Video: an external video signal input to the Ext IN connector
2
When Flat Color is selected in step 1 only, adjust the following parameters.
Color Mix Settings
This function allows you to create a “mix color” signal, combining two
different colors with a pattern from a pattern generator, to be used to fill a
background, border, and so on.
The mix color signal can be used in the border, flex shadow, wipe crop, trail,
wind, and background effects.
For example images, “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The color mix function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Creating a color combination pattern
To select the pattern
1
In the DME menu, select VF1 ‘Edge’ and HF7 ‘Color Mix.’
The Color Mix menu appears.
2
Press [Mix Pattern Select].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
57DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
The Mix Pattern Select menu appears.
3
Press any of the displayed patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) to
select it.
In this state, you can adjust the pattern size and border softness with the
knobs.
(For details of the parameters, see the next item.)
To set the pattern size and position
1
In the Color Mix menu, press [Position/Size].
2
Set the following parameters.
The setting range for the parameters depends on the system selected signal
format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9), as follows.
•For SD format
a) For 4:3 mode
b) For 16:9 mode
• For HD format
a) For 4:3 mode
b) For 16:9 mode
To invert the regions of the two colors
In the Color Mix menu, press [Color Invert], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Vertical position –6.00 to +6.00 a)
–4.50 to +4.50 b)
3 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of the pattern 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –24.00 to +24.00 a)
–32.00 to +32.00 b)
2 V Vertical position –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of the pattern 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24
Chapter 11 DME Operations
58 DME Special Effect Operations
Adjusting the color 1 and color 2
1
In the Color Mix menu, to adjust color 1 press [Color1], and to adjust color
2 press [Color2].
2
Set the following parameters.
Modifying the color combination pattern
See the following pages.
• “Setting the aspect ratio of the wipe crop pattern (Aspect)” (page 53)
• “Replicating the wipe crop pattern (Multi)” (page 54)
• “Rotating the wipe crop pattern (Rotation)” (page 53)
• “Applying modulation to the wipe crop pattern (Modulation)” (page 54)
Defocus Settings
This effect defocuses the entire image.
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Applying the Defocus effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF1 ‘Defocus/Blur.’
The Defocus/Blur menu appears.
2
Press [Defocus], turning it on.
The Defocus effect is enabled. You can adjust the defocusing of video and
key signals with the knobs.
Note
On the MVE-8000A, the Defocus and Glow effects cannot be enabled at
the same time. The effect which was turned on most recently is enabled.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
59DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
3
In the <Defocus Mode> group, select the signal to which to apply the
defocus effect.
Video/Key: Video signal and key signal
Video: Video signal only
Key: Key signal only
Note
“Key” can be selected only when the MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 is
connected through an SDI interface.
4
Set the parameters.
• When Video/Key is selected (with DME dedicated interface)
• When Video/Key is selected (with SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/
MVE-9000)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal defocusing of video
and key signals
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing of video and
key signals
0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video and key
signals
H value shown
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 V/K H Horizontal defocusing of video
and key signals
Video H value shown
2 V/K V Vertical defocusing of video and
key signals
Video V value shown
3 V/K All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video and key
signals
Video H value shown
4 Video All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video signal
Video H value shown
5 Key All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of key signal
Key H value shown
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values
1 Video H Horizontal defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 Video V Vertical defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
60 DME Special Effect Operations
• When Video is selected
.
• When Key is selected (with SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/MVE-9000)
5
To cancel black level leaking that can occur at the edge of the screen when
the Defocus effect is enabled, press [Clean Defocus], turning it on.
Masking the Defocus effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Blur Settings
This effect blurs the entire image.
Applying the Blur effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF1 ‘Defocus/Blur.’
3 Key H Horizontal defocusing of key
signal
0.00 to 100.00
4 Key V Vertical defocusing of key signal 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video signal
H value shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values
1 H Horizontal defocusing of key
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing of key signal 0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of key signal
H value shown
61DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
The Defocus/Blur menu appears.
2
Press [Blur], turning it on.
The Blur effect is enabled. You can adjust the blurring of video and key
signals with the knobs.
Note
On the MVE-8000A, the Glow and Blur effects cannot be enabled at the
same time. The effect which was turned on most recently is enabled.
3
When the MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 is connected through an SDI interface,
in the <Blur Mode> group, select the signal to which you want apply the
Blur effect.
Video/Key: Video signal and key signal
Video: Video signal only
Key: Key signal only
4
Set the parameters.
• When the DME dedicated interface is used
• When Video/Key is selected (with SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/
MVE-9000)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal defocusing of video
and key signals
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing of video and
key signals
0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video and key
signals
H value shown
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values
1 V/K H Horizontal defocusing of video
and key signals
Video H value shown
2 V/K V Vertical defocusing of video and
key signals
Video V value shown
3 V/K All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video and key
signals
Video H value shown
4 Video All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video signal
Video H value shown
5 Key All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of key signal
Key H value shown
Chapter 11 DME Operations
62 DME Special Effect Operations
• When video is selected (with SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/MVE-
9000)
• When Key is selected (with SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/MVE-9000)
Masking the Blur effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Multi Move Settings
This effect shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and
horizontally.
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values
1 Video H Horizontal defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 Video V Vertical defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
3 Key H Horizontal defocusing of key
signal
0.00 to 100.00
4 Key V Vertical defocusing of key signal 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values
1 H Horizontal defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing of video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of video signal
H value shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal defocusing of key
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Vertical defocusing of key signal 0.00 to 100.00
3 All Horizontal and vertical
defocusing of key signal
H value shown
63DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Applying the Multi Move effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF2 ‘Multi Move.’
The Multi Move menu appears.
2
Press [Multi Move], turning it on.
The Multi Move effect is enabled. You can adjust the center point of
shrinking, the ratio of shrinking, and the aspect ratio of the shrunken
images with the knobs.
3
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
a) Specify minus values to stretch the image in the vertical direction, and plus values to
stretch the image in the horizontal direction.
• SD format, 16:9 mode
a) Specify minus values to stretch the image in the vertical direction, and plus values to
stretch the image in the horizontal direction.
• HD format, 4:3 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Center X x-value of shrinking center point –4.00 to +4.00
2 Center Y y-value of shrinking center point –3.00 to +3.00
3 Size Shrinking ratio 0.00 to 100.00
4 Aspect Aspect ratio of shrunken images –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Center X x-value of shrinking center point –4.00 to +4.00
2 Center Y y-value of shrinking center point –2.25 to +2.25
3 Size Shrinking ratio 0.00 to 100.00
4 Aspect Aspect ratio of shrunken images –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Center X x-value of shrinking center point –12.00 to +12.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
64 DME Special Effect Operations
a) Specify minus values to stretch the image in the vertical direction, and plus values to
stretch the image in the horizontal direction.
• HD format, 16:9 mode
a) Specify minus values to stretch the image in the vertical direction, and plus values to
stretch the image in the horizontal direction.
Sepia Settings
This effect overlays a specified color onto the image.
Applying the Sepia effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Color Modify.’
The Color Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Sepia], turning it on.
The Sepia effect is enabled. You can adjust the degree of mixing between
the sepia image and the original image with the knobs.
3
Set the following parameters.
2 Center Y y-value of shrinking center point –9.00 to +9.00
3 Size Shrinking ratio 0.00 to 100.00
4 Aspect Aspect ratio of shrunken images –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Center X x-value of shrinking center point –16.00 to +16.00
2 Center Y y-value of shrinking center point –9.00 to +9.00
3 Size Shrinking ratio 0.00 to 100.00
4 Aspect Aspect ratio of shrunken images –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Y Y signal mix amount 0.00 to 100.00
2 Mix C Chroma signal mix amount 0.00 to 100.00
3 Mix All Y signal and chroma signal mix
amount
Mix Y value shown
65DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
4
To set the color of the sepia image, press [Sepia Color], turning it on, and
adjust the parameters.
Masking the Sepia effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Mono Settings
This effect converts the image into a monochrome image.
Applying the Mono effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Color Modify.’
The Color Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Mono], turning it on.
The Mono effect is enabled. The color image changes to monochrome.
Masking the Mono effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
66 DME Special Effect Operations
Posterization and Solarization Settings
The Posterization and Solarization effects both give a painting-like effect by
coarsening the gradations of the image. The Posterization effect coarsens
luminance gradations, and the Solarization effect coarsens chroma gradations.
Applying the Posterization or Solarization effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Color Modify.’
The Color Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Poster/Solar], turning it on.
The Posterization and Solarization effects are enabled. You can adjust the
coarseness of the gradations with the knobs.
3
Set the parameters.
Masking the Posterization or Solarization effect with a selected
pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Nega Settings
This effect reverses the luminance or chroma of the image.
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Poster Coarseness of luminance
gradations (Posterization
parameter)
0.00 to 100.00
2 Solar Coarseness of chroma
gradations (Solarization
parameter)
0.00 to 100.00
67DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Applying the Nega effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Color Modify.’
The Color Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Nega Y] or [Nega C], turning it on, or press both buttons, turning
them on.
Nega Y: Reverse the luminance.
Nega C: Reverse the chroma.
Masking the Nega effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Contrast Settings
This effect changes the contrast of the luminance and chroma of the image.
Applying the Contrast effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Color Modify.’
The Color Modify menu appears.
2
Press [Contrast], turning it on.
The Contrast effect is enabled. You can adjust the luminance and chroma
contrast with the knobs.
3
Set the parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Y Clip Luminance clip level +109.59 to –7.31
2 Y Gain Luminance contrast gradient –100.00 to +100.00
3 Y Offset Luminance offset level
increment
–100.00 to +100.00
4 C Gain Chroma contrast gradient –100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
68 DME Special Effect Operations
Clip, Gain, Offset
Masking the Contrast effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Mosaic Settings
This effect divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic.
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Applying the Mosaic effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF4 ‘Mosaic.’
The Mosaic menu appears.
2
Press [Mosaic], turning it on.
The Mosaic effect is enabled. You can adjust the size and aspect ratio of
the mosaic tiles with the knobs.
3
Set the following parameters.
Clip
Gain
Offset
Video output level
Video input
level
Video output level
Video input
level
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Size of tiles 0.00 to 100.00
69DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) Specify minus values to stretch the tiles in the vertical direction, and plus values to stretch
the tiles in the horizontal direction.
Masking the Mosaic effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu, and set the pattern type and modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Sketch Settings
This effect provides a range of effects based on the outline of the image, giving
impressions of sketching, enhanced outlines, drawing, relief, or increased
sharpness.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The Sketch function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Applying the Sketch effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF7 ‘Enhanced Video Modify’ and HF1
‘Sketch.’
The Sketch menu appears.
2
Press [Sketch], turning it on.
The Sketch effect is enabled.
3
Select the method for applying outlines in the <Sketch Mode> group.
Sketch: Apply an effect like a sketch.
Edge Color: Enhance the outlines.
Draw: Apply an effect like a line drawing.
Relief: Apply a bas-relief effect.
Sharp: Increase the apparent sharpness.
2 Aspect Aspect ratio of tiles –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Chapter 11 DME Operations
70 DME Special Effect Operations
4
Set the following parameters, according to the method selected in step 3.
• When Sketch is selected
a) 100.00 gives an image completely transformed by the Sketch effect. 0.00 is the original
input image.
b) The larger the Clip value, the narrower the outline width.
• When Edge Color is selected
a) 100.00 gives an image completely transformed by the Sketch effect. 0.00 is the original
input image.
b) The larger the Clip value, the narrower the outline width.
• When Draw is selected
a) 100.00 gives an image completely transformed by the Sketch effect. 0.00 is the original
input image.
b) The larger the Clip value, the narrower the outline width.
• When Relief is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Mix amount for Sketch video and
input video 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Clip Reference level for outline
extraction –100.00 to +100.00 b)
3 Gain Image gain for outline extraction –100.00 to +100.00
4 C Gain Chroma gain of input video –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Mix amount for Edge Color video
and input video 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Clip Reference level for outline
extraction –100.00 to +100.00 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Mix amount for Draw video and
input video 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Clip Reference level for outline
extraction –100.00 to +100.00 b)
3 Gain Image gain for outline extraction –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Mix amount for Relief video and
input video 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Offset Relief luminance level –100.00 to +100.00
3 Gain Image gain for outline extraction –100.00 to +100.00
4 Angle Direction of relief image light
source
–8.00 to +8.00
71DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) 100.00 gives an image completely transformed by the Sketch effect. 0.00 is the original
input image.
• When Sharp is selected
5
If you selected other than Sharp in step 3, depending on the necessity,
proceed as follows.
• To adjust the outline color for Edge Color or Draw
Turn [Edge Matte] on and set the following parameters to set the outline
color.
• To set the color of the sections other than the outlines for Draw
Press [Matte], turning it on, and adjust the following parameters to set the
color of the sections other than the outlines.
• To select the signal to mix with the relief pattern for Relief
In the <Chroma Type> group, select the signal to mix with the relief
pattern.
Matte: Select a single color. The following parameters can be adjusted.
Video: Select the input video signal.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Simultaneously adjust the left and
right resolution
0.00 to 100.00
2 V Simultaneously adjust the top and
bottom resolution
0.00 to 100.00
3 All Simultaneously adjust the
resolution of all four sides
0.00 to 100.00
5 Coring Minimum value of edge to
emphasize
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
72 DME Special Effect Operations
6
To invert white and black in the extracted video, or to invert the outlines
and the sections other than the outlines, press [Nega], turning it on.
Masking the Sketch effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu and set the type of pattern and
modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Metal Settings
This effect provides a metallic gloss like that from gold, silver, or a rainbow
colored surface.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The Metal function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Applying the Metal effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF7 ‘Enhanced Video Modify’ and HF2 ‘Metal.’
The Metal menu appears.
2
Press [Metal], turning it on.
This enables the Metal effect.
3
Set the parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Ratio Mix amount for Metal video and
input video
0.00 to 100.00
2 Y Clip Clip level of input signal Y level 0.00 to 100.00
3 Y Gain Amount of gain for clip adjusted
input signal Y level
–100.00 to +100.00
4 Y Offset Offset added to clip and gain
adjusted input Y signal
0.00 to 100.00
73DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
4
In the <Metal Mode> group, select the type of metallic gloss.
Gold: Give a gold gloss to the input video.
Silver: Give a silver gloss to the input video.
Rainbow: Give a rainbow color gloss to the input video.
Variable: Give a metallic gloss to the input video in any color by adjusting
the following parameters.
Masking the Metal effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu and set the type of pattern and
modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Dim and Fade Settings
The Dim effect makes the image darker as it recedes into the distance. The
Fade effect makes the image fade into the background as it recedes into the
distance.
For sample illustrations and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The Dim and Fade functions are not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
Applying the Dim effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF7 ‘Enhanced Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Dim &
Fade.’
The Dim & Fade menu appears.
2
Press [Dim], turning it on.
This enables the Dim effect.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
74 DME Special Effect Operations
3
Set the following parameters.
4
Press [Flat Color] and set the parameters for the color of the depths of the
picture.
Applying the Fade effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF7 ‘Enhanced Video Modify’ and HF3 ‘Dim &
Fade.’
The Dim & Fade menu appears.
2
Press [Fade], turning it on.
This enables the Fade effect.
3
Set the parameters.
Glow Settings
This effect softens the edges of highlights, giving an effect like being struck by
a soft light.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The Glow function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Start Point where dimming starts (dim
start point)
–100.00 to +100.00
2 Gain Degree of dimming 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Start Point where fading starts (fade
start point)
–100.00 to +100.00
2 Gain Degree of fading 0.00 to 100.00
75DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Applying the Glow effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF7 ‘Enhanced Video Modify’ and HF4 ‘Glow.’
The Glow menu appears.
2
Press [Glow], turning it on.
This enables the Glow effect.
Notes
• On the MVE-9000, the key border function and Glow function cannot be
turned on at the same time. The function most recently turned on is
effective.
• On the MVE-8000A, the Defocus and Glow effects or the Blur and Glow
effects cannot be turned on at the same time. The effect most recently
turned on is effective.
3
Set the parameters.
4
Press [Matte] and set the glow color.
Inverting the highlight areas
Press [Glow Invert], turning it on.
The highlight and non-highlight areas are inverted.
Masking the Glow effect with a selected pattern
Press [Mask] to display the Mask menu and set the type of pattern and
modifiers.
For details, see “Mask Settings” (page 76).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for highlight
detection
0.00 to 100.00
2 Gain Amount of gain for highlights –100.00 to +100.00
3 Soft Softness 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
76 DME Special Effect Operations
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Mask Settings
This effect masks part of the picture, so that special effects are applied only
inside a selected pattern.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.
Applying masks
1
In the DME menu, select VF2 ‘Video Modify’ and HF7 ‘Mask.’
The Mask menu appears.
2
In the <Mask> group, press the button for the group of the effect to which
you want to apply the mask, turning it on.
Effect Gp 1: Posterization, Solarization, Nega, Sepia, Mono, Contrast,
Mosaic, Sketch, Metal
Effect Gp 2: Defocus, Blur, Glow
Note
On the MVE-8000A, Effect Gp 1 and Effect Gp 2 cannot be turned on at
the same time.
3
Press [Position/Size].
4
Set the mask source parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Vertical position –6.00 to +6.00
77DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) This setting value is not supported on the MVE-8000A.
• SD format, 16:9 mode
a) This setting value is not supported on the MVE-8000A.
• HD format, 4:3 mode
a) This setting value is not supported on the MVE-8000A.
• HD format, 16:9 mode
a) This setting value is not supported on the MVE-8000A.
5
To invert the mask source, press [Invert], turning it on.
6
As required, set the modifiers for the mask pattern.
3 Size Size of mask 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of mask 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 21, 24, 304 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –8.00 to +8.00
2 V Vertical position –4.50 to +4.50
3 Size Size of mask 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of mask 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 21, 24, 304 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –24.00 to +24.00
2 V Vertical position –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size Size of mask 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of mask 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 21, 24, 304 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal position –32.00 to +32.00
2 V Vertical position –18.00 to +18.00
3 Size Size of mask 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of mask 0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 21, 24, 304 a)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
78 DME Special Effect Operations
• When turning [Aspect] on and adjusting the pattern aspect ratio
a) When a minus value is specified, the picture is extended in the vertical direction. When a
plus value is specified, the picture is extended in the horizontal direction.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the
pattern
a) –1.00 is one rotation in counterclockwise direction. +1.00 is one rotation in clockwise
direction. 0.00 is no rotation.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a specified speed
a) –100.00 is four rotations per second in counterclockwise direction. +100.00 is four
rotations per second in clockwise direction. 0.00 is no rotation.
Notes on applying a mask effect with a DME (only when using the
MVE-9000)
In the <Mask> group of the DME >Video Modify >Mask menu, if [Effect Gp1]
and [Effect Gp2] are simultaneously set to On, then the border or beveled edge
is also masked.
The following explains this with the example of using a circular mask pattern.
m
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Rotation angle of pattern –8.00 to +8.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation speed of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Image 1: Image before applying mask
Border or
beveled edge
Image with
‘Mono(chrome)’ or
‘Defocus’ applied
79DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
m
In the state corresponding to image 2, if you switch [Effect Gp2] to On, then
the mask should be applied to portion 2 only, but in fact the border or beveled
edge is also masked.
Freeze Settings
This effect freezes the input video. The following types are available:
• Hard Freeze
• Time Strobe
• Film
Note
When 720P signal format is used, the Film mode cannot be selected.
For details of the operation modes, see “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
To apply a Freeze effect, start by displaying the Freeze menu. In the DME
menu, select VF3 ‘Freeze’ and HF1 ‘Freeze.’
1
2
Image 2: State with [Effect Gp1] only set to On
Portion 2 has ‘Mono’
masked, and ‘Defocus’
only applied.
Portion 1 has both
‘Mono’ and ‘Defocus’
applied.
1
2
Image 3: State with [Effect Gp1] and [Effect Gp2] set to On
The border or beveled
edge effect is also
masked.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
80 DME Special Effect Operations
Applying the Hard Freeze effect
1
In the <Freeze Timing> group, select the signal freeze timing.
Frame: Freeze one frame of signal.
Field 1: Freeze the first field of signal.
Note
During the execution of a freeze with the MVE-8000, you cannot change
the freeze timing.
2
In the <Freeze> group, press [Hard Freeze], turning it on.
The Hard Freeze is executed, displaying a still image.
Applying the Time Strobe effect
1
In the <Freeze Timing> group, select the signal freeze timing.
Frame: Freeze one frame of signal.
Field 1: Freeze the first field of signal.
Notes
• During the execution of a freeze with the MVE-8000, you cannot change
the freeze timing.
• The freeze timing setting is not required when the following signal
formats are being used.
Signal formats: 1080PsF/30, 1080PsF/29.97, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/24,
1080PsF/23.976, 720P/59.94, 720P/50
2
In the <Freeze> group, press [Time Strobe], turning it on.
The Time Strobe freeze is enabled. You can adjust the freeze interval and
the ratio of live video inserted between freeze images.
3
Set the parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Duration Freeze interval 1 to 255 (frames)
2 Live Ratio of live video inserted
between freeze images
0.00 to 100.00
81DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Applying the Film effect
Note
When 720P signal format is used, the Film mode cannot be selected.
1
In the <Freeze> group, press [Film], turning it on.
The Film freeze is enabled. You can adjust the ratio of frame advance.
2
Set the parameter.
Nonlinear Effect Settings
You can add a variety of effects, including effects that change the shape of the
image as a whole.
1
In the DME menu, select VF4 ‘Non Linear’ and HF1 ‘Type.’
A menu for selecting the various effects appears.
2
Display the menu for the effect that you want to apply by pressing its
button.
The effect displayed is enabled.
3
Make the settings for the selected effect.
The following nonlinear effects are available.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Film Ratio of frame advance 0.00 to 100.00
Name Effect See
Wave Produces a wave-like effect in the image. page 83
Mosaic Glass Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified
interval.
page 87
Flag Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind. page 88
Twist Twists the image. page 88
Ripple Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image. page 89
Rings Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving
in the same direction.
page 93
Broken Glass Partitions the image like broken glass, with shards
flying outward.
page 94
Chapter 11 DME Operations
82 DME Special Effect Operations
Notes
• It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time.
Turning any nonlinear effect on automatically turns all other nonlinear
effects off.
• The Flex Shadow function cannot be enabled when any of the nonlinear
effects Page Turn, Roll, Cylinder, and Sphere is enabled.
However, the Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/
8000A.
To turn an effect off
In the setting menu, press the button for the effect name, turning it off, or in the
Type menu press [OFF] in the lower right part of the window.
Flying Bar Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks
as they move.
page 95
Blind Divides the image into bars or wedges, with blocks
rotating like the slats of venetian blinds.
page 95
Split Splits the image upper and lower, left and right. page 97
Split Slide Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in
reverse directions.
page 97
Mirror Partitions the image vertically and horizontally, creating
an image like a reflection in a mirror.
page 98
Multi Mirror Divides the image into originals and reflections, lining
them up vertically and horizontally.
page 99
Kaleidoscope Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope. page 100
Lens Creates an image like a view through a lens. page 101
Circle Makes a circle with the image. page 102
Panorama Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to
emphasize the sense of perspective.
page 103
Page Turn Turns the image like a turning page. page 103
Roll Rolls the image up. page 104
Cylinder Winds the whole image onto a cylinder. page 105
Sphere Winds the whole image onto a sphere. page 105
Explosion Divides the image into fragments which expand as they
fly out.
page 105
Swirl Swirls the image. page 107
Melt Melts the image away from a specified part. page 108
Character
Trail
Extends the edge of the image like a trail. page 109
Name Effect See
83DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Wave settings
The Wave effect produces a wave-like effect in the image.
Note
When the signal format is 720P/59.94 or 720P/50, the Wave function cannot
be used on the MVE-8000.
To apply the Wave effect
With the Wave menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Mode> group, select the wave modulation mode.
H&V: Modulate vertically and horizontally without changing the size of
the image. This mode allows waves to be created in both the vertical
and horizontal directions at the same time.
SIZE: Create waves by reducing and expanding the image. This mode
allows waves to be created in one direction only.
2
Set the following parameters, according to the selected mode.
• When H&V is selected
1
H&V
SIZE
2
12
Before modulation
Size not modulated.
1 and 2 are same size.
Create waves by reducing 1
and expanding 2 the image.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
84 DME Special Effect Operations
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
• When Size is selected
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp H Amplitude of waves in horizontal
direction
0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq H Frequency of waves in horizontal
direction
0.00 to 100.00
3Offset H a) Horizontal direction in which to
offset wave phase and amount of
movement
–16.00 to +16.00 c)
–64.00 to +64.00 d)
4Speed H b) Horizontal direction and speed of
waves
–100.00 to +100.00
5 Slant Slant of waves –8.000 to +8.000
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp V Amplitude of waves in vertical
direction
0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq V Frequency of waves in vertical
direction
0.00 to 100.00
3Offset V a) Vertical direction in which to offset
wave phase and amount of
movement
–16.00 to +16.00 c)
–64.00 to +64.00 d)
4Speed V b) Vertical direction and speed of
waves
–100.00 to +100.00
5 Slant Slant of waves –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp H Amplitude of waves 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq H Frequency of waves 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset H a) Direction in which to offset wave
phase and amount of movement –16.00 to +16.00 c)
–64.00 to +64.00 d)
4Speed H b) Direction and speed of waves –100.00 to +100.00
5 Slant Slant of waves –8.00 to +8.00
85DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To stop the waves
Press [Lock], turning it on.
With each press, the waves alternately stop and start moving again.
To select the waveform
Press [Form] and set the following parameters.
• When H&V mode is selected
• When Size mode is selected
a) 1 (SINE): Sine wave
2 (PARABOLA): Parabola wave
3 (TRIANGLE): Triangular wave
4 (RECTANGLE): Rectangular wave
5 (CIRCLE): Circular wave
6 (CUBIC): Cubic wave
To randomize the modulated waveform
1
Press [Random], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
• When H&V mode is selected
Offset
Amp
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Form H Waveform in horizontal direction 1 to 6 a)
2 Form V Waveform in vertical direction 1 to 6 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Form H Waveform 1 to 6 a)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
86 DME Special Effect Operations
• When Size mode is selected
To limit the wave range
1
Press [Range], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
• When H&V mode is selected
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
• When Size mode is selected
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Random H Degree of randomness in
horizontal waveform modulation
0.00 to 100.00
2 Random V Degree of randomness in vertical
waveform modulation
0.00 to 100.00
3 Random All Degree of randomness in both
vertical and horizontal directions
Random H value
shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Random H Degree of randomness in
waveform modulation
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size H Amount of horizontal wave
modulation
0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset H Center point of horizontal
modulation range –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
3 Size V Amount of vertical wave
modulation
0.00 to 100.00
4 Offset V Center point of vertical
modulation range –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size H Amount of wave modulation 0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset H Center point of modulation
range –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
87DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To smooth the range envelope when the wave range is limited
1
Press [Range Envelope], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
• When H&V mode is selected
• When Size mode is selected
To reverse the wave range
To reverse the horizontal wave range set with [Range]: Press [Range Rev
H], turning it on.
To reverse the vertical wave range set with [Range]: Press [Range Rev V],
turning it on.
Mosaic Glass settings
The Mosaic Glass effect makes the image rougher and finer at a specified
interval.
To apply the Mosaic Glass effect
Display the Mosaic Glass menu.
Envelope
Size
Offset
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Envelope H Smoothness of envelope in
horizontal direction
0.00 to 100.00
2 Envelope V Smoothness of envelope in vertical
direction
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Envelope H Smoothness of envelope 0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
88 DME Special Effect Operations
The items displayed in the Mosaic Glass menu and the functions of the knobs
are the same as for the Wave menu.
For more information about how to make settings, see “Wave settings” (page
83).
Flag settings
Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind.
To apply the Flag effect
Display the Flag menu.
The items displayed in the Flag menu and the functions of the knobs are the
same as for the Wave menu.
For more information about how to make settings, see “Wave settings” (page
83).
Twist settings
The Twist effect twists the image.
To apply the Twist effect
With the Twist menu displayed, set the following parameters.
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp V Amplitude of twist in vertical direction 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq V Frequency of twist in vertical direction 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset V a) Amount of movement in twist phase
in the vertical direction –16.00 to +16.00 c)
–64.00 to +64.00 d)
4Speed V b) Speed and direction of twist
movement in vertical direction
–100.00 to +100.00
5 Slant Slant of twist –8.000 to +8.000
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp H Amplitude of twist in horizontal
direction
0.00 to 100.00
3Offset H a) Amount of movement in twist phase
in the horizontal direction
–100.00 to +100.00
5 Slant Slant of twist –8.000 to +8.000
89DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To stop the waves
Press [Lock], turning it on.
With each press, the waves alternately stop and start moving again.
To select the waveform
Press [Form] and set the following parameters.
a) 1 (SINE): Sine wave
2 (PARABOLA): Parabola wave
3 (TRIANGLE): Triangular wave
4 (RECTANGLE): Rectangular wave
5 (CIRCLE): Circular wave
6 (CUBIC): Cubic wave
Ripple settings
Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image.
To apply the Ripple effect
With the Ripple menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Mode> group, select the ripple modulation mode.
Radial: Points on radii of the same length from the center of the ripples
behave in the same way.
Angular: Points at the same angle from the center of the ripples behave in
the same way.
Both: Both Radial and Angular ripples are applied.
Shape: The ripples can have shapes such as stars or hearts in addition to
circles.
Modulation modes and directions
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Form H Waveform in horizontal direction 1 to 6 a)
2 Form V Waveform in vertical direction 1 to 6 a)
Modulation along radii
(Radial mode)
Modulation along periphery
(Angular mode)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
90 DME Special Effect Operations
2
Set the following parameters, depending on the selected modulation mode.
• When Radial mode is selected
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
• When Angular mode is selected
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
• When Both mode is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp R Ripple amplitude along radius 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq R Ripple frequency along radius 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset R a) Direction along radius in which
to offset ripple phase and
amount of movement
–8.000 to +8.000 c)
–32.000 to +32.000 d)
4Speed R b) Ripple direction along radius
and speed
–100.00 to +100.00
5 Amp A Ripple amplitude along
periphery
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp A Ripple amplitude along periphery 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq A Ripple frequency along periphery 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset A a) Direction along periphery in which
to offset ripple phase and amount
of movement
–8.000 to +8.000
4Speed A b) Ripple direction along periphery
and speed
–100.00 to +100.00
5 Amp R Ripple amplitude along radius 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp R Ripple amplitude along radius 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq R Ripple frequency along radius 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset R a) Direction along radius in which to
offset ripple phase and amount of
movement
–8.000 to +8.000 c)
–32.000 to +32.000 d)
4Speed R b) Ripple direction along radius and
speed
–100.00 to +100.00
91DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
• When Shape mode is selected
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
e) 1 (Circle): Circle
2 (Rectangle): Rectangle
3 (Star): Star
4 (Heart): Heart
To limit the direction in which modulation is applied
By pressing [Plus Only], turning it on, you can limit the direction in which
modulation is applied (the direction in which the image expands) to the plus
direction only.
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp A Ripple amplitude along periphery 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq A Ripple frequency along periphery 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset A a) Direction along periphery in
which to offset ripple phase and
amount of movement
–8.000 to +8.000
4Speed A b) Ripple direction along periphery
and speed
–100.00 to +100.00
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp R Ripple amplitude 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq R Ripple frequency 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset R a) Direction in which to offset ripple
phase and amount of movement –8.000 to +8.000 c)
–32.000 to +32.000 d)
4Speed R b) Ripple direction and speed –100.00 to +100.00
5 Shape Ripple shape 1 to 4 e)
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect Ripple aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00
2 Angle Ripple angle –8.000 to +8.000
Chapter 11 DME Operations
92 DME Special Effect Operations
To set the ripple center point
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters, depending on the selected modulation mode.
• When Shape is selected
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
• When other than Shape is selected
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To limit the ripple range
1
Press [Range], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
• When Radial or Shape mode is selected
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Ripple center point in
horizontal direction –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to +20.000 b)
2 V Ripple center point in vertical
direction –3.000 to +3.000 a)
–12.000 to +12.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Ripple center point in
horizontal direction –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
2 V Ripple center point in vertical
direction –6.000 to +6.000 a)
–18.000 to +18.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size R Amount of ripple modulation
along radius
0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset R Center of modulation range
along radius –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
93DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
• When Angular mode is selected
• When Both mode is selected
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To reverse the ripple range
When modulation mode is Radial, Both, or Shape: Press [Range Rev R],
turning it on.
When modulation mode is Both or Angular: Press [Range Rev A], turning
it on.
Other settings
You can turn [Lock], [Form], [Random], and [Range Envelope] on to do the
following.
• Stop the waves
• Select the wave shape
• Randomize the waveform
• Smooth the range envelope when the wave range is limited
For Lock, Form, Random, and Range Envelope functions, see “Wave settings”
(page 83).
Rings settings
The Rings effect partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the
same direction.
To apply the Rings effect
With the Rings menu displayed, use the following procedure.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size A Amount of ripple modulation along
periphery
0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset A Center of modulation range along
periphery
–8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size R Amount of ripple modulation
along radius
0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset R Center of modulation range
along radius –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
3 Size A Amount of ripple modulation
along periphery
0.00 to 100.00
4 Offset A Center of modulation range
along periphery
–8.000 to +8.000
Chapter 11 DME Operations
94 DME Special Effect Operations
1
To make transition settings, press [Transition] and set the following
parameters.
2
To set the partition method, press [Partition] and set the following
parameters.
3
To set the ring center position, press [Position] and set the following
parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
4
To partition into pixels, press [Pixel], turning it on, and set the following
parameters.
Broken Glass settings
The Broken Glass effect partitions the image like broken glass, with shards
flying outward.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Degree of transition 0.000 to 100.000
2 Random Degree of randomness in distance
moved by each block
0.000 to 100.000
3 Spiral Amount of movement toward
periphery accompanying transition
–1.000 to +1.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width of partition 0.000 to 100.000
2 Random Degree of randomness in partition
width
0.000 to 100.000
3 Angle Starting angle of effect –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal center position –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to +20.000 b)
2 V Vertical center position –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Degree to which image disappears
around periphery
0.00 to 100.00
2 Random Degree of jaggies at block edges 0.00 to 100.00
95DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To apply the Broken Glass effect
Display the Broken Glass menu.
The functions of the knobs in the Broken Glass menu are the same as those of
the Rings menu, with the exception of [Direction].
For details about operation, see “Rings settings” (page 93).
To fix the direction in which shards scatter
Press [Direction], turning it on.
Flying Bar settings
The Flying Bar effect divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks
as they move.
To apply the Flying Bar effect
With the Flying Bars menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
To make transition settings, press [Transition] and set the following
parameters.
2
To set the partition method, press [Partition] and set the following
parameters.
Blind settings
The Blind effect divides the image into bars or wedges, with blocks rotating
like the slats of venetian blinds.
To apply the Blind effect
With the Blind menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Mode> group, select [Bar] or [Wedge].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Degree of transition 0.000 to 100.000
2 Random Degree of randomness in distance
moved by each block
–100.000 to
+100.000
3 Angle Direction of movement –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width of partition 0.000 to 100.000
2 Random Degree of randomness in partition
width
0.000 to 100.000
3 Angle Partition angle –8.000 to +8.000
Chapter 11 DME Operations
96 DME Special Effect Operations
2
To make transition settings, press [Transition] and set the following
parameters.
3
To set the partition method, press [Partition] and set the following
parameters.
• When Bar was selected in step 1
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
• When Wedge was selected in step 1
To set the wedge center position
When Wedge is selected in the <Mode> group, you can set the wedge center
position.
1
Press [Position].
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Rotation Number of rotations of the blocks –8.000 to +8.000
2 Perspective Degree of randomness in distance
moved by each block
0.000 to 100.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Width Width of partition 0.000 to 100.000
2 Offset Degree of randomness in partition
width –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to 20.000 b)
3 Angle Starting angle of effect –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 No Width of blocks 0.000 to 100.000
5 Phase Partition position –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal center position –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
2 V Vertical center position –6.000 to +6.000 a)
–18.000 to +18.000 b)
97DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Split settings
The Split effect splits the image upper and lower, left and right.
To apply the Split effect
With the Split menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Mode> group, select the split method.
Single: Leave gaps between splits.
Double: Fill gaps between splits with the same image.
2
Set the following parameters.
To set the split position
1
Press [Position].
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Split Slide settings
The Split Slide effect divides the image into bars which slide alternately in
reverse directions.
To apply the Split Slide effect
With the Split Slide menu displayed, set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition H Degree of left and right separation 0.000 to 100.000
2 Transition V Degree of top and bottom
separation
0.000 to 100.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Degree of left and right
separation –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
2 V Degree of top and bottom
separation –3.000 to +3.000 a)
–12.000 to +12.000 b)
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition H Degree of transition in horizontal
direction
0.000 to 100.000
Chapter 11 DME Operations
98 DME Special Effect Operations
To set the partition position
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Mirror settings
The Mirror effect partitions the image vertically and horizontally, creating an
image like a reflection in a mirror.
To apply the Mirror effect
With the Mirror menu displayed, press [Left to Right], [Right to Left], [Top to
Bottom], or [Bottom to Top] to set the reflection method (multiple selections
possible).
2 Random H Degree of randomness in distance
moved by blocks in horizontal
direction
0.00 to 100.00
3 Skew H Degree of skew in horizontal direction 0.00 to 100.00
4 Width H Horizontal width of partition 0.00 to 100.00
5 Angle Angle of partition line –8.000 to +8.000
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition V Degree of transition in vertical
direction
0.000 to 100.000
2 Random V Degree of randomness in distance
moved by blocks in vertical direction
0.00 to 100.00
3 Skew V Degree of skew in vertical direction 0.00 to 100.00
4 Width V Vertical width of partition 0.00 to 100.00
5 Angle Angle of partition line –8.000 to +8.000
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal partition position –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to +20.000 b)
2 V Vertical partition position –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to +20.000 b)
99DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Left to Right: Reflect left side on right.
Right to Left: Reflect right side on left.
Top to Bottom: Reflect top side on bottom.
Bottom to Top: Reflect bottom side on top.
To set the position of the border between original and reflection
1
Press [Position].
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Multi Mirror settings
The Multi Mirror effect divides the image into originals and reflections, lining
them up vertically and horizontally.
To apply the Multi Mirror effect
With the Multi Mirror menu displayed, set the following parameters.
SONY
DME
SO
DM
SO
D
SO
SO
SO
SO
Left to Right Top to
Bottom
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal border position –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
2 V Vertical border position –6.000 to +6.000 a)
–24.000 to +24.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Interval H Horizontal distance between
mirrors (original width) 0.000 to 10.000 a)
0.000 to 40.000 b)
2 Offset H Amount of horizontal offset of
image with mirrors fixed –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
3 Interval V Vertical distance between mirrors
(original width) 0.000 to 10.000 a)
0.000 to 40.000 b)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
100 DME Special Effect Operations
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To set the center position of original image
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Kaleidoscope settings
The Kaleidoscope effect creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope.
To apply the Kaleidoscope effect
With the Kaleidoscope menu displayed, set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To reflect the kaleidoscope image as if in a mirror
1
To reflect in the horizontal direction, press [Mirror H], turning it on.
2
To reflect in the vertical direction, press [Mirror V], turning it on.
4 Offset V Amount of vertical offset of image
with mirrors fixed –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
5 Angle Mirror angle –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal original image center
position –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
2 V Vertical original image center
position –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Number Number of blocks 0.00 to 100.00
2 Phase Angle of partition reference point –8.000 to +8.000 a)
3 Offset H Amount of horizontal offset –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
4 Offset V Amount of vertical offset –3.000 to +3.000 a)
–12.000 to +12.000 b)
101DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To set the reflection position
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To cyclically repeat part of the original and its reflection
Press [Cyclic], turning it on.
Lens settings
The Lens effect creates an image like a view through a lens.
To apply the Lens effect
With the Lens menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Mode> group, select the lens shape.
•Circle
• Rectangle
•Star
• Heart
•Bar
•Cross
2
Depending on the selected lens shape, set the following parameters.
• When Circle, Rectangle, Star, or Heart is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal reflection position
0.000 to 4.000 a)
0.000 to 16.000 b)
2 V Vertical reflection position 0.000 to 3.000 a)
0.000 to 12.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Magnify H Magnification ratio –100.00 to +100.00
2 Curve H Curve ratio –100.00 to +100.00
3 Size H Size 0.00 to 100.00
4 Angle Slant angle –8.000 to +8.000
5 Aspect Aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
102 DME Special Effect Operations
• When Bar is selected
• When Cross is selected
To make only the lens part visible
Press [Lens Only], turning it on.
The parts of the image outside the lens are removed.
To set the lens center position
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Circle settings
The Circle effect makes a circle with the image.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Magnify H Magnification ratio –100.00 to +100.00
2 Curve H Curve ratio –100.00 to +100.00
3 Size H Size 0.00 to 100.00
4 Angle Slant angle –8.000 to +8.000
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Magnify H Horizontal magnification ratio –100.00 to +100.00
2 Curve H Horizontal curve ratio –100.00 to +100.00
3 Size H Horizontal size 0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Magnify V Vertical magnification ratio –100.00 to +100.00
2 Curve V Vertical curve ratio –100.00 to +100.00
3 Size V Vertical size 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal lens center position –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to +20.000 b)
2 V Vertical lens center position –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
103DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To apply the Circle effect
With the Circle menu displayed, set the following parameters.
To make the axis of modulation vertical
Press [Mod V], turning it on.
The axis of modulation when converting to the circle becomes vertical.
Panorama settings
The Panorama effect curves the upper and lower edges of the image to
emphasize the sense of perspective.
To apply the Panorama effect
With the Panorama menu displayed, set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Page Turn settings
The Page Turn effect turns the image like turning a page.
To apply the Page Turn effect
With the Page Turn menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Split Mode> group, select the split mode.
H&V: The image turns as it is split from the center into 4 parts: left, right,
upper, lower.
H: The image turns as it is split from the center into 2 parts: left, right.
V: The image turns as it is split from the center into 2 parts: upper, lower.
When nothing is selected (Off): There are no splits and the image turns
from the edge.
2
Press [Page Turn], then set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Radius Size of circle 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Curve H Horizontal curve ratio –100.00 to +100.00
2 Curve V Vertical curve ratio –100.00 to +100.00
3 Position H Horizontal curve center position –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
4 Position V Vertical curve center position –3.000 to +3.000 a)
–12.000 to +12.000 b)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
104 DME Special Effect Operations
a) When split mode is H&V
b) When split mode is H
c) When split mode is V
d) When split mode is off
To set the input signal of the back page
1
In the <Back Video> group, select the signal input into the back page.
Self: Use the same signal as the front page.
Flat: Use a flat color.
Hue Rotation: Gradually vary the hue.
2nd Ch: Use the 2nd channel video signal.
To select “2nd Ch,” it is first necessary to select the second DME on
the keyer using DME.
2
Adjust the following parameters, according to the selected input signal.
• When Flat is selected
• When Hue Rotation is selected
Roll settings
The Roll effect rolls the image up.
To apply the Roll effect
Display the Roll menu.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Radius Radius of turn part 0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset Amount of turn –100.00 to +100.00
3 Angle Angle of turn –0.250 to +0.000 a)
–0.250 to +0.250 b)
–0.500 to +0.000 c)
–8.000 to +8.000 d)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Speed Speed at which hue changes –12.00 to +12.00
105DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
The knobs in the Roll menu have the same functions as those in the Page Turn
menu.
For details about operation, see “Page Turn settings” (page 103).
Cylinder settings
The Cylinder effect winds the whole image onto a cylinder.
To apply the Cylinder effect
With the Cylinder menu displayed, set the following parameters.
The procedure for selecting the input signal in the <Back Video> group is the
same as for the Page Turn menu.
For details about operation, see “Page Turn settings” (page 103).
Sphere settings
The Sphere effect winds the whole image onto a sphere.
To apply the Sphere effect
Display the Sphere menu.
The knobs in the Sphere menu have the same functions as those in the Cylinder
menu.
For details about operation, see “Cylinder settings” (page 105).
Explosion settings
The Explosion effect divides the image into fragments which expand as they
fly out.
To apply the Explosion effect
With the Explosion menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Mode> group, select the explosion pattern.
•Circle
• Rectangle
•Star
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Radius Degree to which image is wound onto
the cylinder
0.00 to 100.00
2 Min R Radius of the cylinder 0.00 to 100.00
3 Offset Horizontal position of the image
wound onto cylinder
–100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
106 DME Special Effect Operations
• Heart
• Ellipse
2
Set the following parameters.
• When Circle was selected in step 1
• When Rectangle, Star, Heart, or Ellipse was selected in step 1
To make the fragments stardust
1
Press [Pixel], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
To set the explosion center point
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Degree of transition 0.00 to 100.00
2 Curve Degree to which image periphery
expands
0.00 to 100.00
3 Spiral Degree of curvature of transition
path
–100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Degree of transition 0.00 to 100.00
2 Curve Degree to which image periphery
expands
0.00 to 100.00
3 Aspect Aspect ratio of waveform –100.00 to +100.00
4 Angle Slant of waveform –8.000 to +8.000
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Degree to which image
disappears
0.00 to 100.00
2 Random Degree of randomness in flying
out fragment positions
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Center point in horizontal
direction –5.000 to +5.000 a)
–20.000 to +20.000 b)
107DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
Swirl settings
The Swirl effect swirls the image.
To apply the Swirl effect
With the Swirl menu displayed, set the following parameters.
To make the tip of the swirl stardust
1
Press [Pixel], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
To set the center position of the swirl
1
Press [Position], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
2 V Center point in vertical direction –4.000 to +4.000 a)
–16.000 to +16.000 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Swirl amount 0.00 to 100.00
2 Center Amount of rotation in center of swirl –8.000 to +8.000
3 Outer Amount of rotation outside of Area –8.000 to +8.000
4 Area Region of swirl 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Degree to which image
disappears
0.00 to 100.00
2 Random Trail type and amount of stardust 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Horizontal center position of swirl –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
2 V Vertical center position of swirl –6.000 to +6.000 a)
–18.000 to +18.000 b)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
108 DME Special Effect Operations
Melt settings
The Melt effect melts the image away from a specified part.
To apply the Melt effect
With the Melt menu displayed, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Direction> group, select the direction in which the image melts
away.
Up: Melting occurs upward.
Down: Melting occurs downward.
2
To make transition settings, press [Transition] and set the following
parameters.
3
To make wave settings for melting part, press [Border] and set the
following parameters.
a) Set when Lock is on.
b) Set when Lock is off.
c) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
d) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To stop the waves in the melting part
Press [Lock], turning it on.
With each press, the waves alternately stop and start moving again.
To select the shape of the part beginning to melt
Press [Form] and set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Degree of transition 0.00 to 100.00
2 Curve Degree to which image stretches 0.00 to 100.00
3 Random Degree of jaggies at melted part 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp Amplitude of waves 0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq Frequency of waves 0.00 to 100.00
3Offset a) Amount of wave phase offset –16.000 to +16.000 c)
–64.000 to +64.000 d)
4Speed b) Direction and speed of waves –100.00 to +100.00
5 Slant Slant of border –100.00 to +100.00
109DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) 1 (SINE): Sine wave
2 (PARABOLA): Parabola wave
3 (TRIANGLE): Triangular wave
4 (RECTANGLE): Rectangular wave
5 (CIRCLE): Circular wave
6 (CUBIC): Cubic wave
7 (MELT1): Melting wave 1
8 (MELT2): Melting wave 2
To make the melting part stardust
1
Press [Pixel], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Character Trail settings
The Character Trail effect extends the edge of the image like a trail.
To apply the Character Trail effect
With the Character Trail menu displayed, set the following parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
To make the tip of the swirl stardust
1
Press [Pixel], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Form Waveform 1 to 8 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Degree to which image
disappears
0.00 to 100.00
2 Random Degree to which pixel positions
become more randomized
further from the center
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Transition Position where effect starts –8.000 to +8.000 a)
–32.000 to +32.000 b)
2 Expand Degree of expansion 0.00 to 100.00
3 Trans Angle Angle of slanting in effect region –8.000 to +8.000
4 Trail Angle Direction of trail –100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
110 DME Special Effect Operations
Lighting Settings
This effect provides the effect of light striking the image. The following
lighting patterns are available:
•Plane
•Bar
• Preset (lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects)
Note
You cannot select Bar for an image subjected to a nonlinear effect.
Applying the Lighting effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF5 ‘Light/Trail’ and HF1 ‘Lighting.’
The Lighting menu appears.
2
Press [Lighting], turning it on.
The Lighting effect is enabled.
3
In the <Light Pattern> group, select the lighting pattern Plane, Bar or
Preset.
You can adjust the intensity of the light and other parameters with the
knobs.
4
Set the parameters.
The parameters differ as follows, depending on the selected lighting
pattern.
• When Plane is selected
a) You can make the Lighting effect more effective by adjusting [Total Ambient] to lower the
brightness of the entire image. This setting is used both by this effect and by the
Spotlighting effect.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Density Degree to which image disappears 0.00 to 100.00
2 Random Trail type and amount of stardust 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Light Intensity of light in highlight area 0.00 to 100.00
5 Total Ambient Brightness of whole image 0.00 to 100.00 a)
111DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Note
The Total Ambient parameter is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When Bar is selected
a) You can make the Lighting effect more effective by adjusting [Total Ambient] to lower the
brightness of the entire image. This setting is used both by this effect and by the
Spotlighting effect.
Note
The Total Ambient parameter is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When Preset is selected
a) Setting is available when nonlinear effect page turn, roll, cylinder, or sphere is selected.
b) You can make the Lighting effect more effective by adjusting [Total Ambient] to lower the
brightness of the entire image. This setting is used both by this effect and by the
Spotlighting effect.
Note
The Total Ambient parameter is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
The three regions for which the light intensity can be set
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Light Intensity of light in highlight area 0.00 to 100.00
2 Ambient Intensity of light in ambient area 0.00 to 100.00
5 Total Ambient Brightness of whole image 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Light Intensity of light in highlight area 0.00 to 100.00
2 Ambient Intensity of light in ambient area 0.00 to 100.00
3 Shade Intensity of light in shade area 0.00 to 100.00 a)
5 Total Ambient Brightness of whole image 0.00 to 100.00 b)
Highlight area
Ambient area
Shade area
Chapter 11 DME Operations
112 DME Special Effect Operations
Setting the bar shape of the highlight area
When you select [Bar] or [Preset] in step 3 of “Applying the Lighting effect”
(page 110), use the following procedure to set the shape of the bar.
1
Turn [Light Modify] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
a) For SD 4:3
b) For SD 16:9
c) For HD 4:3
d) For HD 16:9
e) There are some nonlinear effects for which Angle cannot be used.
Bar shape parameters
Setting the color of the light in the highlight area
1
Turn [Light Color] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X X-value of bar center point –8.00 to +8.00 a) b)
–24.00 to +24.00 c)
–32.00 to +32.00 d)
2 Y Y-value of bar center point –6.00 to +6.00 a)
–4.50 to +4.50 b)
–18.00 to +18.00 c) d)
3Angle e) Angle of bar –8.00 to +8.00
4 Width Width of bar 0.00 to 100.00
5 Soft Softness of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Center point of bar
Bar width
Bar angle
113DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Setting the bar shape of the shade area
When you select [Preset] in step 3 of “Applying the Lighting effect” (see page
110), use the following procedure to set the bar shape of the shade area.
1
Turn [Shade Modify] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
a) For SD 4:3 and SD 16:9
b) For HD 4:3
c) For HD 16:9
Setting the color of the shade in the shade area
1
Turn [Shade Color] on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
Setting the bar mode of the highlight area
When you select [Bar] in step 3 of “Applying the Lighting effect” (see page
110), use the following procedure to set the bar mode of the highlight area.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X X-value of bar center point –8.00 to +8.00a)
–24.00 to +24.00 b)
–32.00 to +32.00 c)
4 Width Width of bar 0.00 to 100.00
5 Soft Softness of edges 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
114 DME Special Effect Operations
Note
The bar mode of the highlight area is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
1
Select the mode in the <Bar Light Mode> group.
Normal: Emphasizes the bar highlight area.
Specular: An effect like light striking a surface with metallic reflections.
Mat: An effect like light striking paper, cloth, or another diffusively
reflective surface.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) For SD 4:3 and SD 16:9
b) For HD 4:3
c) For HD 16:9
3
When you select Normal or Mat in step 1, press [Bar Diffuse Color],
turning it on, and adjust the following parameters to set the color of the
diffuse light area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Intensity Intensity of diffuse light area 0.00 to 100.00
2 Offset Offset of center of diffuse light
area –4.00 to +4.00 a)
–12.00 to +12.00 b)
–16.00 to +16.00 c)
3 Width Width of diffuse light area 0.00 to 100.00
4 Soft Softness of diffuse light area 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
115DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Trail Settings
This effect recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail
of afterimages is created.
For an illustrative figure and other information, see “DME Special Effects” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• When using the MVE-8000, the Trail effect cannot be applied to more than
two channels at the same time.
• Turning Trail on when Motion Decay (see page 119), Keyframe Strobe (see
page 121) or Wind (see page 123) is on turns it off automatically.
With no selection made in
the <Bar Light Mode>
group
Width
Bar Light
With a selection made in
the <Bar Light Mode>
group
Diffuse Light
Diffuse Light
Bar Light
Offset = 0
Chapter 11 DME Operations
116 DME Special Effect Operations
Applying the Trail effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF5 ‘Light/Trail’ and HF2 ‘Trail.’
The Trail menu appears.
2
Press [Trail], turning it on.
The Trail effect is enabled. You can adjust the parameters with the knobs.
3
Set the parameters.
a) 0.00 is no trail. At 100.00, the trail does not disappear.
4
To erase the trail, press [Trail Eraser], turning it on.
Switching the priority between the current image and trail
superimposed
In the <Priority> group, select the method of superimposition.
Over: Current image is on top.
Under: Trail is on top.
Selecting the source to create a trail
In the <Trail Source> group, select the source to create a trail.
Notes
• “Rainbow,” “Mix Color,” and “Ext Video” are not supported on the MVE-
8000/8000A.
• “Mix Color”or “Ext Video” can only be applied to one of the background
(see page 136), flex shadow (see page 44), trail, and wind (see page 123)
effects.
If you select “Mix Color” or “Ext Video” in one of these settings, a selection
of “Mix Color” or “Ext Video” in any of the other effects is disabled, and
“Flat Color” is selected in its place.
• When executing combining four channels of DME images, “Mix Color” and
“Ext Video” in the flex shadow and background effects cannot be selected.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Decay Degree to which the trail is left 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Interval Freeze interval 1 to 255 (frames)
3 Live Proportion of the interval
between two successive freeze
images for which the video is
run
0.00 to 100.00
117DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Freeze Video: Use freeze images of the input video as source of the trail.
Flat Color: Use a flat color matte as source of the trail. You can set the
following parameters with the knobs.
Hue Rotate: Use a color matte whose hue varies slightly with each frame for
the trail of the afterimages. You can set the following parameters with the
knobs.
Mix Color: Insert a mix color signal set in the Color Mix menu (see page 56)
in the afterimage portion.
Ext Video: Insert the external video signal input to the Ext IN connector in the
afterimage portion.
Rainbow: Use a freeze image with the hue changing every frame in the
afterimage portion. The difference from “Hue Rotate” is that many colors
appear simultaneously.
For details of the Rainbow parameters, see the “Hue Rotate” item above.
Erasing the afterimages that remain in memory whenever a
keyframe is passed
Press [Trail Eraser], turning it on.
When the effect passes a keyframe, the afterimage is erased before writing a
new afterimage.
Selecting the freeze timing
In the <Trail Freeze Timing> group, select the timing for freezing a trail.
Frame: freeze in frame units.
Field: freeze in field units.
Note
The freeze timing setting is not required when the following signal formats are
being used.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Speed Speed at which the hue
changes
–12.00 to +12.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
118 DME Special Effect Operations
Signal formats: 1080PsF/30, 1080PsF/29.97, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/24,
1080PsF/23.976, 720P/59.94, 720P/50
Defocusing the afterimage portion (Defocus)
Note
The function to defocus the trail afterimage portion is not supported on the
MVE-8000/8000A.
1
Press [Defocus], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Applying stardust to the afterimage portion
The afterimage portion becomes stardust, and gradually disappears.
1
Press the [DUST] button, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) The way in which the afterimage disappears is affected by both Decay and Trail Dust
parameter adjustments.
Setting a combine process
Select whether to add the Trail effect before or after the combine.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Defocus V Defocusing of the video
signal
0.00 to 100.00
2 Defocus K Defocusing of the key
signal
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Trail Dust Amount of the afterimage
disappearing as stardust a)
0.00 to 100.00
2 Dust Soft Timing with which stardust
disappears
0.00 to 100.00
3 Dust Size Size of stardust 0.00 to 100.00
4 Dust Aspect Aspect ratio of stardust –100.00 to +100.00
119DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Notes
• The combine process function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When you change the selection in the <Combine Process> group, the
afterimages which had been added up to then disappear.
• When you do not combine images, the Trail effect only is applied, regardless
of the selection in the <Combine Process> group.
Select one of the following in the <Combine Process> group.
Combine –> Trail: Add the Trail effect after the combine. As the trail
parameters, the data for the channel with the lowest number among the
channels being combined is enabled.
Trail –> Combine: Add the Trail effect before the combine. Trails parameters
can be set independently for each channel.
Motion Decay Settings
When the video image is a moving image, you can blur the motion by creating
motion trails (or afterimages).
For sample images, see “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
When you turn on motion decay, if the Trail, Keyframe Strobe or Wind effect
is on, it automatically goes off.
Blurring image motion
1
In the DME menu, select VF5 ‘Light/Trail’ and HF3 ‘Motion Decay.’
Combine –> Trail Trail –> Combine
Chapter 11 DME Operations
120 DME Special Effect Operations
The Motion Decay menu appears.
2
Press [Motion Decay], turning it on.
This enables motion decay, and you can now use the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
3
Set the following parameter.
a) At the setting 0.00, there is no afterimage. At a setting of 100.00, the afterimage does not
decay.
4
In the <Decay Mix Mode> group, select the way in which the video signal
is blurred.
Soft: mix the live image and the afterimage.
Hard: show the lighter of the live image and afterimage.
5
To erase the afterimage, press [Decay Eraser], turning it on.
Erasing the afterimages that remain in memory whenever a
keyframe is passed
Press [Decay Eraser], turning it on.
When the effect passes a keyframe, the afterimage is erased before writing a
new afterimage.
Selecting the freeze timing
In the <Decay Freeze Timing> group, select the timing for motion decay
freezing.
Frame: freeze in frame units.
Field: freeze in field units.
Note
The freeze timing setting is not required when the following signal formats are
being used.
Signal formats: 1080PsF/30, 1080PsF/29.97, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/24,
1080PsF/23.976, 720P/59.94, 720P/50
Applying stardust to the afterimage portion
The afterimage portion becomes stardust, and gradually disappears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Decay Degree of blurring of the video
signal 0.00 to 100.00 a)
121DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
1
Press the [DUST] button, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
a) The way in which the afterimage disappears is affected by both the Video Decay and
Decay Dust parameter adjustments for the motion decay.
Keyframe Strobe Settings
Each time a keyframe is passed, the video image is frozen, and left remaining.
Note
When you turn on keyframe strobe, if the Trail, Motion Decay or Wind effect
is on, it automatically goes off.
Leaving a trail of afterimages of the image
1
In the DME menu, select VF5 ‘Light/Trail’ and HF4 ‘KF Strobe.’
The KF Strobe menu appears.
2
Press [KF Strobe], turning it on.
This enables the Keyframe Strobe effect, and you can now use the knobs
to adjust the parameters.
3
Set the following parameter.
a) At the setting 0.00, there is no afterimage. At a setting of 100.00, the afterimage does not
decay.
4
To erase the afterimage, press [KF Strobe Eraser], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Decay Dust Amount of the afterimage
disappearing as stardust a)
0.00 to 100.00
2 Dust Soft Timing with which stardust
disappears
0.00 to 100.00
3 Dust Size Size of stardust 0.00 to 100.00
4 Dust Aspect Aspect ratio of stardust –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Decay Degree of blurring of the video
signal 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
122 DME Special Effect Operations
Selecting the overlay priority for movie and still images (video
freeze image)
In the <Priority> group, select the way in which the images are overlaid.
Over: the movie is on top, and the still image is underneath.
Under: the movie is underneath, and the still image is on top.
Mix: the movie and still images are mixed; adjust the following parameter with
the knob.
a) The 0.00 setting is the same as Over, and the 100.00 is the same as Under.
Selecting the freeze timing
In the <KF Freeze Timing> group, select the timing for freezing the keyframe
strobe.
Frame: freeze in frame units.
Field: freeze in field units.
Note
The freeze timing setting is not required when the following signal formats are
being used.
Signal formats: 1080PsF/30, 1080PsF/29.97, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/24,
1080PsF/23.976, 720P/59.94, 720P/50
Erasing the afterimages that remain in memory whenever a
keyframe is passed
Press [KF Strobe Eraser], turning it on.
When the effect passes a keyframe, the afterimage is erased before writing a
new afterimage.
Applying stardust to the afterimage portion
The afterimage portion becomes stardust, and gradually disappears.
1
Press the [DUST] button, turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Mix amount of the still image with
respect to the movie 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 KF Strobe
Dust
Amount of the afterimage
disappearing as stardust a)
0.00 to 100.00
123DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) The way in which the afterimage disappears is affected by both the Decay and KF Strobe
Dust parameter adjustments for the keyframe strobe.
Disabling the keyframe strobe afterimage
Press [KF Strobe Disable], turning it on.
If you turn this function on when creating a keyframe, even as the effect passes
a keyframe, no afterimage remains.
Setting a combine process
Select whether to add the Keyframe Strobe effect before or after the combine.
Notes
• The combine process function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When you change the selection in the <Combine Process> group, the
afterimages which had been added up to then disappear.
• When you do not combine images, the Keyframe Strobe effect only is
applied, regardless of the selection in the <Combine Process> group.
Select one of the following in the <Combine Process> group.
Combine –> KF STRB: Add the Keyframe Strobe effect after the combine.
As parameters, the data for the channel with the lowest number among the
channels being combined is enabled.
KF STRB –> Combine: Add the Keyframe Strobe effect before the combine.
Parameters can be set independently for each channel.
Wind Settings
This effect strobes the image at regular intervals, and moves the frozen image
in a fixed direction, leaving an afterimage.
For example images, “DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• The wind function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When wind is turned on, any of the following effects that are on are turned
off.
2 Dust Soft Timing with which stardust
disappears
0.00 to 100.00
3 Dust Size Size of stardust 0.00 to 100.00
4 Dust Aspect Aspect ratio of stardust –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Chapter 11 DME Operations
124 DME Special Effect Operations
–Trail
– Motion decay
– Keyframe strobe
Applying the wind effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF5 ‘Light/Trail’ and HF5 ‘Wind.’
The Wind menu appears.
2
Press [Wind], turning it on.
This enables the wind, and you can now adjust the parameters with the
knobs.
3
Set the following parameters.
a) 0.00 represents no afterimage, and 100.00 represents no decay in the afterimage.
4
To erase the afterimages, press [Wind Eraser], turning it on.
Selecting the signal for the afterimage portion
In the <Wind Source> group, select the image to fill the afterimage portion.
Notes
• “Mix Color”or “Ext Video”can only be applied to one of the background (see
page 136), flex shadow (see page 44), trail (see page 115), and wind effects.
If you select “Mix Color”or “Ext Video” in the wind settings, a selection of
“Mix Color”or “Ext Video” in any of the other effects is disabled, and “Flat
Color” is selected in its place.
• When executing combining four channels of DME images, “Mix Color” and
“Ext Video” cannot be selected.
Freeze Video: Freeze the input image to use as the afterimage.
Flat Color: Use a single color matte for the afterimage; you can set the
following parameters with the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Decay Amount of afterimage
displayed 0.00 to 100.00 a)
2 Shift H Extension in the horizontal
direction
–100.00 to +100.00
3 Shift V Extension in the vertical
direction
–100.00 to +100.00
125DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Hue Rotate: Use a single color matte with the hue changing for each frame as
the afterimage; you can set the following parameters with the knobs.
Mix Color: Insert a mix color signal (see page 56) in the afterimage portion.
Ext Video: Insert the external video signal input to the Ext IN connector in the
afterimage portion.
Rainbow: Use a freeze image with the hue changing every frame in the
afterimage portion. The difference from “Hue Rotate” is that many colors
appear simultaneously.
For details of the Rainbow parameters, see the “Hue Rotate” item above.
Applying modulation to the afterimage portion (Modulation)
1
In the Wind menu, press [Modulation], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
For details of Priority, Wind Freeze Timing, Wind Eraser, Defocus, Dust, and
Combine Process in the Wind menu, see “Trail Settings” (page 115).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Speed Rate at which hue changes –12.00 to +12.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Amp H Horizontal amplitude of the
wave
0.00 to 100.00
2 Freq H Horizontal frequency of the
wave
–100.00 to +100.00
3 Amp V Vertical amplitude of the
wave
0.00 to 100.00
4 Freq V Vertical frequency of the
wave
–100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
126 DME Special Effect Operations
Spotlighting Settings
Creates the effect of a spotlight striking the surface of the image.
For a sample illustration and other information, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• The Spotlighting effect is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
• When the global effect Combiner is enabled, the settings of the smallest-
numbered channel selected for the Combiner are used.
Setting the surface where light strikes the image
1
In the DME menu, select VF5 ‘Light/Trail’ and HF6 ‘Spot Lighting.’
The Spot Lighting menu appears.
2
Press [Spot Lighting], turning it on.
This enables Spotlighting, and you can now use the knobs to adjust the
parameters.
3
Set the following parameter.
• Lowering the brightness of the image makes Spotlighting more
effective.
• The Total Ambient setting is shared with the Lighting function.
4
In the <Surface Select> group, select the state of the surface struck by the
light.
Flat: The image surface is unchanged, causing the selected light source to
appear as the effect.
Texture: A texture appears on the surface of the image.
Non Linear: The Spotlighting effect is applied to an area to which a DME
nonlinear effect is applied.
Notes
• The BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000) is
required to enable Texture or Non Linear.
An install key must be entered to use the software (see page 301).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Total Ambient Brightness of whole image 0.00 to 100.00
127DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
• The Spotlighting Non Linear setting is effective for the following
nonlinear effects. For any other nonlinear effect, the result of selecting
the Non Linear setting is the same as selecting Flat.
Wave, Mosaic Glass, Flag, Ripple, Lens, Panarama, Page Turn, Roll.
5
If you selected Texture or Non Linear in step 4, set the following
parameters.
Parameters when you selected Texture
•SD format
a) Minus moves left, plus moves right.
b) Minus moves down, plus moves up.
c) Plus emphasizes bumps in texture, minus emphasizes depressions. 0.00 is a flat surface.
•HD format
a) Minus moves left, plus moves right.
b) Minus moves down, plus moves up.
c) Plus emphasizes bumps in texture, minus emphasizes depressions. 0.00 is a flat surface.
Parameters when you selected Non Linear
a) Light appears from Z direction. At –100.00 the light goes deepest, at +100.00 the whole
image is lit like a flat effect.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Movement in X-axis direction –8.00 to +8.00 a)
2 Y Movement in Y-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 b)
3 Size X Image size in X-axis direction 0.50 to 16.00
4 Size Y Image size in Y-axis direction 0.50 to 16.00
5 Amp Emphasize bumps and
depressions –100.00 to +100.00 c)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Movement in X-axis direction –32.00 to +32.00 a)
2 Y Movement in Y-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 b)
3 Size X Image size in X-axis direction 0.50 to 16.00
4 Size Y Image size in Y-axis direction 0.50 to 16.00
5 Amp Emphasize bumps and
depressions –100.00 to +100.00 c)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Amp Distance of light –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
128 DME Special Effect Operations
6
If you selected Texture in step 4, select the pattern as explained in the next
section “To select a texture pattern.”
7
If you selected Texture in step 4, select the way it is applied in the <Surface
Axis> group.
Move: The texture moves together with the DME image.
Fix: The texture does not move, even if the DME image moves.
For the difference between these application methods, see “Digital Multi
Effects (DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
If Non Linear is selected in the <Surface Select> group, Fix is disabled.
Behavior is the same as Move.
To select a texture pattern
1
In the Spot Lighting menu, press [Texture Ptn Select].
The Texture Ptn Select menu appears.
Two lists appear in the status area. The list on the left displays the number
and name of the currently selected texture. The list on the right is for
selecting a texture.
2
In the <Texture Pattern> group, press [User] or [Factory] to select the
texture pattern list.
[User]: List of texture patterns created by the user. (See “Adding user
texture patterns” (page 305).
[Factory]: List of texture patterns stored in the system when shipped from
the factory.
3
Do one of the following to select a texture.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) When Factory is selected
b) When User is selected. The setting value range depends on the number of texture patterns
installed.
4
Press [Set].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Texture No Texture 1 to 30 a)
101 and upwards b)
129DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
The texture selected in step 2 appears in the list on the left of the status
area.
To display a test sphere
1
In the Spot Lighting menu, press [Test Sphere], turning it on.
A test sphere effect appears on the image surface.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
a) Light appears from Z direction. At –100.00 the light goes deepest, at +100.00 the whole
image is lit like a flat effect.
For details of the relationship of test spheres and light sources, see “DME
Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Setting light sources
Up to three light sources (Light 1 to Light 3) for Spotlighting can be set by
menus.
Light source menu
The following three light source menus are available.
Note
The BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000) is required to
enable Light 2 and Light 3.
An install key must be entered to use the software (see page 301).
To set light source data
The following example shows how to set light source data with the Light 1
menu.
If you use multiple light sources, use the same procedure for all light sources.
1
In the <Spot Lighting Adjust> group of the Spot Lighting menu, press
[Light 1].
The Light 1 menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Amp Distance of light –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Light source Menu
Light 1 DME >Light/Trail >Spot Lighting >Light 1
Light 2 DME >Light/Trail >Spot Lighting >Light 2
Light 3 DME >Light/Trail >Spot Lighting >Light 3
Chapter 11 DME Operations
130 DME Special Effect Operations
2
Press [Light 1], turning it on.
This enables the Light 1 light source, and you can now use the knobs to
adjust the parameters.
3
Set the following parameters.
• Lowering the brightness of the image makes Spotlighting more
effective.
• The Total Ambient setting is shared with the Lighting function.
4
In the <Spot Mode> group, select the type of light source.
Parallel: Parallel light source. The direction can be set.
Point: Point light source. The position can be set.
Line: Line light source. The position and angle can be set.
Whole: Non-directional light source which illuminates the whole image
(no settings).
For more information about light source types, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
5
According to the selected light source type, set the following parameters.
When you selected Parallel
a) Minus moves counterclockwise, plus moves clockwise.
When you selected Point
•SD format
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Total
Ambient
Brightness of whole image 0.00 to 100.00
2 Intensity Intensity (brightness) of the light
source
0.00 to 100.00
3 Soft Softness of the lighted area 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Longitude Longitude –8.00 to +8.00 a)
2 Latitude Latitude –8.00 to +8.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Movement in X-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 a)
2 Y Movement in Y-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 b)
3 Z Movement in Z-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 c)
131DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) Minus moves left, plus moves right.
b) Minus moves down, plus moves up.
c) Minus moves forward, plus moves deeper.
•HD format
a) Minus moves left, plus moves right.
b) Minus moves down, plus moves up.
c) Minus moves forward, plus moves deeper.
When you selected Line
•SD format
a) Minus moves left, plus moves right.
b) Minus moves down, plus moves up.
c) Minus moves forward, plus moves deeper.
d) Minus moves counterclockwise, plus moves clockwise.
•HD format
a) Minus moves left, plus moves right.
b) Minus moves down, plus moves up.
c) Minus moves forward, plus moves deeper.
d) Minus moves counterclockwise, plus moves clockwise.
6
In the <Axis Select> group, select the coordinate space in which to place
the light source.
Source: Place the light source in the source coordinate space. The
spotlight moves when the image moves.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Movement in X-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 a)
2 Y Movement in Y-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 b)
3 Z Movement in Z-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 c)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Movement in X-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 a)
2 Y Movement in Y-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 b)
3 Z Movement in Z-axis direction –6.00 to +6.00 c)
4 Longitude Longitude –8.00 to +8.00 d)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 X Movement in X-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 a)
2 Y Movement in Y-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 b)
3 Z Movement in Z-axis direction –24.00 to +24.00 c)
4 Longitude Longitude –8.00 to +8.00 d)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
132 DME Special Effect Operations
Target: Place the light source in the target coordinate space. The spotlight
does not move, even when the image moves.
For details of the coordinate space in which to place the light source, see
“DME Special Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
To set a test sphere
1
In the Light 1 menu, press [Test Sphere], turning it on.
A test sphere effect appears on the surface of the image.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
a) Light appears from Z direction. At –100.00 the light goes deepest, at +100.00 the whole
image is lit like a flat effect.
To select the lighted area
In the <Area Select> group, select one of the following.
FRGD: The light strikes the image foreground.
BKGD: The light strikes the image background.
Both: The light strikes both foreground and background.
For more information about the lighted area, see “Digital Multi Effects
(DME)” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• If you select [Multiply] in the <Fill Blending Mode> group of the Light
Color Adjust menu (see page 135), the light effect is not applied to the
background, even if you select BKGD or Both.
• If the setting of [Brilliancy] in the <Fill Source> group of the Light Color
Adjust menu (see page 135) is 100.00, the light effect is not applied to the
background, even if you select BKGD or Both.
• When the global effect Combiner is set to Mix or Depth, the light effect is
not applied to the background, even if you select BKGD or Both.
To select Surface Flat
Press [Surface Flat], turning it on.
If you have selected anything other than Flat in the <Surface Select> group of
the Spot Lighting menu, the part corresponding only to the surface being struck
by the currently set light from the light source is shown in the same way as if
Flat had been selected.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Amp Distance of light –100.00 to +100.00 a)
133DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
To set the shape of the light
1
Press [Shape], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
•SD format
a) For more information about the shape patterns, see “Shape Patterns” (page 574) in the
Appendix.
b) 0 is a round shape, and 100 is the shape itself. Smaller values make the pattern more
rounded.
c) –1.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction. +1.00 is one rotation in the
clockwise direction.
•HD format
a) For more information about the shape patterns, see “Shape Patterns” (page 574) in the
Appendix.
b) 0 is a round shape, and 100 is the shape itself. Smaller values make the pattern more
rounded.
c) –1.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction. +1.00 is one rotation in the
clockwise direction.
To rotate the shape pattern
1
Press [Shape Speed], turning it on.
The display on knob 5 that was visible when [Shape] was selected changes.
2
Set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Shape Ptn Shape pattern 1 to 2 a)
2 Size Shape size 0.00 to 6.00
3 Deform Amount of shape deformation 0.00 to 100.00 b)
4 Soft Softness of shape pattern 0.00 to 100.00
5 Angle Angle of shape pattern rotation –8.00 to +8.00 c)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Shape Ptn Shape pattern 1 to 2 a)
2 Size Shape size 0.00 to 24.00
3 Deform Amount of shape deformation 0.00 to 100.00 b)
4 Soft Softness of shape pattern 0.00 to 100.00
5 Angle Angle of shape pattern rotation –8.00 to +8.00 c)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
134 DME Special Effect Operations
a) –100.00 is four rotations per second in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is four
rotations per second in the clockwise direction. 0.00 stops the rotation.
To change the light to a ring shape
Note
If you select Parallel or Whole (see page 130) in the <Spot Mode> group and
shaping is disabled, the Ring parameter cannot be set.
Press [Ring] and set the following parameters.
•SD format
a) –1.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction and +1.00 is one rotation in the clockwise
direction.
Note
There is no Radius setting when Line is selected in the <Spot Mode> group.
•HD format
a) –1.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction and +1.00 is one rotation in the clockwise
direction.
Note
There is no Radius setting when Line is selected in the <Spot Mode> group.
To rotate the ring
1
Press [Ring Speed], turning it on.
The display on knob 3 that was visible when [Ring] was selected changes.
2
Set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Speed Rotation direction and speed –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Offset Offset from center position (radius) –6.00 to +6.00
2 Radius Radius of ring 0.00 to 6.00
3 Angle Rotation angle of ring –8.00 to +8.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Offset Offset from center position (radius) –24.00 to +24.00
2 Radius Radius of ring 0.00 to 6.00
3 Angle Rotation angle of ring –8.00 to +8.00 a)
135DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) –100.00 is four rotations per second in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is four
rotations per second in the clockwise direction. 0.00 stops the rotation.
To invert the lighted area
Press [Light Invert], turning it on.
The lighted area is inverted.
To add color to the light source
1
In the Light 1 menu, press [Light Color Adjust].
The Light Color Adjust menu appears.
2
In the <Fill Blending Mode> group, select how the light and image should
be blended.
Mix: Light as if reflected from a mirror.
Multiply: Light as if reflected from a dull surface (diffuse reflection).
3
If you selected Mix, select the fill color in the <Fill Source> group.
Flat Color: A monochrome matte.
Hue Rotation: Color matte with a color that gradually varies.
4
According to the selection, set the following parameters.
• When you selected Flat Color
a) 100.00: The image beneath the light shines through.
• When you selected Hue Rotation
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Speed Rotation speed and direction –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
4 Brilliancy Brilliance of surface struck by light 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Speed Speed at which hue changes –12.00 to +12.00 a)
4 Brilliancy Brilliance of surface struck by light 0.00 to 100.00 b)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
136 DME Special Effect Operations
a) –12.00 is a 360-degree rotation every second in the counterclockwise direction. +12.00 is
a 360-degree rotation every second in the clockwise direction.
b) 100.00: The image beneath the light shines through.
Copying or swapping light source settings
You can copy or swap the setting from one light source (Light 1 to Light 3) to
another light source.
1
In the Spot Lighting menu, press [Copy/Swap].
The Copy/Swap menu appears.
Two lists appear in the status area. The list on the left shows the copy or
swap sources, and the list on the right shows the copy or swap destinations.
2
Do one of the following to select the target data.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
Press [Copy] to copy, or [Swap] to swap.
The data is copied or swapped.
To undo a copy or swap
Press [Undo]. Settings are returned to their values before the copy or swap.
Background Settings
This effect adds a color to the background of the image.
Applying the Background effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF1 ‘Bkgd.’
The Bkgd menu appears.
2
Press [Bkgd], turning it on.
The Background effect is enabled. Only if Flat Color is selected in the
<Bkgd Fill> group, you can adjust the parameters with the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Copy or swap source data 1 to 3
2 Right No Copy or swap destination data 1 to 3
137DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
3
Set the following parameters.
Selecting the signal to insert in the background
When using the MVE-9000, you can select the signal to insert in the
background.
With [Bkgd] set on, use the following procedure.
1
In the <Bkgd Fill> group, select one of the following.
Flat Color: single color
Mix Color: mix color signal set in the Color Mix menu (see page 56)
Ext Video: an external video signal input to the Ext IN connector
Notes
• “Mix Color”or “Ext Video” can only be applied to one of the
background, flex shadow (see page 44), trail (see page 115), and wind
(see page 123) effects.
If you select “Mix Color” or “Ext Video” in one of these settings, a
selection of “Mix Color” or “Ext Video” in any of the other effects is
disabled, and “Flat Color” is selected in its place.
• When executing combining four channels of DME images, “Mix Color”
and “Ext Video” cannot be selected.
2
Only if Flat Color is selected in step 1, adjust the following parameters.
Separate Sides Settings
This effect applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back
of the image.
For an illustration of the concept of front and back, see “DME Special Effects”
in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
138 DME Special Effect Operations
Applying the Separate Sides effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF2 ‘Video/Key.’
The Video/Key menu appears.
2
Press [Separate Side], turning it on.
The Separate Sides effect is enabled. If the video and key signals currently
being output to the monitor are the front side, you can select the front
signals. If they are the back side, you can select the back signals. Video and
key signals are selected with the cross-point control blocks of each M/E
bank or the PGM/PST bank.
Shaped Video Settings
Switching shaped video on or off
You can select whether or not the following signals are treated as shaped video
(a signal subjected to key processing).
• The input video signal from the switcher, for each of the front and back sides
of an image
• The output video signal
Notes
• On the MVE-8000, the shaped video function is not supported. On the MVE-
8000A, the shaped video function is valid only when the MKE-8021A is
installed to provide an SDI interface.
• When the MKE-8021A is installed in the MVE-8000A to provide an SDI
interface, turning the shaped video function off enables both “Ext Key” and
“Lum Key” in each of the <Front Key> and <Back Key> groups.
• When using the MVS-8000 dedicated interface, since the input video signal
to the first channel is always set to the key processed signal on the switcher,
the shaped video setting is always on. For the second and third channel
signals, this may also be turned off.
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF2 ‘Video/Key.’
The Video/Key menu appears.
2
In the <Shaped Video> group, press each of the following buttons to
switch it on or off.
139DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Front Input: When this is on, the front image of the input video signal is
treated as shaped video.
Back Input: When this is on, the back image of the input video signal is
treated as shaped video.
Output: When this is on, the output video signal is treated as shaped video.
About on and off for shaped video input (Front Input/Back Input)
Switch shaped video on and off according to the input video signals.
For example, switch the shaped video input on when the input signal is a key
processed image such as computer graphics.
Switch the shaped video input off when the input signal is not key processed,
for example when a video signal taken with a camera is cut out with a title or
other key signal.
About on and off for shaped video output
Switch the shaped video output on and off to match the on and off state of the
switcher clean video mode.
Also, when the shaped video output is on, it is recommended that the switcher
key type be set to linear key.
About the relationship between shaped video output and effects
When the shaped video output is off, the video signal before key processing is
output. According to the selected effect, the following states may result.
(a) The output video signal is affected by the key signal.
(b) When key processing is done, a different image may appear in the parts
which are removed.
(c) There is no change in the output video signal for effects which are applied
to key signals only.
When multiple effects are applied, the order of priority is (a) > (b) > (c).
The following explains the relationship between effects and states (a), (b), and
(c).
(a) The output video signal is affected by the key signal
The output video signal is affected by the key signal when the following effects
are selected. To prevent the signal from being affected, set the DME key source
to Int Key, or choose an appropriate input key signal.
Page Turn, Roll, Cylinder, Sphere, Spotlighting, global effects (Combiner,
Brick, Shadow)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
140 DME Special Effect Operations
(b) When key processing is done, a different image may appear in
the parts which are removed
The following states result, depending on the selected effect.
Removal with the key can be checked by turning the background on.
Border, Beveled Edge: Added also to the outer side of the cropped video
signal (restriction of this version only).
Trail, Keyframe Strobe: The key signal level of the afterimage portion varies
with adjustments of the knob (Decay), but the afterimage portion of the
video signal does not disappear until Trail Eraser (KF Strobe Eraser) is
turned on or the effect is turned off.
Lighting: The Lighting effect is applied to the whole picture.
Spotlighting: If BKGD or Both is selected in the <Area Select> group, light
strikes the entire background.
(c) No change in the output video signal for effects which are
applied to key signals only
The following states result, depending on the selected effect.
Removal with the key can be checked by turning the background on.
Crop: The Copy effect is applied to the key signal only. The video signal does
not change.
Edge Soft: The Edge Soft effect is applied to the key signal only. The video
signal does not change.
Shadow, Flex Shadow, Combine Shadow: The key signal density changes.
The video signal does not change.
Fade: The key signal changes according to depth data. The video signal does
not change.
Key Density: The key signal density changes. The video signal does not
change.
Invert Settings
Inverts the input video signal and key signal horizontally or vertically. You can
make separate settings for the front and back.
For an illustration of signal inversion, see “DME Special Effects” in Chapter
1 (Volume 1).
Applying the Invert effect
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF2 ‘Video/Key.’
The Video/Key menu appears.
141DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
2
In the <Front> group (to invert front signals) or the <Back> (to invert back
signals), press the following buttons, turning them on.
H Invert: Invert video and key signals horizontally.
V Invert: Invert video and key signals vertically.
Key Density Settings
For the selected key, you can separately set the key density.
Setting the key density
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF2 ‘Video/Key.’
The Video/Key menu appears.
2
Press [Key Density], turning it on.
This enables the key density function, and you can now use the knobs to
adjust the parameters.
3
Set the following parameter.
Key Source Selection
Select the key signals for use as the front and back of the image.
Selecting the key source signals
Note
When the shaped video setting (see page 138) is on, it is not possible to select
the key source. It is fixed as “Ext Key” as listed in the following.
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF2 ‘Video/Key.’
The Video/Key menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Key Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
142 DME Special Effect Operations
2
In the <Front Key> group or <Back Key> group respectively, press one of
the following, turning it on.
Ext Key: Use the key signal sent from the switcher as the key source.
Int Key: Use the full-size DME internal key signal as the key source.
Lum Key: Use the input video luminance signal as the key source.
Note
“Lum Key” can be selected only when the MVE-8000A or MVE-9000 is
used.
3
When the DME being used is the MVE-8000A/9000 and Ext Key or Lum
Key is selected in step 2, set the following parameters.
Notes
• The Ext Key and Lum Key in the <Front Key> group share clip and gain
settings. Similarly, Ext Key and Lum Key in the <Back Key> group also
share clip and gain settings.
• When using the MVE-8000A/9000, the Ext Key parameter setting is
only enabled when the shaped video setting is off.
Interpolation Settings
Specifies the interpolation method for input video signals and input key
signals.
When using the MVE-8000/8000A, except for the settings in the <Filter
Mode> group the following settings are only valid in an SD system. When
using the MVE-9000, the following settings are valid both in an SD system and
an HD/1080i system.
For an overview of interpolation, see “Interpolation” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Selecting an interpolation method for input video signals
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF3 ‘Process.’
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Clip Reference level for key signal
generation
–7.31 to +109.59
2 Gain Key sensitivity –100.00 to +100.00
143DME Special Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
2
In the <Video Field/Frame Mode> group, select the interpolation method
for the video signal.
Adaptive Y/C: Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance
components of the video signal separately, and switch automatically
between fields and frames.
Adaptive Y: Detect changes in the luminance component of the video
signal separately, and switch automatically between fields and frames.
Field: Do interpolation in field units. This gives natural movement,
suitable for moving video.
Frame: Do interpolation in frame units. This gives higher image precision,
suitable for still pictures.
3
When you select Adaptive Y/C or Adaptive Y in step 2, set the following
parameter.
4
In the <Key Field/Frame Mode> group, select the interpolation method for
the key signal.
Adaptive: Detect changes in the luminance component of the key signal
separately, and switch automatically between fields and frames.
Field: Do interpolation in field units. This gives natural movement,
suitable for moving video.
Frame: Do interpolation in frame units. This gives higher image precision,
suitable for still pictures.
5
When you select Adaptive in step 4, set the following parameter.
6
In the <Interpolation Mode> group, set the number of pixels to use in
interpolation.
Multi: Use multi-point interpolation. This gives higher picture quality.
Linear: Use two-point interpolation.
7
In the <Filter Mode> group, select the method used to show the picture
reduced or expanded.
Mode1 (standard): Even when the picture is reduced, add compensation
so that it can be seen clearly.
Mode2 (soft): Suppress aliasing when expanding or reducing the picture.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mode Degree of motion detection 1 to 4
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mode Degree of motion detection 1 to 4
Chapter 11 DME Operations
144 DME Special Effect Operations
Mode3 (sharp): Do not surpress aliasing when expanding or reducing the
picture.
Applying the anti-moire filter
You can reduce the moire patterns created by interpolation when an image is
enlarged, compressed, or rotated.
Note
This function is effective only when the HD signal format is used on the MVE-
8000/8000A.
1
In the DME menu, select VF6 ‘Input/Output’ and HF3 ‘Process.’
The Process menu appears.
2
Press [Anti Moire Filter], turning it on.
3
Set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Anti Moire
Filter
Amount of moire reduction 1 to 8
145Global Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Global Effect Operations
Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of
successive channels. The following types of global effects are available.
• Combiner
•Brick
• Shadow
For details of these global effects, see “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume
1).
Operations common to all global effects
In this section, explanations of the operating procedures for individual global
effects begin with selections from VF1 ‘Ch1 - Ch4’ in the Global Effect menu.
The following are common operations that you must do prior to selecting from
this menu.
1
In the device control block, select the target DME channel.
2
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [GLB EFF],
then select VF1 ‘Ch1 - Ch4.’
The Global Effect >Ch1 - Ch4 menu appears.
Combiner Settings
You can combine images using up to four consecutive channels. You can also
combine channels 1 and 2, and channels 3 and 4, pairwise.
The setting menu differs according to the combiner usage status.
This section shows the cases of “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3” and “Ch1+Ch2, Ch3+Ch4”
as examples.
For details of operating procedures when using an SDI interface, see
“Procedure for combine operation when using an SDI interface” (page 146).
Setting the combiners
1
In the Global Effect >Ch1- Ch4 menu, select HF1 ‘Combiner Priority.’
The Combiner Priority menu appears.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
146 Global Effect Operations
2
If [Mix], [Auto] or [Depth] is on, turn it off.
3
Set the overlap priority for “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3” or “Ch1+Ch2, Ch3+Ch4” as
follows.
For case “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3”
Under <Priority1> to <Priority3>, press [Ch1], [Ch2], and [Ch3],
respectively, to set the overlap priority.
Priority1: Select the channel with the highest priority.
Priority2: Select the channel with the second highest priority.
Priority3: Select the channel with the lowest priority.
For case “Ch1+Ch2, Ch3+Ch4”
Under <Combiner 1 Priority 1> and <Combiner 1 Priority 2>, press [Ch1]
and [Ch2] respectively, and under <Combiner 2 Priority 1> and
<Combiner 2 Priority 2>, press [Ch4] and [Ch3] respectively, to set the
respective priorities for overlaying the images.
Procedure for combine operation when using an SDI interface
Use the following procedure only when the DME being used is the MVE-
8000A or MVE-9000 with an SDI interface.
Note
It is not possible to select MVE-8000A or MVE-9000 channels with buttons in
the key control block.
Priority1: Ch1
Priority2: Ch2
Priority3: Ch3
Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Combiner1 Priority1: Ch1
Combiner1 Priority2: Ch2
Combiner2 Priority1: Ch4
Combiner2 Priority2: Ch3
Ch2
Ch1
Ch3
Ch4
147Global Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
In the following, the example given is that channels 2 and 3 are combined, then
channels 1+2 and channels 3+4 are combined, but other combinations are also
possible.
1
In the Global Effect menu, select VF1 ‘Ch1-Ch4’ and HF7 ‘Combine Gp
Select.’
The Combine Gp Select menu appears.
2
In the <Combine Gp Select> group, select the channel combination.
• To combine channels 2 and 3, press [Ch2+Ch3], turning it on.
• To combine the previously combined combinations of channels 1 and 2,
and channels 3 and 4, press [Ch1+Ch2] and [Ch3+Ch4], turning them
on.
Note
The only two buttons that can be selected simultaneously are the
combination of [Ch1+Ch2] and [Ch3+Ch4].
The selected channels are combined.
To cancel a combine
When for example [Ch2+Ch3] is on, pressing [Ch2+Ch3] once more turns it
off. Alternatively, pressing a different combination button to select it cancels
the combine selection for the current combination.
Mixing the images of up to four consecutive channels
1
In the Combiner Priority menu, press [Mix], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
For case “Ch1+Ch2”
a) See “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
For case “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3”
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix Mix degree 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix1 Mix degree for mix of
channel 1 with result of
Mix2
0.00 to 100.00 a)
Chapter 11 DME Operations
148 Global Effect Operations
a) See “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
For case “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3+Ch4”
Knobs 1 and 2 set the same parameters as “For case ‘Ch1+Ch2+Ch3’,”
respectively. Knob 3 is additionally effective, which sets the parameter
Mix3 (in the same setting value range as with knobs 1 and 2).
Mixing pairwise the images of channels 1 and 2, and channels 3
and 4
1
In the Combiner Priority menu, press [Combiner1 Mix], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
a) See “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
3
Press [Combiner2 Mix], turning it on.
4
Adjust the following parameter.
a) See “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Automatically setting the priority of overlapping images
To set the system so that the priority of overlapping images is automatically
determined by their position on the z-axis, in the Combiner Priority menu,
press [Auto], turning it on.
Note
It is not possible to cross images. If an image is rotated, the priority is
determined by the position on the z-axis of the center of the image.
2 Mix2 Mix degree for channels
2 and 3 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix1 Mix degree for channels
1 and 2 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Mix2 Mix degree for channels
2 and 3 0.00 to 100.00 a)
149Global Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Crossing images from up to four consecutive channels in three
dimensions
Note
The three-dimensional crossing function is not supported on the MVE-8000/
8000A.
1
In the Combiner Priority menu, press [Depth], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
For case “Ch1+Ch2”
For case “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3”
For case “Ch1+Ch2+Ch3+Ch4”
Knobs 1 and 2 set the same parameters as “For case ‘Ch1+Ch2+Ch3’,”
respectively. Knob 3 is additionally effective, which sets the parameter
Soft3 (in the same setting value range as with knobs 1 and 2).
Crossing images from channels 1 and 2, and channels 3 and 4 in
three dimensions
Note
The three-dimensional crossing function is not supported on the MVE-8000/
8000A.
1
In the Combiner Priority menu, press [Combiner1 Depth], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft Softness of edges of crossed
section
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft1 Softness of edges of channel 1
and channel 2 crossed section
0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft2 Softness of edges of channel 2
and channel 3 crossed section
0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
150 Global Effect Operations
3
Press [Combiner2 Depth], turning it on.
4
Set the following parameter.
Brick Settings
This effect creates a rectangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels.
For an illustration, see “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Applying the Brick effect
1
In the Global Effect >Ch1 - Ch4 menu, select HF2 ‘Brick.’
The Brick menu appears.
2
Press [Brick], turning it on.
The Brick effect is enabled, and a rectangular parallelepiped (brick)
showing the images of three channels appears. You can use the knobs to
adjust parameters for the height of the brick and the overlap between the
three images.
Notes
• When the Brick effect is enabled, the z-axis position of the front image
in the source coordinate frame is shifted by the amount of half the height.
Therefore, the image is somewhat magnified.
• The flex shadow function cannot be enabled when Brick is enabled.
However, the flex shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/
8000A.
3
Set the parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft1 Softness of edges of channel 1
and channel 2 crossed section
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Soft2 Softness of edges of channel 3
and channel 4 crossed section
0.00 to 100.00
151Global Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
4
Specify the way to insert the side images when the height is changed by
pressing one of the following buttons in the <Side V> group or the <Side
H> group.
Crop: Crop the parts that do not fit into the side without shrinking the
picture. You can set the following parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination
of signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the
system, as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
• HD format, 4:3 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Height Height of brick 0.00 to 8.00 a)
0.00 to 32.00 b)
2 Front Overlap Front overlap –100.00 to +100.00
3 Side H Overlap Side H overlap –100.00 to +100.00
4 Side V Overlap Side V overlap –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of left crop –4.00 to +4.00
2 V Position of top crop –3.00 to +3.00
3 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of left crop –4.00 to +4.00
2 V Position of top crop –2.25 to +2.25
3 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of left crop –12.00 to +12.00
2 V Position of top crop –9.00 to +9.00
3 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Chapter 11 DME Operations
152 Global Effect Operations
• HD format, 16:9 mode
The set position becomes the upper left corner of Side V or Side H. The
right and bottom sides of the inserted image are set automatically.
Compress: Images are inserted after being compressed. You can set the
following parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination
of signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the
system, as follows.
• SD format, 4:3 mode
• SD format, 16:9 mode
• HD format, 4:3 mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Position of left crop –16.00 to +16.00
2 V Position of top crop –9.00 to +9.00
3 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top crop –2.83 to +3.00
2 Left Position of left crop –4.00 to +3.83
3 Right Position of right crop –3.83 to +4.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom crop –3.00 to +2.83
5 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top crop –2.12 to +2.25
2 Left Position of left crop –4.00 to +3.87
3 Right Position of right crop –3.87 to +4.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom crop –2.25 to +2.12
5 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top crop –8.50 to +9.00
2 Left Position of left crop –12.00 to +11.50
3 Right Position of right crop –11.50 to +12.00
153Global Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
• HD format, 16:9 mode
The part of the image defined by Top, Left, Right, and Bottom is magnified
or shrunk to fit into Side V or Side H.
To invert the image in a side face
For example, to invert the image on the front of Side H in the <Side H Front>
group, press the following buttons, turning them on.
Invert H: To invert horizontally.
Invert V: To invert vertically.
For the images on the other faces, use a similar operation in the following
groups:
• Back image of Side H: <Side H Back> group
• Front image of Side V: <Side V Front> group
• Back image of Side V: <Side V Back> group
4 Bottom Position of bottom crop –9.00 to +8.50
5 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top crop –8.50 to +9.00
2 Left Position of left crop –16.00 to +15.50
3 Right Position of right crop –15.00 to +16.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom crop –9.00 to +8.50
5 Rotation Angle of rotation, when rotated
around the Z-axis of the source
space
0/90/180/270°
Chapter 11 DME Operations
154 Global Effect Operations
Shadow Settings
This effect uses two to four successive channels to give an image a shadow.
For an illustration, see “Global Effects” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
When the Combiner function is off, the shadow effect cannot be used.
Applying the Drop Shadow effect
The Shadow menu allows you to apply the Drop Shadow effect. To access the
Shadow menu, in the Global Effect>Ch1 - Ch4 menu select HF3 ‘Shadow.’
Depending on the selected combiner channels, the valid buttons differ as
follows.
Top side
Side V
Actual size, upper left corner
Set automatically
Cropped region
Crop Compress
Magnified or
shrunk to fit
Side
H
Combiner channel
selection
Button
Ch1
Shadow
Ch2
Shadow
Ch3
Shadow
Ch1+Ch2
Shadow
Ch2+Ch3
Shadow
Ch1+Ch2 Valid
Ch2+Ch3 Valid
Ch3+Ch4 Valid
Ch1+Ch2+Ch3 Valid Valid Valid
Ch2+Ch3+Ch4 Valid Valid Valid
155Global Effect Operations
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Taking Ch1 Shadow as an example, the following explains the procedure for
applying the Drop Shadow effect.
1
Press [Ch1 Shadow], turning it on.
The Drop Shadow effect is enabled, and channel 2 becomes the channel for
the shadow to the image. You can adjust the position and density of the
shadow with the knobs.
Note
The flex shadow function cannot be enabled when Drop Shadow is
enabled.
However, the flex shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/
8000A.
2
Set the parameters.
a) Setting for SD 4:3, SD 16:9
b) Setting for HD 4:3, HD 16:9
3
In the <Ch1 Shadow Source> group, select the shadow source signal.
Video: Select Ch2 video input as the shadow.
Flat Color: Select a matte color as the shadow.
4
When you select Flat Color in step 3, adjust the parameters.
Ch1+Ch2+Ch3+Ch4 Valid Valid Valid Valid
Combiner channel
selection
Button
Ch1
Shadow
Ch2
Shadow
Ch3
Shadow
Ch1+Ch2
Shadow
Ch2+Ch3
Shadow
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal shadow position –8.00 to +8.00 a)
–32.00 to +32.00 b)
2 Position V Vertical shadow position –8.00 to +8.00 a)
–32.00 to +32.00 b)
3 Density Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 11 DME Operations
156 Global Effect Operations
To combine the video images after applying a shadow
Use the Combiner function to select channel 1 + channel 2 and channel 3 +
channel 4, then turn [Ch 1 Shadow] and [Ch 3 Shadow] on.
To apply a shadow after combining the video images
Use the Combiner function to select channel 1 + channel 2 + channel 3 +
channel 4, then turn [Ch 1 + Ch 2 Shadow] on.
Ch4
Ch3
Ch2
Ch1
Ch4
Ch3 Ch2
Ch1
Chapter 12 External Devices
Control of External Devices .....................................................................158
Control of P-Bus Devices .........................................................................159
Creating and Editing the P-Bus Timeline ..........................................159
P-Bus Trigger ....................................................................................162
Control of GPI Devices ............................................................................163
GPI Timeline Creation and Editing ...................................................163
Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders ......................166
Controlling the Tape/Disk Transport ................................................166
Checking VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Information .............171
Cueup & Play ....................................................................................172
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Timeline ..................................180
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Operations .................................186
158 Control of External Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
Control of External Devices
Use the Device menu to carry out operations for controlling external devices
such as the following.
• Devices supporting P-Bus (Peripheral II protocol) (referred to as “P-Bus
devices” in the manual)
• Devices supporting GPI (General Purpose Interface) (referred to as “GPI
devices” in the manual)
•VTRs
• Disk recorders (supporting Sony disk 9-pin protocol and video disk
communications protocol)
• Extended VTRs (Abekas A53 protocol)
For VTRs, Extended VTRs, and disk recorders, you can also carry out
operations using the device control block.
Notes
• To operate P-Bus devices, VTRs, Extended VTRs, and disk recorders in the
this system, the following settings are required on the DCU 9-pin serial port.
– Device type setting
– Device name
– Setting of control panel (SCU) to be used
For details of the settings, see “Making serial port settings” (page 442).
• When using a disk recorder or Extended VTR, be sure to go to the Device
>DDR/VTR >File List menu, and recall the file.
For details of the operation, see “Recalling a file” (page 187).
To access the Device menu
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [DEV].
159Control of P-Bus Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
Control of P-Bus Devices
Creating and Editing the P-Bus Timeline
This section describes how to set an action for a keyframe point, and edit the
P-Bus timeline.
For details of keyframe creation and editing operations, see “Creating and
Editing Keyframes” (page 207).
Note
Using the P-Bus timeline function requires the P-Bus control mode to be set to
[Timeline]. Carry out this setting in the Engineering Setup >Panel >Device
Interface menu (see page 372).
Setting an action
1
In the Device menu, press VF2 ‘P-Bus Timeline.’
The Device >P-Bus Timeline menu appears.
The status area shows two lists. The left list is for setting combinations of
devices and actions. The settings in this list will be saved as keyframe point
data. The right list is for selecting the action.
2
Select the P-Bus device for which you want to set an action, by using any
of the following methods to specify the device ID.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Using either of the following methods, select the action.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Turn the knob.
a) 1: Off (no specification)
2: Store
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 ID Device number 0 to 23
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action No Action 1 to 4 a)
160 Control of P-Bus Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
3: Recall
4: Trigger
4
If in step 3 you selected 2 (Store), 3 (Recall), or 4 (Trigger), turn knob 3 to
select the register number or trigger number.
The indication for knob 3 changes to reflect the selection of Store, Recall,
or Trigger.
The setting is reflected in the list on the right of the status area.
5
Press [Set].
For the device selected in the list on the left of the status area, this sets the
action specified in step 4.
Repeat steps 2 to 5 as required for other devices.
Testing an action command
To produce a test output of the action command, press [Test Fire].
The action command is output from the 9-pin serial port of the DCU according
to the setting in the list on the left of the status area.
Clearing an action setting
To clear the setting for separate devices
1
In the list on the left of the status area, select the device for which you want
to clear the action setting.
2
In the list on the right, select “Off.”
3
Press [Set].
To clear the action settings for all devices in a single operation
Press [All Off].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Store No Register number for Store 1 to 99
3 Recall No Register number for Recall 1 to 99
3 Trigger No Trigger number 0 to 15
161Control of P-Bus Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
Setting the action for a rewind operation
On the P-Bus timeline, when the [REWIND] button in the keyframe control
block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed; when the
[RUN] button is pressed, then the first keyframe action is executed.
To execute an action when the [REWIND] button is pressed, it is necessary to
set this action (Rewind Action). To carry out this setting, in the Device >P-Bus
Timeline menu, press [Rewind Action] to recall the Rewind Action menu. In
this setting screen, use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an
action on the P-Bus timeline.
Alternatively, you can select the reverse arrangement, whereby when the
[REWIND] button is pressed, this executes the action set for the first keyframe,
and when the [RUN] button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed.
In this case, the Rewind Action setting is still valid.
For details of the setting, see “Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is
executed” (page 375).
Carrying out a Direct Store
You can carry out a Learn with the register number specified for the device
selected in the menu.
1
Using any of the following methods, select the device.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
In the Device >P-Bus Timeline menu, press [Direct Store].
The numeric keypad window appears.
3
Enter the register number for which you want to carry out the Learn.
The setting range is from 1 to 99.
4
Press [Enter].
This carries out a Learn with the specified register number.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 ID Device ID 0 to 23
162 Control of P-Bus Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
P-Bus Trigger
“P-Bus trigger” is a function whereby a button operation in the numeric keypad
control block or keyframe control block outputs an action command to a P-Bus
device.
Note
To use the P-Bus trigger function, the P-Bus control mode must be set to
[Trigger]. Make this setting in the Engineering Setup>Panel>Device Interface
menu (see page 372).
The relation between the operation in each of the control blocks and the action
command output is as follows.
Action command for an operation in the numeric keypad control
block
• RECALL: Recall
•STORE: Store
This recalls the register specified in the numeric keypad control block, and a
Recall or Store is carried out, according to the setting.
Action command for an operation in the keyframe control block
• RUN: Trigger 1
• REWIND: Trigger 4
• NEXT KF: Trigger 7
• PREV KF: Trigger 8
Outputting an action command
As an example, to output a Recall, use the following procedure.
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [EFF] button, turning it on.
The [RCALL] button in the numeric keypad control block lights.
2
Press the [P-BUS] button in the numeric keypad control block, turning it
on, to select the P-Bus region.
3
Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad
buttons.
4
Press the [ENTER] button in the numeric keypad control block.
This carries out the Recall.
163Control of GPI Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
Control of GPI Devices
GPI Timeline Creation and Editing
This section describes how to set GPI output ports to be registered at a
keyframe point, and how to carry out creation and editing of the GPI timeline.
For details of keyframe creation and editing operations, see “Creating and
Editing Keyframes” (page 207).
GPI output port settings
Set the GPI output port number of the control panel or DCU which outputs GPI
pulses at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline.
Use the following procedure. (Use the same procedure to subsequently change
the settings.)
1
In the Device menu, press VF1 ‘GPI Timeline.’
The Device >GPI Timeline menu appears.
The status area shows the “GPI Output” list on the left and the “GPI Port”
list on the right.
The “GPI Output” list (on the left) shows the relation between ports 1 to 8
for the GPI timeline and the trigger pulse output destination ports. The
content of this list is saved as keyframe data.
The “GPI Port” list (on the right) is for selecting the GPI trigger pulse
output destination.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the GPI timeline port you
want to set on the GPI Timeline.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Turn the knob.
3
Using either of the following methods, trigger output destination.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 GPI Output No GPI timeline port number 1 to 8
164 Control of GPI Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
a) 1: Off (no specification)
2: Control panel (SCU) GPI port
3: DCU GPI port
4
If in step 3 you selected 2 (SCU) or 3 (DCU), then use the knob to select
the port number.
The indication for knob 3 depends on whether SCU or DCU is selected.
a) The number of DCU GPI ports depends on the settings in Engineering Setup.
The setting is reflected in the list on the right of the status area.
Note
For the output port you have set here, be sure to set the trigger type to
“Rising Edge,” “Falling Edge” or “Any Edge.”
For details of the trigger type settings, see “Making control panel GPI
output settings” (page 370) and “Making DCU GPI output settings” (page
439).
5
Press [Set].
This specifies the SCU/DCU GPI port whose number you specified in step
4 as the pulse output destination for the GPI output port selected in the list
on the left of the status area.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 for other GPI output ports as required.
Testing trigger output
To test the trigger output, press [Test Fire].
According to the list settings on the left of the status area, a pulse is output from
the selected output port.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
2 GPI Port No SCU/DCU GPI port to be the
trigger output destination 1 to 3 a)
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
3 SCU Port No SCU GPI port number 1 to 8
3 DCU Port No DCU GPI port number 1 to 50 a)
165Control of GPI Devices
Chapter 12 External Devices
Clearing output port settings
To clear the settings for each device (GPI output port)
1
In the list on the left of the status area, select the GPI output port whose
settings you want to clear.
2
In the list on the right, select “Off.”
3
Press [Set].
To clear the settings for all devices (GPI output ports) in a single
operation
Press [All Off].
Setting the action for a rewind operation
On the GPI timeline, when the [REWIND] button in the keyframe control
block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed; when the
[RUN] button is pressed, then the first keyframe action is executed.
To execute an action when the [REWIND] button is pressed, it is necessary to
set this action (Rewind Action). To carry out this setting, in the Device >GPI
Timeline menu, press [Rewind Action] to recall the Rewind Action menu. In
this setting screen, use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an
action on the GPI timeline.
Alternatively, you can select the reverse arrangement, whereby when the
[REWIND] button is pressed, this executes the action set for the first keyframe,
and when the [RUN] button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed.
In this case, the Rewind Action setting is still valid.
For details of the setting, see “Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is
executed” (page 375).
166 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk
Recorders
To control a VTR, Extended VTR, or disk recorder in this system, the
following settings are required.
• Button assignment: For a VTR, Extended VTR, or disk recorder connected
to the DCU 9-pin serial port, assign a device selection button in the device
control block.
• Timecode source: When using a VTR, specify a reference signal used for
determining the tape position.
For details, see “Making DCU serial port settings” (page 372) and “Making
detailed settings on the external device connected to the serial port” (page
443).
Controlling the Tape/Disk Transport
To switch to VTR/disk recorder operation mode
To control a VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder with the device control block
(trackball) or device control block (joystick), press the [DEV] button in the
device control block, turning it on, to switch the device control block to the
VTR/disk recorder operation mode. The button assignment changes as follows
(the [SHIFT] button is disabled in VTR/disk recorder operation mode).
167Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Device control block (trackball)
In the device control block (search dial), there is no such a mode selection
button and you can directly select a device.
Selecting a VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder
To select the VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder to be controlled, in the device
selection buttons of the device control block, press a selection of those buttons
turning them on.
For details on frame memory clip operations, see “Frame Memory Clip
Operations” in Chapter 7 (Volume 1).
Controlling the tape/disk transport
Using the buttons in the device control block, you can control the tape transport
or the disk transport.
For more details of the effect of buttons in VTR/disk recorder operation mode,
see “Device Control Block (Trackball),” “Device Control Block (Joystick)”
and “Device Control Block (Search Dial)” in Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
If an appropriate setup setting has been made, VTR, Extended VTR, or disk
recorder can also be operated with the transition control block (standard type
or compact type).
DEV
DEV1
DEV5
DEV9
MENU
DEV2
DEV6
DEV10
DEV3
DEV7
DEV11
REW
DEV4
STOP
DELAY REC
DEV8
DEV12
VAR SHTL JOG
PLAY FFCUESHFT
STB
OFF
START
TC
STOP
TC
ALL
STOP
FM
LOOP
FM1
CLIP
FM2
CLIP
168 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
For more details of the effect of buttons in VTR/disk recorder operation mode,
see “Transition Control Block (Standard Type)” and “Transition Control
Block (Compact Type)” in Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
For details of settings in setup, see “Setting VTR operation button assignment”
(page 331).
Controlling the tape/disk transport with the search dial
With the device control block (search dial), you can use the search dial for
variable speed playback of the material on an external device.
If you turn this dial during video playback, the direction and speed of playback
depend on the direction and angle of rotation. To use this dial, press the
[ENBL] button to the upper right of the dial, lighting it amber. This dial has
three operation modes: jog, shuttle, and variable.
To prevent overheating, if the search dial is on continuously for 10 seconds, it
is automatically turned off. However, in this state, if a movement of the dial is
detected, it switches on again.
Jog mode
Press the [JOG] button, lighting the button amber, to switch the dial to jog
mode. In this mode, you can advance material frame by frame at a speed
proportional to the rotation angle of the dial. To show a still image, stop turning
the search dial.
Shuttle mode
Press the [SHTL] button, lighting the button amber, to switch the dial to shuttle
mode. In this mode, the playback speed varies in steps according to the rotation
angle of the dial, to a maximum of 50 times normal. If the valid angle is
exceeded, the dial makes a clicking sound. To show a still image, return the dial
to the home position, where it stops with a clicking sound.
Reverse direction Forward direction
169Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Variable mode
Press the [VAR] button, lighting the button amber, to switch the dial to variable
mode. In this mode, the playback speed varies according to the rotation angle
of the dial from –1 to +3 times normal speed. The dial indicates the positions
where the playback speed is –1 times normal speed, +1 times normal speed,
and +3 times normal speed by making a clicking sound at those positions. To
show a still image (playback speed 0%), return the dial to its home position,
where it stops with a clicking sound.
×–1: –1 times normal speed
×+3: +3 times normal speed
×+1: +1 times normal speed
To disable the search dial and end variable mode, press the [STOP] button.
Additionally, pressing any of the [REW], [PLAY], [FF], [STB OFF], and
[ALL STOP] editing buttons ends the variable mode. For shuttle mode and
variable mode, you can set the valid range of the operating angle in the
Engineering Setup >Panel >Operation >Sensitivity menu to either of the
followings.
Narrow operating angle
• Shuttle mode: approx. –150 to +150°
• Variable mode: approx. –120 to +210°(+1 times normal speed is +120°)
Reverse direction Forward direction
Low
speed
Low
speed
Maximum
speed
Maximum
speed
Still image
Reverse direction Forward direction
Low
speed
Low
speed
×–1
Still image
×+1
×+3
170 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Wide operating angle
• Shuttle mode: approx. –180 to +180°
• Variable mode: approx. –200 to +348°(+1 times normal speed is +200°)
Recording to VTRs and disk recorders
You can record to the VTR or disk recorder selected in the device control
block. Proceed as follows.
Notes
• Recording is not possible if the VTR or disk recorder is not set to Recorder.
• The disk recorder type must be specified to use the video disk
communications protocol.
See “To make detailed settings for a disk recorder (video disk
communications protocol)” (page 448) for more information about how to
make this setting.
• When using a disk recorder, recording is not possible unless a new file name
is specified.
See “Creating new files” (page 188) for more information about how to
specify file names.
1
Using the buttons of the device control block, select the VTR or disk
recorder to which you want to record.
You can select more than one button.
The first button pressed lights green to indicate the reference device, and
the subsequent buttons light amber.
2
While holding down the [REC] button in the device control block, press
the [PLAY] button.
Recording starts. During recording, the [REC] button lights red and the
[PLAY] button lights amber.
Note
Note the following points about recording to a disk recorder.
• The maximum length of time that can be recorded in one operation is 30
minutes.
• If you want to record to a different file than the file used in the previous
recording, use the Device >DDR/VTR >File List menu to create a new
file.
• If you resume recording without executing [Unload] from the Device
>DDR/VTR >File List menu, recording starts at the position in the same
file where recording was interrupted.
171Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
To stop recording
Press the [STOP] button or the [ALL STOP] button in the device control block.
Checking VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR
Information
You can check the VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR information (timecode
information and operating status) set in the device control block, in the Device
menu display.
To check the VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR information, press VF3 ‘VTR’
and HF1 ‘Cueup & Play’ or HF2 ‘Timeline’ in the Device menu.
The Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play menu or Device >DDR/VTR
>Timeline menu appears, and a list shows the timecode information and
operating status for each device. The columns of the list show the following
information.
DEV (device name): DEV1 to DEV12 represent respectively device 1 to
device 12.
Reg (register): Number of the register to which settings apply.
Status: Status of each device. The meaning of the indications is as follows.
Operating
status display
When VTR, Extended VTR, or
Sony disk 9-pin protocol is
used
When video disk
communications protocol is
used
XXXX Communications with the
device are being carried out
normally, but status information
is not received.
Not communicating, or
communicating but the device
type cannot be read.
Local The REMOTE/LOCAL switch
of the device is set to LOCAL.
Port is not open.
Tape Out No tape is loaded (VTR).
No file loaded. (Sony disk 9-pin
protocol or Extended VTR)
No file loaded.
Rec Recording. Recording.
Cue> Cueing up in the forward
direction.
—
Cue< Cueing up in the reverse
direction.
—
Eject Ejecting cassette. —
Stb Off Stopped in standby off mode. —
Stop Stopped in standby on mode. Stopped.
Play Playing. Playing.
172 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Current: Shows timecode for current device position.
Start TC: Shows timecode for start point set on device.
Stop TC: Shows timecode for stop point set on device.
Variable: Shows the variable speed set for each device.
Delay: Shows start delay time set on device.
Mode: Shows operation mode (Loop or Recue) set for the device (only when
the EVS XT server is operated with video disk communications protocol).
Cueup & Play
Using the device control block or Device menu, you can carry out Cueup &
Play settings (VTR or disk recorder start point, stop point, start delay time, and
so on), and save the settings in an effect register. By recalling this register, you
can carry out automatic control of the VTR, Extended VTR, or disk recorder.
Notes
• In an effect register set on the VTR/disk recorder timeline, Cueup & Play
settings are not possible. To add Cueup & Play settings to such a register,
first clear the VTR/disk recorder timeline setting before carrying out the
operation.
• When using a disk recorder with Cueup & Play, if you carry out the
following sequence of operations, the system may freeze on the frame of the
start point.
1. Press the [RUN] button to play to a point close to the end of a file.
FF Fast forwarding. —
Rewind Rewinding. —
Shtl> Playing in the forward direction
in shuttle mode.
—
Shtl< Playing in the reverse direction
in shuttle mode.
—
Var> Playing in the forward direction
in “variable” mode.
Playing in the forward direction
in “variable” mode.
Var< Playing in the reverse direction
in “variable” mode.
Playing in the reverse direction
in “variable” mode.
Jog> Playing in the forward direction
in jog mode.
Playing in the forward direction
in jog mode.
Jog< Playing in the reverse direction
in jog mode.
Playing in the reverse direction
in jog mode.
Still Playing still image. —
Operating
status display
When VTR, Extended VTR, or
Sony disk 9-pin protocol is
used
When video disk
communications protocol is
used
173Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
2. Stop playback.
3. Press the [RUN] button once more.
In such cases, first recall a different register, then carry out the following
sequence:
1. Recall the original register again.
2. Press the [REWIND] button.
3. Press the [RUN] button.
Making and saving settings relating to Cueup & Play
1
Press the [EFF] button in the numeric keypad control block, turning it on.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations, and
the [RCALL] button lights.
2
Press the region selection button for the region for which you want to make
the setting, turning it on.
You can select more than one button.
3
Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad
buttons.
To search for an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button.
The display shows the register number. A letter “e” or “E” after the number
indicates the register status, as follows:
e: This register is empty in the selected region.
E: This register is empty in all selectable regions.
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
This recalls the register you selected in step 3.
5
When using the device control block (trackball) or device control block
(joystick), press the [DEV] button in the device control block, turning it
on.
Note
Check that the [MENU] button is not lit. If it is lit, press to turn it off.
6
With the device selection buttons in the device control block, select the
VTR, Extended VTR, or disk recorder for which you want to make the
setting.
You can select more than one button.
174 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
The first button pressed lights green to indicate the reference region, and
the subsequent buttons light amber.
7
Set the start point.
• Using the [START TC] button:
Play the VTR, Extended VTR or disk recorder by control from the device
control block. Find the desired start point, and press the [START TC]
button at that position.
If using the [START TC] button, each time you press the button the start
point timecode is overwritten.
• Using the [SET START TC] button of the device control block (search
dial):
Press the [SET START TC] button in the device control block (search
dial). The display in the numeric keypad control block shows “START
TC”. Enter the desired timecode from the numeric keypad control block,
and press [ENTER].
For details of timecode entry, see “Setting the start point and stop point
with the [SET XX] buttons” (page 176).
• Setting with the Cueup & Play menu:
For details of settings in the Cueup & Play menu, see “Setting the start
point, stop point, and start delay time in a menu” (page 177).
8
Set the stop point or duration.
When two of the start point, stop point and duration are set, the remaining
one is automatically determined. For example, if you set the stop point in
the following procedure, you do not need to enter the value of the duration.
• Using the [STOP TC] button:
Play the VTR, Extended VTR or disk recorder by control from the device
control block. Find the desired stop point, and press the [STOP TC] button
at that point.
If using the [STOP TC] button, each time you press the button the stop
point timecode is overwritten.
• Using the [SET STOP TC] button of the device control block (search
dial):
Press the [SET STOP TC] button in the device control block (search dial).
The display in the numeric keypad control block shows “STOP TC.” Enter
the desired timecode from the numeric keypad control block, and press
[ENTER].
• Using the [SET DUR] button of the device control block (search dial):
175Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Press the [SET DUR] button in the device control block (search dial). The
display in the numeric keypad control block shows “DUR” and the current
setting. Enter the desired duration from the numeric keypad control block,
and press [ENTER].
For details of timecode entry, see “Setting the start point and stop point
with the [SET XX] buttons” (page 176).
• Setting with the Cueup & Play menu:
For details of settings in the Cueup & Play menu, see “Setting the start
point, stop point, and start delay time in a menu” (page 177).
9
To set a start delay time, press the [DELAY] button in the device control
block, and enter a value in the numeric keypad control block.
Alternatively, make the setting in the Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play
menu.
If no setting is required, continue to step 11.
For details of settings in the Cueup & Play menu, see “Setting the start
point, stop point, and start delay time in a menu” (page 177).
10
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on, in the numeric keypad control
block.
11
Enter the number of the register in which to save the settings.
When overwriting the settings in the register recalled in step 3, continue to
step 12 without changing the displayed register number.
12
Press the [ENTER] button.
This saves the settings in the register.
Automatically cueing up and playing VTR/Extended VTR/disk
recorder
By recalling a register in which you have saved setting data for Cueup & Play,
you can control the VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder automatically in the
same way as when automatically executing a keyframe effect.
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [EFF] button, turning it on.
The [RCALL] button in the numeric keypad control block lights.
2
With the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block,
select the region.
You can select more than one button.
176 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
3
Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad
buttons.
4
Press the [REWIND] button in the keyframe control block.
The VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder automatically advances to the
timecode value set as the start point.
While the VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder is operating, the [ALL
STOP] button in the device control block flashes amber, and when the start
point is reached lights green.
If the operating VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder is selected as the
reference region in the device control block, the [CUE] button also flashes
and lights in the same way as the [ALL STOP] button. Also, when the start
point is reached, the [STOP] button lights amber.
5
Press the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block.
The VTR/Extended VTR/disk recorder is now controlled according to the
keyframe data.
Setting the start point and stop point with the [SET XX] buttons
When you enter a timecode and make a setting with the [SET START TC],
[SET STOP TC], or [SET DUR] button in the device control block (search
dial), the timecode display changes as follows. With these buttons you can set
the start point and stop point timecodes, and the duration (the duration is not
displayed). When two of these values are set, the remaining one is
automatically determined.
Example 1
1
Press the [SET START TC] button, and enter “00000000” from the
numeric keypad control block.
2
Press the [SET STOP TC] button, and enter “200” from the numeric
keypad control block. This automatically sets DUR.
3
Press the [SET DUR] button, and enter “–100” from the numeric keypad
control block.
START TC
STOP TC
(DUR (not displayed)
00:00:00:00
--:--:--:--
)
START TC
STOP TC
(DUR
00:00:00:00
00:00:02:00
0:02:00)
177Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
START TC remains the same, and STOP TC changes.a)
Example 2
1
Press the [SET DUR] button, and enter “200” from the numeric keypad
control block.
2
Press the [SET STOP TC] button, and enter “01000000” from the numeric
keypad control block.
This automatically sets START TC.
3
Press the [SET STOP TC] button, and without entering anything from the
numeric keypad control block, press [Enter].
The STOP TC display, and the START TC display automatically
calculated in step 2 disappear, and the setting of the DUR does not change.
a) If after pressing the [SET XX] button you press the [ + / – ] button in the numeric keypad
control block, you can enter offsets from the existing setting values. Each time you press
this button, the sign of the offset cycles through the settings “ ”(absolute value) t “+” t
“–”... , and the sign appears in the numeric keypad control block display. If there is no
existing setting value, then it is only possible to enter an absolute value, and not an offset
value.
Setting the start point, stop point, and start delay time in a menu
In the Device menu, you can set the start point, stop point, and start delay time.
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF1 ‘Cueup & Play.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play menu appears.
The status area shows the device number, register number, status
information, current time, start point, stop point, and start delay time.
START TC
STOP TC
(DUR
00:00:00:00
00:00:01:00
0:01:00)
START TC
STOP TC
(DUR
--:--:--:--
--:--:--:--
0:02:00)
START TC
STOP TC
(DUR
00:59:58:00
01:00:00:00
0:02:00)
START TC
STOP TC
(DUR
--:--:--:--
--:--:--:--
0:02:00)
178 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
2
Using any of the following methods, select the device.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Carry out any of the following operations as required.
• To set the start point, press [Set] in the <Start TC> group.
• To set the stop point, press [Set] in the <Stop TC> group.
• To set the start delay time, press [Set] in the <Delay> group.
A timecode window appears.
4
Set the timecode value for the start point, stop point, or start delay time.
Note
You can enter a start delay time in the range that depends on the signal
format as follows:
00:00 to 59:nn,
where nn = (number of frames per second) – 1 frame.
5
Press [Enter].
The set start point, stop point, or start delay time is reflected in the status
area.
Clearing the start point, stop point, and start delay time settings
in a menu
In the Device menu, use the following procedure.
1
Press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF1 ‘Cueup & Play.’
2
Using any of the following methods, select the device for which you want
to clear the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
179Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
3
Carry out any of the following operations as required.
• To clear the start point, press [Clear] in the <Start TC> group.
• To clear the stop point, press [Clear] in the <Stop TC> group.
• To clear the start delay time, press [Clear] in the <Delay> group.
This clears the setting of the start point, stop point, or start delay time.
Selecting Loop or Recue as the playback mode
You can set the device operation mode to loop or recue.
Loop: Carry out playback from the start point of a file to the stop point, then
indefinitely repeat playback from the start point.
Recue: Carry out playback from the start point of a file to the stop point, then
return to the start point and stop.
Note
Loop and recue functions are only available when the EVS XT server is
operated with the video disk communications protocol.
In the Device menu, use the following procedure.
1
Press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF1 ‘Cueup & Play.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play menu appears.
The status area shows the device number, register number, status
information, current time, start point, stop point, start delay time, and
playback mode.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the device.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <Mode> group, press [Loop] or [Recue], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
180 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Timeline
Note
When executing a timeline using a disk recorder or Extended VTR, note the
following points.
• It is not possible to use loop and recue on the timeline.
• When carrying out keyframe settings, be sure to recall the file for operation
first.
• If the duration of the recorded video clip is less than the keyframe duration,
after playback to the end of the clip, the remainder of the keyframe duration
is filled with a still of the last frame of the clip (see figure below).
When executing the timeline using a disk recorder, also take note of the
following points.
• Set the keyframe duration to at least 30 frames.
• From pressing the [RUN] button to the time when the effect actually starts
execution may take around one second.
In order that pressing the [RUN] button after [REWIND] make the effect
start execution as soon as possible, set cueing up of the file for operation as
rewind operation 1). In the first keyframe 2) to be executed with [RUN], for
the cued-up file, do not set the start point, but set only the start command.
1) If the setting when the [REWIND] button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed,
then the first keyframe is executed, and otherwise the setting for the Rewind Action is carried
out.
2) If the setting when the [REWIND] button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed,
then the second keyframe is executed, and otherwise the first keyframe is executed.
• To execute an effect, be sure to carry out a Rewind.
For example, when the start command only is set for a keyframe, playback
KF1 KF2 KF3
Example: When the recorded clip for keyframe 1 has a duration of 15 frames
30 frames
15 frames
: Interval for which clip is recorded
: Interval in which still frame is displayed
In this example, when keyframe 1 is executed, the first 15 frames consist of clip
playback and the remaining 15 frames show the 15th frame as a still image.
30 frames
15 frames
181Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
starts from the current position, in the same way as with a VTR (no automatic
cue-up).
• During file playback, to play the next keyframe at variable speed, for the next
keyframe set variable speed only, and do not set the start point (see figure
below).
• When using a disk recorder with the VTR/disk recorder timeline, if you carry
out the following sequence of operations, the system may freeze on the frame
of the start point.
1. Press the [RUN] button to play to a point close to the end of a file.
2. Stop playback.
3. Press the [RUN] button once more.
In such cases, first recall a different register, then carry out the following
sequence:
1. Recall the original register again.
2. Press the [REWIND] button.
3. Press the [RUN] button.
• Some operating limitations apply when the video disk communications
protocol is used. These are explained with reference to the following figure,
which illustrates creation of a timeline that plays from the video of file A to
the video of file B.
– Operation with no problems:
– Black video or still image appears momentarily when play switches from
file A to file B:
KF1 action setting Operating status of file
A
KF2 action setting
Start Playing Start
KF1 KF2 a) KF3
Playback Playback at set variable speed
a) In keyframe 2, set variable speed only, and do not set the start point.
KF1 KF2
AB
182 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
– Partial operating limitation:
a) Failure to operate when variable speed is set to minus value. However, operates when the
file B action is set to Start, and then variable speed is set to minus after file B starts playing.
– Play does not switch from file A to file B:
If play continues to show video of file A without switching to file B, a Stop
action is required in file A in order to switch to file B.
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline editing
This section describes how to set an action at a keyframe point, and how to edit
the timeline.
For details of the operations for keyframe creation and editing, see “Creating
and Editing Keyframes” (page 207).
To set an action in the menu
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF2 ‘Timeline.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline menu appears.
The status area shows two lists. The upper list shows the device number,
register number, keyframe number, and action type (start point, stop point,
and variable speed) set for the keyframe.
The lower list is used for setting the action for the device selected above,
and shows the port name, current file, current time, status information,
KF1 action setting Operating status of file
A
KF2 action setting
Start Playing Cueup
Variable Speed set Playing at variable speed Cueup
Cueup Cueup Cueup
KF1 action setting Operating status of file
A
KF2 action setting
Start Playing Variable Speed set a)
Variable Speed set Playing at variable speed Variable Speed set a)
Cueup Cueup Variable Speed set a)
KF1 action setting Operating status of file
A
KF2 action setting
Variable Speed set Playing at variable speed Start
Cueup Cueup Start
183Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
start point, stop point, variable speed, and file name (for a disk recorder or
Extended VTR).
2
Using any of the following methods, select the device for which you want
to set the action.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
To set the name of a file when using an Extended VTR or disk recorder,
recall the file using the Device >DDR/VTR >File List menu.
For details of settings required to recall a file, see “Sharing disk recorder/
Extended VTR file lists” (page 373).
Note
There is a limit of eight disk recorder files that can set on a single timeline.
If you have not set the file name when using an Extended VTR, the file
recalled in the Extended VTR when the keyframe point is passed is the
subject of the action.
When not using an Extended VTR or disk recorder, or when the file name
has not been set for an Extended VTR, skip to step 4.
4
In the <Action> group, select the action.
Cueup: Output a command to cue up to the currently displayed start point.
Start: Output a Play command.
Note
When the stop point and variable speed are both set, the variable speed
setting takes priority.
Stop: Output a Stop command.
Note
Before executing the Stop command, if the timecode for the set stop
point has been reached, or on an Extended VTR or disk recorder if the
end of the file has been reached, then at that point the device stops.
5
To set a start point, in the <Start TC> group, press the [Set] button.
A timecode window appears.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
184 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
If you do not want to set the start point, skip to step 8.
Note
For a disk recorder on which the start point is not set, the file recalled in
the disk recorder when the keyframe point is passed is the subject of the
action.
6
Set the start point as a timecode value.
7
Press [Enter].
The new start point setting is reflected in the status area.
8
To set the stop point, in the <Stop TC> group press the [Set] button.
A timecode window appears.
If you do not want to set the stop point, skip to step 11.
9
Set the stop point as a timecode value.
10
Press [Enter].
The new stop point setting is reflected in the status area.
11
To set the variable speed, in the <Variable Speed> group, carry out either
of the following.
• Press [Fit].
Without setting a speed value, this automatically carries out playback
according to automatically calculated values for the duration and
keyframe duration to fit the set start point and stop point.
• Press the [Set] button, and adjust the parameter with the knob.
a) The setting range of the variable speed depends on the type of connected device.
The new variable speed setting is reflected in the status area.
Repeat steps 2 to 11 as required for other devices.
To carry out start point and stop point settings and cueing up
operations in the device control block
With the following buttons in the device control block, you can set the start
point or stop point of a keyframe point on the timeline, or carry out a cueing up
operation.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
2 Variable Variable speed –100 to +200 a)
185Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Note
When using the device control block (trackball or joystick), check that the
[MENU] button in the block is lit amber. If it is not lit, press it, turning it on.
When using the device control block (search dial), check that the [TIMELINE]
is lit amber. If it is not lit, press it, turning it on.
[START TC] button: Set the start point of the keyframe point to the current
time.
[STOP TC] button: Set the stop point of the keyframe point to the current
time.
[SET START TC] button (of the device control block (search dial)):
Enable to input the timecode of the start point of the keyframe point with
the numeric keypad control block.
[SET STOP TC] button (of the device control block (search dial)): Enable
to input the timecode of the stop point of the keyframe point with the
numeric keypad control block.
[SET DUR] button (of the device control block (search dial)): Enable to
input the duration between the start point and stop point of a keyframe
point with the numeric keypad control block.
[CUE] button: Cue up to the start point set for the keyframe point.
To display or check the settings, use the Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline menu.
To test an action command output
To test an action command output, select the desired device from the upper list
in the status area, and press [Test Fire].
An action command is output from the DCU 9-pin serial port, according to the
settings in the list.
To clear the start point, stop point, and variable speed settings
1
In the upper list in the status area, select the device for which you want to
clear the settings.
2
Carry out any of the following operations as required.
• To clear the start point setting, press [Clear] in the <Start TC> group.
• To clear the stop point setting, press [Clear] in the <Stop TC> group.
• To clear the variable speed setting, press [Clear] in the <Variable
Speed> group.
To set the action for a rewind operation
On the VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline, when the [REWIND]
button in the keyframe control block is pressed the action set for the first
keyframe is not executed; when the [RUN] button is pressed, then the first
keyframe action is executed.
186 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
To execute an action when the [REWIND] button is pressed, it is necessary to
set this action (Rewind Action). To carry out this setting, in the Device >DDR/
VTR >Timeline menu, press [Rewind Action] to recall the Rewind Action
menu. In this setting screen, use the same setting method as in the screen for
setting an action on the VTR/disk recorder timeline.
Alternatively, you can select the reverse arrangement, whereby when the
[REWIND] button is pressed, this executes the action set for the first keyframe,
and when the [RUN] button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed.
In this case, the Rewind Action setting is still valid.
For details of the setting, see “Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is
executed” (page 375).
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Operations
To carry out disk recorder/Extended VTR file operations, use the Device menu.
Refreshing (recalling) the disk recorder/Extended VTR file list
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF3 ‘File List.’
The Device >DDR/VTR > File List menu appears.
In the status area, two lists appear.
The upper list shows the selected device name, and the currently selected
file name (register number), and set file name.
The lower list shows a list of files for the selected device (the device
appearing in the upper list). In this list is shown the file name (register
number) set when the material was recorded, the length of the file data
(timecode value), and the file update information.
Notes
• File update information is not shown when using the video disk
communications protocol.
• When using an Extended VTR, the length of file data and file update
information are not shown, and the register number is shown in place of
the file name.
2
Select the device for which you want to recall the file list, using the knob.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
187Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
3
Press the [File List Update] button.
This starts the process of recalling the file list, and a message box appears.
When the file list recall is completed, the message box disappears.
To cancel recalling the file list
During the recall, press the [Cancel] button in the message box.
File list sharing
You can share the recalled file list across serial ports connected to the same
disk recorder.
For details of file list sharing settings, see “Sharing disk recorder/Extended
VTR file lists” (page 373).
Sorting files in the list
You can sort the files in the list by name, number, or update date.
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF3 ‘File List.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >File List menu appears.
2
Select the device for which you want to recall the file list, using the knob.
3
In the <Sort> group, press one of [File Name], [File No], and [Update].
File Name: Sort in alphabetical order of file name.
File No: Sort in ascending file number order.
Update: Sort in file update date order, newest first.
Notes
• Files cannot be sorted by the file update date and time when using the
video disk communications protocol.
• When using an Extended VTR, it is not possible to sort files.
This sorts the files in the selected order.
Recalling a file
To recall a file from the file list, use the following procedure.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
188 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Note
Files cannot be recalled when the disk recorder is set to Recorder.
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF3 ‘File List.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >File List menu appears.
2
Select the device from which you want to recall a file, using the knob.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the file you want to recall.
• Press directly on the lower list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) For disk recorders. The range of setting values depends on the total number of files.
b) For Extended VTRs. The range of setting values depends on the total number of files.
4
Press [Load].
This recalls the selected file, and the file name appears at the top of the
status area.
Creating new files
A file name must be specified to record to a new file on a disk recorder.
Notes
• New files cannot be created when the disk recorder is set to Player or
Recorder/Player.
• In the case of Extended VTRs, new files cannot be created.
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF3 ‘File List.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >File List menu appears.
2
Press [New File].
The keyboard window appears.
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
1 Dev Device number 1 to 12
Knob Parameter Setting Setting values
2 No File selection 1 to 5000 a)
0 to 99 b)
189Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
3
Enter a file name and press [Enter].
When using the Sony disk recorder 9-pin protocol: Up to 23 characters.
When using the video disk communications protocol: Up to 8
characters (in Fixed 8 Character mode) or 23 characters (in Variable
Length mode)
For details of how to select the file name character count mode in the video
disk communications protocol, see “To make detailed settings for a disk
recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol)” (page 446).
The name appears as the current file name at the top of the status area.
When the loaded file is not a target for recording
When a file that is not a target for recording is loaded in the disk recorder,
proceed as follows.
1
In the Device menu, press VF3 ‘DDR/VTR’ and HF3 ‘File List.’
The Device >DDR/VTR >File List menu appears.
2
Press [Unload].
The current file name at the top of the status area is cleared.
190 Control of VTRs, Extended VTRs, and Disk Recorders
Chapter 12 External Devices
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Sequence of Keyframe Operations ..........................................................193
Displaying the Timeline Menu ................................................................194
Interpreting the Timeline Menu ........................................................194
Settings in the Timeline Menu ..........................................................196
Recalling a Register ..................................................................................198
Specifying the Region and Edit Points ....................................................203
Selecting the Region in Which Editing Applies ................................203
Setting the Edit Points .......................................................................205
Creating and Editing Keyframes ............................................................207
Creation .............................................................................................207
Insertion .............................................................................................208
Modification ......................................................................................208
Deletion .............................................................................................212
Movement ..........................................................................................213
Copying .............................................................................................214
Pause ..................................................................................................214
Keyframe Loop (Repeated Execution of a Specified Range) ...........215
Undoing an Edit Operation ................................................................218
Duration Mode Setting ......................................................................218
Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME ..................219
Time Settings .............................................................................................220
Setting the Keyframe Duration ..........................................................220
Setting the Effect Duration ................................................................221
Setting the Delay ...............................................................................222
Path Setting ...............................................................................................223
Basic Procedure for Path Settings .....................................................223
Executing Effects ......................................................................................227
Executing Effects in the Keyframe Control Block ............................227
Setting the Run Mode ........................................................................228
Executing an Effect in the Flexi Pad Control Block .........................229
Saving Effects ............................................................................................231
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline .................................................233
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric
Keypad Control Block ...........................................................233
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu ...................235
Register Operations in the Menus ...........................................................238
Effect Attribute Settings ....................................................................238
Effect Status Display .........................................................................239
Effect Register Editing ......................................................................239
Displaying a List of Effect Registers for Editing ..............................244
193Sequence of Keyframe Operations
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Sequence of Keyframe Operations
The following table shows the principal operations involved in the sequence
from creating keyframes to executing an effect. For details of each operation,
see the page number in parenthesis.
For an overview, see “Keyframes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
v
v
v
v
v
v
Recalling a register (see page 198)
To create a new effect, recall an empty register; to edit an effect, open the
register containing it.
Specifying the region and edit points (see page 203)
Select the region in which editing applies, and set the edit points.
Creating and editing keyframes (see page 207)
Create the keyframes that make up the effect, using operations to create,
insert, modify, or delete keyframes.
Time settings (see page 220)
Set the overall duration of the effect or the duration of each keyframe.
Path setting (see page 223)
Set the type of interpolation used between successive keyframes.
Executing effects (see page 227)
This provides a smooth effect, based on the time and path settings.
Saving effects (see page 231)
Save a completed effect in a register.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
194 Displaying the Timeline Menu
Displaying the Timeline Menu
By displaying the Timeline menu, you can view keyframe effects on the
timeline for each region, and the associated information.
Recalling the Timeline menu
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button
[KEY FRAME].
2
Select HF1 ‘Time Line.’
The Time Line menu appears.
Interpreting the Timeline Menu
The following are the main parts of the menu display.
Key Frame >Timeline menu
aKeyframe status
1 Keyframe
status
2 Region name and
register number
3 Delay (numerical display)
5 Display start
time
7 Delay (display
on timeline)
8 Pause point
6 Display
end time
0 Effect
duration
9 Total
timeline
length
qa Knob
adjustment
display
4 Keyframe
number /
total
195Displaying the Timeline Menu
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
This shows the region name, register number, register name, number of
remaining keyframes, current position and timecode with regard to the
reference region.
bRegion name and register number
This shows the region name and the number of the register recalled in this
region.
The display color indicates the region selection as follows.
Blue: reference region
White: selected region
Gray: not selected region
cDelay (numerical display)
This shows the delay between carrying out an effect operation, and the start of
the actual effect.
dKeyframe number / total
This shows the number of the keyframe at the cursor position, and the total
number of keyframes in the register.
eDisplay start time
This shows the timecode value for the timeline display start point.
fDisplay end time
This shows the timecode value for the timeline display end point.
gDelay (display on timeline)
When a delay is set, the interval is shown by a blue line.
hPause point
A “P” appears where a pause is set.
iTotal timeline length
The total time of delays and effect duration appears in white.
jEffect duration
The total duration of the effect appears in orange.
kKnob adjustment display
Turning the corresponding knob scrolls the timeline display, allowing you to
see the timeline for regions that were previously hidden.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
196 Displaying the Timeline Menu
Settings in the Timeline Menu
Selecting the region to be displayed
The Timeline menu shows a timeline for each region, but you can also restrict
the regions to be shown.
Recalling the Timeline Assign menu
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button
[KEY FRAME].
2
Select HF5 ‘Timeline Assign.’
The Key Frame>Timeline Assign menu appears.
The right of the status area shows a list of the regions (including the global
region) assigned to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad
control block. The left shows the regions in order of precedence, and
whether each region is shown on the Timeline menu.
Deciding which regions appear on the timeline
In the Timeline Assign menu, press [Active Region], toggling it on or off.
On: The regions for which the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad
control block are lit are shown in the precedence order (see next item) set
in this menu, followed by the regions for which the buttons are off, in the
same order.
Off: The regions appear according to the precedence order (see next item) and
display on/off setting (see page 197) set in this menu.
Deciding the precedence order for timeline display
To change the precedence order, insert and delete regions in the list, in the
desired order.
1
In the Timeline Assign menu, use any of the following methods to select
the desired precedence order position and the region you want to insert.
• Press directly on the precedence order position in the list on the left and
the region you want to insert in the list on the right.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs to make the setting.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Priority Precedence order of insertion
position
1 to upwards
197Displaying the Timeline Menu
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
2
In the <Priority> group, press [Insert].
This inserts the selected region before the specified precedence order.
If the inserted region is already present in a different precedence order, it
is deleted from that precedence order.
3
To delete a region from a precedence order, use any of the following
methods to select the region.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
To carry out the deletion, press [Delete] in the <Priority> group.
This deletes the selected region from the precedence order list.
Setting the display of regions in the Timeline menu on or off
When [Active Region] is off, to select which regions are displayed in the
Timeline menu, use the following procedure.
1
In the Timeline Assign menu, use any of the following methods to select
the region.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
For no display, press [Display], turning it off. To display, press once more,
turning it on.
When [Active Region] is off, regions with the “Display Off” setting are not
displayed in the Timeline menu.
To return to the default precedence order and timeline menu
display settings
Press [Default] in the <Priority> group.
2 Region Region to be inserted 1 to upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Priority Precedence order assigned to the
region to be deleted
1 to upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Priority Region selection 1 to upwards
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
198 Recalling a Register
Recalling a Register
Use the numeric keypad control block to recall a register. For each region there
are 99 registers dedicated to keyframes, numbered from 1 to 99.
When creating an effect as a user programmable DME, use a 3-digit register
number which is commonly used for all DME regions (channels).
For a description of the concept of regions and registers, see “Regions and
Registers” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
The master timeline can also be recalled from the standard-type Flexi Pad
control block.
Numeric keypad control block
Recalling a register
1
Press the [EFF] button, turning it on.
This allocates the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations,
and the [RCALL] button lights.
EFF
M/E
1
USER
1
DME
1
DME
5
SNAP
SHOT
M/E
2
USER
2
DME
2
DME
6
SHOT
BOX
M/E
3
USER
3
DME
3
DME
7
MCRO
P/P
USER
4
DME
4
DME
8
TRANS
RATE
RTR
DEV
1
DEV
2
UNDO
TC
STORE
STATS
MASTR ALL P-BUS GP1
STORE
RCALL
789
456
123
0
+/-
EFF
TRIM
CLR
AUTO
DISS
TRANS
ENBL
GPI
ENTER
Display
Region selection buttons RCALL button
UNDO button
EFF button
199Recalling a Register
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
2
Press the button corresponding to the region you want to select, turning it
on.
You can also press more than one button.
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], [P/P]: These select the corresponding M/E-1,
M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST regions.
[USER 1] to [USER 8]: These select the User regions.
[DME 1] to [DME 8]: These select the DME channels.
[DEV 1] to [DEV 12]: These select the regions Device 1 to Device 12,
respectively.
[P-BUS]: This selects P-Bus.
[GPI]: This selects GPI.
[MCRO]: This selects Macro.
[ALL]: This selects all valid regions.
[MASTR]: This selects the master timeline (see “Creating and Saving a
Master Timeline” (page 233)).
Note
The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the
region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. (See
“Assigning a region to a region selection button in the numeric keypad
control block” (page 328).)
It is not possible to select [MASTR] and other regions simultaneously. If
selected simultaneously, the master timeline takes precedence.
The first button pressed lights green as the reference region, and any
subsequently pressed buttons light amber.
Pressing one of the amber-lit buttons, while holding down [EFF], turns the
button green to indicate its corresponding region as the new reference
region.
For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region, see
“Regions and Registers” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
The display shows the name of the reference region, and the number of the
last register recalled for this region.
3
Enter the number of the register you want to recall, using the numeric
keypad.
To find an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button. To search for an empty register common to all currently
selectable regions, press the [.] button again.
To search for an empty register in the 100 range, press [1], [0], [0], [.]
(period) in this order. Similarly, to search for an empty register in the 200
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
200 Recalling a Register
range, press [2], [0], [0], [.] (period), and to search for an empty register in
the 300 range, press [3], [0], [0], [.] (period).
The register number appears in the display. If the number is followed by a
letter ‘e’ or ‘E,’ this indicates the following.
e: The selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2.
E: The selected register is empty for all currently selectable regions.
4
To apply a temporary attribute (effect dissolve), press the [+/–/EFF DISS]
button.
Note
It is not possible to apply temporary attributes to the master timeline.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
This recalls the specified register.
When the master timeline is recalled, the region selection buttons light
according to the saved region information.
To undo the recall of a register
Immediately after recalling the register, press the [UNDO] button to undo the
operation.
Note
After recalling the master timeline, you cannot undo the recall.
Recalling the master timeline in the Flexi Pad control block
Whichever block you recall the master timeline from, the region set when it
was saved is recalled.
201Recalling a Register
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [EFF] button.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to master timeline operation.
The previously selected bank number and last recalled register number
appear in the numeric display.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the bank to be recalled.
To select bank 0: press the [BANK 0] button.
To select bank 1: press the [BANK 1] button.
To select any of banks 0 to 9: press the [BANK SEL] button; the memory
recall section display changes as shown in the following figure; press
one of 0 to 9.
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U1 U2
1 2 3 4
8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
AUTO
TRAN
EFF
DISS
EFF button Numeric display
Memory recall section
Bank selection buttons
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
202 Recalling a Register
The selected bank number appears in the numeric display.
The memory recall section buttons show the register names corresponding
to the selected bank, and the register status.
Note that by a setting in the Setup menu, you can select either register
names or register numbers to be displayed.
Lit orange: register holding the master timeline
Lit yellow: last recalled register
Off: empty register
3
Press the button in the memory recall section which shows the desired
register name.
The button you pressed lights yellow, and the master timeline is recalled.
The numeric display shows the bank number, followed by the selected
register number.
789
456
123
0RE
WIND RUN
203Specifying the Region and Edit Points
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Specifying the Region and Edit Points
Selecting the Region in Which Editing Applies
Selecting by numeric keypad
Select the region in which the editing is applied by the effect consisting of
keyframes, using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control
block. (See step 2 (page 199) in “Recalling a register.”)
Selecting by menus
This is convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the numeric
keypad control block or changing the reference region.
Note
The function of region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block
is linked to the menu. If you carry out region selection by pressing a region
selection button, then all the regions assigned to that button are selected.
1
In the Key Frame menu, press HF7 ‘Region Select.’
The Key Frame >Region Select menu appears.
On the left of the status area, region selection buttons appear.
Depending on the region selection state, the following indications appear.
Green text: the assigned regions include the reference region.
Orange text: one of the assigned regions is selected.
White text: no assigned region is selected.
When any one or more of the regions assigned to the region selection
buttons is not selected, a red bar appears within the button indication. The
[STORE] and [RCALL] buttons in the numeric keypad control block flash
amber.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
204 Specifying the Region and Edit Points
2
Press a button indication on the left of the status area, to select the button
you want to assign.
The regions currently assigned to the button you pressed appear on the
right side of the status area.
3
In the <Region Select> group, press the button for the region you want to
select, turning it on.
4
In the <Ref Region Select> group, press the button indication you want to
make the reference region.
The button you pressed lights green.
205Specifying the Region and Edit Points
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Setting the Edit Points
Keyframe control block
To set the edit points, use any of the following operations in the keyframe
control block.
• To move the edit point to the keyframe immediately after the current time
(the position at which the effect is currently stopped), press the [NEXT KF]
button.
• To move the edit point to the keyframe immediately before the current time,
press the [PREV KF] button.
• To move the edit point to a keyframe specified by number, press the [GO TO
KF] button, then enter the keyframe number with the numeric keypad in the
numeric keypad control block, and press the [ENTER] button to confirm.
• To move the edit point to a specified timecode, press the [GO TO TC] button,
then enter the timecode value with the numeric keypad in the numeric
keypad control block, and press the [ENTER] button to confirm.
To enter a difference value
When moving to a point specified with the [GO TO KF] button or [GO TO TC]
button, you can also enter the difference from the current keyframe number or
timecode value.
STOP
NEXT
KF
NORM REV
NORM
/REV
EFF
LOOP
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
DELAY
EFF
DUR
COPY PASTE
DEL
SHIFT INS PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MOD UNDO
CONST
DUR
AUTO
INS
TURN
OVER
KF
LOOP
GO TO
TC
PAUSE
GO TO
KF
ALL FROM
TO
FF
RE
WIND
RUN
EDIT ENBL button
Buttons used for editing
CONST DUR button
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
206 Specifying the Region and Edit Points
Press the numeric keypad [+/–] button, and enter the difference, then press the
[TRIM] button. Each time you press the [+/–] button, it toggles between plus
(+) and minus (–).
207Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Creating and Editing Keyframes
For details of keyframe editing, see “Effect Editing” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Creation
Creating new keyframes
To create new keyframes, after recalling an empty register, use the following
procedure to create and insert each new keyframe. Use the keyframe control
block for carrying out the operation.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
This enables effect editing in the keyframe control block.
2
Create the image you want to be the first keyframe.
3
Press the [INS] button.
This takes the current image as the first keyframe.
You can make a setting in the Setup menu so that when you recall an empty
register, the system state at that point is automatically captured as the first
keyframe.
4
Create the image you want to be the next keyframe.
5
Press the [INS] button.
This inserts the current image as the second keyframe after the first
keyframe.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create the required number of keyframes.
To insert a new keyframe before an existing keyframe
Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [INS] button, to insert a new
keyframe before the current keyframe.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
208 Creating and Editing Keyframes
Insertion
Inserting keyframes
To insert a keyframe in an existing effect, use the following procedure in the
keyframe control block.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at the desired edit point.
3
Create the image for the keyframe you want to insert.
4
Press the [INS] button.
When the edit point is on a keyframe, to insert the new keyframe before
the existing keyframe, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [INS]
button.
This inserts the current image as the new keyframe.
Inserting a keyframe may change the total duration of the effect. (See
“Time Settings” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).)
Modification
Modifying keyframes
Use the following procedure in the keyframe control block.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at the desired edit point.
When the edit point is on a keyframe, this is what you modify. If the edit
point is between two keyframes, the previous keyframe is what you
modify.
Note
In constant duration mode (see “Effect Editing” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1))
modification is only possible when the edit point is on a keyframe.
3
Using image transformations or adding special effects, modify the
keyframe.
209Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
4
Press the [MOD] button.
This modifies the keyframe.
Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously
You can modify a number of keyframes simultaneously. There are three
different cases for this operation.
• Modifying from the edit point to a particular keyframe
• Modifying all keyframes in the effect
• Modifying the keyframes in a specified range
The different procedures for these cases are now described.
To modify from the edit point to a particular keyframe
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at the first keyframe of the range to be modified.
3
Carry out the necessary modifications.
4
Press the [FROM TO] button, turning it on.
The display in the numeric keypad control block shows the current
keyframe number, followed by “TO.”
5
Enter the number of the last keyframe to be modified from the numeric
keypad control block and press the [ENTER] button to confirm.
6
Press the [MOD] button. Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [MOD] button.
For the difference in the result, see “Differences in the changes when a
number of keyframes are modified” (page 210).
This makes the modification simultaneously to all keyframes from the edit
point to the specified keyframe.
To modify all keyframes in the effect
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Carry out the necessary modifications on any keyframe.
3
Press the [ALL] button, turning it on.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
210 Creating and Editing Keyframes
4
Press the [MOD] button. Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [MOD] button.
For the difference in the result, see “Differences in the changes when a
number of keyframes are modified” (page 210).
This makes the modification simultaneously to all keyframes in the effect.
To modify the keyframes in a specified range
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at any keyframe within the range to be modified.
3
Carry out the necessary modifications.
4
Press the [FROM TO] button, turning it on.
The display in the numeric keypad control block shows the current
keyframe number, followed by “TO.”
5
Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block, carry out
the following operations.
• To set the first keyframe in the range to be modified, press the [CLR]
button, then enter the keyframe number, and press the [ENTER] button
to confirm.
• To set the last keyframe in the range to be modified, enter the keyframe
number from the numeric keypad, and press the [ENTER] button to
confirm.
6
Press the [MOD] button. Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [MOD] button.
For the difference in the result, see “Differences in the changes when a
number of keyframes are modified” (page 210).
This makes the modification simultaneously to all keyframes in the
specified keyframe range.
Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are
modified
When you select a number of keyframes to modify, and press the [MOD]
button alone or in combination with the [SHIFT] button, the result of the
operation differs as shown below.
211Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Modifying the keyframes by pressing the [MOD] button alone
The modified parameter values are taken as absolute values, and applied to all
of the selected keyframes.
Modifying the keyframes by holding down the [SHIFT] button and
pressing the [MOD] button
The modified parameter values are taken as relative values, which modify all
of the selected keyframes.
: Background A
: Background B
Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution
Modify keyframe 2.
(Changing the position of background B in
the horizontal direction)
Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify
simultaneously.
Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution
Result:
The horizontal position of background B in keyframes 1 and 3 is now the same as
that in keyframe 2.
In all keyframes, the vertical position remains unchanged as the parameter is not
changed.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
212 Creating and Editing Keyframes
Deletion
Deleting keyframes
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at the desired edit point.
When the edit point is on a keyframe, this is what you delete. If the edit
point is between two keyframes, the previous keyframe is what you delete.
: Background A
: Background B
Modify keyframe 2.
(Changing the position of background B in
the horizontal direction)
Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify
simultaneously.
Result:
Background B of keyframes 1 and 3 is moved in the horizontal direction by the same
amount as in keyframe 2.
Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution
Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution
213Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
3
To delete a number of keyframes in a single operation, press the [FROM
TO] button or the [ALL] button, turning it on.
For how to specify a range of keyframes, see “Modifying more than one
keyframe simultaneously” (page 209).
4
Press the [DEL] button.
This deletes the keyframe.
Deleting a keyframe reduces the total duration of the effect.
In constant duration mode (see page 218), however, the duration does not
change.
For details of changes in the effect duration caused by deleting keyframes,
see “Keyframes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Movement
Moving keyframes
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at the edit point you want to move.
3
To move a number of keyframes in a single operation, press the [FROM
TO] button, turning it on, to specify the keyframes.
For how to specify a range of keyframes, see “Modifying more than one
keyframe simultaneously” (page 209).
4
Press the [DEL] button.
This deletes the keyframe, and saves it in the paste buffer.
5
Move the edit point to the position to which you want to move the
keyframe.
6
Press the [PASTE] button.
This inserts the keyframe you have moved after the current keyframe. In
constant duration mode, the moved keyframe overwrites the edit point.
To insert the moved keyframe before a keyframe
Hold down the [SHIFT] button, and press the [PASTE] button to insert the
moved keyframe before the current keyframe.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
214 Creating and Editing Keyframes
Copying
Copying keyframes
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect at the edit point you want to copy.
3
To copy a number of keyframes in a single operation, press the [FROM
TO] button or the [ALL] button, turning it on.
For how to specify a range of keyframes, see “Modifying more than one
keyframe simultaneously” (page 209).
4
Press the [COPY] button.
This copies the specified keyframe, and saves it to the paste buffer.
5
Move the edit point to the position where you want to insert the copied
keyframe.
6
Press the [PASTE] button.
This inserts the keyframe you have copied after the current keyframe. In
constant duration mode, the copied keyframe overwrites the edit point.
To insert the copied keyframe before a keyframe
Hold down the [SHIFT] button, and press the [PASTE] button to insert the
copied keyframe before the current keyframe.
Pause
To apply a pause to a keyframe, use the following procedure.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect on the keyframe to which you want to apply a pause.
3
Press the [PAUSE] button.
This applies a pause to the specified keyframe.
215Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Keyframe Loop (Repeated Execution of a Specified
Range)
By setting the range of the loop within the effect, and the number of loop
executions, you can execute the loop range repeatedly.
Note
It is only possible to set one keyframe loop for each region.
Creating a new keyframe loop
To specify the loop range and loop count, carry out the following procedure.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Stop the effect on the keyframe you want to make the first of the loop range
(start point). (Here, by way of example, keyframe 2 is taken as the start
point.)
3
Press the [KF LOOP] button in the keyframe control block, turning it on.
The numeric keypad control block display shows the start point keyframe
number as follows.
The example shown means “from (keyframe) 2 to...,” where the end
keyframe is to follow.
4
With the numeric keypad buttons of the numeric keypad control block,
enter the number of the last keyframe in the loop range (end point). (Here,
by way of example, keyframe 5 is the end point.)
5
Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the entry.
The display changes as follows, prompting you to enter the loop count.
6
Enter the loop count. (Here, by way of example, “15” is entered.)
• To specify a loop count, enter a number in the range 1 to 99.
• To specify an endless loop, enter “0” (zero).
FM 2 TO
FM 2 TO 5
COUNT
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
216 Creating and Editing Keyframes
7
Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the entry.
The start point, end point, and loop count that you have set are reflected in
the Timeline menu.
If you enter the loop count as “0” (endless loop), the count is shown as
“inf” (infinity).
The numeric keypad control block display changes back to the state shown
in step 4.
Changing the keyframe loop settings
To change the loop range or count for the currently recalled effect, carry out
the following procedure.
1
When the [KF LOOP] button in the keyframe control block is lit amber,
press it, turning it green.
The numeric keypad control block display shows the current loop range.
If, for example, the start point is keyframe 2 and the end point is keyframe
5, this appears as follows.
2
To change the loop range, press the [CLEAR] button in the numeric
keypad control block.
To change the loop count only, press the [ENTER] button, then skip to step
6.
When you press the [CLEAR] button, this appears as follows.
3
Enter the keyframe number for the new start point, and press the [ENTER]
button.
4
Enter the keyframe number for the new end point, and press the [ENTER]
button.
The display shows the currently set loop count.
5
To change the setting, press the [CLEAR] button.
This clears the set loop count.
COUNT 15
FM 2 TO 5
FM TO
COUNT
217Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
6
Enter the new loop count, and press the [ENTER] button.
Executing a keyframe loop
In the keyframe control block, press the [RUN] button.
The set loop range is executed repeatedly for the set loop count number of
times.
The screen shows the total loop count and the number of loops remaining. (If
the loop count is infinite (inf), the remaining number is not shown.)
If the [REV] button is lit, the loop is played in the reverse order.
Canceling keyframe loop execution
Press the [REWIND] button in the keyframe control block.
Changes to the loop range caused by keyframe insertion/
deletion
When a keyframe is inserted or deleted within the loop range, the loop range
also changes. The following are examples.
Example 1: If keyframe 3 is deleted, the loop end point moves forward as
follows.
Example 2: If keyframe 3 is added, the end point keyframe number moves
back.
123456 7
123456 7
Before deletion
After deletion
Deletion
: Loop range
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
218 Creating and Editing Keyframes
Example 3: If the keyframe at the end of the loop range (the end point) is
deleted, the keyframe loop settings are all cleared, as follows, and the [KF
LOOP] button goes off. The same occurs if the first keyframe in the loop
range (the start point) is deleted.
Undoing an Edit Operation
To undo a keyframe insert, modify, delete, or paste operation immediately after
execution, press the [UNDO] button.
Duration Mode Setting
There are two keyframe duration modes: variable duration mode, and constant
duration mode in which the effect duration is fixed. (See “Duration modes” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).)
• To select variable duration mode, turn the [CONST DUR] button off.
• To select constant duration mode, press the [CONST DUR] button, turning
it on.
1234567
1234567
Before addition
After addition
Addition
: Loop range
1234567
1234567
Before deletion
After deletion
Deletion
: Loop range
219Creating and Editing Keyframes
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME
To create an effect for user programmable DME, it is necessary to set the
transition mode.
Setting the transition mode
1
In the Key Frame menu, select HF4 ‘DME User PGM.’
The DME User PGM menu appears.
2
In the <Transition Mode> group, select the transition mode according to
the DME wipe action.
Single: select single transition mode.
Flip/Tumble: select the flip/tumble transition mode.
Dual: select dual transition mode.
P in P: select picture-in-picture mode.
Compress: select compress mode.
Frame I/O: select frame in-out transition mode.
Frame I/O H: select frame in-out transition mode in the horizontal
direction.
Frame I/O V: select frame in-out transition mode in the vertical direction.
For details of creating an effect for user programmable DME, see
“Creating User Programmable DME Patterns” in Chapter 6 (Volume 1).
Note
Which DME channel is selected as the reference region (lit green) in the
numeric keypad control block is reflected in the <Transition Mode> group
display.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
220 Time Settings
Time Settings
You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the
keyframe durations or the effect duration.
For details of keyframe duration and effect duration, see “Time Settings” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Setting the Keyframe Duration
Keyframe control block
Setting the keyframe duration
You can set the value of the keyframe duration independently for each
keyframe, by the following method.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
STOP
NEXT
KF
NORM REV
NORM
/REV
EFF
LOOP
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
DELAY
EFF
DUR
COPY PASTE
DEL
SHIFT INS PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MOD UNDO
CONST
DUR
AUTO
INS
TURN
OVER
KF
LOOP
GO TO
TC
PAUSE
GO TO
KF
ALL FROM
TO
FF
RE
WIND
RUN
EFF DUR button
KF DUR button
EDIT ENBL button
DELAY button
221Time Settings
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
2
Stop the effect on the keyframe for which you want to set the duration.
The time from this keyframe to the following keyframe is what you set.
3
Press the [KF DUR] button, turning it on.
The display in the numeric keypad control block shows “KF DUR”
followed by the duration of the current keyframe (seconds:frames).
4
Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block, enter the
timecode value for the keyframe duration, as a maximum of four digits.
For example, to set 9 seconds and 20 frames, enter 920. You can also use
the [TRIM] button to enter a difference value. (See “To enter a difference
value” (page 205).)
5
Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the entry.
This changes the keyframe duration to the new setting.
Note
In addition to the above operation, the keyframe duration may also be
automatically changed as a result of changing the effect duration. (See the
next section.)
Setting the Effect Duration
To set the effect duration, use the following procedure.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Press the [EFF DUR] button, turning it on.
The display in the numeric keypad control block shows “DUR” followed
by the effect duration (minutes:seconds:frames).
3
Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block, enter the
timecode value for the effect duration, as a maximum of six digits.
For example, to set 3 minutes 7 seconds and 15 frames, enter 30715. You
can also use the [TRIM] button to enter a difference value. (See “To enter
a difference value” (page 205).)
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
This changes the effect duration to the new setting.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
222 Time Settings
Note
In addition to the above operation, the effect duration may also be changed
as a result of inserting or deleting keyframes. See “Time Settings” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Setting the Delay
To set the delay (see “Time Settings” in chapter 1 (Volume 1)), use the
following procedure.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Press the [DELAY] button, turning it on.
The display in the numeric keypad control block shows “DELAY”
followed by the delay time (seconds:frames).
3
Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block, enter the
timecode value for the delay, as a maximum of four digits.
You can also use the [TRIM] button to enter a difference value. (See “To
enter a difference value” (page 205).)
4
Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the entry.
This changes the delay setting.
223Path Setting
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Path Setting
The term “path” refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out
from one keyframe to the next.
For details of the notion of path, see “Paths” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Set keyframe paths in the Key Frame >Path menu.
To access the Key Frame>Path menu
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [KEY FRAME],
then select HF3 ‘Path.’
Basic Procedure for Path Settings
Selecting the category
From the 16 buttons in the function button area, select the category for which
you want to make the setting.
First row: path settings for the switcher M/E1 to M/E3, and PGM/PST banks
Second and third rows: path settings for User1 to User8
Fourth row: path settings for DME local channel and global channel 3D
transforms and effects
Making switcher path settings
This section describes settings for M/E-1 Key1 as an example.
The area for the VF buttons shows the names of items.
A B sign by a button indicates that pressing it opens a more detailed setting
menu.
The status area shows the settings for Xpt, Hue, and Curve. However,
depending on the item, these parameters may or may not be present.
Note
Whenever you set a path or modify its setting, be sure to press the [MOD]
button in the keyframe control block. The setting does not become effective
unless the [MOD] button is pressed.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
224 Path Setting
Changing the path type for Curve
1
In the Path menu, press [M/E-1].
The M/E-1 menu appears.
2
Press the Curve path type indication for the Key1 item that you want to
change.
A path selection window appears.
3
Press the indication for the desired path type, to select it.
OFF: Executing the effect causes no change.
Step: There is no interpolation between keyframes, so that the
effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed.
Linear: Linear interpolation between keyframes, resulting in
constant speed movement.
S-Curve: The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and
after a keyframe, so that the rate of change is maximum midway
between two keyframes.
Spline: The effect follows a smooth curved path from each
keyframe to the next.
The status area reflects the selected path type.
225Path Setting
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
At this point, depending on the setting for Curve, the effect for Hue and
Xpt is also affected as shown in the following table. In the menu, the Hue
and Xpt settings do not change, but the path type indication is dimmed out.
4
If you selected Spline as the path type, set the following parameters, using
the knobs.
Changing the path type for Hue
1
Press the Hue path type indication for the item that you want to change.
2
Turn knob 1 to change the Hue path type.
The path type indications shown in the menu represent the change in hue
as seen on a Vectorscope.
CW: Rotate clockwise.
CCW: Rotate counterclockwise.
Short: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions is shorter.
Long: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions is longer.
Changing the path type for Xpt
1
Press the Xpt path type indication for the item that you want to change.
A path selection window appears.
2
Press the indication for the desired path type, to select it.
Xpt Hold off: When replaying a keyframe, change the inputs to the
settings saved in memory.
Curve setting Hue change Xpt change
OFF Does not change Hold
Step Changes as with the Step setting Is not affected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Tens Spline interpolation tension –4.00 to +4.00
2 Bias Spline interpolation bias –4.00 to +4.00
3 Cont Spline interpolation continuity –4.00 to +4.00
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
226 Path Setting
Xpt Hold on: When replaying a keyframe, do not change the
inputs.
227Executing Effects
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Executing Effects
By means of the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block, you can play an
effect as a continuously varying image. This is referred to as effect execution.
See also “Effect Execution” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
It is also possible to execute an effect from the device control block or the
standard type Flexi Pad control block (see Chapter 2 (Volume 1)).
Executing Effects in the Keyframe Control Block
Keyframe control block
STOP
NEXT
KF
NORM REV
NORM
/REV
EFF
LOOP
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
DELAY
EFF
DUR
COPY PASTE
DEL
SHIFT INS PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MOD UNDO
CONST
DUR
AUTO
INS
TURN
OVER
KF
LOOP
GO TO
TC
PAUSE
GO TO
KF
ALL FROM
TO
FF
RE
WIND
RUN
Effect execution section
REWIND button
FF button
RUN button
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
228 Executing Effects
Executing an effect automatically
1
Select the region in which you want to execute the effect, using the region
selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. (See step 2 (page
199) of “Recalling a register.”)
2
With the numeric keypad, enter the number of the register in which the
effect you want to execute is saved, and press the [ENTER] button to
confirm.
This recalls the effect saved in the register.
3
In the keyframe control block, press the [RUN] button.
The [RUN] button lights amber and the effect is executed automatically.
Manually executing an effect
In step 3 above, operate the fader lever.
To use the transition control block fader lever as a keyframe fader
Press the [KF] button in the transition control block (standard type), turning it
on, to execute a keyframe effect with the fader lever in the same control block.
Notes
• It is not possible for the [KF] button to be on for multiple banks (M/E or
PGM/PST) at the same time. If you press the [KF] button in more than one
bank, only the last button pressed remains on.
• If a macro is assigned to the transition control block fader lever, then while
in use as a keyframe fader the macro is not executed.
Moving to the first keyframe of the effect
To move to the first keyframe of the effect, press the [REWIND] button.
Moving to the last keyframe of the effect
To move to the last keyframe of the effect, press the [FF] button.
Setting the Run Mode
You can set the run mode in which an effect is executed when you press the
[RUN] button.
229Executing Effects
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Specifying the effect execution direction
To specify the effect execution direction, press the [NORM] button or the
[REV] button, turning it on. When you press one, turning it on, the other
automatically goes off.
To execute the effect so as to obtain the effects of the [NORM] and [REV]
buttons alternately, press the [NORM/REV] button, turning it on.
When the [NORM] button is lit: The effect is executed in the direction from
the first keyframe to the last keyframe.
When the [REV] button is lit: The effect is executed in the direction from the
last keyframe to the first keyframe.
When the [NORM/REV] button is lit: Each time the effect is executed, the
direction reverses.
Executing an effect up to the next keyframe
1
Press the [STOP NEXT KF] button, turning it on.
2
Press the [RUN] button.
This executes the effect as far as the next keyframe. When the [REV]
button is lit, it is executed as far as the previous keyframe.
Repeating an effect
1
Press the [EFF LOOP] button, turning it on.
2
Press the [RUN] button.
This executes the effect repeatedly, from the first keyframe to the last
keyframe.
When the [REV] button is lit, the effect is executed in the reverse direction.
3
To stop the repeating effect, press the [EFF LOOP] button, turning it off,
or press the [REWIND] button.
Executing an Effect in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Executing an effect
To execute an effect recalled from the numeric keypad control block in the
Flexi Pad control block, use the following procedure.
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [EFF] button.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
230 Executing Effects
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to effect operation, and the
[REWIND] button and [RUN] button appear in the memory recall section.
The previously selected bank number and last recalled register number
appear in the numeric display.
2
Press the following buttons to execute the effect.
REWIND: Press this button to move to the first keyframe of the currently
recalled effect.
RUN: Press this button to run the currently recalled effect.
231Saving Effects
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Saving Effects
When you recall an effect, the currently recalled effect is automatically saved
in a register. This is referred to as the auto save function.
You can disable the auto save function in a Setup menu.
By means of the following operation, you can also specify a register and save
an effect in it.
Saving an effect in a specified register
Specify the register using the numeric keypad control block.
1
Press the [EFF] button, turning it on.
This allocates the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations.
2
Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for which you
want to save the register, turning it on.
See step 2 (page 199) of “Recalling a register.”
3
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
4
With the numeric keypad, enter the number of the register in which you
want to save the effect.
To find an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button. To search for an empty register common to all currently
selectable regions, press the [.] button again.
To search for an empty register in the 100 range, press [1], [0], [0], [.]
(period) in this order. Similarly, to search for an empty register in the 200
range, press [2], [0], [0], [.] (period), and to search for an empty register in
the 300 range, press [3], [0], [0], [.] (period).
The register number appears in the display. If the number is followed by a
letter ‘e’ or ‘E,’ this indicates the following.
e: The selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2.
E: The selected register is empty for all selectable regions.
5
To add an attribute (effect dissolve), press the [+/–/EFF DISS] button,
turning it on.
For details of attributes, see “Effect Attributes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
6
Press the [ENTER] button.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
232 Saving Effects
This saves the current effect in the specified register, and turns off the
[STORE] button. The [RCALL] button and [STORE STATS] button both
light.
To undo the saving of an effect
Immediately after saving an effect, hold down the [STORE STATS] button and
press the [UNDO] button to undo the save.
233Creating and Saving a Master Timeline
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the
Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Creating and saving a master timeline
You can save region information (information on any regions, including the
register numbers associated with the regions) referred to as a master timeline
in a dedicated register. By recalling that register, you can manipulate the
regions and registers together.
1
Press the [EFF] button, turning it on.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block to keyframe effect
operations.
2
Recall the register number of the effect you want to save on the master
timeline for each region. (See “Recalling a Register” (page 198).)
3
Of the region selection buttons, press those buttons for the regions you
want to save on the master timeline, turning them on.
4
Press the region selection button [MASTR], turning it on.
The display shows the number of the register last used for master timeline
register operation.
5
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
6
With the numeric keypad buttons, enter the number of the register in which
you want to save the master timeline.
To find an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button.
The display shows the register number. If the number is followed by a
letter “E,” the register is empty.
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
234 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline
The regions selected in step 3 and the register numbers recalled in those
regions are saved in the master timeline register, and the [STORE] button
goes off. At the same time, the [RCALL] button lights.
Notes
• It is not possible to undo a master timeline save.
• Saving the master timeline does not carry out a save of effects. Save the
effects for each region first, then carry out the master timeline save.
Changing a master timeline
You can change information already saved in a master timeline.
As an example, to change the M/E-1 register from Effect 5 to Effect 10, use the
following procedure.
Information in master timeline register 1 before change
Information in master timeline register 1 after change
1
Recall the master timeline register you want to change. (See “Recalling a
Register” (page 198).)
This simultaneously recalls M/E-1 register 5 and P/P register 5, and the
[M/E-1] and [P/P] region selection buttons light.
2
Press the region selection button [MASTR], turning it off.
3
Turn on only the button for the region you want to change (here, [M/E-1]),
and recall the desired register (here, Effect 10).
This recalls M/E-1 register 10, while on P/P register 5 remains selected.
4
Press the buttons for the regions you want to save on the master timeline
(here, [M/E-1] and [P/P]), turning them on.
5
Press the region selection button [MASTR], turning it on.
Region Register
M/E-1 Effect 5
P/P Effect 5
Region Register
M/E-1 Effect 10
P/P Effect 5
235Creating and Saving a Master Timeline
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
The display shows the register number last used for master timeline
operation.
6
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
7
With the numeric keypad buttons, enter the number of the register (here
“1”) in which you want to save the master timeline, and press the [ENTER]
button.
This saves M/E-1 register 10 and P/P register 5 in master timeline register
1, and the [STORE] button goes off. At the same time, the [RCALL]
button lights.
Checking the regions saved on a master timeline
For example in the course of changing a master timeline, you can check which
regions are saved in the register. With the [MASTR] button in the numeric
keypad control block lit, hold down the [STORE] button. While it is held down,
the buttons for the saved regions light. When the button is released, the state
before it was held down is restored.
Creating and Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu
You can save a master timeline using the Effect >Master Timeline >Store
menu.
Recalling the Store menu
Carry out the following procedure.
1
Do either of the following.
• In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [EFF].
• In the numeric keypad control block, press the [EFF] button twice in
rapid succession.
The Effect menu appears.
2
Press VF1 ‘Master Timeline’ and HF1 ‘Store.’
The Master Timeline >Store menu appears.
The status area shows the master timeline register names, register lock
status, register number for each region, and so on.
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
236 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline
3
If required, press the following buttons in the status area to change the
region display.
M/E, P/P: indicate assignment of M/E-1 (“M/E1”), M/E-2 (“M/E2”), M/
E-3 (“M/E3”), and P/P (“P/P”).
User: indicate assignment of User1 (“USR1”), User2 (“USR2”), User3
(“USR3”), User4 (“USR4”), User5 (“USR5”), User6 (“USR6”),
User7 (“USR7”), and User8 (“USR8”).
DME: indicate assignment of DME ch1 (“DME1”), ch2 (“DME2”), ch3
(“DME3”), ch4 (“DME4”), ch5 (“DME5”), ch6 (“DME6”), ch7
(“DME7”), and ch8 (“DME8”).
DEV1-8: indicate assignment of Device1 (“DEV1”), Device2 (“DEV2”),
Device3 (“DEV3”), Device4 (“DEV4”), Device5 (“DEV5”), Device6
(“DEV6”), Device7 (“DEV7”), and Device8 (“DEV8”).
DEV9-12: indicate assignment of Device9 (“DEV9”), Device10
(“DEV10”), Device11 (“DEV11”), and Device12 (“DEV12”).
Misc: indicate assignment of P-Bus (“PBUS”), GPI (“GPI”), and Macro
(“MCRO”).
Creating and saving a master timeline
To save a master timeline register with the menu, use the following procedure.
1
In the Store menu, using any of the following methods, select the register
in which you want to save the master timeline.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Edit].
The Edit menu appears, and you can now save the master timeline in the
specified register. In this menu again, you can turn the knob to select the
master timeline register.
The status area shows the status of each region in this master timeline.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the region. Multiple selections
are also possible.
• Press directly on the display in the status area.
• To cancel the selection, press once more to return to the normal display.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Master Reg Master timeline register
number
1 to 99
237Creating and Saving a Master Timeline
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
• To select all regions, press [ALL].
To select all switcher-related regions (M/E, P/P, User), press [SWR
ALL].
4
Press [Assign], turning it on.
• If the selected register is locked, a confirmation message appears asking
whether or not to cancel the operation. Press [OK] to return to the
previous menu display without carrying out the registration.
• If the operation is carried out, the region selected in step 3 is registered
on the master timeline, and the parameters are now valid.
5
Turn the knob to select the number of the effect register.
6
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as required to set all regions and register numbers to be
saved on the master timeline.
7
In the <Store> group, press [Store].
This saves the settings.
To return to the state before saving the master timeline content
In the <Store> group, press [Undo].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Effect Reg Effect register number 1 to 399
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
238 Register Operations in the Menus
Register Operations in the Menus
Using the Effect menu, you can carry out the following effect register
operations.
• Attribute setting
• Status display
• Register editing
To display the Effect menu
Press the top menu selection button [EFF] in the menu control block.
The menus for editing registers are divided up by registers. Here the menu for
registers 1 to 99 is described as an example, but you can carry out operations
in the same way on registers 101 to 199, 201 to 299, and 301 to 399, using VF3
to VF5.
Effect Attribute Settings
Applying effect dissolve
To apply the “effect dissolve” attribute to a keyframe effect, use the following
procedure.
1
In the Effect menu, press VF2 ‘Effect 1-99’ and HF1 ‘Attribute.’
The Attribute menu appears.
The status area shows the region names, register numbers and status, and
attribute settings.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list, and in the selection
window select the region. Selecting multiple regions is also possible.
To select all regions, press [ALL].
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
239Register Operations in the Menus
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
• To select all registers, press [ALL].
5
Press [Effect Dissolve], turning it on.
6
Turn the knob to set the duration.
Setting the duration for a temporary attribute
To set the duration for a temporary attribute set in the numeric keypad control
block, turn knob 5.
Effect Status Display
The Effect >Effect 1-99 menu displays the following information.
Region name: The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
Register number
Register name
Write-protected status: When the register is write-protected, a letter “L”
appears.
Empty status: When the register is empty, a letter “E” appears.
Effect Register Editing
You can carry out the following editing on effect registers and master timeline
registers.
•Lock: Write-protect the contents of the register.
•Copy: Copy the contents of one register to another register.
• Merge: Merge the data of two registers. It is not possible to merge master
timeline registers.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register number 1 to 99
3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Eff Diss
Duration
Dissolve duration 1 to 999 (frames)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Temp Dur Temporary attribute
dissolve duration
0 to 999 (frames)
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
240 Register Operations in the Menus
•Move: Move the contents of one register to another register.
•Swap: Swap the contents of two registers.
•Delete: Delete the contents of a register.
•Name: Attach a name to a register.
Write-protecting the contents of the effect register
Note
It is not possible to write-protect an empty register.
1
In the Effect menu, press VF2 ‘Effect 1-99’ and HF2 ‘Lock.’
The Lock menu appears.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection
window, then select the region in the selection window. Selecting multiple
regions is also possible.
To select all regions, press [ALL].
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• To select all registers, press [ALL].
5
Press [Lock], turning it on.
To unlock the register
Select the register you want to unlock, and press [Lock], turning it off.
Copying, moving, and swapping effect register data
This section describes the procedure for copying. You can move or swap
registers using a similar procedure.
1
In the Effect menu, press VF2 ‘Effect 1-99’ and HF3 ‘Copy/Merge.’
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register number 1 to 99
3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99
241Register Operations in the Menus
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
• The Copy/Merge menu appears.
• The left side of the status area shows the register number of the copy
source, and the right side shows the register number of the copy
destination.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection
window, then select the region in the selection window. Selecting multiple
regions is also possible.
To select all regions, press [ALL].
Operation between regions
Operation between regions is possible in the following cases.
• Two of the M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3 and P/P regions
• Two of the User1 to 8 regions of the same configuration
• Two of the DME ch1 to 8 (including Global) regions
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the desired registers.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• To select all registers, press [ALL].
5
To copy without transferring the name, in the <Copy> group, press [W/o
Name], turning it on.
6
In the <Copy> group, press [Copy].
This carries out the copy.
If, for example, the copy destination register is write-protected or the same
register is specified both as the copy source and destination registers, a
confirmation message appears. Press [OK] to cancel the copy.
Merging effect registers
1
In the Effect menu, select VF2 ‘Effect 1-99’ and HF3 ‘Copy/Merge.’
• The Copy/Merge menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 From Reg Copy source register number 1 to 99
2 To Reg Copy destination register number 1 to 99
3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
242 Register Operations in the Menus
• The left side of the status area shows a list for the register coming
afterward when merged. The right side shows a list for the register
coming before when merged.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list, and in the selection
window select the region. Selecting multiple regions is also possible.
To select all regions, press [ALL].
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
5
Press [Merge].
This carries out the merge.
Deleting data from effect registers
1
In the Effect menu, press VF2 ‘Effect 1-99’ and HF6 ‘Delete.’
The Delete menu appears.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection
window, then select the region in the selection window. Selecting multiple
regions is also possible.
To select all regions, press [ALL].
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the desired registers.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 From Reg The register coming afterwards when
merged
1 to 99
2 To Reg The register coming before when merged 1 to 99
243Register Operations in the Menus
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
• To select all registers, press [ALL].
5
Press [Delete].
Attaching a name to an effect register
1
In the Effect menu, press VF2 ‘Effect 1-99’ and HF7 ‘Rename.’
The Rename menu appears.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection
window, then select the region in the selection window. Selecting multiple
regions is also possible.
To select all regions, press [ALL].
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register you want to name.
• Press directly on the list in status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected register appears in reverse video.
5
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
For details of keyboard window operation, see “Menu Operations” in
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
6
Enter the name, of not more than eight characters, and press [Enter].
The set name is reflected in the status area.
Note
The following names cannot be used.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register number 1 to 99
3 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register number 1 to 99
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
244 Register Operations in the Menus
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,
COM4, COM5, COM6
COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
Displaying a List of Effect Registers for Editing
You can display a list of effect registers including status information (whether
data is present and so on), then carry out lock, copy, delete, and rename
operations.
Displaying the list of effect registers with status information
Press the menu title button at the top left of the Effect menu.
The Effect >Status menu appears. The status area shows a list of effect registers
(1 to 99).
Register name displays
For the same number, the register name for the M/E-1 region takes precedence.
If there is no data for the M/E-1 region, then the register name appears in the
sequence M/E-2 >M/E-3 >P/P >User1 to User8 >DME ch1 to DME ch8
>Device1 to Device12 >P-Bus >GPI >Macro.
Indication colors
Each register has a color-coded border, indicating its status.
Selected register: pale blue border
Register containing data: shown amber within the border. If, however, there
are one or more locked regions, the display is in red.
Write-protecting the contents of the register (lock function)
(This applies to all regions.)
In the Effect >Status menu, use the following procedure.
1
Using any of the following methods, select the register you want to lock.
• Press directly on the corresponding register indication in the status area.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register selection 1 to 99
245Register Operations in the Menus
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
2
Press [Lock].
The register is locked, and the background of the register indication
appears in red.
To release the lock
Press [Lock] once more, turning the contents of the frame to amber.
Copying the contents of a register
(This applies to all regions.)
In the Effect >Status menu, use the following procedure.
1
Using any of the following methods, select the copy source register.
• Press directly on the corresponding register indication in the status area.
• Turn the knob.
2
In the <Copy> group, press [From __ ].
3
Select the copy destination register.
4
In the <Copy> group, press [To __ ].
This executes the copy.
Deleting the contents of a register
(This applies to all regions.)
In the Effect >Status menu, use the following procedure.
1
Using any of the following methods, select the register you want to delete.
• Press directly on the corresponding register indication in the status area.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Delete].
This deletes the data from the register.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register selection 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register selection 1 to 99
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
246 Register Operations in the Menus
Renaming a register
(This applies to all regions.)
In the Effect >Status menu, use the following procedure.
1
Using any of the following methods, select the register you want to
rename.
• Press directly on the corresponding register indication in the status area.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
3
Enter a name of up to eight characters, and press [Enter].
This changes the name.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register selection 1 to 99
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block ........248
Saving and Recalling Snapshots ........................................................248
Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block ...........................254
Banks and Registers ..........................................................................254
Saving and Recalling Snapshots ........................................................256
Snapshot Operations in the Menus .........................................................260
Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a Menu ..........................260
Setting Snapshot Attributes ...............................................................260
Snapshot Status Display ....................................................................263
Setting Key Snapshot Attributes .......................................................265
Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot ............................................265
Snapshot Register Editing .................................................................266
Displaying a List of Snapshot Registers for Editing .........................267
Operations in the Misc >Snapshot menu ...........................................267
Chapter 14 Snapshots
248 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Snapshot Operations From the Numeric
Keypad Control Block
The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the various settings required
to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data, for
recall as required to recover the same effect-applied state.
For an overview of snapshots, see “Snapshots” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
You can carry out snapshot operations principally using the numeric keypad
control block. (See following illustration.)
Additionally, in each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks, you can use
the Flexi Pad control block to save and recall. (See page 254.)
To apply attributes or display the status, use the Snapshot menu. (See page
260.)
Saving and Recalling Snapshots
Snapshot operations with the numeric keypad control block use the following
buttons.
249Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Numeric keypad control block
Saving a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block
1
Make the settings for the state you want to save as a snapshot.
2
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button,
turning it on.
This allocates the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations,
and the [RCALL] button lights.
3
Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for which you
want to save, turning it on. You can select more than one region.
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], [P/P]: These select the corresponding M/E-1,
M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST regions.
[USER 1] to [USER 8]: These select the User regions.
[DME 1] to [DME 8]: These select the DME channels.
[RTR]: This selects the Router region.
[ALL]: This selects all regions.
EFF
M/E
1
USER
1
DME
1
DME
5
SNAP
SHOT
M/E
2
USER
2
DME
2
DME
6
SHOT
BOX
M/E
3
USER
3
DME
3
DME
7
MCRO
P/P
USER
4
DME
4
DME
8
TRANS
RATE
RTR
DEV
1
DEV
2
UNDO
TC
STORE
STATS
MASTR ALL P-BUS GP1
STORE
RCALL
789
456
123
0
+/-
EFF
TRIM
CLR
AUTO
DISS
TRANS
ENBL
GPI
ENTER
SNAPSHOT button
Display
+/–/EFF DISS button
CLR/AUTO
TRANS button
TRIM/GPI ENBL
button
Numeric keypad
STORE button
RCALL button
STORE STATS button
UNDO button
Region selection buttons
Chapter 14 Snapshots
250 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Note
The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the
region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. (See
“Assigning a region to a region selection button in the numeric keypad
control block” (page 328).)
The first button pressed lights green as the reference region, and any
subsequently pressed buttons light amber.
Pressing one of the amber-lit buttons, while holding down [SNAPSHOT],
turns the button green to indicate its corresponding region as the new
reference region.
For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region, see
“Regions and Registers” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
The display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the
register previously recalled for that region.
4
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
5
Enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad.
To find an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button. To search for an empty register common to all currently
selectable regions, press the period button again.
Note
If you choose a register which already contains a snapshot, and save a
snapshot, then the existing register contents are overwritten.
The register number appears in the display. If the number is followed by a
letter ‘e’ or ‘E,’ this indicates the following.
e: The selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 3.
E: The selected register is empty for all currently selectable regions.
The entered register number appears in the display.
6
To apply attributes, press the following buttons, turning them on.
a) The GPI port that can be set is 1 (fixed).
For details of attributes, see “Snapshots” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Attribute to apply Button
Effect dissolve [+/–/EFF DISS] button
Auto transition [CLR/AUTO TRANS] button
GPI output a) TRIM/GPI ENBL] button
251Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Note
In the numeric keypad control block, it is not possible to apply the cross-
point hold. For details, see “Applying snapshot attributes” (page 260).
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
This saves the snapshot, and the [STORE] button goes off. The [RCALL]
and [STORE STATS] buttons light.
To cancel a snapshot save operation
After saving a snapshot, to cancel the save, hold down the [STORE STATS]
button and press the [UNDO] button.
Recalling a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button,
turning it on.
This allocates the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations,
and the [RCALL] button lights.
2
Press the region selection button corresponding to the region you want to
recall, turning it on. Multiple selections are also possible.
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], [P/P]: These select the corresponding M/E-1,
M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST regions.
[USER 1] to [USER 8]: These select the User regions.
[DME 1] to [DME 8]: These select the DME channels.
[ALL]: This selects all regions.
[RTR]: This selects the Router region.
[MASTR]: This selects a master snapshot.
Note
The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the
region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. (See
“Assigning a region to a region selection button in the numeric keypad
control block” (page 328).)
It is not possible to select [MASTR] and other regions simultaneously. If
selected simultaneously, the master snapshot takes precedence.
The first pressed button lights green as the reference region, and
subsequently pressed buttons light amber.
Chapter 14 Snapshots
252 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Pressing one of the amber-lit buttons, while holding down [SNAPSHOT],
turns the button green to indicate its corresponding region as the new
reference region.
For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region, see
“Regions and registers” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
The display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the
register previously recalled for that region.
3
Enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad.
See step 5 (page 250) in “Saving a snapshot from the numeric keypad
control block.”
The entered register number appears in the display.
4
To apply temporary attributes, press the following buttons, turning them
on.
a) When Xpt Hold mode is selected in setup.
b) When Key Disable mode is selected in setup.
For the setup setting, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame
Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” (page 407).
For details of temporary attributes and available attributes, see “Snapshot
Attributes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• The cross-point hold and key disable settings are maintained until you
next press the [XPT HOLD] button.
• Applying temporary attributes does not affect the contents of the
register.
• It is not possible to apply temporary attributes to a master snapshot.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
Control block Temporary
attribute to apply
Button
Cross-point control
block
A/B bus cross-point
hold
[XPT HOLD] button in the
background A/B bus
Key cross-point hold [XPT HOLD] button in the key bus a)
Key disable [XPT HOLD] button in the key bus b)
Numeric keypad
control block
Effect dissolve [+/–/EFF DISS] button
Auto transition [CLR/AUTO TRANS] button
253Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block
Chapter 14 Snapshots
This recalls the specified snapshot, and the reference region name and
recalled register number appear in the display.
If you applied the effect dissolve or auto transition temporary attributes in
step 4, the corresponding buttons go off.
When a master snapshot is recalled, the region selection buttons light
according to the saved region information.
To cancel a snapshot recall operation
After saving a snapshot, to cancel the recall, press the [UNDO] button.
Note
It is not possible to cancel recalling a master snapshot.
Creating and saving a master snapshot with the numeric keypad
control block
To create and save a master snapshot with the numeric keypad control block,
refer to the operations in “Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the
Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block” (page 233). Note, however,
that in place of the [EFF] button in the numeric keypad control block, the
[SNAPSHOT] button is used.
Chapter 14 Snapshots
254 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad
Control Block
In the Flexi Pad control block on each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks, you can only carry out operations on snapshots for that bank. It is
therefore not necessary to select a region.
Banks and Registers
In a standard type Flexi Pad control block, in order to handle the 99 registers,
they are considered in groups. These groups are called “banks,” and there are
ten banks, numbered from 0 to 9.
The correspondence between banks and registers is shown in the following
table.
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0AUTO
TRAN
EFF
DISS
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
UNDO
1 2
3 4
5 6
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
78
SNAPSHOT button Numeric display
UNDO button
STORE STATS button
Bank selection buttons
Memory recall section
Flexi Pad control block (standard type) Flexi Pad control block (simple type)
SNAPSHOT button
Numeric display
UNDO button
Memory recall section
255Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Example: When you select bank 3, the register numbers allocated to the
memory recall section are as follows.
Operations with a simple type Flexi Pad control block
With a simple type Flexi Pad control block, the registers that can be handled
are numbers 1 to 8. Bank operations are therefore not possible. It is also not
possible to apply attributes, or to cancel a snapshot save or recall operation
once carried out.
To use registers 9 to 99, or to cancel a snapshot save operation, use the numeric
keypad control block.
Bank number Register numbers
Bank 0 1 to 10
Bank 1 11 to 20
Bank 2 21 to 30
Bank 3 31 to 40
Bank 4 41 to 50
Bank 5 51 to 60
Bank 6 61 to 70
Bank 7 71 to 80
Bank 8 81 to 90
Bank 9 91 to 99
37 38 39
34 35 36
31 32 33
40
Chapter 14 Snapshots
256 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Saving and Recalling Snapshots
Saving a snapshot
As an example, to save a snapshot on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 bank, make the settings for the state you want to save as a
snapshot.
2
In the M/E-1 bank Flexi Pad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button.
This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations. The
numeric display shows the last selected bank number and the register
number last recalled on the bank.
3
Use any of the following methods to select the bank for saving the
snapshot.
(On a simple type Flexi Pad control block, there are no banks, and this
operation is not necessary.)
To select bank 0: Press the [BANK 0] button.
To select bank 1: Press the [BANK 1] button.
To select any bank from 0 to 9: Press the [BANK SEL] button, changing
the memory recall section display as in the following figure; select a
number from 0 to 9.
The selected bank number appears in the numeric display.
The buttons in the memory recall section change to show the names of the
registers in the selected bank, together with the register status.
Using the Setup menu, it is possible to specify which to display, the
register name or register number.
Lit orange: register containing a snapshot
Lit yellow: last recalled register
789
456
123
0
257Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Not lit: register not containing anything
4
To apply an attribute, hold down the [SNAPSHOT] button, and in the
memory recall section, press a button as follows, turning it on.
For details of attributes, see “Snapshot Attributes” in Chapter 1 (Volume
1).
Note
In the Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to apply the cross-point
hold or GPI output attributes. In a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it
is not possible to apply any attributes. To add these attributes, use a menu
operation. (See page 260.)
5
Still holding down the [SNAPSHOT] button from step 4, press the
memory recall button corresponding to the register in which you want to
save.
Note
If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow, the existing register
contents are overwritten.
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this completes the save
operation. The [STORE STATS] button lights amber, and the numeric
display shows the selected register number after the bank number.
To cancel a snapshot save operation
After saving a snapshot, to cancel the save, hold down the [STORE STATS]
button and press the [UNDO] button.
The [STORE STATS] button changes color from amber to green.
Note
On a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to cancel a snapshot
save operation.
Recalling a snapshot
Note
When an M/E bank is not assigned to any region selection button in the
numeric keypad control block in a setup setting, it is not possible to recall a
Attribute to apply Button
Effect dissolve [EFF DISS] button
Auto transition [AUTO TRANS] button
Chapter 14 Snapshots
258 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block
snapshot with the Flexi Pad control block of that M/E bank. (See “Assigning a
region to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block” (page
328)).
As an example, to recall a snapshot on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 bank Flexi Pad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button.
This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations. The
numeric display shows the last selected bank number and the register
number last recalled on the bank.
2
Select the bank for recall.
See step 3 (page 256) in “Saving a snapshot.”
3
To apply temporary attributes, press the following buttons, turning them
on.
a) When Xpt Hold mode is selected in setup.
b) When Key Disable mode is selected in setup.
For details of the operation mode of the [XPT HOLD] button, see page
409.
For details of temporary attributes and available attributes, see “Snapshot
Attributes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Notes
• The cross-point hold and key disable settings are maintained until you
next press the [XPT HOLD] button.
• Applying temporary attributes does not affect the contents of the
register.
4
Press the button in the memory recall section which shows the desired
register name.
Control block Temporary
attribute to apply
Button
Cross-point control
block
A/B bus cross-point
hold
[XPT HOLD] button in the
background A/B bus
Key cross-point hold [XPT HOLD] button in the key bus a)
Key disable [XPT HOLD] button in the key bus b)
Flexi Pad control
block
Effect dissolve [EFF DISS] button
Auto transition [AUTO TRANS] button
259Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 14 Snapshots
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this recalls the snapshot.
The numeric display shows the selected register number after the bank
number.
To cancel a snapshot recall operation
After recalling a snapshot, to cancel the recall, press the [UNDO] button.
Deleting a snapshot
As an example, to delete a snapshot on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 bank Flexi Pad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button.
This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations. The
numeric display shows the last selected bank number and the last recalled
register number on the corresponding bank.
2
Select the bank for the register containing the snapshot you want to delete.
See step 3 (page 256) in “Saving a snapshot.”
3
Hold down the [STORE STATS] button, then hold down the button in the
memory recall section displaying the number of the corresponding
register.
The button you pressed goes off, and this deletes the snapshot. The
[STORE STATS] button lights amber.
Note
On a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to delete a snapshot.
Chapter 14 Snapshots
260 Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Operations in the Snapshot menu
You can also set snapshot or key snapshot attributes in the Snapshot menu,
which also displays the status of the registers. To access the Snapshot menu,
press the top menu selection button [SNAPSHOT] in the menu control block.
In the Snapshot menu, as well as setting snapshot attributes, you can carry out
editing operations on snapshots, including copy and delete.
See “Snapshot Register Editing” (page 266).
Operations in the Misc >Snapshot menu
For M/E and PGM/PST snapshots only, you can carry out saving, recalling,
applying attributes, and so on using the same menu. (See page 267.)
Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a Menu
During snapshot operations, you can select a region in the menu. This is
convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the numeric keypad
control block or changing the reference region.
For details of the operations, see “Selecting by menus” (page 203).
Setting Snapshot Attributes
Applying snapshot attributes
1
In the Snapshot menu, press VF2 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Attribute.’
The Snapshot>Attribute menu appears.
The status area shows the region names, register numbers, and the status
and attributes set.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection
window, then select the region in the selection window. Selecting multiple
regions is also possible. To select all regions, press [ALL].
3
Press [OK].
261Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Chapter 14 Snapshots
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• To select all registers, press [ALL].
5
In the <Attribute> group, press the buttons for the attributes you want to
apply, turning them on.
Carry out the following procedures for each of the attributes.
To apply the cross-point hold attributes
1
Press [XPT Hold].
The Snapshot>Attribute>Xpt Hold menu appears. The status area shows a
list of the currently selected regions and bus names.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the register.
• Press directly on the list in the status area. To select one or more buses,
press [Plural] and then select buses.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) Appears when the region is RTR.
b) Appears when the region is other than RTR.
• To select all registers, press [ALL].
3
When the region is set to RTR (Router) only, press [RTR Level].
A window appears for selecting the router level.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register number 1 to 99
2 Num Select number of registers 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2Destination a) Destination selection 1 to 128
3Bus b) Bus name selection –
Chapter 14 Snapshots
262 Snapshot Operations in the Menus
4
Press the level for which you want to set the cross-point hold, turning it on,
and press [OK]. To select all levels, press [ALL].
5
Press [On].
This enables cross-point hold on the selected bus or buses.
To switch cross-point hold off, press [Off].
To apply the effect dissolve attribute
1
Press [Effect Dissolve], turning it on.
2
Turn the knob to set the effect dissolve duration.
To set the duration for a dissolve set as a temporary attribute
effect
To set the duration for a dissolve set as a temporary attribute effect in the
numeric keypad or Flexi Pad control block, turn the knob.
To apply the auto transition attribute
Press [Auto Transition], turning it on.
To apply the GPI output attribute
1
Press [GPI Output], turning it on.
2
Turn the knob to set the port number.
To apply the clip event attribute
Notes
• The following operating procedure can be used only for the frame memory
channels assigned to a user region.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Eff Diss Duration Dissolve duration 0 to 999 (frames)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Temp Dur Temporary attribute
dissolve duration
0 to 999 (frames)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 GPI Out
Port
GPI output port number 1 to 8
263Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Chapter 14 Snapshots
For details of frame memory assignment, see “Setting user regions” (page
387).
• This operation is not supported on the MVS-8000.
1
Press [Clip Event].
The Snapshot >Attribute >Clip Event menu appears.
2
In the <Frame Memory Select> group, press the desired button.
On the left of the status area, the name and content of the selected region
(for example, USER1) are shown. On the right, the content of the clip of
the current frame memory is shown.
3
Press [Clip Event], turning it on.
The clip event attribute is applied.
4
To select the clip of the current frame memory, press [Set].
The content of the clip is shown on the left of the status area.
5
To play the clip as soon as it is recalled, press [Auto Play], turning it on.
For details of attributes and available attributes, see “Snapshots” in Chapter
1 (Volume 1).
Snapshot Status Display
The Snapshot >Attribute menu displays the following information.
For details of how to access the Snapshot >Attribute menu, see page 260.
Region name: The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
Register number
Register name
Write-protected status: When the register is write-protected, an “L” (for
“lock”) appears.
Empty status: When the register is empty, an “E” (for “empty”) appears.
Attribute settings: The attributes set for a register are shown by the following
character codes.
When the cross-point hold is set:
Chapter 14 Snapshots
264 Snapshot Operations in the Menus
When an effect dissolve is set:
When an auto transition is set:
When a GPI output is set:
When a clip event is set:
Displayed
character codes
Attributes set
A, B Cross-point hold is set for the A or B background bus.
1, 2, 3, 4 Cross-point hold is set for key bus 1, 2, 3, or 4.
U1, U2 Cross-point hold is set for the utility 1 or utility 2 bus.
D2 Cross-point hold is set for video bus selected for 2nd DME
channel.
FvFkBvBk Cross-point hold is set for all of the DME front video bus, DME
front key bus, DME back video bus, and DME back key bus.
Aux Cross-point hold is set for one of the AUX buses.
Mon Cross-point hold is set for one of the monitor buses.
Fm1, Fm2 Cross-point hold is set for one of the frame memory 1 and 2
buses.
Ccr1, Ccr2 Cross-point hold is set for one of the CCR 1 and 2 buses.
RTR Cross-point hold is set for the Router region.
Displayed
character codes
Attributes set
Duration value The effect dissolve attribute is set, with the displayed duration.
Displayed
character codes
Attributes set
T Auto transition is set.
Displayed
character codes
Attributes set
Port number GPI output is set for the port of the displayed number.
Displayed
character codes
Attributes set
On Clip event is set.
265Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Setting Key Snapshot Attributes
Applying key snapshot attributes
1
In the Snapshot menu, press VF5 ‘Key Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Attribute.’
The Snapshot >Key Snapshot >Attribute menu appears.
The status area shows the region names, register numbers, and whether the
registers are locked or not.
2
Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection
window, then select the region in the selection window. Selecting multiple
regions is also possible.
3
Press [OK].
The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
5
In the <Recall Mode> group, select one of the following modes for save
and recall operations.
XPT: Only the key material selection data is saved or recalled.
Modifier: Only the key modifier settings are saved or recalled.
Transition: Only the independent key transition settings are saved or
recalled.
Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot
To save a master snapshot in the Snapshot menu, after recalling the Snapshot
>Master Snapshot >Store menu, refer to the operations in “Creating and
Saving a Master Timeline With the Menu” (page 235).
Recalling the Store menu
1
Do either of the following.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Register Register number 1 to 4
Chapter 14 Snapshots
266 Snapshot Operations in the Menus
• In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button
[SNAPSHOT].
• In the numeric keypad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button
twice in rapid succession.
The Snapshot menu appears.
2
Press VF1 ‘Master Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Store.’
The Master Snapshot >Store menu appears.
The status area shows the master snapshot register names, register lock
status, register number for each region, and so on.
3
If required, press the following buttons in the status area to change the
region display.
M/E, P/P: indicate assignment of M/E-1 (“M/E1”), M/E-2 (“M/E2”), M/
E-3 (“M/E3”), and P/P (“P/P”).
User: User1 (“USR1”) to User8 (“USR8”)
DME: indicate assignment of DME ch1 (“DME1”), ch2 (“DME2”), ch3
(“DME3”), ch4 (“DME4”), ch5 (“DME5”), ch6 (“DME6”), ch7
(“DME7”), and ch8 (“DME8”).
Misc: RTR (“Router”)
Snapshot Register Editing
You can carry out the following editing on snapshot registers.
(You can use similar procedures also on master snapshot, wipe snapshot, DME
wipe snapshot and key snapshot registers.)
•Lock: Write-protect the contents of the register.
•Copy: Copy the contents of one register to another register.
•Move: Move the contents of one register to another register.
•Swap: Swap the contents of two registers.
•Delete: Delete the contents of a register.
•Name: Attach a name to a register.
For details of snapshot register operations, see “Effect Register Editing”
(page 239).
267Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Displaying a List of Snapshot Registers for Editing
You can display a list of snapshot registers including status information
(whether data is present and so on), then carry out lock, copy, delete, and
rename operations.
Displaying the list of snapshot registers with status information
Press the menu title button at the top left of the Snapshot menu.
The Snapshot >Status menu appears. The status area shows a list of snapshot
registers (1 to 99).
For details of lock, copy, delete, and rename operations, see “Displaying a List
of Effect Registers for Editing” (page 244).
Register name displays
For the same number, the register name for the M/E-1 region takes precedence.
If there is no data for the M/E-1 region, then the register name appears in the
sequence M/E-2 >M/E-3 >P/P >User1 to User8 >DME ch1 to DME ch8
>RTR.
Operations in the Misc >Snapshot menu
Recalling a snapshot
1
In the Misc menu, press [Snapshot].
The Snapshot menu appears.
Chapter 14 Snapshots
268 Snapshot Operations in the Menus
2
As required, change the bank (see page 268).
3
Press the button for the number or name you want to recall.
This recalls the snapshot, and the button you pressed lights green.
Saving a snapshot
1
Display the Misc >Snapshot menu.
2
Set the state you want to save as a snapshot.
3
Press [Store].
The button lights amber.
4
As required, change the bank (see page 268).
5
Press the button for the number or name you want to save.
This saves the snapshot, and the button goes off.
Changing the bank
Change the combination shown on the memory recall buttons (the bank).
1
Press [Bank Sel].
2
Select the bank in the numeric keypad window.
For example, to show the numbers or names corresponding to registers 11
to 20, select “1” in the numeric keypad window.
Applying attributes
To apply an attribute to the snapshot represented by a lit-green memory recall
button, use the following procedure.
1
To apply the cross-point hold attribute, in the <Attribute Xpt Hold> group
select the appropriate bus.
Note
A setting in the Setup menu determines whether key disable is applied to
cross-point hold or not. For details, see “Setting the operation mode of the
key bus [XPT HOLD] button” (page 409).
2
Select the following attributes in the <Attribute> group as required.
269Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Effect Dissolve: Apply effect dissolve.
Auto Transition: Apply auto transition.
GPI Output: Apply GPI output. When this is selected, select the GPI
number with the knob.
Deleting a snapshot
1
In the Misc >Snapshot menu, press [Delete].
The button lights amber.
2
As required, change the bank.
3
Press the button for the number or name you want to delete.
This deletes the snapshot, and the button you pressed goes off.
Renaming a snapshot register
1
In the Misc >Snapshot menu, press [Rename].
The button lights amber.
2
As required, change the bank.
3
Press the button for the number you want to rename.
A keyboard window appears.
4
Enter the register name, and press [Enter].
The new name appears on the memory recall button.
Chapter 14 Snapshots
270 Snapshot Operations in the Menus
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Utility Execution .......................................................................................272
Executing a Utility With the User Preference Buttons (Menu Control
Block) .....................................................................................272
Executing a Utility in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block .................273
Executing Utilities With the Cross-Point Buttons in the Key 2 Row 274
Shotbox Register Creation .......................................................................276
Creating a Shotbox Register in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 276
Creating a Shotbox Register Using the Menus .................................278
Shotbox Execution ....................................................................................281
Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block .........281
Shotbox Execution in the Flexi Pad Control Block ..........................282
Shotbox Execution in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block .................284
Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row Cross-Point Buttons
285
Shotbox Register Editing .........................................................................286
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
272 Utility Execution
Utility Execution
You can assign actions such as menu shortcuts, function enabling and
disabling, and recalling shotbox or macro registers to buttons in the menu
control block, utility/shotbox control block, and cross-point control block. Use
the setup menu to make the assignment.
For details of the menu control block, utility/shotbox control block, and cross-
point control block see “Menu Control Block”, “Utility/Shotbox Control
Block”, and “Cross-Point Control Block” in Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
For details of the settings for assigning functions to buttons, see “Setting
Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)” (page 356).
Executing a Utility With the User Preference Buttons
(Menu Control Block)
In the setup menu, you can assign any 16 actions to the user preference buttons
in the menu control block.
To execute an assigned action
Press the corresponding user preference button ([PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16]).
• In the case of a function on/off action, the button you pressed lights amber,
and this enables the function.
To disable the function, press the button once more.
• For other actions, the button you pressed momentarily lights amber, and then
the function is executed.
273Utility Execution
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Executing a Utility in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block
Utility/shotbox control block
By default, the memory recall buttons in the utility/shotbox control block are
assigned to shotbox registers 1 to 96, in banks 1 to 4 (see page 284), but in the
setup menu, you can assign these to any 96 actions.
To execute an assigned action
When the action is to execute a shotbox register, follow the procedure in
“Shotbox Execution in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block” (page 284).
1
Press one of the bank selection buttons [BANK1] to [BANK4] to select a
bank.
• The bank selection button you pressed lights amber.
• For the selected bank, the memory recall buttons show the button
numbers and corresponding button states. If a button has been given a
name in the setup menu, this name appears.
Not lighted: buttons with nothing saved
Lit orange: buttons saving a utility command or menu shortcut
2
Press the memory recall button for which the action you want to execute
has been registered.
1
BANK
1
2 3 4
7
BANK
2
BANK
3
BANK
4
56
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
Bank selection buttons
Memory recall buttons
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
274 Utility Execution
• In the case of a function on/off action, the button you pressed lights
green, and this enables the function.
To disable the function, press the button once more.
• For other actions, the button you pressed momentarily lights green, and
then the function is executed.
Executing Utilities With the Cross-Point Buttons in the
Key 2 Row
You can use the key 2 row of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks
in the same way as the buttons in the utility/shot box control block.
Note
To use this function, it is first necessary to assign the utility/shot box mode
switching function to the control panel [PRE MCRO] button.
For details of the assignment operation, see “Assigning the utility/shot box
mode switching function” (page 334).
Cross-point control block in the PGM/PST block
You can assign any action to the cross-point buttons.
M/E
1
M/E
1
SHIFT
SHIFT XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
PRE
MCRO
KEY3
KEY4
POST
MCRO
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD UTIL
M/E
1
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
Key 2 row
Background A row
Background B row
Bank switching buttons
PRE MCRO buton
275Utility Execution
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
For details of the assignment operation, see “Assigning a function to the key 2
row cross-point buttons” (page 367).
To execute the assigned action
When the action is executing a shot box register, follow the procedure
“Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row Cross-Point Buttons”
(page 285).
1
Press the [PRE MCRO] button, turning it on.
2
Press one of the bank switching buttons (see previous figure), to select the
bank.
These buttons correspond to banks 1 to 5 in sequence from the left.
3
Press the cross-point button to which the desired action is assigned.
This executes the action.
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
276 Shotbox Register Creation
Shotbox Register Creation
The term “shotbox” refers to a function whereby for each specified region any
snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously. For each region,
any snapshot or keyframe effect number can be specified to be recalled.
There is also a setting to enable or disable the auto run function.
For a shotbox overview, see “Shotbox” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
You can create (save) shotbox registers in the following control blocks.
• Numeric keypad control block (See “Numeric Keypad Control Block” in
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).)
• Menu control block (See “Menu Control Block” in Chapter 2 (Volume 1).)
Creating a Shotbox Register in the Numeric Keypad
Control Block
When you create a shotbox register in the numeric keypad control block, you
carry out separate operations in respect of the snapshot setting data and the
effect setting data, and save in the register. The procedure described here
makes the snapshot settings first, followed by the effect settings.
Creating a shotbox register
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [SNAPSHOT] button,
turning it on.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations.
2
Specify the register number of the snapshot you want to save in a shotbox
register, and then recall it for each region.
For details of the procedure for recalling a register, see “Recalling a
snapshot from the numeric keypad control block” (page 251).
3
Press the [SHOTBOX] button, turning it on.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block to shotbox operations.
4
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
The [SNAPSHOT] button lights green.
277Shotbox Register Creation
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
If not lighted, press the [SNAPSHOT] button to turn it on.
Note
Only in [SHOTBOX] operation mode with the [STORE] button lit, the
[SNAPSHOT] button or [EFF] button lights green to indicate that a setting
operation is in progress for the purpose of saving snapshot data or effect
data in a shotbox register.
5
Press the region button for the snapshot you want to save, turning it on.
6
Enter the desired shotbox register number with the numeric keypad
buttons.
To find an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button.
The display shows the relevant register numbers. When a register number
is postfixed with an “E,” the register is empty.
7
Press [ENTER].
This saves the region you turned on in step 5, and the register number you
recalled for that region as a snapshot setting in a shotbox register, and the
[STORE] button goes off. At the same time, the [RCALL] button lights.
8
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [EFF] button, turning it on.
9
Specify the register number of the keyframe effect you want to save in a
shotbox register, and then recall it for each region.
For details of the procedure for recalling a register, see “Recalling a
register” (page 198).
10
Referring to steps 3 to 5, carry out the setting operation for effect register
saving. In step 4, however, press the [EFF] button, lighting it green.
11
Enter the shotbox register number specified in step 6 using the numeric
keypad buttons.
12
Press the [ENTER] button.
This saves the effect setting in a shotbox register, and the [STORE] button
goes off. At the same time, the [RCALL] button lights.
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
278 Shotbox Register Creation
To change the contents of a shotbox register
After recalling the shotbox register you want to change, referring to the
previous item “Creating a shotbox register,” change the contents of the
shotbox register, and save.
To check the region saved in a shotbox register
During operations to change the contents of a shotbox register, to check which
region is saved in the register, use the following procedure.
1
With the [SHOTBOX] button lit, press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
2
Press the required button, as follows, turning it on.
To check the snapshot region: [SNAPSHOT] button
To check the effect region: [EFF] button
3
Hold down the [STORE] button.
While this button is held down, the button for the saved region lights.
Releasing the button returns you to the state before holding down the
[STORE] button.
Note
While the [STORE] button is lit, the mode selection buttons ([TRANS RATE]
button and so on) in the numeric keypad control block do not operate. To
change the mode, press the [RCALL] button or [SHOTBOX] button so that the
[STORE] button goes off.
Creating a Shotbox Register Using the Menus
Accessing the Shotbox menu
Carry out creation and editing of shotbox registers in the Shotbox menu.
To access the Shotbox menu, use either of the following methods.
• In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [SHOTBOX].
• In the numeric keypad control block, press the [SHOTBOX] button twice in
rapid succession.
Creating a shotbox register
1
In the Shotbox menu, press VF1 ‘Register’ and HF1 ‘Store/Recall.’
The Store/Recall menu appears.
In the status area, the settings for each register appear as follows.
279Shotbox Register Creation
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Region settings: Appear as “Sxxx” when a snapshot is allocated, and as
“Exxx” when an effect is allocated. (xxx is the register number.) The
register name also appears. If nothing is allocated, nothing appears in
the display.
Register lock setting: When the register is write-protected, an “L” (for
“lock”) appears.
Empty status: When the register is empty, an “E” (for “empty”) appears.
Auto run setting: When this is enabled, so that an effect is executed
simultaneously with recall, “AR” appears.
Shotbox register name: This shows the shotbox register name.
2
If necessary, switch the region display by pressing one of the following
buttons in the status area.
M/E, P/P: Shows the allocations for M/E-1 (“M/E1”), M/E-2 (“M/E2”),
M/E-3 (“M/E3”), and P/P (“P/P”).
User: Shows the allocations for User1 (“USR1”), User2 (“USR2”),
User3 (“USR3”), User4 (“USR4”), User5 (“USR5”),
User6 (“USR6”), User7 (“USR7”), and User8 (“USR8”).
DME: Shows the allocations for DME ch1 (“DME1”), ch2 (“DME2”),
ch3 (“DME3”), ch4 (“DME4”), ch5 (“DME5”), ch6 (“DME6”),
ch7 (“DME7”), and ch8 (“DME8”).
DEV1-8: Shows the allocations for Device1 (“DEV1”), Device2
(“DEV2”), Device3 (“DEV3”), Device4 (“DEV4”), Device5
(“DEV5”), Device6 (“DEV6”), Device7 (“DEV7”), and Device8
(“DEV8”).
DEV9-12: Shows the allocations for Device9 (“DEV9”), Device10
(“DEV10”), Device11 (“DEV11”), and Device12 (“DEV12”).
Misc: Shows the allocations for P-Bus (“PBUS”), GPI (“GPI”), Router
(“RTR”), and Macro (“MCRO”).
3
Using any of the following methods, select the register you want to create
(or edit).
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Press [Edit].
The Edit menu appears, and it is now possible to make the settings for the
specified register.
You can also use knob 1 to select the register in this menu.
In the status area, the shotbox register status for each region appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Shotbox Reg Shotbox register number 1 to 99
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
280 Shotbox Register Creation
5
Using any of the following methods, select the desired region. You may
select more than one region.
• Press directly on the region display in the status area, turning it to reverse
video.
• Press [ALL] to select all regions.
• To select all switcher-related regions (M/E, P/P, User), press
[SWR ALL].
• To cancel a selection, press once more to return to the normal display.
6
In the <Assign> group, select the snapshot or effect to be allocated to the
region.
Snapshot: Allocate a snapshot register.
Effect: Allocate a keyframe effect.
• If the selected register is locked, a confirmation message appears asking
whether or not to cancel the operation. Press [OK] to return to the
previous menu display without carrying out the registration.
• If the operation is carried out, the region selected in step 5 is registered
on the master timeline, and the parameters are now valid.
7
Depending on the selection in step 6, set the parameters as follows.
• When a snapshot is selected
• When an effect is selected
a) For the DME region, you can also set register numbers 101 to 199, 201 to 299, and 301 to
399.
8
To run the allocated effect as soon as it is recalled, press [Auto Run],
turning it on.
9
Repeat steps 5 to 8 as required.
10
In the <Store> group, press [Store] to save the setting.
To return to the state before saving the setting
In the <Store> group, press [Undo].
To execute the settings to check them
Press [Recall] to execute the shotbox.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Snapshot Snapshot register number 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Effect Keyframe effect number 1 to 99 a)
281Shotbox Execution
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Shotbox Execution
You can recall (and run) shotbox registers from the following control blocks.
This section describes the various methods of operation.
• Numeric keypad control block (see page 281)
• Flexi Pad control block (see page 282)
• Cross-point control block (see page 285)
• Utility/shotbox control block (see page 284)
Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control
Block
Numeric keypad control block
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [SHOTBOX] button,
turning it on.
EFF
M/E
1
USER
1
DME
1
DME
5
SNAP
SHOT
M/E
2
USER
2
DME
2
DME
6
SHOT
BOX
M/E
3
USER
3
DME
3
DME
7
MCRO
P/P
USER
4
DME
4
DME
8
TRANS
RATE
RTR
DEV
1
DEV
2
UNDO
TC
STORE
STATS
MASTR ALL P-BUS GP1
STORE
RCALL
789
456
123
0
+/-
EFF
TRIM
CLR
AUTO
DISS
TRANS
ENBL
GPI
ENTER
Region selection buttons
STORE button
STORE STATS button
RCALL button
SHOTBOX button Display
UNDO button
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
282 Shotbox Execution
• This allocates the numeric keypad control block to shotbox operations.
• The [RCALL] button lights amber.
• The display shows the last recalled register number.
2
With the numeric keypad buttons, enter the desired register number.
• The display now shows the entered register number.
• If the specified register is empty, an “E” automatically appears after the
register number.
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
• This runs the specified shotbox register.
• The number of the recalled register appears in the display.
• The region selection buttons corresponding to the regions for which the
effect is set light.
• If auto run is set for the specified shotbox register, on recall the effect is
immediately executed.
• If you recall an empty register, then shotbox execution has no effect.
When auto run is not set for the recalled register
Simply recalling the register does not run the effect. To do this, in the
keyframe control block, press the [RUN] button.
Shotbox Execution in the Flexi Pad Control Block
Note
In the simple type of Flexi Pad control block, shotbox operations are not
possible.
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [SHOTBOX] button, lighting the
[SHOTBOX] button amber.
• This allocates the Flexi Pad control block to shotbox operations.
• The previously selected bank number and the last recalled register
number appear in the numeric display.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the bank.
• To select a register in bank 0, press the [BANK 0] button.
• To select a register in bank 1, press the [BANK 1] button.
• Press the [BANK SEL] button, and when the memory recall section
display changes as follows, press the button from 0 to 9 corresponding
to the bank you want to select.
283Shotbox Execution
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
• The numeric display shows the selected bank number.
• The buttons in the memory recall section show the names and states of
the registers corresponding to the selected bank.
Off: register in which nothing is saved
Lit orange: register holding shotbox settings
Lit yellow: last executed register
3
Press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the register
you want to run.
• The selected shotbox register is executed.
• The pressed button lights yellow.
• The numeric display shows the bank number followed by the selected
register number.
• If the selected shotbox register has auto run set, on recall the effect is
immediately executed.
When auto run is not set for the recalled register
Simply recalling the register does not run the effect. To do this, press the
[RUN] button.
789
456
123
0
RUNREWIND
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
284 Shotbox Execution
Shotbox Execution in the Utility/Shotbox Control Block
Utility/shotbox control block
In the utility/shotbox control block, as the default setting the memory recall
buttons have registers 1 to 96 allocated to banks 1 to 4.
1
Press one of the bank selection buttons [BANK1] to [BANK4] to select the
bank.
• The pressed bank selection button lights amber.
• The memory recall buttons show the names and states of the registers
corresponding to the selected bank.
Off: register in which nothing is saved
Lit orange: register holding shotbox settings
Lit yellow: last recalled register
Bank Register allocation to memory recall buttons
11 to 24
2 25 to 48
3 49 to 72
4 73 to 96
1
BANK
1
2 3 4
7
BANK
2
BANK
3
BANK
4
56
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
Bank selection buttons
Memory recall buttons
285Shotbox Execution
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
2
Press the memory recall button to which the shotbox register you want to
run is allocated.
• The shotbox execution is carried out.
• The pressed button lights yellow.
• The numeric keypad control block [SHOTBOX] button lights, and the
region selection button corresponding to the region for which the effect
is set also lights.
• If the selected shotbox register has auto run set, on recall the effect is
immediately executed.
When auto run is not set for the recalled register
Simply recalling the register does not run the effect. To do this, press the
[RUN] button in the keyframe control block.
Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row
Cross-Point Buttons
You can use the key 2 row of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks
in the same way as the buttons in the utility/shot box control block.
Note
To use this function, it is first necessary to assign the utility shot box mode
switching function to the control panel [PRE MCRO] button.
For details of the assignment operation, see “Assigning the utility/shot box
mode switching function” (page 334).
You can assign any shot box register to the cross-point buttons.
For details of the assignment operation, see “Assigning a function to the key 2
row cross-point buttons” (page 367).
1
Press the [PRE MCRO] button, turning it on.
2
Press one of the bank switching buttons (see the figure on page 274), to
select the bank.
3
Press the cross-point button to which the desired shot box is assigned.
This executes the shot box function.
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
286 Shotbox Register Editing
Shotbox Register Editing
You can carry out the following editing on shotbox registers.
•Lock: Write-protect the contents of the register.
•Copy: Copy data from one register to another.
•Move: Move data from one register to another.
•Swap: Swap the contents of two registers.
•Delete: Delete the contents of a register.
•Name: Attach a name to a register.
The procedures for shotbox register editing are similar to the procedures
described in “Effect Register Editing” (page 239).
Unlike in effect register editing, however, it is not necessary to specify a region
in shotbox register editing.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setup for the Whole System .....................................................................289
Network Settings (Network Config Menu) .......................................289
System Settings (System Config Menu) ...........................................290
Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu) ........................................293
Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format Menu) ...............................296
Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu) ..................297
Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu) ..........................................299
Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu) ...............299
System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu) .......................................315
Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel .........................321
Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu) .................................321
Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu) ..........................................342
Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu) ..............351
Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu) ............................356
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) ............367
Operation Settings (Operation Menu) ...............................................374
Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu) .....................381
Setup Relating to Switcher Processor .....................................................384
Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu) .........................384
Signal Input Settings (Input Menu) ...................................................390
Signal Output Settings (Output Menu) ..............................................398
Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu) .................404
Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color Correction
(Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu) ..................................................407
Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu) .............................410
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) ............417
Setup Relating to DME ............................................................................426
Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu) ...............................426
Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu) .........................428
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu) ............429
Setup Relating to DCU .............................................................................433
Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu) .................433
GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu) .....................................434
Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu) ................................438
GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu) ...............................439
Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu) .................................441
Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally ........................................451
Router Interface Settings (Router Menu) ..........................................451
Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu) ........................................454
Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu) ........................................................454
Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu) ...............................456
Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu) ...........................................458
Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu) ....................................459
Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu) ..........................................461
Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel ...463
Procedure for Simple Connection .....................................................463
Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in Simple Connection ...........464
289Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setup for the Whole System
Carry out operations relating to setup in the Engineering Setup menu.
To access the Engineering Setup menu, press the top menu selection button
[ENG SETUP].
For an overview of setup, see “Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Setting the unit ID
When there are two switchers and connected DME units on the same network,
it is necessary to set the unit ID on each device, as follows.
For more details of how to make the unit ID settings, refer to the installation
manual for the particular device.
Network Settings (Network Config Menu)
To make the network settings, use System >Network Config menu.
To display the Network Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF1 ‘Network
Config.’
The status area shows the device ID, and Control LAN and Data LAN IP
addresses for each device excluding the DCU.
Making the network settings
1
In the System >Network Config menu, press [Auto Config].
Switcher ID
1st switcher 1
2nd switcher 2
DME ID
DME1 for 1st switcher (channels 1 to 4) 1
DME2 for 1st switcher (channels 5 to 8) 2
DME1 for 2nd switcher (channels 1 to 4) 3
DME2 for 2nd switcher (channels 5 to 8) 4
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
290 Setup for the Whole System
This automatically checks all devices (excluding the DCU) connected to
the Data LAN.
2
Once switch to another menu, then display the Network Config menu
again.
Now the status area of the System >Network Config menu shows the
results of the automatic check.
Note
Be sure to carry out this operation after reconfiguring the system, or after a
software upgrade.
System Settings (System Config Menu)
To make the system settings, use the System >System Config menu.
To display the System Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF2 ‘System
Config.’
Note
After changing any of the following settings, be sure to press [Execute] to save
the new values. If you want to cancel the setting changes without saving them,
press [Clear].
Selecting the system operation mode
In the <Operation Mode> group of the System >System Config menu, select
one of the following.
Single Proc: Control mode in which the panel controls a switcher and up to
two DMEs connected to the switcher.
Single Simul: Control mode in which the panel controls a switcher and a DME
connected to the switcher. The operating bank and DME are interlocked.
(See “System Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).)
Dual Simul: Control mode in which the panel controls two switchers and the
DME connected to each switcher simultaneously.
Notes
• When operating an MVS-8000 system and a DVS-9000 system in Dual
Simul mode, simultaneous operation may not be possible because of
differences between the systems in some functions.
291Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• For an MVS-8000 system, SD systems and HD systems store different
numbers of frames in frame memory. When operating an SD system and
an HD system in Dual Simul mode, use the HD system (which stores
fewer frames) as the first system (the system whose switcher ID is 1).
Specifying the switcher controlled by the control panel
1
In the System >System Config menu, press the [Panel Assign] button.
The Panel Assign menu appears.
2
Select the switcher to be controlled by the selected control panel, as
follows.
•If there is only one switcher on the network, in the <1st Switcher>
group, set [SWR1] to On, and in the <2nd Switcher> group, set [SWR2]
to Off.
•If there are two switchers on the same network, in the <1st Switcher>
group, select the switcher to be operated.
When the system operation mode (see previous item) is set to [Dual
Simul], the switcher status set in <1st Switcher> appears on the control
panel.
3
To set the selected control panel as tally control master panel, press [Tally
Master], turning it on.
If there are multiple panels and processors, the control panel for which
[Tally Master] is set to On carries out tally control for the whole system.
Note
When there are multiple control panels, make sure that one of them has
[Tally Master] set to On. When you change the master panel, be sure to
copy and save the setup tally (TLY) and router (RTR) data in the File
menu, and make the same settings for other panels.
Specifying the DME connected to the switcher
1
In the System >System Config menu, press [Switcher Assign].
The Switcher Assign menu appears.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the switcher to which the
settings apply.
• In the list appearing in the menu, press the desired device name.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
292 Setup for the Whole System
The selected switcher appears in reverse video.
If there is only one switcher on the network, carry out the SWR1 setting
(for the first switcher) only.
3
Make the DME settings as follows.
•When making DME settings for SWR1 (the first switcher), for the
first DME, select [DME1] in the <1st DME> group. For the second
DME, select [DME2] in the <2nd DME> group. When a second DME is
not connected, turn all buttons in the <2nd DME> group off.
•When making DME settings for SWR2 (the second switcher), for the
first DME, select [DME3] in the <1st DME> group. For the second
DME, select [DME4] in the <2nd DME> group. When a second DME is
not connected, turn all buttons in the <2nd DME> group off.
Enabling the FM data port of the switcher
With the FM data port enabled, frame memory data can be transferred in a short
time between the switcher and the control panels.
Notes
• If multiple control panels are in use, [FM Data Port Enable] can be turned on
for only one control panel per switcher.
• This function is not available on the MVS-8000.
1
In the System >System Config menu, press [Switcher Assign].
The Switcher Assign menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the switcher to be set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
The selected switcher is displayed in reverse video.
If there is only one switcher on the network, make the setting only for
SWR1 (the first switcher).
3
Press [FM Data Port Enable], turning it on.
Setup in “Dual Simul” mode
When the system operation mode (see page 290) is set to “Dual Simul,” the
following setting is required for setup of the two switchers and connected DME
units.
In the <Setup Target> group, set the [System 1] or [System 2] button to On,
then carry out the setup. You can also set both to On, and make the settings
simultaneously on the two systems.
293Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)
To set the format, that is, the frame frequency and number of scan lines handled
by each device, use the System >Format menu.
To display the Format menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF3 ‘Format.’
Note
After changing any of the following settings, be sure to press [Execute] (or [FC
Format Execute] for changing the format converter signal format) to save the
new values. If you want to cancel the settings and return to the original state,
press [Clear] without pressing [Execute] or [FC Format Execute]. When you
press [Execute], some data is lost (such as frame memory images). If you press
[FC Format Execute], memory is not initialized, and this data is not lost.
When using 720P format (on a 4M/E or 3M/E system)
On a 4M/E system or a 3M/E system with a board with multi-format support,
it is not possible to use an M/E reentry signal in an overlaid manner on the key
bus or utility 1 bus even when not using the color corrector.
Example 1: When M/E-1 is selected on the M/E-2 background A bus (or
background B bus, key bus, utility 1 bus, or utility 2 bus), it is not possible
to select M/E-2 on the M/E-3 key bus or utility 1 bus.
Example 2: When M/E-2 is selected on the M/E-3 background A bus (or
background B bus, key bus, utility 1 bus, or utility 2 bus), it is not possible
to select M/E-3 on the PGM/PST key bus or utility 1 bus.
In the case of a 3M/E system, by setting bit 1 of switch S101 on the CA-
44 or CA-54 board to the “Off” position, you can remove this restriction.
Note, however, that this slightly reduces the input window.
Setting the signal format
1
In the System >Format menu, select the device for operations.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Signal Format].
A pop-up window appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Selection of device for operations 1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
294 Setup for the Whole System
3
Press the button for the desired signal format.
Switching the input reference signal for HD system
In the <Ref Input Format> group of the System >Format menu switch the input
reference signal selection.
• Tri Sync
•BB
For details, see “System Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Setting conversion formats
Installing the MKS-8450G Format Converter Board in the MVS-8000G
enables signal video format conversions.
This operation is valid only when BB is selected in the <Ref Input Format>
group.
For details of the format converter, see “System Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume
1).
1
Display the System >Format menu.
295Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
Use the methods described in step 1 in “Setting the signal format” (page
293) to select either SWR1 or SWR2.
3
To select the conversion format for format converter inputs 1 to 8, press
[FC Input 1-8 Format].
A pop-up window appears.
4
Press the button for the desired signal format.
5
To select the conversion format for format converter inputs 9 to 16, press
[FC Input 9-16 Format], then press the button for the desired signal format.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
296 Setup for the Whole System
Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio (Format Menu)
To set the screen aspect ratio, use the System >Format menu.
Setting the screen aspect ratio
1
In the System >Format menu, press [Aspect].
The Aspect menu appears.
2
In the <Screen Aspect> group, select one of the following.
• 16:9
•4:3
• Independ: Set the screen aspect ratio separately for M/E, P/P, and USER
on the switcher, and for each channel independently on the DME.
3
If you selected [Independ] in step 2, select from the following.
Switcher Aspect: Make the setting for the switcher.
DME Aspect: Make the setting for the DME.
A menu appears according to the selection.
4
Carry out either of the following, depending on the selection you made in
step 3.
When you selected [Switcher Aspect]: In each of the <M/E-1>, <M/E-
2>, <M/E-3>, <P/P>, and <USER> groups, select either [16:9] or
[4:3].
When you selected [DME Aspect]: For each of the <CH1> to <CH4>
groups, select either [16:9] or [4:3].
5
To confirm the above setting, press [Aspect Execute].
To cancel the setting and return to the original state, press [Clear] without
pressing [Aspect Execute].
When you press [Aspect Execute], a confirmation message appears.
6
Press [Yes].
This saves the screen aspect ratio setting.
297Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)
To set the initial state at start-up, use the System >Start Up menu.
Note
It is not possible to set the DCU state at start-up, but its settings can be saved
in the control panel.
To display the Start Up menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF4 ‘Start Up.’
The status area shows the current start-up mode settings of each device.
Selecting the state at start-up
1
In the status area of the System >Start Up menu, select the device to which
the settings are to apply.
2
In the <Start Up Mode> group, select one of the following modes.
Resume: When this is on, Resume mode is enabled.
Custom: When this is on, Custom mode is enabled.
For information about Resume mode and Custom mode, see “System
Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The Resume mode is only valid when a switcher or control panel is
selected for the setting.
3
When Custom mode is selected, in each of the <Setup> group and <Initial
Status> group, select one of the following.
User: When this is on, user-defined settings are used for the Setup or
Initial Status settings. For the method of saving the user-defined
settings, see the next item.
Factory: When this is on, factory default settings are used for the Setup or
Initial Status settings.
4
To confirm the settings, press [Execute]. If you want to cancel the setting
changes without saving them, press [Clear].
When [Execute] is pressed, a confirmation message appears.
5
Select [Yes].
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
298 Setup for the Whole System
The start-up state settings are saved.
Saving user-defined settings
To save the Setup settings
1
After selecting the devices to which the settings apply to, in the System
>Start Up menu, press [Setup Define].
A confirmation message appears.
2
Press [Yes].
This saves the setup settings for the selected devices in non-volatile
memory within the respective devices.
For details about the settings which will be saved, see“Data Saved by
[Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]” (page 641).
To save the Initial Status settings
1
After selecting the devices to which the settings apply to, in the System
>Start Up menu, press [Init Status Define].
A confirmation message appears.
2
Press [Yes].
This saves the initial status settings other than the “setup” settings for the
selected devices in non-volatile memory within the respective devices.
For details about the settings which will be saved, see “Data Saved by
[Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]” (page 641).
Setting automatic loading of register data at power on (autoload
function)
To have specified data read in at power on, in the System >Start Up menu,
press [Power On File Load], turning it on.
This enables the autoload function.
When the autoload function is enabled, a directory “PWON_LD” appears in
the corresponding File menu.
About saving data which can be loaded by the autoload function, see “Saving
Files Recalled by Autoload” (page 489).
299Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Reset and Initialization (Initialize Menu)
To carry out a reset or memory initialization for a device, use the System
>Initialize menu.
To display the Initialize menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF5 ‘Initialize.’
The status area shows the current start-up mode settings.
Resetting the device and initializing memory
1
In the status area of the System >Initialize menu, select the device to which
the settings are to apply.
2
In the <Initialize> group, select one of the following modes.
Reset: Reset the device.
All Clear: Initialize memory.
3
Press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears.
4
Select [Yes].
Depending on the selection in step 2, the following is the result.
• When you selected [Reset], a reset is applied to the device causing it to
be restarted in the start-up state.
• When you selected [All Clear], all memory in the device is cleared,
including snapshots, keyframe effects, setup, and so on, and the device
returns to its factory default settings. However, the Network Config,
Format, Start Up, and Date/Time settings are not initialized.
Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)
To install software or firmware in a device, use the System >Install/Unit
Config menu.
To display the Install/Unit Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF6 ‘Install/Unit
Config.’
The status area shows the version of the software and the firm ware installed in
each device.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
300 Setup for the Whole System
Installing software
1
Insert the memory card holding the software into the memory card slot.
2
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, press [Install].
The Install menu appears; the status area shows the following information.
Upper list: For each connected device, this shows the device name,
current software version (Current), and the latest version that can be
installed (Install, Title).
OK: Installation already completed.
On: For installation, but not completed.
Error: An error occurred during installation.
Cancel: Installation canceled.
Lower list: For the device selected in the upper list, this shows an
automatically detected list of software that can be installed on the
particular device. Also, software selected as a candidate for
installation in the upper list is marked in the lower list with an bullet.
3
If you are satisfied with the currently installed version of all items in the
upper list, skip to step 6.
To change the items to be installed, use any of the following methods to
select the relevant device.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The display of the lower list changes according to the selected device.
To display all related software
Press [Display All Software], turning it on.
Not just the automatically detected software, but the names of all related
software for the selected device appear.
4
In the lower list, select the software you want to install.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Device selection 1 and upwards
301Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
5
Press [Set].
The selection is reflected under “Install” and “Title” in the upper list.
6
Press [Install].
The “Install” box shows “On,” confirming that this is to be installed. To
cancel this installation setting, press “Install” once more, making the box
blank.
7
Repeat steps 3 to 6, to confirm all software to be installed.
8
Press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears.
9
Press [Yes].
This carries out the installation, and when it completes normally, the
“Install” box shows “OK.”
Displaying installation details
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, press [Detail Information].
This accesses the Detail Information menu, and displays the detailed
information on the software and firmware installed in the currently selected
device.
Making settings required to use the software
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 No Software selection 1 and upwards
BZS-8250 Simple P/P Software
BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000)
BZS-8050 Editing Control Software a)
BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 Software
BZS-8420 Color Corrector Software d)
BZS-8500M Switcher Upgrade Software b)
BZS-8510M Switcher Upgrade Software c)
BZS-8520M Mix/Effect Upgrade Software d)
BZS-8530M Mix/Effect Upgrade Software b)
BZS-8560 Switcher Upgrade Software b)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
302 Setup for the Whole System
a) This can be used only with a CCP-8000 series control panel equipped with the MKS-8010A.
b) This can be used only on the MVS-8000G.
c) This can be used only on the MVS-8000GFS.
d) This can be used only on the MVS-8000G/GFS.
e) This can be used only on the MVE-8000A.
To use the software listed above, you are required to enter an install key which
validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key
is not required.)
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.
To obtain a key, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install/Unit
Config menu of the switcher, using the following procedure.
To display the unique device ID
1
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, use either of the following
methods to select the device for which you want to register the license.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
2
Press [License].
The License menu appears as follows.
BZDM-8560 DME Upgrade Software e)
303Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
To enter the install key
When you have the install key, carry out the following procedure.
1
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, use either of the following
methods to select the device for which you want to register the license.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
2
Press [License].
The License menu appears.
3
Press directly on the name of the software you want to license (the
Condition box is blank).
4
Press [License Management].
List of software option model names and numbers
Device name
Unique device ID
Whether or not software licensed
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
304 Setup for the Whole System
The License Management menu appears.
5
Press [Activate License].
A keyboard window appears.
6
Enter the 16-character install key you have been given, and press [Enter].
A license registration completed message appears.
7
Press [OK].
The status area Condition box shows “Active.”
8
Using either of the following methods, restart the device.
• In the System >Initialize menu, with only the device for which you
registered the license being selected, press [Reset] in the <Initialize>
group and then press [Execute].
• Power off and on again.
After restarting, the licensed software is now available for use.
(In case it becomes necessary to cancel the license registration, you can use the
following procedure.)
To cancel the license registration
1
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, use either of the following
methods to select the device for which you want to cancel the license
registration.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
2
Press [License].
The License menu appears.
3
Press directly on the name of the software for which you want to cancel the
license registration (the Condition box shows “Active”).
4
Press [License Management].
The License Management menu appears.
5
Press [Deactivate License].
A confirmation message appears.
305Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
6
Press [Yes].
A license registration canceled message appears.
7
Press [OK].
The status area Condition box showing “Active” changes to blank.
8
Using either of the following methods, restart the device.
• In the System >Initialize menu, select only the device for which you
registered the license, and press [Reset] in the <Initialize> group.
• Power off and on again.
After restarting, the software for which the license registration has been
canceled is no longer available.
Adding user texture patterns
You can add user created texture patterns to the repertory of texture patterns
with which the spotlighting function enables the light falls on the image
surface.
Note
This function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.
For details of spotlighting, see page 126, and for details of texture patterns, see
page 128.
The procedure for adding a texture pattern is as follows.
To prepare a texture file
Create a texture file meeting the following conditions, and save it on a memory
card.
File format: Windows bmp (“bitmap”) (extension: bmp, 24-bit RGB)
File name: alphanumeric (maximum 8 characters) + extension (bmp)
Example: wood_01.bmp
Image size (horizontal × vertical): 128 × 128 to 1024 × 1024 pixels
Prepare the texture file
(next item)
m
Create the texture package
(page 308)
m
Install the texture package
(page 310)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
306 Setup for the Whole System
The maximum number of texture files that can be handled by the system is
related to the image size of the texture files, as shown in the following table
(when all images are the same size).
Notes
• Different image sizes can be combined, but this affects the total number of
texture files that can be handled.
• The number of texture files that can be handled may be reduced, depending
on the way in which they are stored in memory (see “Texture Package
menu” (page 306)).
• For a texture file with an image size outside the specification, the minimum
enclosing image size is applied (see table above), and the region below and
to the right is filled with black.
Example: a 300 × 200 pixel texture file is treated as 512 × 256 pixels.
Texture Package menu
To create user texture patterns, use the Texture Package menu.
Maximum number of texture files handled
Dimension (horizontal)
Dimension (vertical)
128 pixels 256 pixels 512 pixels 1024 pixels
128 pixels 64 32 16 8
256 pixels 32 16 8 4
512 pixels 16 8 4 2
1024 pixels 8421
200
256
300
512
307Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
aThe rest of the capacity (available memory space)
This shows an available memory space in units of 128×128 pixels (a maximum
of 64 units of memory space is available).
bTexture number list
This shows the texture numbers (101 to 164) registered in the texture package.
The list Capacity shows the file size in units of 128×128 pixels (a total
maximum of 64 units of texture files can be registered).
5Grid display of memory capacity
6Select button
7Delete button
8Make Package
button
1The rest of the capacity
2Texture number list
3Directory selection button
4Texture file list
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
308 Setup for the Whole System
cDirectory selection button
By pressing this button to display the popup window, you can select a directory
on the memory card.
dTexture file list
This shows the texture files stored on the memory card.
If a texture file is stored in a directory, press the directory selection button and
select the directory in the popup window, to show a list of files.
The list Capacity shows the file size in units of 128×128 pixels.
eGrid display of memory capacity
This shows how the texture files are stored in memory (an 8×8 grid, of 64
squares, each equivalent to 128×128 pixels).
And this shows the location where the texture files are stored in memory by
bold frames. The grid for the texture file selected in the texture number list is
shown in amber.
fSelect button
Pressing this button assigns the texture file selected in the texture file list to the
number selected in the texture number list.
gDelete button
Pressing this button deletes the texture file assigned to the number in the
texture number list.
hMake Package button
Pressing this button creates the texture package.
To create a texture package
To use a user-provided texture pattern with the spotlighting function, it is
necessary to convert the texture files to vector files for bump mapping. This
operation is referred to as “creating a texture package.”
1
Insert the memory card holding the texture file into the memory card slot.
2
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF6 ‘Install/Unit
Config.’
The Install/Unit Config menu appears; the status area shows the version
information for the software installed on the various devices.
3
Using any of the following methods, select a DME for which the
spotlighting license is valid.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
309Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Turn the knob.
4
Press [Texture Package].
Note
If you select a device for which the spotlighting license is not enabled, then
[Texture Package] is not enabled.
The Texture Package menu appears.
For details of the Texture Package menu, see page 306.
5
In the texture number list, select the number for which you want to register
the texture package, by any of the following methods.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
6
In the texture file list, select the texture file by any of the following
methods.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of the setting values depends on the number of saved files on a memory card.
7
In the <Texture Pattern> group, press [Select].
This assigns the texture file selected in step 6 to the number selected in step
5, and updates the texture number list.
The grid display of memory capacity shows the location where the texture
files are stored in memory by bold frames. The grid portion for the texture
file selected in the texture number list is shown in amber.
8
Repeat steps 5 to 7, to assign all of the texture files to texture packages.
Notes
• If you assign a texture file that is already in the texture number list to a
different texture number, then the previous assignment is deleted. (It is
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Texture No Texture number selection 101 to 164
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Texture file selection 1 and upwards a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
310 Setup for the Whole System
not possible to assign the same texture file to two or more different
texture numbers.)
• In the following cases, texture file assignment is not possible.
– If there is no available memory space (“The rest of the capacity:0”
appears)
– If the selected texture file is too large to fit in the available memory
space
To delete a texture file assignment
Select the texture file (multiple selections are not possible) you want to
delete in the texture number list, and in the <Texture Pattern> group press
[Delete].
9
To create the texture package, press [Make Package].
A confirmation message appears.
10
Select [OK].
The texture package is created in the same location that the texture file is
stored on the memory card (extension: zsp, file name generated
automatically).
Notes
• If you remove the memory card on which the texture file is stored, it is
not possible to create the texture package.
• If a texture package is already present on the memory card, it is
overwritten by a new texture package.
• If you carry out steps 9 and 10 without having assigned even one texture
file, it is not possible to create a texture package.
• If there is insufficient space on the memory card to store the texture
package, an error message appears, and the process is aborted. If this
happens, delete unwanted files from the memory card using your
computer, so that there is enough free space on the memory card, and
repeat the process. (As a guide, the space required is approximately
equal to total number of bytes of the texture files assigned in steps 5 to
8.)
To Install the texture package
1
Insert the memory card holding the texture package into the memory card
slot.
2
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF6 ‘Install/Unit
Config.’
311Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
The Install/Unit Config menu appears; the status area shows the version
information for the software installed on the various devices.
3
Press [Install].
The System >Install/Unit Config >Install menu appears; the status area
shows the following information.
Upper list: For each connected device, this shows the device name,
current software version (Current), and the information about the
texture package that can be installed (Install, Title).
OK: Installation already completed.
On: For installation, but not completed.
Error: An error occurred during installation.
Cancel: Installation canceled.
Lower list: For the device selected in the upper list, this shows an
automatically detected list of software that can be installed on the
particular device. Also, software selected as a candidate for
installation in the upper list is marked in the lower list with an asterisk.
4
Using any of the following methods, select in the upper list a DME for
which the spotlighting license is valid.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
Press [Display All Software], turning it on.
The lower list shows the texture packages.
6
Using any of the following methods, select the texture package you want
to install from the lower list.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
7
Press [Set].
The selection is reflected under “Install” and “Title” in the upper list.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device Device selection 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 No Package selection 1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
312 Setup for the Whole System
8
Press [Install].
The “Install” box shows “On,” confirming that this is to be installed. To
cancel this installation setting, press “Install” once more, making the box
blank.
9
To carry out the installation, press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears.
10
Select [Yes].
This carries out the installation, and when it completes normally, the
“Install” box shows “OK.”
Switching the color correction function
Notes
• After making the setting, be sure to finally press [Execute] to confirm the
setting. To cancel the setting during the process, press [Clear].
• This setting is not required for the MVS-8000G because secondary color
correction and spot color adjustment can be enabled at the same time on the
MVS-8000G.
1
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu status area, select SWR1 or
SWR2, where the color correction function is installed.
2
Press [Unit Config].
• The Unit Config menu appears.
• The status area shows the device name and the currently selected color
correction function name.
3
In the <CCR Config> group, select either of the following.
Spot CCR: Enable the spot color adjustment function.
Secondary CCR: Enable the secondary color correction function.
4
Press [Execute].
A confirmation message appears.
5
Select [Yes].
• This resets the device and switches the function.
• The color correction settings are all reinitialized.
313Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Inverting the field polarity of frame memory images on the
system level
Note
This function is valid when the signal format is HD (excluding 720P).
Except, when the [FM Ancillary] button is on, the setting is fixed in Reverse
mode.
1
In the status area in the System >Install/Unit Config menu, select the
switcher (SWRx), and press [Unit Config].
The Unit Config menu appears.
2
In the <FM Data> group, select one of the following modes.
Normal: In the frame memory system, do not invert the image field
polarity.
Reverse: When saving an input image to frame memory or recalling an
image you want to save, invert the field polarity.
The factory default setting is “Normal.”
A popup window appears with a message.
3
Check the message, and press [OK].
Notes
• In previous versions of the MVS-8000A, the frame memory system operated
in the “Reverse” mode as described here. In this version, by setting <FM
Data> to “Reverse,” you can continue operating in the previous way, but in
this state when importing or exporting an image, or loading a frame memory
file created on the MVS-8000, the field polarity is inverted. It is therefore
recommended to set <FM Data> to “Normal.”
• In the “Normal” mode, frame memory files created with MVS-8000A
Version 5.21 or earlier have the fields inverted. In this case, use the Field
Invert menu to carry out field inversion for each individual file.
For details, see “Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field
Invert Function)” in Chapter 7 (Volume 1).
Allowing MVS-8000A/MVS-8000G files to be used on the MVS-
8000
This function allows files saved on an MVS-8000A system or MVS-8000G
system to be used on the MVS-8000. With this function enabled, when data is
recalled it is corrected as required, depending on the application and file
version information.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
314 Setup for the Whole System
Notes
• This function is only valid on the MVS-8000 system.
• On the MVS-8000 system, Version 5.42 or later of the application software
must be installed.
• The files that can be corrected are those saved on an MVS-8000A or MVS-
8000G system with Version 7.1 or later of the application software.
• For the MVS-8000 system control panel application software, the MVS-
8000A or MVS-8000G system equivalent or later version must be installed.
1
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, select [Menu] and press [Unit
Config].
The Unit Config menu appears.
2
Press [File Auto Convert], turning it on.
A confirmation message appears.
3
Press [OK].
Saving a frame memory clip including ancillary data
1
In the System >Install/Unit Config menu, select [SWRx], and press [Unit
Config].
The Unit Config menu appears.
2
Press [FM Ancillary], turning it on.
On: Save with ancillary data.
Off: Save without ancillary data.
Note
Enabling this selection by pressing [Execute] in the following step
reinitializes all frame memory data. Make backups of required data
beforehand.
3
Press [Execute].
A popup window appears, displaying a message.
4
Check the message, and select [Yes].
315Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
System Maintenance (Maintenance Menu)
The system date and time, memory card and USB related settings, setup menu
lock settings, and so on, appear in the System >Maintenance menu.
To display the Maintenance menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF1 ‘System’ and HF7 ‘Maintenance.’
In the status area, the current date and time, and details of the memory card
appear.
Setting the date and time
For system date and time settings, use the following procedure.
1
In the System >Maintenance menu, turn the knobs to set the following
parameters.
Parameter group [1/2]
Parameter group [2/2]
The set date and time appears in the “Set” box in the status area.
2
Press the [Set Date/Time] button.
This sets the current time to the date and time set in step 1, and the setting
in the “Current” box of the status area changes accordingly.
Displaying memory card information
1
Insert the memory card into the memory card slot.
2
In the <USB Storage Device> group of the System >Maintenance menu,
press [Refresh].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Hour Hour 0 to 23
2 Min Minute 0 to 59
3 Sec Second 0 to 59
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Month Month 1 to 12
2 Day Day 1 to 31
3 Year Year 2000 to 2037
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
316 Setup for the Whole System
Formatting a memory card
Note
Format a memory card before using it for the first time.
1
Insert the memory card in the memory card slot.
2
In the System >Maintenance menu, using either of the following methods,
select the USB device.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
3
In the <USB Storage Device> group, press [Format].
A confirmation message appears.
4
To carry out the formatting, press [YES].
This formats the memory card.
Carrying out the primary setting
To specify a USB device with a storage device connected as a primary device,
use the following procedure.
Note
Without this setting, you cannot use the “Memory Card” item in the File menu
to access a memory card on a storage device connected to the USB device.
1
In the System >Maintenance menu, using any of the following methods,
select the USB device you want to set as primary.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
In the <USB Storage Device> group, press [Set Primary].
Making the primary setting automatic
In the <USB Storage Device> group, press [Auto Detect].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Mount Point USB device selection 1 to 18
317Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Reloading a USB driver
To reload a USB driver, in the System >Maintenance menu, press [Reload
USB Driver].
Note
If even after this operation the memory card is not recognized, remove the
memory card and reinsert it, then try again.
Initializing the hard disk
If a file system corruption error has occurred on the hard disk, you should
initialize the hard disk.
1
In the <HDD> group of the System >Maintenance menu, press [HDD
Format].
Note
When the hard disk is operating normally, pressing [HDD Format] has no
effect.
An initialization confirmation message appears.
2
To execute the initialization operation, press [Yes]. To cancel, press [No].
If you have pressed [Yes], the hard disk initialization operation is
executed, and a finished message appears. If you have pressed [No], the
initialization operation is canceled, and the System >Maintenance menu
appears again.
3
Press [OK].
The processor is reset.
Locking the setup menu settings
To protect the data, you can inhibit operations in selected setup menus. Use the
following procedure. (It is not possible to lock the Setup Operation Lock
menu.)
1
In the System >Maintenance menu, press [Setup Operation Lock].
The Setup Operation Lock menu appears.
2
In the <VF Group> group, select the group including the desired menu.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
318 Setup for the Whole System
The status area shows a list of menu numbers and menu names in the
selected group.
Subsequent lock operations apply within the group selected here.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the menu or the set of menus
as candidates for the locking operation.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• To select all setup menus within the selected group, press [ALL].
You can also select a menu while it is open. For details, see “To select an
opened setup menu for locking” (page 319).
4
Press [Lock Item Select].
This makes the selected menus candidates for locking, and a padlock icon
appears in the “Lock” box (in the unlocked state) .
Note
If there are already one or more locked menus, selection of lock candidates
is not possible.
To deselect a lock candidate
After selecting a menu, press [Lock Item Select] once more, to clear the
Lock box.
To deselect all lock candidates in the selected VF group
Press [Lock Item All Clear].
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4, to select all of the lock candidates.
6
Press [Lock].
A keyboard window appears.
7
Enter the password with a maximum of 16 characters, and press [Enter].
If the password is correct, the menus selected in the list of candidates are
all locked. The padlock icon changes to the locked state .
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Selection of a menu by its number
in the list
1 and upwards
3 Num Selection of number of menus in
the list
1 and upwards
319Setup for the Whole System
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Releasing the lock
When a lock is already applied, use the following procedure.
1
In the System >Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock menu, press [Lock].
A keyboard window appears.
2
Enter the password.
If the password is correct, the lock is released, and the padlock icon
disappears.
To change the lock password
1
In the System >Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock menu, press [Change
Password].
A confirmation message appears.
2
Press [Yes].
A keyboard window labeled “Old Password” appears.
3
Enter the old password, and press [Enter].
If the password is correct, a keyboard window labeled “New Password”
appears.
4
Enter the new password, and press [Enter].
5
Enter the new password once more, for confirmation.
This sets the new password.
To select an opened setup menu for locking
With the menu you want to lock open, press Lock Item Select button at the
lower left.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
320 Setup for the Whole System
The [Lock Item Select] button turns red, and a padlock icon appears.
This selection is reflected in the lock candidate list in the Setup Operation Lock
menu.
Note
If there are already one or more locked menus, selection of lock candidates is
not possible.
In this case, the indication of the [Lock Item Select] button changes as follows.
If you want to select lock candidates, first remove the lock in the Setup
Operation Lock menu.
VF button
Lock Item Select button
HF button
When the displayed
menu is locked
When a menu other
than the displayed
menu is locked
321Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setup Relating to Operations From the
Control Panel
Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)
To carry out the overall control panel settings, use the Panel >Config menu.
To display the Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF1 ‘Config.’
The status area shows the “Bank numbers 1 to 4” (physical locations) of the M/
E and PGM/PST banks, the allocated bank names, and whether or not operation
is enabled.
Interchanging the bank order or disabling operation
1
In the Panel >Config menu, select the Bank you want to set, using any of
the following methods.
• Press directly on the status area display.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The Bank selection here indicates the physical position on the control
panel, numbering from the top as the 1st Row, 2nd Row, 3rd Row, and 4th
Row.
2
Select the bank that you want to assign to the selected Bank number in the
<M/E Assign> group.
The status area shows the interchanged state of the banks.
Notes
• It is not possible to assign the same M/E logical bank to more than one
physical bank. Be sure to make different M/E assignments.
• When the bank order is changed, the state of region selection button
assignment in the numeric keypad control block also changes
correspondingly.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Select the position of the bank you want
to set
1 to 4
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
322 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
3
For the selected Bank number, in the <M/E Operation> group, select one
of the following.
Enable: Enable panel display and operation of the bank.
Disable: Enable only panel display, and disable operation of the bank.
Inhibit: Disable both the panel display and operation of the bank.
Note
When this is set to Inhibit, snapshots of the bank are not recalled.
Assigning two M/E banks to one M/E bank
1
In the Panel >Config menu, select the M/E bank for which you want to
make the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) Depends on the center control panel configuration. When the bank closest to the operator
(the 4th row of a 4-M/E system) is selected, [Dual M/E Assign] is disabled.
For example, if the furthest bank from you is assigned to M/E-1, and you
want no shift button operation for the bank, select 1 (1st Row) for Bank.
2
Press [Dual M/E Assign].
This assigns the furthest M/E bank from you to the unshifted (shifted)
cross-points and the M/E bank in front of it to the shifted (unshifted) cross-
points. For fader lever operations, only the M/E bank closer to you is
enabled.
The shift/non-shift assignment is set by [Dual M/E Xpt Swap]. For more
details, see the next section, “Interchanging shifted and non-shifted
operations for a dual M/E.”
To return to the original assignment
Interchange the bank order (see page 321).
Interchanging shifted and non-shifted operations for a dual M/E
1
In the Panel >Config menu, select the M/E bank for which the dual M/E
setting is made.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Selection of position of bank for which you
want to make the setting 1 to 4 a)
323Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) Depends on the center control panel configuration.
2
Press [Dual M/E Xpt Swap], toggling it on or off.
On: The lower M/E bank is non-shifted, and the higher M/E bank is
shifted.
Off: The lower M/E bank is shifted, and the higher M/E bank is non-
shifted.
Assigning the key delegation in the downstream key control
block
As an example, to assign key 4 of the M/E-1 bank to key delegation button 1
of the downstream key control block 1, use the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press the [DSK Fader Assign].
The DSK Fader Assign menu appears.
2
Directly press on the indications in the status area, to select the
downstream key control block for which you want to make the setting, and
select the key delegation.
Here, press on the intersection of the “1st Module” column and “Key1
Assign” row.
3
In the <M/E Select> group, select the bank of the key you want to assign.
Here, select [M/E-1] as an example.
4
In the <Key Link Select> group, select the key you want to assign.
Here, select [Key4] as an example.
5
To disable the fader lever of the selected downstream key control block,
select [Disable] in the <Fader Assign> group.
To enable the fader lever, select one of the following in the <Fader
Assign> group, determine the key to which the fader lever operation
applies.
All: Key selected with one of the key delegation buttons
Key1: Key assigned to key delegation button 1 ([DSK1] button)
Key2: Key assigned to key delegation button 2 ([DSK2] button)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Bank to be selected for dual
M/E setting 1 to 4 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
324 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Key3: Key assigned to key delegation button 3 ([DSK3] button)
Key4: Key assigned to key delegation button 4 ([DSK4] button)
Linking switcher bus and router destination
To provide links between the switcher bus and router destination, make the
following settings as required.
Matrix selection: Select the target of link setting from the eight matrices (1 to
8).
Matrix position definition: Set the start address and level for the source and
destination on the S-Bus.
Link table setting: Link a switcher cross-point button and matrix source.
Link bus setting: Link a switcher bus address and router destination.
To select a matrix number
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
In the <Link> group, press [External Bus Link].
The External Bus Link menu appears.
The status area shows the current link status.
3
Turn the knobs to select the matrix.
In the status area, the color of the selected part changes.
4
Press [Link Matrix Set].
This confirms the matrix selection and the selected part in the status area
returns to the previous color.
To delete a link
With the link selected, press [Clear].
To define the position of a matrix
Specify where in the 1024 × 1024 S-Bus space the link matrix is to be provided,
by setting the source and destination start address.
For the matrix selected in the External Bus Link menu, use the following
procedure.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number 1 to 64
2 Link Matrix Matrix number 1 to 8
325Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
1
In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link menu,
press [Link Matrix Adjust].
The Link Matrix Adjust menu appears.
The status area shows the status of the currently selected matrix, and a list
of the source and destination start addresses that can be selected.
In this menu too, you can use the knobs to select the link for the setting.
2
Using any of the following methods, define the position of the matrix to be
linked.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
To confirm a source address selected in step 2, press [Source Set], to
confirm a destination address press [Destination Set], and to confirm a
level press [Level Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.
To set a link table
For the link selected in the External Bus Link menu, make the settings as
follows.
1
In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link >Link
Matrix Adjust menu, press [Link Table Adjust].
The Link Table Adjust menu appears.
The status area lists the status of the currently selected link, combinations
of video signals and sources, and the sources that can be selected.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the switcher cross-point button
and the matrix source to be linked to the button.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Source Source start address 1 to 897
3 Destination Destination start address 1 to 897
4 Level Level 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Main No Switcher cross-point button 1 to 128
2 Source No Matrix source selection 1 to 128
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
326 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
3
To confirm the matrix source selection made in step 2, press [Link Source
Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.
4
As required, repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the matrix sources to be linked
to other cross-point buttons.
To initialize the set links
In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link >Link Matrix
Adjust menu, press [Init Link Table].
A confirmation message appears.
Press [Yes].
The links set using the above procedure are initialized to the default settings,
and this is reflected in the status area.
To make link bus settings
For the link number selected in the External Bus Link menu, use the following
procedure.
1
In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button >External Bus Link menu,
press [Link Bus Adjust].
The Link Bus Adjust menu appears. The status area lists the current link
status, and the switcher buses and router destinations that can be selected.
In this menu too, you can use knob 1 to select the link to be set.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the switcher bus and the router
destination to be linked to the switcher bus.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
To confirm the bus selected in step 2, press [Master Bus Set], and to
confirm the destination press [Linked Dest Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.
Linking transitions between keyers
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Internal Bus Switcher bus selection 1 to 128
3 Destination Router destination selection 1 to 128
327Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
In the <Link> group, press [Key Trans Link].
The Key Trans Link menu appears.
The status area shows the keyers for each M/E bank and the linked keyers.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the keyer to be the master.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected keyer appears in reverse video.
4
In the <Key Select> group, select the keyer to be linked to the transition of
the master.
Note
Linking does not apply to a transition carried out with the downstream key
control block.
Linking the next transition selection buttons
To the transition links between keyers, you can add a link for the next transition
selection buttons in the transition control block. The effect of this additional
link is such that if for example, two keyers (Key 2 and Key 3) are linked with
the master keyer (Key 1), pressing the [KEY1] next transition selection button
also selects the [KEY2] and [KEY3] buttons.
1
Set the transition links between keyers.
For details of the operation, see the previous section, “Linking transitions
between keyers.”
2
Press [Next Trans Link], turning it on.
The [KEY1], [KEY2], [KEY3], and [KEY4] next transition selection
buttons in the transition control block are now selected coupled to the
settings in the Key Trans Link menu for transition links between keyers.
Note
These settings apply to the whole Key Trans Link menu. It is not possible
to make separate settings for each master keyer.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Master Key Select keyer to be master 1 to 16
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
328 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Selecting the module to be the reference for device control block
In the <Reference Module> group of the Panel >Config menu, select the
module to be the reference.
• Trackball
• Joystick
Assigning a region to a region selection button in the numeric
keypad control block
A maximum of four regions can be set for a single region selection button in
the numeric keypad control block.
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [10 Key Region Assign].
The 10 Key Region Assign menu appears.
The left side of the status area shows region selection buttons; the upper
part of the right side shows a list of regions assigned to region selection
buttons, and the lower part shows a list of assignable regions.
2
Press the indication of the button for the assignment.
The button you pressed appears in reverse video.
3
Using any of the following methods, select one of the four regions for the
setting.
• Press directly on the list in the upper part of the right side.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor in the list in the
upper part of the right side.
• Turn the knob.
329Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
4
Using any of the following methods, select the region to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the lower part of the right side.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor in the list in the
lower part of the right side.
• Turn the knob.
5
Press [Set], to confirm the selection.
This assigns the region to the region selection button in the numeric
keypad control block.
Note
Only regions assigned here can be used for keyframe or snapshot recall.
If an M/E bank is not assigned to a region selection button in the numeric
keypad control block, the M/E Flexi Pad control block cannot be used to recall
a snapshot.
To set the region selection buttons selected when the [ALL] button
is pressed
1
In the Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu, press [All Select] in
the button area, or the [All Select] button indication in the status area,
setting it to On.
The [All Select] button indication in the status area changes to orange, and
the system switches to a mode for assigning region selection buttons to the
[ALL] button. In the factory default state, all buttons appear in reverse
video, and are assigned to the [ALL] button.
2
If you do not want to assign any region selection button to the [ALL]
button, press the corresponding button indication, setting it to Off.
The button you pressed returns to normal display.
Note
Assignment to the [ALL] button is region by region. Changing the assignment
of a region selection button does not change the regions assigned to the [ALL]
button.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Assign Selection to which setting
applies
1 to 4
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Region Region selection 1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
330 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
To return the region assignment to the factory default state
In the Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu, press [Default].
This returns the assignment of region selection buttons in the numeric keypad
control block to the factory default state.
To delete a region assignment
In step 3 of the procedure “Assigning a region to a region selection button in
the numeric keypad control block” (page 328), make the selection to which the
operation applies, then press [Clear].
This clears the assignment of the selected region.
Setting the assignment of transition type selection buttons
You can change the assignment of transition type selection buttons in the
transition control block.
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Transition Module].
The Transition Module menu appears.
3
Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the <Bank
Select> group.
The current assignment of the transition type selection buttons appears at
the upper left.
4
Press the transition type selection button for which you want to change the
assignment.
The button you pressed appears in reverse video.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the transition type to be
assigned, from the list on the right.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
6
Press [Set].
The texts on the button illustrations change to reflect the selection.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button
Assign
Selection of transition type 1 to 10
331Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
To cancel the assignment
Press [Clear].
To make the assignment the default
Press [Default].
Setting VTR operation button assignment
You can change the assignment of some of the buttons in the transition control
block for use in VTR operations.
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Transition Module].
The Transition Module menu appears.
3
Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the <Bank
Select> group.
In the center on the left, [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] appear with
their current assignments.
Note
This only appears when the transition control block is a standard type or
compact type.
On the lower left, [PTN LIMIT], [LIMIT SET], and [KF] appear with their
current assignments.
Note
This only appears when the transition control block is a standard type.
4
Press any of the [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] buttons.
The three buttons appear in reverse video.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the button functions for the
assignment from the list on the right.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
332 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
The following are the button functions.
Normal/Reverse: Use the respective buttons as a [NORM] button,
[NORM/REV] button, and [REV] button for VTR operations.
Play/Stop/Cue: Use the respective buttons as a [PLAY] button, [STOP]
button, and [CUE] button for VTR operations.
6
Press [Set].
The texts on the button displays change to the selected items.
7
Press any of the [PTN LIMIT], [LIMIT SET], and [KF] buttons.
The three buttons appear in reverse video.
8
Select the button functions for the assignment from the list on the right.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The following are the button functions.
Ptn Limit /KF: Use the respective buttons as a [PTN LIMIT] button,
[LIMIT SET] button, and [KF] button.
Play/Stop/Cue: Use the respective buttons as a [PLAY] button, [STOP]
button, and [CUE] button for VTR operations.
9
Press [Set].
The texts on the button displays change to the selected items.
To inhibit the button operations
Press [Clear].
To make the assignment the default
Press [Default].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button
Assign
Selection of button functions 1 or 2
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button
Assign
Selection of button functions 1 or 2
333Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setting the assignment of macro operation buttons
Note
This setting applies to all simple type Flexi Pad control blocks on the control
panel.
To switch the [UNDO] button on a simple type Flexi Pad control block to a
[MCRO] button for macro operation, use the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button menu, press [Flexi Pad
Module].
The Flexi Pad Module menu appears.
2
Select the assignment of the [UNDO] button in the simple type Flexi Pad
control block from the <UNDO Button Assign> group.
UNDO: use as an [UNDO] button.
MACRO: use as a [MCRO] button.
Assigning the dual background bus mode switching function
The dual background bus mode is a mode in which the background A row
shifted signal can be selected with the key 1 row, and the background B row
shifted signal can be selected with the key 2 row. To switch this mode on and
off, it is necessary to assign this function to the cross-point control block [PRE
MCRO] button.
For details of the dual background bus, see “Signal Selection” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Xpt Module].
The Xpt Module menu appears.
3
Select the bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3 or P/P) in the status area.
4
In the <PRE MCRO/POST MCRO> group, select [Dual Bkgd Bus].
This assigns the dual background mode to the [PRE MCRO] button, and
disables the [POST MCRO] button.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
334 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Assigning the utility/shot box mode switching function
You can first assign functions to the key 2 row cross-point buttons, and then
use them in the same way as the buttons in the utility/shot box control block.
To switch this mode on and off, it is necessary to assign this function to the
cross-point control block [PRE MCRO] button.
For details of how to assign a function to this button, see “Assigning a function
to the key 2 row cross-point buttons” (page 367).
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Xpt Module].
The Xpt Module menu appears..
3
Select the setting target (M/E-1 to M/E-3 or P/P) in the status area.
4
Select [Utility/Shotbox] in the <PRE MCRO/POST MCRO> group.
This assigns the utility/shot box mode to the [PRE MCRO] button, and
disables the [POST MCRO] button.
Assigning the function to disable cross-point button operations
to a button
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Xpt Module].
The Xpt Module menu appears.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the bank.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Press [Inhibit Set].
This assigns the function to disable cross-point button operations to the
[PRE MCRO] button.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Bank selection 1 to 4
335Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Assigning keys to the DSK1 and DSK2 buttons in the
downstream key/fade-to-black control block
It is possible to select the key used for downstream key/fade-to-black control
block operations.
For details of the downstream key/fade-to-black control block, see Chapter 2
(Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >Config >Link/Program Button menu, press [DSK/FTB
Module].
The DSK/FTB Module menu appears.
The left side of the status area shows the DSK1 and DSK2 buttons, and the
right side shows a list of keys to be assigned.
2
Press the indication (DSK1, DSK2) of the button for the assignment.
The button you pressed changes to reverse video.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the key to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Press [Set], to confirm the selection.
This assigns the selected key to the key delegation button.
To return the key delegation button assignment to the factory
default state
In the DSK/FTB Module menu, press [Default].
This returns the key delegation assignment to the factory default state.
Assigning keys to the independent key transition control block
(simple type)
It is possible to select the keys that can be used in an independent key transition
control block (simple type) operation.
For details of the independent key transition control block (simple type), see
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Key No Selection of key assigned to
button
1 to 16
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
336 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
The control panel comprises a main base for installing the principal switcher
bank control blocks, and an extension section for extended control blocks. The
independent key transition control block (simple type) can be installed in
either, but the assignable keys differ as follows.
When the independent key transition control block (simple type) is
installed in the main base
Select the keys to be assigned from the following.
• Key1,2 (keys 1 and 2)
• Key3,4 (keys 3 and 4)
• DSK1,2 (downstream keys 1 and 2)
• DSK3,4 (downstream keys 3 and 4)
• N/A (no assignment)
In this case, “Key1,2” and “Key3,4” are the keys of the switcher bank (M/E-1,
M/E-2, M/E-3, PGM/PST) in which the independent key transition control
block is installed and whose assignment is determined by the M/E Assign
menu.
When the independent key transition control block (simple type) is
installed in the extension section
Select the keys to be assigned from the following.
• M/E-1 Key1,2
• M/E-1 Key3,4
• M/E-2 Key1,2
• M/E-2 Key3,4
• M/E-3 Key1,2
• M/E-3 Key3,4
•DSK1,2
•DSK3,4
•Key1,2
1)
•Key3,4
1)
1) In this case, depending on the switcher extension interface port, operations always apply to
the following.
Ext Port 1: M/E-1
Ext Port 2: M/E-2
Ext Port 3: M/E-3
• N/A (no assignment)
To assign a key to the independent key transition control block (simple type),
use the following procedure. Here the example shown is the case in which keys
3 and 4 (“Key3,4”) are assigned to the second row switcher bank of the main
base.
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Compact Key Module Assign].
The Compact Key Module Assign menu appears.
337Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
The left side of the status area shows data for the main base (physical
layout and switcher bank names and key assignment). The right side shows
the data for the extension section (physical ports and key assignment).
2
Press directly on the display on the left, to select the control block for the
assignment.
Here, press on the intersection of the “2nd Row” column and “Module
Assign” row.
3
In the <Module Assign> group, select the key you want to assign.
In this example, select [Key3,4].
To return the key assignment to the default
In the Compact Key Module Assign menu, press [Default].
This returns all key assignments to their factory default state.
Assigning preview output to preview selection buttons
It is possible to assign any preview output to a preview selection button.
This applies to the preview selection buttons in the fade-to-black control block
and the downstream key/fade-to-black control block.
For details of these control blocks, see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Fade To Black Module].
The Fade To Black Module menu appears.
On the left of the status area, preview selection buttons (1 to 11) appear.
On the right side a list of signals to be assigned appears.
3
In the button indications on the left, press the button for the assignment.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the signal to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list on the right.
• In the list on the right, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Button Button selection 1 to 20
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
338 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
5
Press [Set].
This assigns the signal selected in the list to the button.
To cancel an assignment
Select the button, then press [Clear].
This leaves nothing assigned.
To return all preview selection button assignments to the factory
default state
In the Fade To Black Module menu, press [Default].
Assigning devices or functions to the device selection buttons
and other buttons of the device control block (search dial)
You can assign devices and functions to the device selection buttons, SBOX
buttons and [DELAY] button of the device control block (search dial).
For details of the device control block (search dial), see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Device Control Module].
The Device Control Module menu appears.
The left of the status area shows the device selection buttons, SBOX
buttons and [DELAY] button of the device control block (search dial). The
list on the right shows the devices and functions that can be assigned.
3
In the button displays on the left, press the button for the assignment.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the device or function to be
assigned.
• Press directly on the list on the right.
• In the list on the right, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
Press [Set].
This assigns the device or function selected in the list to the button.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1Device
Function
Selection of device or
function to be assigned
1 and upwards
339Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
To cancel an assignment
Select the button, then press [Clear].
This removes the assignment to that button.
To return all device selection button assignments to the factory
default state
In the Device Control Module menu, press [Default].
Assigning devices and functions to the region selection buttons
of the device control block (trackball)/device control block
(joystick)
You can assign devices and functions to the region selection buttons of the
device control block (trackball)/device control block (joystick)
For details of the device control block (trackball)/device control block
(joystick), see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Joystick/Trackball Module].
The Joystick/Trackball Module menu appears.
The left of the status area shows the region selection buttons of the device
control block. The list on the right shows the devices and functions that can
be assigned.
3
In the button displays on the left, press the button for the assignment.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the device or function to be
assigned.
• Press directly on the list on the right.
• In the list on the right, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
Press [Set].
This assigns the device or function selected in the list to the button.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Device
Function
Selection of device or
function to be assigned
1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
340 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
To cancel an assignment
Select the button, then press [Clear].
This removes the assignment to that button.
To return all device selection button assignments to the factory
default state
In the Joystick/Trackball Module menu, press [Default].
Inhibiting utility 2 bus and key operations
You can inhibit operations on the utility 2 bus and keys 1 to 4 of the M/E and
P/P banks by menu operations.
This inhibitions apply for the following control blocks.
• Cross-point control block
• Transition control block
• Independent key transition control block 1)
1) Only when the Key1, 2 or Key 3, 4 are assigned by the Compact Key Module Assign menu.
Note
In the AUX bus control block and other control blocks which are excluded
from M/E and P/P banks, the operations on the utility 2 bus and keys 1 to 4 are
not inhibited.
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [M/E Operation Inhibit].
M/E Operation Inhibit menu appears.
2
In the list in the status area, using any of the following methods, select the
switcher bank for which operations are to be inhibited.
• Press directly on the desired switcher bank in the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <M/E Operation Inhibit> group, press the utility 2 bus or key button
([Util2 Bus] or [Key1] to [Key4]) for which operations are to be inhibited.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Switcher bank selection for
inhibiting operations
1 to 4
341Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Assigning functions to the menu control block Top menu and
user preference buttons
To these 41 buttons, you can freely assign a menu recall or user preference
button function.
For details of the menu control block, see Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >Config menu, press [Link/Program Button].
The Link/Program Button menu appears.
2
Press [Menu Panel].
The Menu Panel menu appears.
The left side of the status area shows the Top menu selection buttons and
user preference buttons, and the right side shows a list of menus and
actions to be assigned.
3
Using any of the following methods, scroll the display.
• Press the arrow keys.
• Turn the knob.
4
In the button indications on the left, press the button for the assignment.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the menu or action to be
assigned.
• Press directly on the right list.
• Press the arrow keys on the right list to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
6
Press [Set].
This assigns the menu or action selected in the list to the button.
To cancel an assignment, select the button, then press [Clear].
To return all button assignments to the factory default state, in the Menu
Panel menu, press [Default].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Scroll Scroll 1 to 5
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Menu/Action Select the menu or action 1 to 40
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
342 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)
To carry out the cross-point settings, use the Panel >Xpt Assign menu.
To display the Xpt Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF2 ‘Xpt Assign.’
The status area shows a list of “cross-point assign tables” to use for the M/E
banks, PGM/PST bank, and various buses.
Creating cross-point assign tables
As cross-point assign tables, you can create a “main” table and up to 14 other
tables (table 1 to table 14). However, you can only carry out assignment of the
video and key combinations in the main table.
To create the main table
In the main table, a pair consisting of a video signal and a key signal is assigned
to each button number. You can also assign the same signal to another button
number at the same time. Further, you can delete currently assigned signals
from the main table.
To create the main table, use the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table1 (Table2,
Table3, or Table4) menu, press [Main, V/K Pair Assign].
The Main, V/K Pair Assign menu appears.
The left of the status area shows the video and key signal names, source
number, and audio mixer cross-points (machine numbers) currently
assigned in the main table. On the right is a list of the source numbers and
signals that can be assigned. When the shift button is pressed, the number
column is distinguished by color.
For details of audio mixer cross-point assignment operations, see “Setting
the audio mixer cross-points” (page 350).
2
Using any of the following methods, select the button number.
• Press an auxiliary bus control block cross-point button.
(The auxiliary bus control block is in selection mode, only when the
menu for cross-point button selection is showing.)
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 V/K Pair No Selection of video and key pair number 1 to 128
343Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
3
When assigning a video signal, press [Video] in the <Assign> group.
When assigning a key signal, press [Key]. (You can select a video signal
and a key signal at the same time.)
Note
[Video] and [Key] in the <Assign> group cannot be turned off at the same
time. At least the one or the other is always on.
4
Use any of the following methods to select the signal to assign.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
Using the buttons in the <Xpt Assign> group, assign the selected signal to
the button number currently selected in the main table.
Set: Delete the signal currently assigned to the selected button number and
make a new assignment.
Insert: Move down one line the signal currently assigned to the selected
button number and following signals, and make a new assignment.
Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Insert” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to
128 cannot be changed. When “Insert” is executed for any other number,
moving down of signals ends at number 120, and the signals assigned to
numbers 121 to 128 are maintained in their original lines.
To disable a button
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair Assign menu, select the button you
want to disable, and press [Inhibit].
To delecte any currently assigned signal
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair Assign menu, select the button
corresponding to the signal you want to delete, and press [Delete] in the <Xpt
Assign> group.
Signal deletion is executed in accordance with the selection in the <Assign>
group, and the signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button
number and following signals move up one line.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Source No Selection of source to be assigned 1 to 128
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
344 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Delete” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to 128
cannot be changed. When a signal assigned to any other button number is
deleted, moving up of signals ends when the signal assigned to number 120 has
moved to number 119, and the signals assigned to numbers 121 to 128 are
maintained in their original lines.
To create tables 1 to 14
When creating tables 1 to 14, in the same way as when creating the main table,
you can assign the same signal to more than one button number, or delete
currently assigned signals. However, assignment of video and key
combinations is impossible.
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, press [Table Button Assign].
The Table Button Assign menu appears.
The table number appears on the upper left part of the status area.
The left part of the status area shows the cross-point button numbers, video
and key pair numbers, video signal source names and source numbers, and
key signal source names and source numbers. When the shift button is
pressed, the number column is distinguished by color.
The right part shows the video and key pair numbers, and the names of
video signals and key signals set in the main table.
The Table Button Assign menu also allows you to access the Main, V/K
Pair Assign menu and the Src Name/LCD Color menu.
2
Using the knob, select the table number.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the button number.
• Press an auxiliary bus control block cross-point button.
(The auxiliary bus control block is in selection mode, only when the
menu for cross-point button selection is showing.)
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the pair number.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1Ta b l e N o Selection of the table to be set 1 to 14
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Button No Cross-point button selection 1 to 128
345Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
Using the buttons in the <Button Assign> group, assign the selected pair
number to the button number currently selected in table 1.
Set: Delete the signal currently assigned to the selected button number and
make a new assignment.
Insert: Move down one line the signal currently assigned to the selected
button number and following signals, and make a new assignment.
Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Insert” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to
128 cannot be changed. When “Insert” is executed for any other number,
moving down of signals ends at number 120, and the signals assigned to
numbers 121 to 128 are maintained in their original lines.
To disable a button
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select the button you
want to disable, and press [Inhibit].
To delete any currently assigned signal
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select the button
corresponding to the signal you want to delete, and press [Delete] in the
<Button Assign> group.
The signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button number
and following signals move up one line.
Note
When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected, execution of
“Delete” is impossible. The signal assignments to button numbers 121 to 128
cannot be changed. When a signal assigned to any other button number is
deleted, moving up of signals ends when the signal assigned to number 120 has
moved to number 119, and the signals assigned to numbers 121 to 128 are
maintained in their original lines.
To return the table to its default state
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair Assign menu or Panel >Xpt
Assign >Table Button Assign menu, press [Default Recall].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 V/K Pair No Selection of video and key pair
number to be assigned
1 to 128
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
346 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to return to the
default state.
2
To return to the default state, press [Yes], and to cancel the operation, press
[No].
To set the cross-point button shift operation
You can set the operation of the rightmost button in each row of cross-point
buttons excluding the reentry buttons.
In the <Xpt Shift Mode> group of the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair
Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select one of
the following for each cross-point table.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted version of the cross-point buttons
is enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted version and the unshifted version.
Off: Acts as a cross-point button, in a 16-button system as button number 16,
in a 24-button system as button number 24, and in a 32-button system as
button number 32.
To set the action of the [SHIFT] button in the cross-point control
block
In the <Display Shift Mode> group of the Panel >Xpt Assign >Main, V/K Pair
Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign menu, select either
of the following.
Display: Functions as a shift button dedicated to the source name displays.
Shift All Bus: Functions as a shift button for all buses.
Notes
• It is not possible to make this setting separately for each of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.
• “Shift All Bus” is only valid when the cross-point button shift operation (see
previous item) is set to “Lock” or “Off.”
Setting the source signal name
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu or Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button
Assign menu, press [Src Name/LCD Color].
The Src Name/LCD Color menu appears.
2
Turn the knob to select the signal to be set.
347Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
3
Press [Source Name].
A keyboard window appears.
4
Enter any name of not more than 16 characters, then press [Enter].
For details of keyboard window operation, see “Menu Operations” in
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
Sequential names for multiple signals
When you specify a number at the end of a signal name, all of the signals in the
range selected by knobs 1 and 2 are automatically assigned names ending with
sequential numbers.
Example: To assign sequential names to source signal 2 through source signal
4
1) In step 2 above, set knob 1 to “2,” and set knob 2 to “3.”
2) Set the name of source signal 2 to “CAM2.”
The name “CAM3” is assigned automatically to source signal 3, and the
name “CAM4” is assigned automatically to source signal 4.
Setting the source name display color
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign >Table Button Assign >Src Name/LCD Color
menu, turn the knobs to select the setting target.
2
In the <LCD Color> group, select the color (Orange/Green/Yellow).
Copying cross-point assign tables
The contents of a cross-point assign table can be copied to another cross-point
assign table, and vice versa.
Note
The contents of a sub table cannot be copied to the main table.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Source signal selection 1 to 128
2 Num Number of source signals to be
selected
1 to 128
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Source signal selection 1 to 128
2 Num Number of source signals to be
selected
1 to 128
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
348 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, press [Table Copy].
The Table Copy menu appears.
The status area shows a list of copy sources and a list of copy destinations.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the number of the table to use
as the copy source and the number of the table you want to be the copy
destination.
• Press directly on the list of copy sources (left-side list) or the list of copy
destinations (right-side list) in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Copy].
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to execute the
copy.
4
To execute the copy, press [Yes], and to cancel the operation, press [No].
Selecting cross-point assign tables
You can select the cross-point assign table to be used for each of the following
banks or buses.
• M/E-1 to M/E-3 banks and PGM/PST bank
• Buses assignable to AUX delegation buttons
Note
It is not possible to assign cross-point tables 5 to 14 to a bus of a switcher
operated by an MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel.
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, using any of the following methods, select
the switcher bank or bus.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys on the list on the left to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Selection of copy source 1 to 15
2 Right No Selection of copy destination 1 to 14
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank/Bus No Switcher bank or
bus selection 1 and upwards
349Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
Using any of the following methods, select the table.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys on the list on the right to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Table Assign Set].
This sets the table for the selected switcher bank or bus.
Exporting source names and destination names
To send the source names and destination names to the S-Bus, use the
following procedure.
1
In the Panel >XPT Assign menu, press [Name Export].
The Name Export menu appears.
2
Turn the knob to set the station ID.
a) If set to 255, the information is sent to all stations (with display of “All”).
3
Press [Src Name Export].
This exports the source names to the station selected in step 2.
4
Press [Dest Name Export].
This exports the destination names to the station selected in step 2.
Note
Since destination names cannot be selected freely, fixed names are used.
2 Num Number of
selected switcher
banks or buses
1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Values
3 Table No Selection of table
to be assigned
1 to 15
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Station ID Station ID setting 1 to 255 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
350 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Enabling the function to link the audio mixer
Note
For audio mixer operations in this system, it is necessary to set Mixer ESAM-
II for the DCU 9-pin serial port.
For details, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)” (page 441).
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, using any of the following methods, select
the M/E bank or bus.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys in the list on the left, to scroll the reverse video
cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Audio Follow].
“Enable” appears in the Audio Follow column.
Setting the audio mixer cross-points
To assign an audio mixer cross-point to a switcher cross-point pair (video/key),
carry out the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Xpt Assign menu, press [Mixer Xpt Assign].
The Mixer Xpt Assign menu appears.
2
In the list on the left, select the number for the setting.
3
In the list on the right, select the audio mixer cross-point (machine
number).
4
Press [Set].
The audio mixer number appears in the Mixer Xpt column.
Assigning a cross-point button to enable/disable side flags
By assigning the side flag function to the rightmost button in a cross-point
button row, you can use this button to enable/disable side flags for each of the
M/E and PGM/PST banks.
This setting applies to all of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
When you make this assignment, the SHIFT button (the button assigned to the
shift function) is moved one to the left.
351Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Note
If a macro attachment is set, when you assign the button to the side flag
function, the button numbers are offset, and therefore when you press the
button this does not execute the macro. The settings, however, are maintained,
so that when you cancel the side flag assignment, the macro can be accessed
once more.
For details of side flag operations, see Chapter 10 “Side Flag Settings”
(Volume 1).
1
In the Panel >XPT Assign menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].
The Side Flags Button Assign menu appears.
2
Press [Side Flags Btn Assign], turning it on.
This assigns the rightmost cross-point button to enabling/disabling the side
flag function.
Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign
Menu)
To carry out the settings of the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus
control block, use the Panel >Aux Assign menu.
M/E
1
M/E
1
SHIFT
SHIFT XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
PRE
MCRO
KEY3
KEY4
POST
MCRO
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD UTIL
M/E
1
M/E
1
SIDE
FLAG
SIDE
FLAG
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
SHIFT button moves
one to the left
Button for side flags
enable/disable
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
352 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
To display the Aux Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF3 ‘Aux Assign.’
The left side of the status area shows the delegation numbers, and the list of
buses set; the right side shows a list of buses that can be assigned.
Assigning a bus to an AUX delegation button
1
In the Panel >Aux Assign menu, using any of the following methods,
select the delegation button and the bus to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) The setting can be from 1 to 62. The valid settings, however, depend on the number of
buttons and the delegation button shift mode.
b) The buses that can be assigned are as follows.
AUX1 to AUX48, Monitor1 to Monitor8, DME1V to DME8V, and DME1K to DME8K
M/E1 Utility1 and 2, M/E2 Utility1 and 2, M/E3 Utility1 and 2
P/P Utility1 and 2, Frame Memory Source1 and 2, Edit Preview, DSK1 to 4 Fill/Source,
M/E-1 Key 1 to 4 Fill/Source, M/E-2 Key 1 to 4 Fill/Source, M/E-3 Key 1 to 4 Fill/
Source, M/E-1 EXT DME, M/E-2 EXT DME, M/E-3 EXT DME, P/P EXT DME, DME
Utility 1 and 2, CCR 1 and 2
• For a button for which you want to disable operation, press [Inhibit].
2
Press [Set] to confirm the selection.
To set the AUX delegation button shift operation
To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the row of AUX
delegation buttons, select one of the following in the <Shift Mode> group of
the Panel >Aux Assign menu.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted version of the AUX delegation
buttons is enabled while the button is held down.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Deleg No Selection of AUX delegation
button 1 to 128 a)
2 Bus No Selection of bus to be assigned 1 to 123 b)
Number of buttons Shift mode Valid settings
16 OFF 1 to 16
ON 1 to 30
24 OFF 1 to 24
ON 1 to 46
32 OFF 1 to 32
ON 1 to 62
353Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted version and the unshifted version of the AUX delegation buttons.
Off: Acts as an AUX delegation button. In a 16-button system it acts as button
number 16, in a 24-button system as button number 24, and in a 32-button
system as button number 32.
Using the auxiliary bus control block for router control
To make router control settings, display the Setup >Panel >Aux Assign >RTR
Mode Setting menu.
To display the RTR Mode Setting menu
1
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF3 ‘Aux Assign.’
The Aux Assign menu appears.
2
Press [RTR Mode Setting].
The RTR Mode Setting menu appears. The left of the status area shows the
destination number assignment status and source table, and the right side
lists the destinations that can be assigned.
To assign a destination to a destination selection button
In the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, use the following
procedure.
1
Using any of the following methods, select a destination selection button
and the destination to be assigned to the button.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• For a button whose operation you want to disable, press [Inhibit].
Note
When a destination selection button having a number in the range 65 to 128
is selected, source table selection automatically becomes invalid, and
therefore the Inhibit function also becomes invalid.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Dest No Destination selection button
selection
1 to 128
2 No Destination selection in S-Bus
space
1 to 1024
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
354 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
2
Press [Dest Set] to confirm the selection.
3
If in step 1 you selected a value in the range 1 to 64, turn the knob to select
the source table.
4
Press [Source Table Set] to confirm the selection.
5
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.
To set the shift operation of the destination selection buttons
To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the destination selection
button row, select one of the following in the <Dest Shift Mode> group of the
Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted destination selection buttons are
enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted and unshifted states of the destination selection buttons.
Off: Acts as a destination selection button, that is, button number 16 on a 16-
button system, button number 24 on a 24-button system, and button
number 32 on a 32-button system.
To set the source table
1
In the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, press [Source Table
Assign].
The Source Table Assign menu appears.
2
In the <Source Table Select> group, select the source table you want to
manipulate.
3
Press [Table Assign].
The Table Assign menu appears.
The left of the status area lists the button numbers and set sources, and the
right side lists the source that can be assigned.
4
Using any of the following methods, select a source selection button and
the source you want to assign.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Source
Ta b l e
Source table selection 1 to 5
355Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• For a button whose operation you want to disable, press [Inhibit].
5
Press [Source Set] to confirm the selection.
To set the shift operation of the source selection buttons
To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the source selection button
row with different destinations assigned to the 1st and 2nd rows, select the
source table in the Source Table Assign menu, then in the <Xpt Shift Mode>
group select one of the following.
Hold: Acts as a shift button, and the shifted source selection buttons are
enabled while the button is held down.
Lock: Acts as a shift button, and pressing the button toggles between the
shifted and unshifted states of the source selection buttons.
Off: Acts as a cross-point button, that is, button number 16 on a 16-button
system, button number 24 on a 24-button system, and button number 32 on
a 32-button system.
To expand the shift function
To set the [KEY] button as a shift operation expansion button, in the Source
Table Assign menu select the source table, then in the <Expand Xpt Shift
Assign> group, press [Key Button].
In order not to expand the shift operation, press [No Assign] in the <Expand
Xpt Shift Assign> group.
To assign levels to a level selection button
To assign levels to the [LEVEL1] to [LEVEL4] buttons in the auxiliary bus
control block, use the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, press [Level Button
Assign].
The Level Button Assign menu appears. The status area shows a list of the
assignment status of levels to each button.
2
In the <Level Button Select> group, select the button you want to set.
3
In the <Level Assign> group, press the levels you want to assign to the
button, turning them on.
You can select plural of levels. You can also make a selection that overlaps
that of another button.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Source selection button selection 1 to 128
2 No Source selection in S-Bus space 1 to 1024
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
356 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
To select a destination selection button for a snapshot
To set whether snapshots are recalled for each destination selection button
individually, use the Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu as follows.
1
Use any of the following methods to select the destination selection button
to which the setting applies.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [SS Enable], turning it on or off.
On: When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled, the recall also
applies to the selected destination selection button.
Off: When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled, the recall does not
apply to the selected destination selection button.
Note
When a destination selection button is set to Inhibit, then even if SS Enable
is on, the snapshot for that destination is not recalled.
Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)
To assign functions to the user preference buttons ([PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16])
in the menu control block and the memory recall buttons in the utility/shotbox
control block, display the Panel >Prefs/Utility menu.
To display the Prefs/Utility menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF4 ‘Prefs/Utility.’
The status area shows the settings of the user preference buttons.
Assigning functions to user preference buttons
1
In the Panel >Prefs/Utility menu, using any of the following methods,
select the button to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Dest No Selection of destination selection
button
1 to 128
357Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
In the <Action> group, select the function to be assigned.
Menu Shortcut: Assign a frequently used menu to be recalled (menu
shortcut).
Utility Command: Assign a function enable/disable or similar operation
(utility command).
Macro Recall: Assign a macro register recall.
Shotbox Recall: Assign a shotbox register recall.
3
Depending on the selection in step 2, make the following settings.
When Menu Shortcut is selected: For the subsequent operations, see the
next item “Assigning a menu shortcut to a user preference button”
(page 361).
When Utility Command is selected: A list of commands appears on the
right of the status area; using any of the following methods, select the
command you want to assign.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) When the Command parameter is set to Sw’er GPI Test Fire, Panel GPI Test Fire, DCU
GPI, or Test Fire
When Macro Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the macro
register you want to assign.
When Shotbox Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the shotbox
register you want to assign.
4
Press [Action Set].
This assigns the selected action, which is reflected in the status area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No User preference button selection 1 to 16
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Command Utility command selection 1 and upwards
4 a) GPI No GPI port number 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Macro Macro register selection 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Shotbox Shotbox register selection 1 to 99
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
358 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
To cancel an assignment
After selecting the relevant button, press [Clear].
To use the [PREFS 9] to [PREFS 16] settings
There are sixteen user preference buttons that can be set, [PREFS 1] to [PREFS
16], but there are only eight user preference buttons present in the menu control
block. By default these buttons are assigned to the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 8]
settings. Therefore, to use the settings of [PREFS 9] to [PREFS 16], it is
necessary to access the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >Link/Program
Button >Menu Panel menu, and assign these settings to buttons in the menu
control block.
List of utility commands and user preference button status
The following table shows the utility commands that can be assigned to user
preference buttons.
Command name a) Function Button status
Lit amber Off
SWR Remote1 Enbl
|
SWR Remote4 Enbl
Switcher Remote 1 enabled/disabled
|
Switcher Remote 4 enabled/disabled
Enabled Disabled
DME1 Editor Port Enbl DME1 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
DME2 Editor Port Enbl DME2 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
2nd System Enbl (Dual Simul Mode) Second system
enabled/disabled
Enabled Disabled
ME1 PGM1 ST
|
ME1 PGM4 ST
M/E-1 PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
M/E-1 PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
ME1 PVW ST M/E-1 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 Clean ST M/E-1 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 K-PVW ST M/E-1 key preview output safe title on/
off
On Off
ME2 PGM1 ST
|
ME2 PGM4 ST
M/E-2 PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
M/E-2 PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
ME2 PVW ST M/E-2 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 Clean ST M/E-2 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 K-PVW ST M/E-2 key preview output safe title on/
off
On Off
ME3 PGM1 ST
|
ME3 PGM4 ST
M/E-3 PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
M/E-3 PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
ME3 PVW ST M/E-3 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME3 Clean ST M/E-3 clean output safe title on/off On Off
359Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
ME3 K-PVW ST ME-3 key preview output safe title on/
off
On Off
PP PGM1 ST
|
PP PGM4 ST
P/P PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
P/P PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
PP PVW ST P/P preview output safe title on/off On Off
PP Clean ST P/P clean output safe title on/off On Off
PP K-PVW ST P/P key preview output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON1 ST DME Monitor 1 output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON2 ST DME Monitor 2 output safe title on/off On Off
Edit PVW ST Edit preview output safe title on/off On Off
Preset ST Preset output safe title on/off On Off
AUX1 ST
|
AUX48 ST
AUX1 output safe title on/off
|
AUX48 output safe title on/off
On Off
FM Src1 Frame
Freeze
Frame freeze of frame memory source
1
During frame
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src1 Filed Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 1 During field
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src1 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory
source 1
While freeze
being released
Either of the other
two states
FM Src2 Frame
Freeze
Frame freeze of frame memory source
2
During frame
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src2 Field Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 2 During field
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src2 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory
source 2
While freeze
being released
Either of the other
two states
SWR GPI Enbl Enable/disable switcher GPI Enabled Disabled
DME1 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME1 GPI Enabled Disabled
DME2 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME2 GPI Enabled Disabled
Panel GPI Enbl Enable/disable panel GPI Enabled Disabled
SWR GPI1 Test Fire
|
SWR GPI8 Test Fire
Output test trigger from switcher GPI1
|
Output test trigger from switcher GPI8
Output (lights
only at the instant
the button is
pressed)
When the output
is assigned
Panel GPI1 Test Fire
|
Panel GPI8 Test Fire
Output test trigger from panel GPI1
|
Output test trigger from panel GPI8
Output (lights
only at the instant
the button is
pressed)
When the output
is assigned
Command name a) Function Button status
Lit amber Off
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
360 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
a) For the safe title on/off commands (from ME1 PGM1 ST-ME1 PGM4 ST to AUX1 ST-AUX48
ST), the name of the assigned output signal is shown.
DCU GPI1 Test Fire
|
DCU GPI50 Test Fire
Output test trigger from port assigned
to DCU GPI1
|
Output test trigger from port assigned
to DCU GPI50
Output (lights
only at the instant
the button is
pressed)
When the output
is assigned
Macro Attachment
Enbl
Enable/disable macro attachment Enabled Disabled
Macro Only Set Macro only mode on/off On Off
Pre Macro Set macro attachment in pre macro
mode
Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Post Macro Set macro attachment in post macro
mode
Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Macro Take Macro execution During execution When the function
is assigned
Macro Auto Ins Macro auto insert mode on/off On Off
Macro AT with Rate When registering an auto transition
macro event, on/off setting of mode to
save transition rate
On Off
Macro AT with A/B Bus When registering an auto transition
macro event for the transition control
block, on/off setting of mode to save A/
B Bus cross-point settings
On Off
Macro TL with Region When registering a timeline macro
event, on/off setting of mode to save
applicable region
On Off
DME Override DME override on/off On Off
DME Graphic DME graphics on/off (Applies to
graphics for channel selected in device
control block)
On Off
System Manager Enbl Enable/disable operation from System
Manager
Enabled Disabled
Plug-In Editor Enbl Enable/disable operation from an
editing keyboard
Enabled Disabled
Inhibit Set Inhibit cross-point button Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Inhibit All Clear Clear all cross-point button inhibit
settings
Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Command name a) Function Button status
Lit amber Off
361Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Assigning a menu shortcut to a user preference button
1
Referring to the procedure up to step 2 in the previous item, select [Menu
Shortcut].
The user preference buttons [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] flash amber.
2
Using any of the following methods, display the menu to which you want
to make a shortcut.
• In the menu control block, press the relevant top menu selection button,
then select VF and HF.
• Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu
screen, then enter a menu number from the numeric keypad window.
• Press a particular control panel button twice in rapid succession.
3
Press the user preference button to which you want to assign the shortcut.
The menu screen goes back to the Prefs/Utility menu, and the selection is
reflected in the status area. The user preference buttons [PREFS 1] to
[PREFS 16] flash amber.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to assign all desired menu shortcuts to
the user preference buttons.
To abandon the process of menu shortcut assignment
In the Prefs/Utility menu, press [Menu Shortcut] once more.
This exits the menu shortcut assignment mode.
Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility/
shotbox control block
1
In the Prefs/Utility menu, press [Utility Module Assign].
The Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign menu appears. The status area
shows the settings in the utility/shotbox control block.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the button to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Bank selection 1 to 4
2 Button No Control block button selection 1 to 24
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
362 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
3
In the <Action> group, select the function you want to assign.
Menu Shortcut: Assign a frequently used menu to be recalled (menu
shortcut).
Utility Command: Assign a function enable/disable or similar operation
(utility command).
Macro Recall: Assign a macro register recall.
Shotbox Recall: Assign a shotbox register recall.
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, make the following settings.
When Menu Shortcut is selected: For the subsequent operations, see the
next item “Assigning a menu shortcut to a memory recall button in the
utility/shotbox control block” (page 365).
When Utility Command is selected: A list of commands appears on the
right of the status area; using any of the following methods, select the
command you want to assign.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) When the Command parameter is set to Sw’er GPI Test Fire, Panel GPI Test Fire, DCU
GPI, or Test Fire
When Macro Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the macro
register you want to assign.
When Shotbox Recall is selected: Turn the knob to select the shotbox
register you want to assign.
5
Press [Action Set].
This assigns the selected action, which is reflected in the status area.
In the utility/shotbox control block, the assigned button lights orange.
If a shotbox register was assigned, the register name appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Command Utility command selection 1 and upwards
4 a) GPI No GPI port number 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Macro Macro register selection 1 to 99
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Shotbox Shotbox register selection 1 to 99
363Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
To cancel an assignment
After selecting the relevant button, press [Clear].
List of utility commands and memory recall button status
The following table shows the utility commands that can be assigned to
memory recall buttons.
Command name a) Function Button status
Lit green Lit orange
SWR Remote1 Enbl
|
SWR Remote4 Enbl
Switcher Remote 1 enabled/disabled
|
Switcher Remote 4 enabled/disabled
Enabled Disabled
DME1 Editor Port Enbl DME1 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
DME2 Editor Port Enbl DME2 editor port enabled/disabled Enabled Disabled
2nd System Enbl (Dual Simul Mode) Second system
enabled/disabled
Enabled Disabled
ME1 PGM1 ST
|
ME1 PGM4 ST
M/E-1 PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
M/E-1 PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
ME1 PVW ST M/E-1 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 Clean ST M/E-1 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME1 K-PVW ST M/E-1 key preview output safe title on/
off
On Off
ME2 PGM1 ST
|
ME2 PGM4 ST
M/E-2 PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
M/E-2 PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
ME2 PVW ST M/E-2 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 Clean ST M/E-2 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME2 K-PVW ST M/E-2 key preview output safe title on/
off
On Off
ME3 PGM1 ST
|
ME3 PGM4 ST
M/E-3 PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
M/E-3 PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
ME3 PVW ST M/E-3 preview output safe title on/off On Off
ME3 Clean ST M/E-3 clean output safe title on/off On Off
ME3 K-PVW ST ME-3 key preview output safe title on/
off
On Off
PP PGM1 ST
|
PP PGM4 ST
PP PGM1 output safe title on/off
|
PP PGM4 output safe title on/off
On Off
PP PVW ST P/P preview output safe title on/off On Off
PP Clean ST P/P clean output safe title on/off On Off
PP K-PVW ST P/P key preview output safe title on/off On Off
DME MON1 ST DME Monitor 1 output safe title on/off On Off
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
364 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
DME MON2 ST DME Monitor 2 output safe title on/off On Off
Edit PVW ST Edit preview output safe title on/off On Off
Preset ST Preset output safe title on/off On Off
AUX1 ST
|
AUX48 ST
AUX1 output safe title on/off
|
AUX48 output safe title on/off
On Off
FM Src1 Frame
Freeze
Frame freeze of frame memory source
1
During frame
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src1 Filed Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 1 During field
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src1 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory
source 1
While freeze
being released
Either of the other
two states
FM Src2 Frame
Freeze
Frame freeze of frame memory source
2
During frame
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src2 Field Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 2 During field
freeze
Either of the other
two states
FM Src2 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory
source 2
While freeze
being released
Either of the other
two states
SWR GPI Enbl Enable/disable switcher GPI Enabled Disabled
DME1 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME1 GPI Enabled Disabled
DME2 GPI Enbl Enable/disable DME2 GPI Enabled Disabled
Panel GPI Enbl Enable/disable panel GPI Enabled Disabled
SWR GPI1 Test Fire
|
SWR GPI8 Test Fire
Output test trigger from switcher GPI1
|
Output test trigger from switcher GPI8
Output (lights
only at the instant
the button is
pressed)
When the output
is assigned
Panel GPI1 Test Fire
|
Panel GPI8 Test Fire
Output test trigger from panel GPI1
|
Output test trigger from panel GPI8
Output (lights
only at the instant
the button is
pressed)
When the output
is assigned
DCU GPI1 Test Fire
|
DCU GPI50 Test Fire
Output test trigger from port assigned
to DCU GPI1
|
Output test trigger from port assigned
to DCU GPI50
Output (lights
only at the instant
the button is
pressed)
When the output
is assigned
Macro Attachment
Enbl
Enable/disable macro attachment Enabled Disabled
Macro Only Set Macro only mode on/off On Off
Pre Macro Set macro attachment in pre macro
mode
Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Post Macro Set macro attachment in post macro
mode
Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Command name a) Function Button status
Lit green Lit orange
365Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
a) For the safe title on/off commands (from ME1 PGM1 ST-ME1 PGM4 ST to AUX1 ST-AUX48
ST), the name of the assigned output signal is shown.
Assigning a menu shortcut to a memory recall button in the
utility/shotbox control block
1
Referring to the procedure up to step 3 in the previous item, select [Menu
Shortcut].
The memory recall buttons in the utility/shotbox control block flash
orange.
2
Using any of the following methods, display the menu to which you want
to make a shortcut.
• In the menu control block, press the relevant top menu selection button,
then select VF and HF.
• Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu
screen, then enter a menu number from the numeric keypad window.
• Press a particular control panel button twice in rapid succession.
Macro Take Macro execution During execution When the function
is assigned
Macro Auto Ins Macro auto insert mode on/off On Off
Macro AT with Rate When registering an auto transition
macro event, on/off setting of mode to
save transition rate
On Off
Macro AT with A/B Bus When registering an auto transition
macro event for the transition control
block, on/off setting of mode to save A/
B Bus cross-point settings
On Off
Macro TL with Region When registering a timeline macro
event, on/off setting of mode to save
applicable region
On Off
DME Override DME override on/off On Off
DME Graphic DME graphics on/off (Applies to
graphics for channel selected in device
control block)
On Off
Plug-In Editor Enbl Enable/disable operation from an
editing keyboard
Enabled Disabled
Inhibit Set Inhibit cross-point button Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Inhibit All Clear Clear all cross-point button inhibit
settings
Can be set only
while pressed (lit)
When the function
is assigned
Command name a) Function Button status
Lit green Lit orange
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
366 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
3
In the utility/shotbox control block, select the bank, and press the button to
which you want to assign the shortcut.
The menu screen goes back to the Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign
menu, and the selection is reflected in the status area.
The buttons in the utility/shotbox control block flash.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to assign all desired menu shortcuts to
the buttons in the utility/shotbox control block.
To abandon the process of menu shortcut assignment
In the Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign menu, press [Menu Shortcut].
This exits the menu shortcut assignment mode.
Setting names to be displayed in memory recall buttons
Note
The name you set using the following procedure is displayed only when “Menu
Shortcut” or “Utility Command” has been assigned to the selected memory
recall button. To set a name for display in a memory recall button to which
“Shotbox Recall” or “Macro Recall” has been assigned, use the Shotbox menu
or Macro menu.
1
In the Prefs/Utility >Utility Module Assign menu, select the button using
any of the following methods.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
2
Press [Name].
A keyboard window appears.
3
Enter a name of not more than eight characters, and press [Enter].
The name you have set is reflected in the status area and on the memory
recall button in the utility/shotbox control block.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank Bank selection 1 to 4
2 Button No Control block button selection 1 to 24
367Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Assigning a function to the key 2 row cross-point buttons
You can assign a function to the key 2 row cross-point buttons of each of the
M/E-1 to M/E-3, or PGM/PST banks, and use them in the same way as the
buttons in the utility/shot box control block.
1
In the Prefs/Utility menu, press [Key2/4 Bus Button Assign].
The Key2/4 Bus Button Assign menu appears. The cross-point settings for
the key 2 row appear.
2
Refer to “Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility/
shotbox control block” (page 361) to make the assignment. Note,
however, the following differences.
• The bank setting of knob 1 is from 1 to 5.
• The adjustment range of knob 2 is from 1 to the number of cross-point
buttons.
• The character string for a button name is a maximum of four characters.
For details of executing a utility/shot box function with the key 2 row, see
“Executing Utilities With the Cross-Point Buttons in the Key 2 Row”
(page 274) and “Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row
Cross-Point Buttons” (page 285).
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface
Menu)
To carry out setup relating to connections with external devices, display the
Panel >Device Interface menu.
To display the Device Interface menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF5 ‘Device
Interface.’
Making control panel GPI input settings
1
In the Panel >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Input].
The GPI Input menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
368 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger type.
(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.
(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input
pulse.
(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the
input signal.
(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.
4
In the <Target> group, select the action block.
M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, P/P: Set the action for one of the banks.
Common/Setup: Set an action for something other than the above, or a
setup action.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Cut, Auto Trans
Key1 Cut, Key2 Cut, Key3 Cut, Key4 Cut
Key1 Auto Trans, Key2 Auto Trans, Key3 Auto Trans, Key4 Auto Trans
Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3 SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Aux Bus No Aux bus selection 1 to 48 e)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
1 to 99 c)
1 to 399 d)
5 Src No Source signal selection 1 and upwards e)
5 No User preference button
selection 1 to 16 f)
369Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
When Target is P/P: Cut, Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut, DSK2 Cut, DSK3 Cut, DSK4 Cut
DSK1 Auto Trans, DSK2 Auto Trans, DSK3 Auto Trans, DSK4 Auto Trans
DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4 SS ? Recall
FTB Cut, FTB Auto Trans
When Target is Common/Setup: Master SS ? Recall, Master Effect ? Recall, SS ?
Recall, Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, FM
Src1 Frame Freeze, FM Src1 Field Freeze, FM Src1 Freeze Off, FM Src2 Frame
Freeze, FM Src2 Field Freeze, FM Src2 Freeze Off, FM Src1 Clip Record, FM
Src1 Clip Stop, FM Src2 Clip Record, FM Src2 Clip Stop, FM1 to FM8 Clip
Cueup, FM1 to FM8 Clip Play, FM1 to FM8 Clip Stop, Shotbox ? Recall, Macro
Take, Prefs Buttons?, Macro ? Recall, No Action
(FM Src1(2) Clip Record/Stop, and FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup/Play/Stop do not
operate on the MVS-8000.)
• Action list when the trigger type is only “Rising Edge” or “Falling Edge”
Aux? O’ride Src??
• Action list when the trigger type is “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, or P/P: No Action
When Target is Common/Setup: Format (Overall system settings, frame/field rate,
number of lines)
Aspect (overall system settings), Simul, Level Enable, No Action
Notes
• “Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the “Aspect” and “Format” actions that can
be used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used, if the input is
“Disable” then it is not possible to switch “Aspect” or “Format” by GPI input.
If a GPI to switch “Aspect” or “Format” occurs when powering the system off, the
action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes off and
the power may go off before the action is completed. This may corrupt the setup
settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid such a situation.
• As for “Aux ? O’ride Src ??,” when “Rising Edge” is selected, on a rising edge the
set AUX bus primary input is used. On a falling edge, the original state of the cross-
point is restored. If the GPI trigger is applied repeatedly at short intervals (0.5
second or less), the cross-point switching may not be carried out correctly. In this
case, apply the GPI trigger again.
• If “System Format” is selected for “Action” when the format converter is used on
the MVS-8000G, you can set the conversion formats of the format converter for
“FC Input 1-8” and “FC Input 9-16”.
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 2 selection is “Snapshot” or “Shotbox”
d) When knob 2 selection is “Effect”
e) When knob 2 selection is “Aux ? O’ride Src ??”
f) When knob 2 selection is “Prefs Button?”
6
Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
The selected setting appears in the status area.
Carrying out level settings
To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
370 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
1
In the Panel >Device Interface menu, select the action to be set, and press
[H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level,
press [H Set]. To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low,
press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.
Making control panel GPI output settings
1
In the Panel >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Output].
The GPI Output menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.
(Rising Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open-
circuit or drives the output high, and holds this state for the
specified pulse width.
(Falling Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted
or drives the output low, and holds this state for the specified
pulse width.
(Any Edge): Each time the trigger occurs, the relay contacts are
alternately closed or opened, or the output is switched between
high and low.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Signal format/screen
aspect ratio selection
1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8
371Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level.
4
Turning the knobs, select the pulse width and timing to be set.
a) 1: Field 1, 2: Field 2, 3: Any
When “ ” is selected as the trigger polarity, there is no Pulse Width
setting. When “Status” is selected, there is no Pulse Width or Timing
setting.
5
In the <Source> group, select the action block.
M/E-1 to M/E-3 and P/P: Set an action for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Common: Set an action for error status.
6
Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Status”
When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3
SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall, No Action
When Source is P/P: DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK
4 SS ? Recall, No Action
When Source is Common: KF Run, No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Status”
When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3
SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall
Key1 On, Key2 On, Key3 On, Key4 On, No Action
When Source is P/P: DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4
SS ? Recall
DSK1 On, DSK2 On, DSK3 On, DSK4 On, No Action
When Source is Common: Error Make, Error Break, PREFS1, PREFS2, PREFS3,
PREFS4, PREFS5, PREFS6, PREFS7, PREFS8, PREFS9, PREFS10, PREFS11,
PREFS12, PREFS13, PREFS14, PREFS15, PREFS16, Device Recording, No
Action
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 (fields)
4 Timing Output timing 1 to 3 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
372 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
7
Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
The selected setting appears in the status area.
Test firing the trigger
To test fire the trigger, press [Test Fire].
This outputs a trigger from the selected output port. This is not output when the
trigger type is “Status.”
Setting the control mode for P-Bus devices
In the <P-Bus Control> group of the Panel >Device Interface menu, select the
mode.
Trigger: When a predetermined button is pressed, the action command
assigned to that button is output, to control an external device.
Timeline: The external device is controlled as a keyframe effect controlled by
the center control panel.
Setting the SCU editor panel port
When an editing keyboard is used, this port setting is for the editing keyboard
if the license for the BZS-8050 is valid (see page 301), and for the serial tally
if the license for the BZS-8050 is invalid.
If you want to use the port setting for the serial tally when the license for the
BZS-8050 is valid, select [Serial Tally] from the <Editor Port Assign> group
in the Panel >Device Interface menu.
Serial Tally: Use the SCU editor panel port for the serial tally.
Editor Keyboard: Use the SCU editor panel port for the editing keyboard.
Making DCU serial port settings
You can assign buttons in the device control block (DEV1 to DEV12) to DCU
serial ports, to operate the devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR)
connected to these ports. For a disk recorder/Extended VTR, you can also set
the sharing of file lists.
For details of DCU serial port settings, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port
Assign Menu)” (page 441).
To associate a serial port with a device selection button
1
In the Panel >Device Interface menu, press [DCU Serial Port Assign].
The Serial Port Assign menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the DCU serial port.
373Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings.
The DCU number, slot number, and serial port number appear.
3
Select the device selection button to be assigned from the <Assign> group.
Notes
• It is not possible to assign more than one device selection button to the
same port. The later assigned device selection button takes priority, and
the previous selection is invalidated.
• If P-Bus/Mixer ESAM-II is assigned to a serial port, it is not possible to
assign a device selection button to that port.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make assignments to other ports.
To select whether to use an editing keyboard
If you want to use an editing keyboard for the selected device, select a port
using the same operation as in step 2, then press [Plug-In Editor Enbl] to
display “Enbl” in the Editor column. If you do not want to use an editing
keyboard, press [Plug-In Editor Enbl] to make the “Enbl” display disappear.
Notes
• This selection is possible when the BZS-8050 license is valid (see page 301).
• A port to which Mixer ESAM-II is assigned is automatically set to Enbl, and
you cannot change this setting.
Sharing disk recorder/Extended VTR file lists
To share files between devices connected to the same disk recorder/Extended
VTR, use the following procedure.
Note
The following operation can only be carried out for the ports to which a disk
recorder or Extended VTR is assigned.
1
In the Panel >Device Interface >Serial Port Assign menu, select the target
disk recorder/Extended VTR.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Serial port selection 1 and upwards a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
374 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings.
2
Turn the knob to select the device selection button (DEV1 to DEV12) for
sharing the file list.
3
Press [Same File List Set].
This is reflected in the file list in the status area.
4
Repeat steps 1 to 3 as required to select other devices for sharing the file
list.
Operation Settings (Operation Menu)
To make settings relating to panel operation, use the Panel >Operation menu.
To display the Operation menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF6 ‘Operation.’
The status area shows the items that can be set and a list of the settings.
Setting the on-air tally
To set the high tally state reflected on the control panel, use the following
procedure.
1
In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Button Tally].
The Button Tally menu appears.
2
In the <Tally Type> group, select either of the following.
[R1] to [R8]: Reflect any of tally groups 1 to 8 as the tally state.
Independent: Reflect only the switcher tally state.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Serial port selection 1 and upwards a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 File List Device selection button for
sharing the file list
1 to 12
375Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
3
Press [Execute].
A popup window appears and shows the progress of the operation.
Setting the transition rate display mode
To determine whether to display transition rate values in menus and on the
control panel in frames or as timecode values, select either of the following in
the <Trans Rate Display> group.
Frame: display in frames.
Timecode: display as timecode (SS:FF).
Making settings relating to effects
To make settings relating to the functions used when carrying out keyframe
effect operations, use the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Effect Mode].
The Effect Mode menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.
2
Make the following settings as required.
Effect recall mode: To select the state of the first keyframe when an effect
is recalled, select [Recall] (the first keyframe is not recalled) or
[Recall&Rewind] (the first keyframe is recalled) in the <Recall
Mode> group.
Automatically turning [EDIT ENBL] off: When an effect is recalled
with the [EDIT ENBL] button on, to automatically turn this button off,
disabling keyframe editing, turn [Edit Enable Auto Off] on.
Automatic first keyframe insertion: When an empty register is recalled,
to automatically insert a first keyframe of the state at that point, turn
[1st KF Auto Insert] on.
Automatic effect saving: To automatically save an effected when it is
recalled after being edited, turn [Effect Auto Save] on.
Keyframe duration default value: Press [Default KF Duration], then
enter the default value from the numeric keypad window.
Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is executed
For P-Bus, GPI, and DDR/VTR timeline operations, to execute the first
keyframe when a rewind is carried out, set each external device on in the
<REWIND&1st KF> group in the Effect Mode menu.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
376 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Note
When an effect is executed by pressing the [RUN] button with this setting on,
the first keyframe action is not executed.
GPI: setting for the GPI timeline
P-Bus: setting for the P-Bus timeline
DDR/VTR: setting for the VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline
Macro: setting for the macro timeline
Setting the Source and Destination names
To set the Source and Destination names used in the control panel, use the
following procedure.
Note
Before carrying out these settings, it is necessary to set the number of the S-Bus
description name.
For details of the operation, see “To set the group number of an S-Bus
description name” (page 453) under “Setup Relating to Router Interface and
Tally.”
1
In the <Source/Dest Name> group of the Panel >Operation menu, select
the names to be used from the following.
Sw’er Local: Source names set in the Xpt Assign menu, and fixed bus
names
S-Bus Descript: Description names set in the router
S-Bus Type + Num: Type + Num set in the router (In this case always
eight characters.)
2
In the <Name Display Mode> group, select the method of display in the
source name displays.
Auto: Optimize display according to number of characters. A name of up
to two characters appears as two characters in one line. A name of up
to four characters appears as four characters in one line.
Otherwise, up to the first eight characters are shown in two lines.
2 Character: The first two characters appear.
4 Character: The first four characters appear.
To replace a name set in the Xpt Assign menu with an S-Bus
description name
Turn [S-Bus Name Link] on. This has such effect that each time a description
name is changed on the router, the corresponding source name is automatically
377Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
changed. Thus, the same description name can always be used both on the
router and the switcher.
Even when [Sw’er Local] is selected, the same name as when [S-Bus Descript]
is selected can be displayed. The S-Bus description name can also be displayed
in the Xpt Assign menu.
Settings for the Flexi Pad
You can select the pattern numbers or register names as the button indications
for Flexi Pad control block and the following menus.
• M/E-1 > Wipe >Wipe Snapshot menu
• M/E-1 > DME Wipe >DME Wipe Snapshot menu
• Misc >Snapshot menu
Note
The CCP-9000/9000A system has no Flexi Pad.
1
In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Flexi Pad Mode].
The Flexi Pad Mode menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.
2
Make the following settings as required.
Coupling the transition type selection with the Flexi Pad control block
mode selection: To make the Flexi Pad mode selection change
automatically when [WIPE] or [DME] is selected in the transition
control block, press [Wipe/DME Auto Deleg], turning it on.
Button indications in the memory recall section: When the Flexi Pad
control block mode is [WIPE] or [DME], for the button indications in
the memory recall section, select [Pattern] or [Register Name] in the
<Wipe/DME Display> group. When the mode is [Snapshot], [Effect],
or [MCRO], select [Register No] or [Register Name] in the
<Snapshot/Effect Display> group.
For details, see the following.
• “Wipe Snapshots” in Chapter 5 (Volume 1)
• “DME Wipe Snapshots” in Chapter 6 (Volume 1)
• the figure of the memory recall section in “Recalling the master timeline
in the Flexi Pad control block” (page 201)
• the figure of the memory recall section in “Saving and Recalling
Snapshots”(page 256)
• the figure of the memory recall section in “Recalling a Macro Register
and Executing a Macro”(page 493).
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
378 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Setting the button operation mode
1
In the Panel >Operation menu, press [Custom Button].
The Custom Button menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.
2
Make the following settings as required.
Operation mode of the [ALL] button in the transition control block:
To specify the next transition to be selected by pressing the [ALL]
button in the transition control block, press the next transition you
want to select, turning it on, in the <Next Trans All> group. If
everything here is set to Off, then pressing the [ALL] button does not
change the specification of the next transition.
Operation mode during an auto transition: For the operation mode
when the [AUTO TRANS] or [TAKE] button is pressed once more
during an auto transition, select [Continue] or [Cancel] in the <Auto
Trans/Take> group.
Continue: Continue the auto transition.
Cancel: Cancel the auto transition and return to the state before
starting the auto transition.
Operation mode during keyframe execution: For the operation mode
when the [RUN] button is pressed once more during effect execution,
select [Continue] or [Cancel] in the <Run> group.
Continue: Continue the execution.
Cancel: Cancel the execution and return to the state before starting the
execution.
Interchanging the [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] buttons: To
interchange the [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] buttons in the transition
control block, press the [Auto Trans/Cut Swap] button, turning it on.
Transition preview operation mode: For the operation mode of the
[TRANS PVW] button, select [Lock] or [Hold] in the <Trans Pvw>
group. The setting as to whether to use the “One-time mode” in which
the transition preview terminates when the transition completes, or to
use button control, is made on the switcher side (see page 404).
[KEY] button operation mode for key source bus operations: When the
key source bus is selected with the delegation buttons in the AUX bus
control block, specify the [KEY] button operation mode in the <Key
Source Bus Select Mode> group, as follows.
Key: If you select this, the [KEY] button is always lit, and this mode
allows only key signals to be selected with the cross-point buttons.
Video & Key: The [KEY] button is enabled, and either video or key
signals can be selected.
379Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Note
On the MVS-8000, it is not possible to switch the operating mode of
the [KEY] button.
CCP-8000-specific button settings: Press [CCP-8000 Button], and skip
to step 3.
3
If required, make the following settings.
Operation mode during a fade-to-black: To set the operation mode if the
[FTB] button is pressed once more during a fade-to-black, select either
of the following in the <FTB> group.
Continue: Continue the fade-to-black.
Cancel: Cancel the fade-to-black, and return to the state before
executing the fade-to-black.
Operation mode of the [XPT HOLD] buttons in the key rows: Set the
operation mode of the [XPT HOLD] buttons in the key rows in the
<Key Bus Xpt Hold> group, as follows.
Normal: The <Xpt Hold Mode> in the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/
CCR menu is enabled.
Protect: In this mode, pressing a panel button cannot change the
cross-point settings.
Note
The button On/Off state is preserved in each of the “Normal” and
“Protect” modes. For example, if the [XPT HOLD] buttons are “On”
in the Normal mode, and you switch to Protect mode, then if the [XPT
HOLD] buttons were “Off” in this mode the previous time, the [XPT
HOLD] buttons go off, and if they were “On” they light.
[UTIL] button operation mode: To set the operation mode of the [UTIL]
button in the cross-point control block, press either of the following in
the <Util Button> group.
Hold: Acts as a utility button while held down, changing the
assignment of the cross-point button rows.
Lock: For the key rows, each time the button is pressed the cross-point
button assignment toggles between the utility assignment and the
normal assignment. The background A and B rows are fixedly
assigned to the A and B rows, even if the [UTIL] button is pressed.
(For details, see “Names and Functions of Parts of the Control
Panel” in Chapter 2 (Volume 1).)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
380 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Setting trackball, joystick, search dial, and double-click
sensitivity
You can set the operational sensitivity for trackball, joystick and the buttons
which recall the relevant menus when pressed twice, and the relation of the
rotation angle of search dial with the playback speed.
1
In the Panel >Operation menu, press the [Sensitivity].
The Sensitivity menu appears.
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.
2
Make the following settings as required.
Trackball and Z-ring sensitivity in normal mode: In the <Trackball
Normal Mode> group, select [×1], [×2], or [×4].
Trackball and Z-ring sensitivity in fine mode: In the <Trackball Fine
Mode> group, select [1/2], [1/4], or [1/8].
Joystick sensitivity in normal mode: In the <Joystick Normal Mode>
group, select [×1], [×2], or [×4].
Joystick sensitivity in fine mode: In the <Joystick Fine Mode> group,
select [1/2], [1/4], or [1/8].
Touch sensitivity for recalling menus by double-clicking buttons: In
the <Double Click> group, select [Fast], [Normal], or [Slow].
Search dial rotation angle to attain the same playback speed: In the
<SHTL/VAR Dial Range> group, select [Narrow] or [Wide].
Specifying main split fader
In the <Main Split Fader> group of the Panel >Operation menu, select [Left]
or [Right].
Setting the macro execution mode
1
Press [Macro] in the Panel >Operation menu.
The Macro menu appears.
2
In the <Macro Execution Mode> group, select the macro execution mode.
Normal: normal execution mode
Step: step execution mode
3
In the <Flexi Pad Edit Mode> group, set the macro editing mode of the
standard type Flexi Pad to [Pause Only] or [Full Editing].
381Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
This enables the standard type Flexi Pad control block to be used for macro
editing. Depending on the macro editing mode setting, functions are
assigned to the memory recall buttons as shown in the following figure.
4
When making a macro attachment setting, select whether or not to enable
cross-point button operations in the <Attachment Setting Mode> group.
With Button Function: enable cross-point button operations
W/o Button Function: disable cross-point button operations
Screen Saver and Other Settings (Maintenance Menu)
To make settings relating to the screen saver, etc., use the Panel >Maintenance
menu.
To display the Maintenance menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF2 ‘Panel’ and HF7 ‘Maintenance.’
The status area shows a list of the items with their settings.
Screen saver settings
To enable the menu screen saver, use the following procedure.
1
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [Screen Saver], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
STOR ??PAUS
EXIT STOR ??
AUTO
INS
PAUS ALL
INS MOD DEL
>NEXT<PREV
When the setting is
[Pause Only]
When the setting is
[Full Editing]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Sleep Time Time until screen saver starts
operation
1 to 300 (minutes)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
382 Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Adjusting the brightness
You can adjust each of the following brightnesses independently.
LCD: Adjust the brightness of the source name displays and the LCD buttons
in the Flexi Pad control block.
LED: Adjust the brightness of the LED displays in the numeric keypad control
block and so forth.
Switch: Adjust the brightness of the panel switches.
The following description takes the LCD brightness as an example. Use a
similar process for the other adjustments.
1
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [LCD Brightness].
2
Adjust the following parameter.
a) The larger the value, the brighter the screen.
Adjusting the alarms
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, make the following settings.
To give audible feedback from menu touch screen operations: Press
[Touch Beep], turning it on.
Calibrating the touch panel
1
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [Touch Panel Calibration].
The following message appears.
“To Perform Calibration, please touch the center of each plus sign.”
2
Press [Yes].
3
Press the center of the plus sign displayed on the screen.
When you press on the plus sign, it disappears and a diagonally opposite
plus sign appears.
4
Press the center of the plus sign.
A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to restart the panel reflecting the new setting.
• Select “No” to cancel the setting and return to the Maintenance menu.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Brightness Menu screen brightness 1 to 5 a)
383Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setting the menu to be shown when the menus are started
1
In the Panel >Maintenance menu, press [Initial Menu Set].
A popup window appears.
2
Enter the page number of the desired menu.
The next time the menus are started, the menu specified by this number
appears.
Note
To enable this setting, the initial state of the control panel when powered on
must be set to one of the following.
• Set to Resume mode
• Set to Custom mode, with “User” selected in the <Setup> group.
For details of these settings, see “Selecting the State After Powering On (Start
Up Menu)” (page 297).
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
384 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)
To make settings for the switcher processor configuration, use the Switcher
>Config menu.
To display the Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF1 ‘Config.’
The status area shows the output signal assignment for each of the M/E and
PGM/PST banks.
Adjusting the reference phase
To adjust the switcher internal reference phase, in the Switcher >Config menu,
set the following parameter.
Specifying the video switching timing
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [Switching Timing].
The Switching Timing menu appears.
2
Select any of the following.
Any: Not specified
Field 1: Field 1 (odd fields)
Field 2: Field 2 (even fields)
Note
When the signal format is set to 720P or 1080PsF, this selection is not possible.
Setting the operation mode
In the <M/E Config> group of the Switcher >Config menu, select the operation
mode for each M/E or P/P bank from the following.
• Standard mode
• Multi Program mode
• DSK mode (P/P only)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Phase Switcher internal reference phase –32.00 to +96.00
385Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
For details of the modes, see “Switcher Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
When Multi Program mode is selected, two or more transition type indication
may light. It is also possible that more than one “Transition Type” has been
selected in the Misc >Transition menu for each M/E.
To assign the output of each bank in Multi Program mode
When you selected [Multi Program] in the procedure described in “Setting the
operation mode” (page 384), use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [M/E Output Assign].
The M/E Output Assign menu appears.
2
On the list in the status area, select the bank output to be assigned.
The selected output appears in reverse video.
3
In the <M/E Output Assign> group, select the output signal to be assigned.
To set the output configuration for each bank
When you selected [Multi Program] or [DSK] in the procedure described in
“Setting the operation mode” (page 384), use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [PGM Config].
The PGM Config menu appears.
The status area shows the background and key configuration assigned to
the output of each bank.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the output for which you
want to make the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected output appears in reverse video.
3
In the <Bkgd> group, select the background.
In Multi Program mode, select [Clean] or [Utility2], then skip to step 5.
In DSK mode, select one of [Bkgd1] to [Bkgd4].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No (PGM) Output to which setting applies 1 to 16
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
386 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
4
In DSK mode, turn the knobs to select the background signal.
a) 1 to 6: M/E1 OUT1 to 6
7 to 12: M/E2 OUT1 to 6
13 to 18: M/E3 OUT1 to 6
5
In each of the <Key1> to <Key4> groups, select [Enable] or [Disable].
To set the key preview configuration
You can make this setting at any time, regardless of the operation mode.
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [K-PVW Config].
The K-PVW Config menu appears.
The status area shows the key preview configuration for each bank.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the key preview to which the
settings apply.
• Press directly on the list in the status area to make the selection.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected key preview appears in reverse video.
3
In the <Mode> group, select [Video] mode or [Key] mode.
If you select Key mode, skip to step 6.
4
In the <Bkgd> group, select the background.
In standard mode or Multi Program mode, select [Clean] or [Utility2], then
skip to step 6.
In DSK mode, select any of [Bkgd1] to [Bkgd4].
5
In DSK mode, turn the knobs to select the background signal.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 to 5 Bkgd1 to 4 Background signal selection 1 to 18 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No (K-PVW) Key preview to which setting
applies
1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 to 5 Bkgd1 to 4 Background signal selection 1 to 18 a)
387Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
a) 1 to 6: M/E1 OUT1 to 6
7 to 12: M/E2 OUT1 to 6
13 to 18: M/E3 OUT1 to 6
6
In the <Key 1> to <Key 4> groups, select the corresponding key status
from the following.
Link: Follow the key on/off setting.
On: Key is always on.
Off: Key is always off.
Setting user regions
Note
If you change the user region settings, the previously stored snapshot data and
keyframe effect data can no longer be used.
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [User1-8 Config].
The User1-8 Config menu appears. The status area shows the region names
and assigned user region numbers.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the region you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <User Region Assign> group, select the user region you want to
assign. If you do not want to assign a user region, select [No Assign].
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make the settings for other regions.
5
To confirm the setting, press [Execute]. To cancel the setting and return to
the original state, press [Clear] without pressing [Execute].
When you press [Execute], a confirmation message appears.
6
Press [Yes].
This assigns a region to a user region.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Region Region selection 1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
388 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Assigning PGM/PST logically to an M/E
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [Logical M/E Assign].
The Logical M/E Assign menu appears. The status area shows the physical
M/E and logical M/E organization.
2
Select the M/E you want to logically set to the PGM/PST from the
<Logical M/E to Physical P/P> group.
P/P: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical PGM/PST.
M/E-1: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical M/E-1.
M/E-2: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical M/E-2.
M/E-3: Assign the physical PGM/PST as logical M/E-3.
Setting the assignments of DME channels to use on the
individual M/E banks
The Switcher >Config >DME Config menu allows you to select the DME
channels to use on the M/E and PGM/PST banks for processed keys or DME
wipes.
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [DME Config].
The DME Config menu appears.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the M/E or PGM/PST bank
for which you want to set a DME channel assignment.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
3
In the <DME Channel> group, press one of the [Ch1] to [Ch8] buttons
turning it on.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign DME channels to other banks.
Setting the side flag video material and operation
Make settings relating to the video material (4:3 aspect ratio) for applying side
flags.
Note
These settings are valid only on the MVS-8000A/8000G; not valid on the
MVS-8000.
389Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
For details of side flag operations, see “Side Flag Settings” in Chapter 10
(Volume 1).
To set the aspect ratio (4:3/16:9)
1
In the Switcher >Config menu, press [Side Flags].
The Side Flags menu appears.
The status area lists the video/key pair numbers, video signal source
names, and aspect ratio settings (16:9/4:3).
2
Using any of the following methods, select the pair number for which you
want to make the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• To select all of the pair numbers, press [ALL].
3
In the <Aspect> group, press [4:3].
If you select [16:9], no side flags are applied.
To set 4:3 video material to have side flags applied automatically
You can make a setting so that when a signal with aspect ratio set to 4:3 is
selected in the cross-point control block, side flags are automatically applied.
To do so, in the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu press [Auto Side Flags].
Pressing this button toggles the setting on and off.
This setting applies to all of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
To set to crop to 4:3 when a DME wipe is executed
When side flags are enabled, you can automatically crop an image as set to be
a 4:3 image when executing a DME wipe.
To do so, in the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu press [Auto Crop].
Pressing this button toggles the setting on and off.
This setting applies to all of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
To adjust the width of the side flags
You can adjust the width of the side flags.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 V/K Pair No Selection of a V/K pair by its
number in the list
1 to 128
3 Num Selection of number of V/K pairs
in the list
1 to 128
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
390 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
1
In the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu, press [Width].
2
Adjust the following parameters.
To display the menu for enabling/disabling the side flags
In the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu, press [Misc >Enbl >Setup Flags].
To display the menu for assigning the side flags on/off function to
a cross-point button
In the Switcher >Config >Side Flags menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].
Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)
For setup relating to signal inputs, use the Switcher >Input menu.
To display the Input menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF2 ‘Input.’
The status area shows source numbers and source names, input signal phase,
and through mode on/off setting.
Making phase adjustment and through mode settings
1
In the Switcher >Input menu, select the input signal to which the settings
apply.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected input signal appears in reverse video.
2
Press [Input Phase Adj].
3
To adjust the phase, adjust the following parameter.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Left Width of left side flag –100.00 to +100.00
4 Right Width of right side flag –100.00 to +100.00
5 All Width of both side flags Left value shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Src No Input signal selection 1 to 80
391Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
4
To enable through mode, press [Through Mode], turning it on.
Making video process settings
1
In the Switcher >Input menu, press [Video Process].
The Video Process menu appears.
The status area shows the source number, source name, and video process
adjustment settings.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the input signal to which the
settings apply.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Video Process], turning it on.
4
Adjust the following parameters.
To set the parameter settings to their defaults, press [Unity].
Enabling the illegal color limiter
To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the switcher
internal matte generator, press [Matte Illeg Col Limit] in the Switcher >Input
menu, turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Phase Input signal phase –16 to +16
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Src No Input signal selection 1 to 80
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –7.31 to +109.59
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
392 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Setting the format converter inputs (when using the MVS-8000G)
To select the format converter inputs to be set (inputs 1 to 8 or
inputs 9 to 16)
1
Display the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu.
The following figure illustrates the case when FC Input 1-8 are set to up-
conversion, and FC Input 9-16 are set to cross-conversion.
2
Press [FC Input 1-8] or [FC Input 9-16] as required.
3
Using any of the following methods, select what the setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) If you pressed [FC Input 9-16] in step 2, the value is from 9 to 16 inclusive.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source No Input selection 1 and upwards a)
Button to switch between displaying FC Input 1-8
and FC Input 9-16 (If FC Input 1-8 and FC Input 9-
16 have the same format, this does not appear.)
393Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
To make detailed settings for up-conversion
1
In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, select the input to which the
setting applies.
2
Press [Format Converter], turning it on.
This enables format conversion.
3
In the <Conversion> group, select one of the following.
Frame: Conversion in frame units
Field: Conversion in field units
Adaptive: Automatically switching between the above two modes
When Adaptive is selected, adjust the following parameter.
a) 1: Still priority mode, 2: Standard mode, 3: Motion priority mode
4
In the <Aspect> group, select one of the following.
Edge Crop: Add black bars on the left and right sides of a 4:3 aspect ratio
image to convert it to a 16:9 image.
Letter Box: Crop the top and bottom of a 4:3 aspect ratio image to convert
it to a 16:9 image.
Squeeze: Stretch a 4:3 image horizontally to covert it to a 16:9 image.
(For details of the image transformations, see the following figure.)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Motion Select Motion detection
sensitivity
1 to 3 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
394 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
To set the image position in edge crop up-conversion mode
1
In the <Edge Crop Position> group of the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust
menu, press [Position], turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameter.
a) For down-conversion, the value is from –30 to +30 inclusive.
To return the edge crop image to the center
In the <Edge Crop Position> group, press [Center].
To set the image position in letter box up-conversion mode
1
In the <Letter Box Position> group of the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust
menu, press [Position], turning it on.
Original image (4:3) Up-converted image (16:9)
Edge Crop
Letter Box
Squeeze
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting format Setting values
2 EC Position Image position a) 1080 –120 to +120
720 –80 to +80
395Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
Adjust the following parameter.
To return the letterbox image to the center
In the <Letter Box Position> group, press [Center].
To make enhancer settings
1
In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, press [Enhancer], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
Parameter group [1/2]
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting format Setting values
2 LB Position Image position 1080i/59.94,
29.97PsF
–31 to +32
1080i/50,
25PsF
–36 to + 36
720P –30 to +30
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Detail Gain Adjust the edge
enhancement
sharpness
0 to 127
3 Limiter Adjust the
maximum signal
level to be added
to the original
signal
0 to 63
4 Crisp Set the amplitude
value for which a
low-amplitude
signal is not
emphasized
0 to 15
5 Level Depend Set the luminance
range for edge
enhancement
0 to 15
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Frequency Set the central
frequency for edge
enhancement
0 to 3
3 H/V Ratio Set the horizontal/
vertical ratio for
edge
enhancement
0 to 7
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
396 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
To make detailed settings for down-conversion
1
In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, select the input to which the
setting applies.
2
Press [Format Converter], turning it on.
This enables format conversion.
3
In the <Aspect> group, select one of the following.
Edge Crop: Crop the left and right sides of a 16:9 image to convert it to a
4:3 image.
Letter Box 13:9: Crop the left and right sides of a 16:9 image to make a
13:9 image and add black bars at the top and bottom of the 13:9 image
to make a 4:3 image.
Letter Box 14:9: Crop the left and right sides of a 16:9 image to make a
14:9 image and add black bars on the top and bottom of the 14:9 image
to make a 4:3 image.
Letter Box 16:9: Add black bars on the top and bottom of a 16:9 image to
convert it to a 4:3 image.
Squeeze: Compress a 16:9 image horizontally to convert it to a 4:3 image.
(For details of the image transformations, see the following figure.)
397Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
For down-conversion, the image position setting in edge crop mode is the
same as for up-conversion. The value is from –30 to +30 inclusive. For
more details, see “To set the image position in edge crop up-conversion
mode” (page 394).
For down-conversion, the enhancer settings are the same as for up-
conversion. For more details, see “To make enhancer settings” (page
395).
Original image (16:9) Down-converted image (4:3)
Edge Crop
Letter Box 13:9
Letter Box 14:9
Letter Box 16:9
Squeeze
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
398 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
To make cross-conversion settings
To make the cross-conversion settings, carry out steps 1 and 2 described in
“To make detailed settings for up-conversion” (page 393). No other settings
are required.
To copy format converter input data
1
In the Switcher >Input >FC Adjust menu, press [Copy].
The Copy/Swap >Copy >Format Converter menu appears.
The status area shows lists of the copy source on the left, and the copy
destination on the right.
2
Select [Input] in the <Data Select> group.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the data.
• Press directly on the list.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Press [Copy].
This copies the data.
Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)
For setup relating to signal outputs, use the Switcher >Output menu.
To display the Output menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF3 ‘Output.’
The status area shows the output signal numbers and names, and output signal
phase for the signals output from Output 1 to 48.
Assigning output signals
To assign a signal to output from an output port, use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Output menu, press [Output Assign].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Select the copy source data 1 and upwards
2 Right No Select the copy destination data 1 and upwards
3 Num Select the number of items 1 and upwards
399Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
The Output Assign menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and assigned signals on the left, and
a list of signals that can be assigned on the right.
2
In the <Output Assign> group, select either of the following.
[Re-Entry Source]: It is possible to make duplicate assignments.
M/E-1 Output 1 to 6 a)
M/E-2 Output 1 to 6 a)
M/E-3 Output 1 to 6 a)
PGM/PST 1 to 6 a)
DME Monitor Video
DME Monitor Key
Color Corrector 1 and 2
Undefined
Color Bkgd 2
Frame Memory 1 to 8
a) M/E output signals selected in the M/E Output Assign menu.
[Aux Bus]: It is not possible to make duplicate assignments.
Preset
Edit Preview
AUX 1 to 48
3
Using any of the following methods, select the output port number and
signal to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area to make the selection.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
• For output ports not to be assigned, press [Inhibit].
The selected signal appears in reverse video.
4
Press [Set] to confirm the assignment.
Selecting the output signal to which settings apply
In the following adjustment/setting operations except for “Setting the
reference output” (see page 402), use any of the following methods to select
the output signal before making the setting.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Output No Output port number 1 to 48
2 Source No Selection of signal to be assigned 1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
400 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected output signal appears in reverse video.
Adjusting the video clip
To adjust the clip value for each of the output signals from the Output 1 to 48
ports, use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Output menu, press [Video Clip].
The Video Clip menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and assigned signals, and the white
clip, dark clip, and chrominance clip values.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
To set the values to the default values, press [Default].
Making vertical blanking interval adjustment and through mode
settings
1
In the Switcher >Output menu, press [V Blank/Through].
The V Blank/Through menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals, the vertical
blanking interval, and the through mode Enable/Disable status.
2
Press [V Blank Mask].
3
Adjust the parameter.
a) Depending on the signal format, the adjustment range varies as follows.
•480i: 10 to 19
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Output No Output port number selection 1 to 48
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 White Clip Luminance signal white clip value 90.00 to 109.02
3 Dark Clip Luminance signal dark clip value –6.85 to +10.00
4 Chroma Clip Chrominance signal clip value 90.00 to 113.17
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Mask End Final value for vertical blanking
interval
See note a) below
401Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
•576i: 6 to 22
•1080i: 7 to 20
•720P: 7 to 25
To return the values to their defaults, press [Default].
4
To enable the through mode, press [Through Mode], setting it to Enable.
The through mode can be applied to the following outputs.
• Aux 1 to 48 outputs
• Program outputs of the M/E and PGM/PST rows
• Clean outputs of the M/E and PGM/PST rows
Making safe title settings
Note
“Grid” in the following procedure is supported on the MVS-8000G only.
1
In the Switcher >Output menu, press [Safe Title].
The Safe Title menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals, with the
box 1, box 2, cross, and grid states.
2
To enable the safe title on/off setting made in the Misc menu, press [Safe
Title], turning it on.
3
Carry out either of the following operations.
To display a box: Press [Box1] or [Box2], turning it on.
In this case, carry out the following steps 4 and 5.
To display a cross: Press [Cross], turning it on.
To display a grid: Press [Grid], turning it on (when using the MVS-
8000G).
In this case, carry out the following steps 4 and 5.
4
When you selected [Box1] or [Box2] in step 3, adjust the following
parameters.
a) Adjustable for Box2
When in step 3 you selected [Grid], in the <Grid Size> group, select one
of the following.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Box Size Box size 50.00 to 100.00
3 Luminance Display brightness 0.00 to 100.00 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
402 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
80.00%: Set the grid size to 80% of the screen frame
85.00%: Set the grid size to 85% of the screen frame
90.00%: Set the grid size to 90% of the screen frame
100.00%: Set the grid size to the full-screen size (100% of the screen
frame)
5
When in step 3 you selected [Box1] or [Box2], in the <Box1 Adjust> or
<Box2 Adjust> group, select the screen aspect ratio (16:9/14:9/4:3).
When in step 3 you selected [Grid], in the <Grid Adjust> group, select the
screen aspect ratio (16:9/4:3).
Setting the reference output
Note
This function is not supported on the MVS-8000G.
To adjust the reference output phase with respect to the reference input, adjust
the following parameters in the Switcher >Output menu.
Cropping the image to a 4:3 aspect ratio in an HD system
In an HD system, to crop an image having a screen aspect ratio of 4:3 to an
aspect ratio of 4:3, use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Output menu, press [4:3 Crop].
The 4:3 Crop menu appears.
The status area shows the output ports and respective 4:3 Crop mode
settings.
2
Press [4:3 Crop], turning it on.
This enables the crop setting, and this is reflected in the status area.
Note
When the screen aspect ratio of 16:9 is selected for all M/E banks in the System
>Format >Active Line/Aspect menu, the setting of 4:3 Crop is disabled.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Line Line phase –90 to +90
3 Time Time –32.00 to +96.00
403Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setting the format converter outputs (only when using the MVS-
8000G)
To set the format converter
Display the Switcher >Output >FC Adjust menu. The subsequent operations
are the same as for the format converter input settings, except that you can not
disable the format converter settings.
For details of the operations, see “Setting the format converter inputs (when
using the MVS-8000G)” (page 392).
To copy format converter output data
1
In the Switcher >Output >FC Adjust menu, press [Copy].
The Copy/Swap >Copy >Format Converter menu appears.
2
In the <Data Select> group, press [Output].
3
Use the same operations as in steps 3 and 4 of “To copy format converter
input data” (page 398) to copy the data.
Assigning a PGM/PST bank output signal to the format converter
outputs (1, 2) (only when using simple P/P software on the MVS-
8000G)
1
Display the Switcher >Output >FC Output Assign menu.
2
In the <FC Output1-2 Assign> group, select [Out 17-22].
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
404 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Out 15-16: The outputs from the format converter output connectors
(FC1, FC2) are fixed, being the same signals as from Out 15 and Out
16.
Out 17-22: Assign the signals selected from the list on the right.
3
In the box on the left, press [1] or [2] to select FC Output 1 or 2.
4
In the box on the right, select the output signal.
5
Press [Set].
This assigns the signal.
Note
It is not possible to assign the same signal to the format converter outputs
1 and 2.
Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu)
For settings relating to video switching, use the Switcher >Transition menu.
To display the Transition menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF4 ‘Transition.’
The status area shows the transition preview, key transition, bus toggle, and
split fader settings for each M/E and P/P bank.
Selecting the bank to which the settings apply
In the Transition menu, using any of the following methods, select the bank to
which the settings apply, then make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected bank appears in reverse video.
Setting the transition preview mode
To select the transition preview mode, in the <Transition Preview> group of
the Transition menu, select either of the following.
One Time: The transition preview ends after a single transition.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bank M/E or P/P selection to which settings apply 1 to 4
405Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Normal: Switching the [TRANS PVW] button on or off switches between the
transition preview mode and the normal mode.
Selecting the transition mode of the independent key transition
control block
To select the key transition mode, select either of the following in the <Key
Transition> group of the Transition menu.
Same: The transition settings for the On and Off directions are the same.
Independ: The transition settings for the On and Off directions can be set
separately.
Selecting the background transition flip-flop mode
In the Transition menu, press [Bus Toggle], to switch between on and off.
On: Flip-flop mode
Off: Bus fixed mode
For more details, see “Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
Setting the split fader to be enabled or disabled
In the Transition menu, press [Split Fader] to switch between Enable and
Disable. This setting is only valid when using a simple transition module with
Bus Toggle set to Off.
Enable: When the fader lever is split, the split fader effect is enabled.
Disable: Even when the fader lever is split, the normal fader lever effect is
obtained.
Enabling or disabling the fade-to-black function
In the <FTB> group of the Transition menu, press the program output name to
toggle between On and Off.
On: When the [FTB] button is pressed, a fade-to-black is carried out.
Off: Even when the [FTB] button is pressed, no fade-to-black is carried out.
Note
The PGM2 to PGM4 settings are only valid in Multi Program mode or DSK
mode.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
406 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Setting a preset color mix
1
In the Switcher >Transition menu, press [Preset Color Mix].
The Preset Color Mix menu appears.
The status area shows the stroke mode setting for each M/E bank, the
setting for whether or not the key status is maintained, and the one-time
mode setting.
2
In the <Stroke Mode> group, select whether to carry out a transition in one
stroke or two strokes.
Normal: Carry out a preset color mix with two transition operations.
Single: Carry out a preset color mix with a single transition operation.
Note
In bus fixed mode (see page 405), the setting is fixed to “Single.”
3
In the <Non Drop Key> group, select the key setting for a transition
including a key.
To carry out the transition with the key state maintained, press [Key1] to
[Key4], turning them on. (See “Transition Types” in Chapter 1 (Volume
1).)
4
If each time a transition ends the transition type is to return to the previous
setting, press [One Time Enable].
Settings relating to fader lever operations
To select the way in which the fader lever position and the transition progress
are related, use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Transition menu, press [Transition Curve].
The Transition Curve menu appears.
2
In the <Fader Curve> group, select the fader lever operation mode.
Normal: The transition progress is linear, according to the fader lever
position. (Factory default setting)
Adv Tally Mode: When the fader lever is moved from the end of its travel,
the tally is output slightly before the transition starts.
407Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and
Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)
For settings relating to keys, wipes, frame memory and Color Correction, use
the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu.
To display the Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF5 ‘Key/Wipe/
FM/CCR.’
The status area shows the key memory settings, mask and border processing
order, key priority, cross-point hold, pattern limit transition, and wipe edge
settings for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
Switching video process memory on or off
In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Video Proc Memory],
turning it on. (See also “Switcher Setup” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).)
Settings for the show key function
1
In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Show Key].
The Show Key menu appears.
2
In the <Show Key Enable> group, press the signal for which “show key”
is enabled, turning it on.
3
To set the time for which “show key” is held, press [Hold Time].
4
Adjust the following parameter.
Settings for key auto drop function
Note
This function is only valid in standard mode.
The “key auto drop” function automatically switches off a particular key when
you press a cross-point button in a bus that outputs the background on the
particular switcher bank (PGM/PST, or M/E-1 to M/E-3).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Hold Time Show key hold time 0 to 999 (frames)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
408 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
When the background output bus is in flip-flop mode, this is always the A bus.
In bus-fixed mode, it is either the A bus or the B bus depending on the fader
lever position.
For details of bus-fixed mode, see “Executing a Transition” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
1
In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Key Auto Drop].
The Key Auto Drop menu appears.
2
In the <Key Auto Drop> group, press the name of the keyer for which you
want the key to be deleted automatically, turning it on.
Automatically naming and saving to frame memory
In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [FM Auto Store], turning it
on.
Selecting the bank to which the settings apply
For the section “Selecting the key memory mode” and subsequent sections,
select the bank to which the settings apply using any of the following methods,
then make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
The selected bank appears in reverse video.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting
values
1 Bank M/E or P/P selection to which settings apply 1 to 4
409Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Selecting the key memory mode
In the <Key Memory> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu,
select one from Full (full mode)/Simple (simple mode)/Off.
For more details, see “Key Memory” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Selecting the processing order of masks and borders
In the <Mask/Border Process> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
menu, select one of the following.
Mask >Border: Apply the Mask effect, then apply the Border effect.
Border >Mask: Apply the Border effect, then apply the Mask effect.
Selecting the key priority operation mode
In the <Key Priority> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, select
one of the following.
Normal: The key priority sequence can be varied freely.
Fix: Fixed at currently set priority sequence.
Setting the operation mode of the key bus [XPT HOLD] button
In the <Xpt Hold Mode> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu,
select any of the following. This setting is applied for the attributes of
snapshots as well as the operation mode of [XPT HOLD] button.
Key Disable: The [XPT HOLD] button of the key bus functions not only as a
cross-point hold button but also as a key disable button. When the [XPT
HOLD] button is on, recalling a snapshot or keyframe effect does not
reflect the key settings, including the cross-point selection information.
Key Disable with Status: Same as [Key Disable], and further disables the
reflection of the key on/off status.
Xpt Hold: The [XPT HOLD] button of the key bus functions as a cross-point
hold button. When the [XPT HOLD] is on, recalling a snapshot or
keyframe effect does not reflect the cross-point selection information.
To change the cross-point hold attribute of a snapshot
If you select “Key Disable” above, this also applies key disable to the cross-
point hold attribute.
If you select “Key Disable With Status,” the key disable function is applied,
including the key on/off status.
Setting the operation mode when the pattern limit is released
In the <Pattern Limit Transition> group of the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
menu, select either of the following operation modes.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
410 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Auto: When the pattern limit is released, the remainder of the transition is
carried out automatically at a special-purpose transition rate.
Manual: After the pattern limit is released, the transition waits for the next
operation, then executes. Until you move the fader lever or press [AUTO
TRANS], the transition is not executed.
Setting the default wipe edge softness
1
In the Switcher >Key/Wipe/FM/CCR menu, press [Wipe Edge Default],
turning it on.
2
Set the following parameter.
Setting the mode in which all signals can be selected for input to
the color corrector
Press [CCR Internal Signal Enable] in the Switcher > Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
menu, turning it on.
You can select signals generated internally to the switcher as material for input
to the color corrector.
Note
When you select an M/E reentry signal as material for input to the color
corrector, 1H delay occurs to the output signal of M/E.
Settings Relating to Function Links (Link Menu)
Carry out setup relating to links by displaying the Switcher >Link menu.
To display the Link menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF6 ‘Link.’
The status area shows the current link information.
Setting a cross-point button link
To link together two buses internal to the switcher, use the following
procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Link menu, press [Internal Bus Link].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Soft Default value of wipe edge
softness –50.00 to +50.00
411Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
The Internal Bus Link menu appears.
The status area shows the link source and link destination buses, and link
table information.
2
Using any of the following methods, select what setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Link Bus Select].
The Link Bus Select menu appears.
The status area lists the current setting status of the selected link and the
buses that can be selected.
4
In the <Bus Select> group, select [Master Bus] (link source bus).
5
Using any of the following methods, select the bus to be the link source,
and press [Bus Set].
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) Only when [Master Bus] is selected, M/E-1 to M/E-3 Trans PGM, and P/P Trans PGM are
available.
Only when [Linked Bus] is selected, AUX 1 to AUX 48 as Key and MON 1 to MON 8 as
Key are available.
The following buses cannot be selected on the MVS-8000.
M/E-1 Key1 to 4 Source as Video
M/E-2 Key1 to 4 Source as Video
M/E-3 Key1 to 4 Source as Video
PGM/PST Key1 to 4 Source as Video
Note
With one of M/E-1 to M/E-3 Trans PGM and P/P Trans PGM selected
for [Master Bus], linking is carried out as soon as you start moving the
fader lever.
6
In the <Bus Select> group, select [Linked Bus] (link destination bus).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number 1 to 64
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Bus selection 1 to 190 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
412 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
7
Referring to step 5, select the bus to be the link destination, and press [Bus
Set].
8
Turn the knob to select the link table, and press [Link Table Set].
For more information about link tables, see the following item.
The status area reflects the current setting status.
To delete a link
Select the link you want to delete, then press [Clear] in the Switcher >Link
>Internal Bus Link menu.
Making link table settings
1
In the Switcher >Link >Internal Bus Link menu, press [Link Table Select].
The Link Table Select menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the link source and link
destination signals.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
To confirm the selection, press [Link Src Set].
This links the link destination signal to the signal selected as Main No.
To initialize the set source address
In the Switcher >Link >Link Table Select menu, press [Init Link Table].
A confirmation message appears; press [Yes].
The source addresses are reassigned, and this is reflected in the status area.
To change the link number and link table number
In this menu too, you can change the link number and link table number. To do
this, turn the knobs as follows to make the setting, then press [Link Table Set].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Link Table No Link table selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Main No Video/key signal for link source 1 to 128
5 No Video/key signal for link destination 1 to 128
413Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Linking cross-point buttons and GPI output ports
To link cross-point buttons or the [CUT] and [AUTO TRANS] buttons in the
cross-point control block, and GPI output ports, use the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Link menu, press [GPI Link], to display the Switcher
>Link >GPI Link menu.
The status area shows the output ports and the link status, and delay value
information.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the GPI output port.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [GPI Link Adjust].
The GPI Link Adjust menu appears.
The status area shows the current setting state of the selected link, and a
list of the selectable video names or button names, together with the GPI
link Enable/Disable setting for each bus.
4
Using any of the following methods, select what the setting applies to. For
each GPI port there can be up to eight links.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) These include main pair numbers 1 to 128, and “Cut” and “Auto Trans” on each bank.
5
In the <Video/Button> group, press [Select].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link to which setting applies 1 to 64
3 Link Table No Link table selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 GPI Port GPI output port selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 GPI Port GPI output port selection 1 to 8
2 Link No Link number selection 1 to 8
3 Video/Button No Selection of video or
button name to be linked 1 to 136 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
414 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
The selected video or button name is reflected in the status area.
To clear a video/button name link
Make the selection to which the setting applies, then in the <Video/
Button> group press [Clear].
6
To select for each bus whether the GPI link setting is enabled or disabled,
use any of the following methods to select the bus to which the setting
applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
7
In the <Bus> group, select any of the following.
Enable: Enable the GPI link setting for the selected bus.
Disable: Disable the GPI link setting for the selected bus.
All Enable: Enable the GPI link setting for all buses.
To set the delay value
1
In the Switcher >Link >GPI Link Adjust menu, turn the knobs to select the
output port for which you want to set the delay value, and the
corresponding delay value.
2
Press [Delay Set].
This confirms the delay value, which is reflected in the status area.
Making a setting for linking two M/E banks
You can link any two M/E banks for some operations by using the Switcher
>Link >M/E Link menu.
The operations for which you can link two M/E banks are as follows.
• Transition execution (auto transition, cut, and fader lever operation)
• Next transition selection
• Transition type selection
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Bus Bus selection 1 to 114
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 GPI Port GPI output port for the
setting
1 to 8
5 Delay Delay value for the output
port
0 to 300 (fields)
415Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Note
Clip transition execution is excluded from the above transition execution
operations.
1
In the Switcher >Link menu, press [M/E Link].
The M/E Link menu appears.
The status area displays a link list showing link source banks (M/E and
PGM/PST) and link destination banks, and a selection list.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the link number you want to
set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <M/E Select> group, select [Master M/E] (link source).
4
Using any of the following methods, select the M/E or PGM/PST bank you
want to be the link source, then press [M/E Set].
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) 1: M/E-1
2: M/E-2
3: M/E-3
4: PGM/PST
5
In the <M/E Select> group, select [Linked M/E] (link destination).
6
In the same way as in step 4, select the M/E or PGM/PST bank you want
to be the link destination, then press [M/E Set].
To link the banks not only for transition execution but also for the
other operations
Press [Transition Only], turning it off.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Bank selection 1 to 4 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
416 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
To release the link setting
Use the same operation as in step 2 to select the link number for which you
want to release the link setting, then press [Clear].
Making a link setting for key transition
You can make a link setting for key transition by using the Switcher >Link
>Key Transition Link menu.
The operations for which you can link two banks are the following independent
key transition operations.
• Auto transition
• Turning the key on or off
• Fader lever operation (on the downstream key control block)
1
In the Switcher >Link menu, press [Key Trans Link].
The Key Transition Link menu appears.
The status area displays a link list showing link sources and link
destinations, and a key selection list.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the link number you want to
set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
In the <Key Select> group, select [Master Key] (link source).
4
Using any of the following, select the key you want to be the link source,
then press [Key Set].
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The keys and their numbers selectable as link source/link destination are as follows.
M/E-1 Key1 (1), M/E-1 Key2 (2), M/E-1 Key3 (3), M/E-1 Key4 (4), M/E-2 Key1 (5), M/
E-2 Key2 (6), M/E-2 Key3 (7), M/E-2 Key4 (8), M/E-3 Key1 (9), M/E-3 Key2 (10), M/E-
3 Key3 (11), M/E-3 Key4 (12), DSK1 (13), DSK2 (14), DSK3 (15), and DSK4 (16)
5
In the <Key Select> group, select [Linked Key] (link destination).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Link No Link number selection 1 to 32
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Key number selection 1 to 16 a)
417Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
6
In the same way as in step 4, select the key you want to be the link
destination, then press [Key Set].
To release the link setting
Use the same operation as in step 2 to select the link number for which you
want to release the link setting, then press [Clear].
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface
Menu)
To carry out setup relating to connections with external devices, display the
Switcher >Device Interface menu.
To display the Device Interface menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF3 ‘Switcher’ and HF7 ‘Device
Interface.’
Making 9-pin port device interface settings
The description in this section takes the REMOTE3 port as an example. For
other REMOTE ports, carry out the same process as required.
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [Remote Assign].
The Remote Assign menu appears.
2
Select the device interface you want to set for the REMOTE3 port from the
<Remote3> group.
Editor A: assign Editor A to the REMOTE3 port.
Editor B: assign Editor B to the REMOTE3 port.
AUX: assign AUX to the REMOTE3 port.
DME1: assign DME1 to the REMOTE3 port.
Note
When REMOTE3 and REMOTE4 are respectively assigned to DME1 and
DME2, you can switch the AUX bus from the DME (DME-3000/7000)
connected to these ports.
At this time, connect the DME input video signals and key signals as follows.
• DME1 video input: AUX1 output
• DME1 key input: AUX2 output
• DME2 video input: AUX4 output
• DME2 key input: AUX5 output
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
418 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Note that for a DME external video signal, you can select any of AUX1 to
AUX14 on the DME. Connect to the selected AUX bus.
Making switcher processor GPI input settings
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Input].
The GPI Input menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger type.
(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.
(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input
pulse.
(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the
input signal.
(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.
4
In the <Target> group, select the action block.
M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, P/P: Set the action for one of the banks.
Common/Setup: Set an action for something other than the above, or a
setup action.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8
2 No Selection of number for action to be
assigned
1 to 8
419Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Cut, Auto Trans
Key1 Cut, Key1 Auto Trans, Key2 Cut, Key2 Auto Trans, Key3 Cut, Key3 Auto
Trans, Key4 Cut, Key4 Auto Trans
SS ? Recall, Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3 SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ?
Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, KF Reverse
Run, No Action
When Target is P/P: Cut, Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut, DSK1 Auto Trans, DSK2 Cut, DSK2 Auto Trans, DSK3 Cut, DSK3
Auto Trans, DSK4 Cut, DSK4 Auto Trans
FTB Cut, FTB Auto Trans
SS ? Recall, DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4 SS
? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, KF Reverse
Run, No Action
When Target is Common/Setup: FM Src1 Field Freeze, FM Src1 Frame Freeze, FM
Src2 Field Freeze, FM Src2 Frame Freeze
FM Src1 Freeze Off, FM Src2 Freeze Off
FM Src1 Clip Record, FM Src1 Clip Stop, FM Src2 Clip Record, FM Src2 Clip
Stop, FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup, FM1 to FM8 Clip Play, FM1 to FM8 Clip Stop,
User1 to 8 SS ? Recall, User1 to 8 EFF ? Recall, User1 to 8 EFF ? Recall & Run,
User1 to 8 KF Run, User1 to 8 KF Stop, User1 to 8 KF Rewind, User1 to 8 KF
Reverse Run, No Action
(FM Src1(2) Clip Record/Stop, and FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup/Play/Stop do not
operate on the MVS-8000.)
• Action list when the trigger type is “Level”
When Target is M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, or P/P: Aspect
Bkgd A Side Flags*, Bkgd B Side Flags*
* Appears on the MVS-8000A/8000G only.
No Action
When Target is Common/Setup: Format, Aspect, Level Enable, No Action
Notes
• “Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the “Aspect” and “Format” actions that can
be used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used, if the input is
“Disable” then it is not possible to switch “Aspect” or “Format” by GPI input.
If a GPI to switch “Aspect” or “Format” occurs when powering the system off, the
action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes off and
the power may go off before the action is completed. This may corrupt the setup
settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid such a situation.
• If “Format” is selected for “Action” when the format converter is used on the MVS-
8000G, you can set the conversion formats of the format converter for “FC Input 1-
8” and “FC Input 9-16”.
b) When knob 3 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 3 selection is “Snapshot” or “Effect”
6
Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
1 to 99 c)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
420 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
The selected setting appears in the status area.
Carrying out level settings
To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, select the action to be set, and
press [H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is high, press [H Set].
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low, press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.
Notes
• When the action is “Format,” these settings conflict with the current
settings, but after making the settings, agreement is restored after a pulse
change or power off/on.
• When the Action is “Bkgd A Side Flags” or “Bkgd B Side Flags,” the
levels are fixed, as follows.
High level: Off
Low level: On
Making switcher processor GPI output settings
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [GPI Output].
The GPI Output menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Selection of setting for action 1 and upwards
421Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
3
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.
(Rising Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open-
circuit or drives the output high, and holds this state for the
specified pulse width.
(Falling Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted
or drives the output low, and holds this state for the specified
pulse width.
(Any Edge): Each time the trigger occurs, the relay contacts are
alternately closed or opened, or the output is switched between
high and low.
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the output.
4
Turn the knobs to select the pulse width and timing to be set.
a) 1: Field 1, 2: Field 2, 3: Any
When “ ” is selected as the trigger polarity, there is no Pulse Width
setting. When “Status” is selected, there is no Pulse Width or Timing
setting.
5
In the <Source> group, select the action block.
M/E-1 to M/E-3 and P/P: Set an action for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Common: Set an action for error status.
6
Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Port selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 (fields)
4 Timing Output timing 1 to 3 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
1 to 99 c)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
422 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Status”
When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2, or M/E-3: Cut, Auto Trans
Key1 Cut, Key1 Auto Trans, Key2 Cut, Key2 Auto Trans, Key3 Cut, Key3 Auto
Trans, Key4 Cut, Key4 Auto Trans
Key1 SS ? Recall, Key2 SS ? Recall, Key3 SS ? Recall, Key4 SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, No Action
When Source is P/P: Cut, Auto Trans
DSK1 Cut, DSK1 Auto Trans, DSK2 Cut, DSK2 Auto Trans, DSK3 Cut, DSK3
Auto Trans, DSK4 Cut, DSK4 Auto Trans
FTB Cut, FTB Auto Trans
DSK1 SS ? Recall, DSK2 SS ? Recall, DSK3 SS ? Recall, DSK4 SS ? Recal
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, No Action
When Source is Common: No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Status”
When Source is M/E-1, M/E-2 or M/E-3: Key1 On, Key2 On, Key3 On, Key4 On
No Action
When Source is P/P: DSK1 On, DSK2 On, DSK3 On, DSK4 On
No Action
When Source is Common: Error Make, Error Break, No Action
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 2 selection is “Snapshot” or “Effect”
7
Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
The selected setting appears in the status area.
Test firing the trigger
To test fire the trigger, press [Test Fire].
This outputs a trigger from the selected output port. This is not output when the
trigger type is “Status.”
Enabling or disabling AUX bus control
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [Aux Control].
The Aux Control menu appears.
2
Select the 9-pin port for the setting, from the <Control> group.
Remote1: Make the settings for the REMOTE1 port.
Remote2: Make the settings for the REMOTE2 port.
Remote3: Make the settings for the REMOTE3 port.
Remote4: Make the settings for the REMOTE4 port.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the AUX bus.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
423Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
a) 0: EDIT PVW
1 to 48: AUX1 to AUX48
4
Select whether to enable or disable AUX bus control from the <Control
Mode> group.
Enable: enable control of the port selected in step 2.
Disable: disable control of the port selected in step 2.
Manual: make whether control of the port selected in step 2 is possible or
not depend on the setting in the Misc menu.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 as required to make the settings for other ports.
Setting the interface between the DME and the switcher
To set the interface between the DME and the switcher when the DME is an
MVE-8000A or MVE-9000, proceed as follows.
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [DME Type Setting].
The DME Type Setting menu appears.
2
In the <DME1 Type> group to set DME1 or in the <DME2 Type> group
to set DME2, press either of the following, turning it on.
Dedicated: The MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 has an MVS-8000-series
dedicated interface.
SDI: The MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 has an SDI interface.
3
To select the number of keys that use DME on an M/E bank, make one of
the following selections in the <DME Assigned Key per M/E> group.
Up to 2 Keys: Mode in which a processed key operation is carried out only
with the dedicated interface DME or the SDI interface DME.
Up to 3 Keys: Mode in which two processed key operations with the
dedicated interface DME and the SDI interface DME are both possible
simultaneously on the same M/E. When this mode is selected, when
combined by a processed key with the SDI interface DME, select the
material for the second channel not on the DME external video bus,
but on the AUX bus.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No AUX bus selection 0 to 48 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
424 Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input
Select the signal input to the DME (AUX bus output) and the signal returned
as the switcher primary input (reentry input) as follows.
Notes
• When using the MVE-8000, it is not necessary to make this setting.
• Before the following operations, carry out the procedure described in the
previous item “Setting the interface between the DME and the switcher.”
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [DME Type Setting].
The DME Type Setting menu appears.
2
Press [DME SDI Interface].
The DME SDI Interface menu appears.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the DME channel to which
operations apply.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Notes
• When using the MVE-8000A, it is not possible to select any of DME 1
Ext In to DME 8 Ext In.
• When using the MVE-9000 through the DME dedicated interface, it is
not possible to select DME 1 to DME 8 (video/key).
4
In the <Select> group, select the AUX bus or reentry to be assigned to the
DME channel.
Aux Bus: Set AUX bus.
Re-Entry: Set reentry.
5
Depending on the selection in step 4, use any of the following methods to
make the setting.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
–When Aux Bus is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 DME Ch No DME channel selection 1 to 24
425Setup Relating to Switcher Processor
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
– When Re-Entry is selected
6
Press [Set].
In the list on the right of the status area, the selected content is reflected in
the specified DME channel.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 as required.
Selecting the mode for turning off keys upon receiving the editor
command
Selects the mode for turning off keys when an “All Stop” command is received
from the editor.
1
In the Switcher >Device Interface menu, press [Editor I/F].
The Editor I/F menu appears.
2
Select one of the following modes.
All: When an “All Stop” command is received, all keys for the selected
regions are turned off.
Specified: When an “All Stop” command is received, among all the keys
for the selected regions, only the keys specified by the editor are
turned off.
Note
When an “All Stop” command is received in the process of a transition, the
keys selected for the next transition are also turned off.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Src No AUX bus number 0 to 48
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Src No Reentry number 0 to 80
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
426 Setup Relating to DME
Setup Relating to DME
Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu)
To make settings relating to DME input signals, display the DME >Input
menu.
To display the Input menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF4 ‘DME’ and HF1 ‘Input.’
The status area shows the initial crop information and the DME system phase.
In the following description, the settings for DME1 are given by way of
example, but the settings for DME2 are carried out in a similar way.
Setting the initial crop
1
In the DME1 <Aspect> group of the DME >Input menu, select the screen
aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3).
2
In the DME1 <Crop> group, press [Initial Crop] and adjust the following
parameters.
• If you selected 4:3 in step 1
• If you selected 16:9 in step 1
To return the parameter values to their default values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top side –3.00 to +3.00
2 Left Position of left side –4.00 to +4.00
3 Right Position of right side –4.00 to +4.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom side –3.00 to +3.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Position of top side –9.00 to +9.00
2 Left Position of left side –16.00 to
+16.00
3 Right Position of right side –16.00 to
+16.00
4 Bottom Position of bottom side –9.00 to +9.00
427Setup Relating to DME
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Press [Unity] in the <Crop> group.
Setting an illegal color limit for matte signals
To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the DME internal
matte generator, press [Matte Illeg Col Limit] for DME1 in the DME >Input
menu, turning it on.
Making DME system phase adjustment
To adjust the DME reference phase, use the following procedure.
1
In the DME >Input menu, press [System Phase].
2
Set the following parameters.
Setting the TBC window center position
When the MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 is connected through SDI interface, the
DME >Input >TBC Center menu allows you to set the TBC window center
position.
1
In the DME >Input menu, press [TBC Center].
The TBC Center menu appears.
The status area shows the TBC center position values for DME1, DME 2,
and external input signals.
Note
The TBC center position values for external input signals are shown only
when an SDI-interfaced MVE-9000 is used.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the input number for which you
want to set the TBC center position.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1DME1
Phase
DME1 system phase adjustment –32.00 to +96.00
2DME2
Phase
DME2 system phase adjustment –32.00 to +96.00
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
428 Setup Relating to DME
3
In the <Video/Key> group (when an SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A/9000 is
used) or the <External Video> group (when an SDI-interfaced MVE-9000
is used), press the desired button, and set the TBC center position to 0H,
0.5H, or 1H.
Settings Relating to Signal Outputs (Output Menu)
To make settings relating to DME output signals, display the DME >Output
menu.
To display the Output menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF4 ‘DME’ and HF3 ‘Output.’
Adjusting the monitor output
When the MVE-8000A/MVE-9000 is connected through SDI interface, you
can adjust both DME1 and DME2 output video clip levels.
Use the following procedure. (DME 1 is taken by way of example.)
1
In the <DME1(Ch1-Ch4)> group of the DME >Output menu, press [Clip
Adjust], turning it on.
2
Set the following parameters.
To return the setting to the default value
In the DME >Output menu, press [Default].
Setting the monitor output
To set the signals output from the four monitor output connectors, use the
following procedure.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Input number selection 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 White Clip White clip adjustment 90.00 to 109.02
2 Dark Clip Dark clip adjustment −6.85 to +10.00
3 Chroma Clip Chroma clip adjustment 90.00 to 113.17
429Setup Relating to DME
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Note
This setting is valid when an SDI-interfaced MVE-8000A or an MVE-9000 is
used.
1
In the DME >Output menu, press [Monitor Output].
The Monitor Output menu appears.
2
In the <Select> group, select the DME to which the setting applies.
DME1: Select DME1.
DME2: Select DME2.
3
In the list on the left of the status area, press directly on the monitor output
for which you want to make setting.
4
In the list on the right of the status area, press directly on the signal you
want to output.
5
Press [Set].
The selection is reflected in the monitor output.
Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface
Menu)
To carry out setup relating to DME connections with external devices, display
the DME >Device Interface menu.
To display the Device Interface menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF4 ‘DME’ and HF4 ‘Device
Interface.’
In the following description, the settings for DME1 are given by way of
example, but the settings for DME2 are carried out in a similar way.
Setting the editor protocol
In the <DME1 Editor Protocol> group of the DME >Device Interface menu,
press the following buttons to make the setting.
DME: Control by DME protocol through the editor port.
VTR: Control by VTR protocol through the editor port.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
430 Setup Relating to DME
Making editor port settings
In the <DME1 Editor Port Setting> group of the DME >Device Interface menu,
press either of the following to select the way in which the editor ports are used.
Common: Control all of channels 1 to 4 through Editor ports 1 to 4.
Independ: Control channels 1 to 4 individually through Editor ports 1 to 4.
Note
On the MVE-8000, the setting is fixed to Common.
Making DME GPI input settings
1
In the DME >Device Interface menu, press [DME1 GPI Input].
The DME1 GPI Input menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.
(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.
(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input
pulse.
(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the
input signal.
(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.
4
In the <Target> group, select what this applies to (channels 1 to 4, or Proc).
5
Using any of the following methods, select the action to be set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port Input port selection 1 to 8
2 No Selection of number for action to
be assigned
1 to 8
431Setup Relating to DME
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Turn the knobs.
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Level”
When Target is Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4: Freeze, SS ? Recall
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop, KF Rewind, KF Reverse
Run, No Action
When Target is Proc: No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Level”
When Target is Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4: Aspect, No Action
When Target is Proc: Format (frame/field rate, number of lines)
Aspect, Level Enable, No Action
Note
“Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the “Aspect” and “Format” actions that can be
used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used, if the input is
“Disable” then it is not possible to switch “Aspect” or “Format” by GPI input.
If a GPI to switch “Aspect” or “Format” occurs when powering the system off, the
action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes off and the
power may go off before the action is completed. This may corrupt the setup settings.
It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid such a situation.
b) When knob 3 selection is “Snapshot”
c) When knob 3 selection is “Effect”
6
Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
The selected setting appears in the status area.
Carrying out level settings
To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.
1
In the DME >Device Interface menu, select the action to be set, and press
[H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Reg No Register number 1 to 99 b)
1 to 399 c)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
432 Setup Relating to DME
3
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is high, press [H Set].
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low, press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.
Making DME GPI output settings
1
In the DME >Device Interface menu, press [DME1 GPI Output].
The DME1 GPI Output menu appears.
The output port selection is fixed at 1.
2
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the action you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) Error Make, Error Break, No Action
4
Press [Action Set] to confirm the action selection.
The selected setting appears in the status area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Signal format/screen aspect ratio
selection
1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 to 3 a)
433Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setup Relating to DCU
Note
For setup relating to DCU, it is necessary to make the same settings on multiple
control panels (maximum three units) that are sharing the DCU. After carrying
out the DCU setup on one control panel, make the same settings on the other
control panels.
Settings Relating to Parallel Inputs (Input Config Menu)
The DCU parallel input ports are assigned with the following priority
sequence.
1. When external boxes are set in the Router/Tally >Router >External Box
Assign menu, the parallel inputs are assigned to the external box inputs in
order.
2. When tally settings are carried out in the Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu,
tally inputs are assigned automatically.
In this menu, you set only the input ports which are unused after making the
above assignments.
To assign GPI inputs to DCU parallel input ports, display the DCU >Input
Config menu.
To display the Input Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF1 ‘Input Config.’
The status area shows input port information.
Assigning a GPI input port
1
In the DCU >Input Config menu, select what the setting applies to (DCU1
or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
In the <Parallel Input Assign> group, press [GPI Input].
3
Using any of the following methods, assign the number of the GPI input to
the input port.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
434 Setup Relating to DCU
• Turn the knobs.
a) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select a value in the range 1 to 34.
4
To confirm the assignment in step 3, press [GPI Input Set].
This assigns the GPI input, and this is reflected in the status area.
Releasing the assignment of a GPI input port
1
In the DCU >Input Config menu, select what the setting applies to (DCU1
or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
In the <Parallel Input Assign> group, if [GPI Input] is on, press it to turn
it off.
3
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
4
In the <Parallel Input Assign> group, press [No Assign].
GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)
To set the trigger type and so on for each GPI input, display the DCU >GPI
Input Assign menu.
To display the GPI Input Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF2 ‘GPI Input
Assign.’
The GPI input port setting status appears in the status area.
Making DCU GPI input settings
1
In the DCU >GPI Input Assign menu, using any of the following methods
select what the setting applies to.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Parallel Input Input port 1 to 102 a)
3 GPI Input GPI input 1 to 50
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 From No First port number 1 to To No
2 To No Last port number From No to 102
435Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.
(Rising Edge): Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse.
(Falling Edge): Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input
pulse.
(Any Edge): Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the
input signal.
(Level): Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or
high.
No Operation: Apply no trigger on an input pulse.
3
In the <Target Device> group, select the control panel to handle the GPI
input.
SCU1: ID1 control panel (PNL1)
SCU2: ID2 control panel (PNL2)
SCU3: ID3 control panel (PNL3)
The action set in the following step 4 is executed for the switcher and DME
controlled by the selected control panel.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the action you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Level”
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No GPI input 1 to 50
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
4 Aux Bus No Aux bus selection 1 to 48 e)
5 Reg No Register number 1 to 4 b)
1 to 99 c)
1 to 399 d)
5 Src No Source signal selection 1 and upwards e)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
436 Setup Relating to DCU
M/E-1 Cut, M/E-2 Cut, M/E-3 Cut, P/P Cut,
M/E-1 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Auto Trans,
P/P Auto Trans
M/E-1 Key1 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key1 Cut
M/E-1 Key2 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key2 Cut
M/E-1 Key3 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key3 Cut
M/E-1 Key4 Auto Trans, M/E-1 Key4 Cut
M/E-2 Key1 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key1 Cut
M/E-2 Key2 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key2 Cut
M/E-2 Key3 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key3 Cut
M/E-2 Key4 Auto Trans, M/E-2 Key4 Cut
M/E-3 Key1 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key1 Cut
M/E-3 Key2 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key2 Cut
M/E-3 Key3 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key3 Cut
M/E-3 Key4 Auto Trans, M/E-3 Key4 Cut
P/P DSK1 Auto Trans, P/P DSK1 Cut
P/P DSK2 Auto Trans, P/P DSK2 Cut
P/P DSK3 Auto Trans, P/P DSK3 Cut
P/P DSK4 Auto Trans, P/P DSK4 Cut
FTB Auto Trans, FTB Cut
Master SS ? Recall,
SS ? Recall,
M/E-1 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E-1 Key2 SS ? Recall
M/E-1 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E-1 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E-2 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E-2 Key2 SS ? Recall
M/E-2 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E-2 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E-3 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E-3 Key2 SS ? Recall
M/E-3 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E-3 Key4 SS ? Recall
P/P DSK1 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK2 SS ? Recall
P/P-1 DSK3 SS ? Recall, P/P-1 DSK4 SS ? Recall
FM Src1 Field Freeze, FM Src1 Frame Freeze, FM Src1 Freeze Off
FM Src2 Field Freeze, FM Src2 Frame Freeze, FM Src2 Freeze Off
FM Src1 Clip Record, FM Src1 Clip Stop, FM Src2 Clip Record, FM Src2 Clip Stop,
FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup, FM1 to FM8 Clip Play, FM1 to FM8 Clip Stop,
Effect ? Recall, Effect ? Recall & Run, KF Run, KF Stop,
Master Effect ? Recall
KF Rewind, Shotbox ? Recall, Macro Take, Macro ? Recall, No Action
(FM Src1(2) Clip Record/Stop, and FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup/Play/Stop do not operate
on the MVS-8000.)
• Action list when the trigger type is only “Rising Edge” or “Falling Edge”
Aux? O’ride Src??
• Action list when the trigger type is “Level”
Simul, Custom, Format (frame/field rate, number of lines)
(System Format, SWR Format, DME Ch1-Ch4 Format, DME Ch5-Ch8 Format)
Aspect (System Aspect, SWR Aspect, M/E-1 Aspect, M/E-2 Aspect,
M/E-3 Aspect, P/P Aspect, DME Ch1-Ch4 Aspect
DME Ch1 Aspect, DME Ch2 Aspect, DME Ch3 Aspect,
DME Ch4 Aspect, DME Ch5 Aspect
DME Ch6 Aspect, DME Ch7 Aspect, DME Ch8 Aspect)
Level Enable, No Action
Notes
• Level Enable” is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled
(“Enable”) or disabled (“Disable”) for the Aspect and Format actions that can be
used when the trigger type is Level. When Level Enable is used, if the input is
“Disable” then it is not possible to switch Aspect or Format by GPI input.
If a GPI to switch Aspect or Format occurs when powering the system off, the
action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes off and
437Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
the power may go off before the action is completed. This may corrupt the setup
settings. It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid such a situation.
• As for “Aux ? O’ride Src ??,” when “Rising Edge” is selected, on a rising edge the
set AUX bus primary input is used. On a falling edge, the original state of the cross-
point is restored. If the GPI trigger is applied repeatedly at short intervals (0.5
second or less), the cross-point switching may not be carried out correctly. In this
case, apply the GPI trigger again.
• If “SWR Format” or “System Format” is selected for “Action” when the format
converter is used on the MVS-8000G, you can set the conversion formats of the
format converter for “FC Input 1-8” and “FC Input 9-16”.
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 2 selection is “Snapshot”
d) When knob 2 selection is “Effect”
e) When knob 2 selection is “Aux ? O’ride Src ??”
5
To confirm the setting in step 4, press [Action Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.
Carrying out level settings
To set the low level and high level, first set the trigger type to “Level,” then use
the following procedure.
1
In the DCU >GPI Input Assign menu, select the action to be set, and press
[H/L Set].
The H/L Set menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level,
press [H Set]. To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low,
press [L Set].
This confirms the setting, which appears in the status area.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Signal format/screen aspect ratio
selection
1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
438 Setup Relating to DCU
Parallel Output Settings (Output Config Menu)
For the DCU parallel output ports, after carrying out tally settings in the
Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu, you can assign GPI outputs to output ports
that are still unused.
To assign DCU outputs to DCU parallel output ports, display the DCU >Output
Config menu.
To display the Output Config menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF3 ‘Output Config.’
The status area shows output port information.
Assigning a GPI output port
1
In the DCU >Output Config menu, select what the setting applies to
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
In the <Parallel Output Assign> group, press [GPI Output].
3
Using any of the following methods, select the output port and GPI output
number.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select 2.
b) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select a value in the range 1 to 36.
4
To confirm the selected setting, press [GPI Output Set].
This confirms the selection, which is reflected in the status area.
Releasing the assignment of a GPI output port
1
In the DCU >Output Config menu, select what the setting applies to
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Parallel Output Slot Output port slot 2 to 6 a)
2 Parallel Output Port Output port 1 to 54 b)
5 GPI Output GPI output 1 to 50
439Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
In the <Parallel Output Assign> group, if [GPI Output] is on, press it to
turn it off.
3
Turn the knobs to select the slot and port to which the setting applies.
4
In the <Parallel Output Assign> group, press [No Assign].
GPI Output Setting (GPI Output Assign Menu)
To set the trigger type and so on for each GPI output, display the DCU >GPI
Output Assign menu.
To display the GPI Output Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF4 ‘GPI Output
Assign.’
The GPI output port setting status appears in the status area.
Making DCU GPI output settings
1
In the DCU >GPI Output Assign menu, using any of the following
methods select what the setting applies to.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
In the <Trigger Type> group, select the trigger polarity.
(Rising Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open-
circuit or drives the output high, and holds this state for the
specified pulse width.
(Falling Edge): The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted
or drives the output low, and holds this state for the specified
pulse width.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 From Slot First port slot 2 to 6
2 From Port First port number 1 to 54
3 To Slot Last port slot 2 to 6
4 To Port Last port number 1 to 54
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No GPI output 1 to 50
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
440 Setup Relating to DCU
(Any Edge): Each time the trigger occurs, the relay contacts are
alternately closed or opened, or the output is switched between
high and low.
Status: Depending on the status, the relay contacts are closed or opened,
or the output is switched between high and low.
No Operation: The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level.
3
Turning the knobs, select the pulse width and timing to be set.
a) 1: Field 1, 2: Field 2, 3: Any
When “ ” is selected as the trigger polarity, there is no Pulse Width
setting. When “Status” is selected, there is no Pulse Width or Timing
setting.
4
In the <Source Device> group, select the control panel or DCU to handle
the GPI output.
SCU1: ID1 control panel (PNL1)
SCU2: ID2 control panel (PNL2)
SCU3: ID3 control panel (PNL3)
DCU1: ID1 DCU
DCU2: ID2 DCU
When the action set in the following step 5 is carried out on the control
panel selected here, this causes a GPI output. It is also possible to output
error information. When the DCU is selected, you can output error
information by means of the action set in step 5.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the action you want to set.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) • Action list when the trigger type is other than “Status”
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Pulse Width Pulse width 1 to 60 (fields)
4 Timing Output timing 1 to 3 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Action Action selection 1 and upwards a)
5 Reg No Snapshot register number 1 to 4 b)
5 GPI No GPI number selection 1 to 32 c)
441Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
When Source Device is SCU: M/E1 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E1 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E1
Key3 SS ? Recall
M/E1 Key4 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E2
Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E3 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E3
Key4 SS ? Recall
P/P DSK1 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK2 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK3 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK4
SS ? Recall
Editor GPI-?? (executable only when the BZS-8050 license is valid)
No Action
When Source Device is DCU: No Action
• Action list when the trigger type is “Status”
When Source Device is SCU: M/E1 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E1 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E1
Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E1 Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E2 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E2 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E2
Key4 SS ? Recall
M/E3 Key1 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key2 SS ? Recall, M/E3 Key3 SS ? Recall, M/E3
Key4 SS ? Recall
P/P DSK1 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK2 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK3 SS ? Recall, P/P DSK4
SS ? Recall
M/E1 Key1 On, M/E1 Key2 On, M/E1 Key3 On, M/E1 Key4 On
M/E2 Key1 On, M/E2 Key2 On, M/E2 Key3 On, M/E2 Key4 On
M/E3 Key1 On, M/E3 Key2 On, M/E3 Key3 On, M/E3 Key4 On
P/P DSK1 On, P/P DSK2 On, P/P DSK3 On, P/P DSK4 On
Error Make, Error Break, Device Recording, No Action
When Source Device is DCU: Error Make, Error Break, No Action
b) When knob 2 selection is “Key Snapshot”
c) When knob 2 selection is “GPI”
6
To confirm the selection, press [Action Set].
This confirms the selection, which appears in the status area.
Test firing the trigger
To test fire the trigger, in the DCU >GPI Output menu press [Test Fire].
This outputs a trigger from the selected output port. This is not output when the
trigger type is “Status.”
Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)
To set the protocol to match a device connected to a 9-pin serial port, display
the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu.
To display the Serial Port Assign menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF5 ‘DCU’ and HF5 ‘Serial Port
Assign.’
The serial port setting status appears in the status area.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
442 Setup Relating to DCU
Making serial port settings
1
In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the target for the setting
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the serial port.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The setting value range depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Using any of the following methods, select the protocol for the connected
device.
• Press directly on the list on the right of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) 1. No Assign: nothing is connected to the serial port.
2. P-Bus: P-Bus device.
3. VTR: VTR
4. DDR SD9P: disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol)
5. DDR VDCP: disk recorder (video disk communication protocol)
6. Extended VTR (Abekas A53 protocol)
7. Mixer ESAM-II
Note
Mixer ESAM-II cannot be operated from this system. It can only be
operated from an editing keyboard.
4
Press [Device Type Set].
The selected protocol is reflected on the left of the status area.
5
To enter the name of the serial port, press [Set] in the <Name> group.
A keyboard window appears. You can enter a name of not more than 16
characters.
If no name is set for the serial port, it is displayed as “DCUd_PORTs-p.”
d: 1 or 2 (DCU No.)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Device Type Protocol selection 1 to 7 a)
443Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
s: 2 to 6 (Slot No.)
p: 1 to 6 (Port No.)
6
Press [Enter].
To return the set name to the default name
Press [Clear] in the <Name> group.
7
From the <SCU Select> group, select the control panel (SCU1, SCU2 or
SCU3) assigned to operations on the external device connected to the
serial port.
To delete the serial port assignment
1
In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the target for the setting
(DCU1 or DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
Using any of the following methods, specify the serial port.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Press [Clear].
Making detailed settings on the external device connected to the
serial port
After setting the external device for each serial port, it is necessary to make
further detailed settings for operation of the external device.
To make detailed settings for a P-Bus device
1
In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the setting target (DCU1 or
DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
P-Bus device for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
444 Setup Relating to DCU
a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Press [Port Setting].
The DCU >Serial Port Assign >P-Bus Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, and SCU number appear. In the lower part of the status
area, the device name and response speed settings appear.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the ID for which you want to
make a device name setting.
• Press directly on the device name list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
In the <Name> group, press [Set] to display a numeric keypad window.
6
Input the desired name, and press [Enter].
The input device name appears in the device name list.
To return the device name for the selected ID to the default name
In the <Name> group, press [Clear].
7
Using any of the following methods, specify the command to which the
response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the delay list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
8
Turn the knob to set the response speed (in field units) of the device.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port number 1 and upwards a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 ID ID selection 0 to 23
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 No Command number selection 1 to 18
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Delay Response speed setting 0 to 60
445Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
9
Press [Delay Set].
This confirms the setting.
10
Repeat steps 4 to 9 as required to make the settings for other commands.
To make detailed settings for a VTR
1
In the <DCU Select> group of the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select
the target for the setting (DCU1 or DCU2).
2
Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
VTR for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Press [Port Setting].
The DCU >Serial Port Assign >VTR Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, SCU number, and timecode source appear. In the lower
part of the status area, the VTR constants appear.
4
In the <TC Source> group, select the timecode source (reference signal for
determining the tape position) from the following.
LTC (Longitudinal Time Code): Use LTC. When interpolation data is
returned from a VTR, use that interpolation data.
LTC: VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code): Normally use LTC, but
when the tape is moving at speeds at which LTC cannot be read, use
VITC.
When interpolation data is returned from a VTR, use that interpolation
data.
VITC: Use VITC.
CTL (Control): CTL pulses or timer counter pulses are used. Use this
only for a tape on which no timecode is recorded.
The displayed tape position is based on the reference signal specified here.
5
Using any of the following methods, specify the VTR constants.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
446 Setup Relating to DCU
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
6
Press [Set].
A numeric keypad window for hexadecimal input appears.
7
Set the VTR constants using values in the range 00 to FF.
8
Press [Enter].
This confirms the settings.
9
Repeat steps 5 to 8 as required to set the constants for other VTRs.
To make detailed settings for a disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin
protocol)
1
In the <DCU Select> group of the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select
the target for the setting (DCU1 or DCU2).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item Item selection 1 to 16
Block Byte Setting item
BLOCK 1 1 HI-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)
2 LO-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)
3 HI-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL TIME)
4 LO-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL TIME)
5 EDIT DELAY (FRAME)
6 EE DELAY (FRAME)
7 OVER RUN (FRAME)
8 TRAJECTORY
BLOCK 2 1 TC READ DELAY (FRAME)
2START DELAY (FRAME)
3 AFTER SYNC DELAY–
4 AFTER SYNC DELAY+
5MODE1
6MODE2
7 MAX PRRL SPEED
8 QUICK PVW PRRL TIME (FRAME)
447Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
disk recorder for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Press [Port Setting].
The DCU >Serial Port Assign >DDR SD9P Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, SCU number, and disk recorder type appear. In the lower
part of the status area, the response speed settings appear.
4
Using any of the following methods, specify the item to which the
response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) 1. Maximum Open Delay: maximum time required to open a file
2. Maximum Cueup Delay: maximum time required to cue up a file
3. Play After Cueup Delay: delay time from the cued-up state to begin playback
4. Play After Open Next Delay: delay time from the Open Next state to begin playback
5
Turn the knob to set the disk recorder response speed.
6
Press [Set].
This confirms the setting.
7
Repeat steps 4 to 6 as required to make the settings for other items.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item No Item selection 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Setting Response speed setting 0 to 255
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
448 Setup Relating to DCU
To make detailed settings for a disk recorder (video disk
communications protocol)
1
In the <DCU Select> group of the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select
the target for the setting (DCU1 or DCU2).
2
Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
disk recorder for which you want to make settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Press [Port Setting].
The DCU >Serial Port Assign >DDR VDCP Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, SCU number, and disk recorder type appear.
In the lower part of the status area appear the video port number and
response speed settings.
4
In the <DDR Type> group, select the type of disk recorder.
Player: Functioning as a player.
Recorder: Functioning as a recorder.
5
In the <Name Mode> group, select the file name character count mode.
Fixed 8 Character: Use 8-character file names.
Variable Length: Use variable-length file names. (On an MVS-8000
system, the file name is limited to 23 characters.)
6
In the <TC Sense> group, select the type of timecode sensing.
Zero based: Mode in which timecode is detected taking the first frame of
the recalled file as 00:00:00:00
SOM based: Mode in which timecode saved in the recalled file is detected
Note
The details of the above operation modes depend on the connected device.
For more information, consult the documentation for the connected device.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port 1 and upwards a)
449Setup Relating to DCU
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
7
Using any of the following methods, specify the item to which the video
port number or response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) 1. Video Port: Number of the video port associated with the serial port to which the setting
applies
For a player, the output port setting
For a recorder, the input port setting
2. Maximum Open Delay: maximum time required to open a file
3. Maximum Cueup Delay: maximum time required to cue up a file
4. Play After Cueup Delay: delay time from the cued-up state to begin playback
5. Stop Delay: delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping
6. Still Delay: delay time from issuing the still command until actually stopping
7. Continue Delay: delay time from issuing the continue command until actually stopping
8
Turn the knob to set the disk recorder video port number or response speed.
When setting the video port number
a) 0: No assignment
When setting the response speed
9
Press [Set].
This confirms the setting.
10
If required, repeat steps 4 to 9, to set other items.
To make detailed settings for an Extended VTR
1
In the DCU >Serial Port Assign menu, select the setting target (DCU1 or
DCU2) from the <DCU Select> group.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the serial port connected to the
Extended VTR for which you want to make the settings.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item No Item selection 1 to 7 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Setting Video port number 0 to 127 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Setting Response speed 0 to 255
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
450 Setup Relating to DCU
• Turn the knob.
a) The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting. (When the MKS-2700 is
connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port.)
3
Press [Port Setting].
The DCU >Serial Port Assign >Extended VTR Setting menu appears.
At the top of the status area, the relevant serial port, slot number, protocol,
serial port name, and SCU number appear. In the lower part of the status
area, the response speed settings appear.
4
Using any of the following methods, specify the command to which the
response speed setting applies.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
a) 1.Maximum Open Delay: maximum time required to open a file
2. Maximum Cueup Delay: maximum time required to cue up a file
3. Play After Cueup Delay: maximum delay time from the cued-up state to begin playback
4. Stop Delay: delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping
5
Turn the knob to set the response speed of the Extended VTR.
6
Press [Set].
This confirms the setting.
7
Repeat steps 4 to 6 as required to make the settings for other items.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Port No Serial port number 1 and upwards a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Item No Item selection 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Setting Response speed setting 0 to 255
451Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Router Interface Settings (Router Menu)
In this system, the interface with a router (routing swicher) uses the S-Bus
protocol. It is therefore necessary to assign inputs and outputs of the switcher
and so on to an S-Bus space.
To carry out this assignment, use the Router/Tally >Router menu. The
assignment is common to the parallel and serial tallies.
To display the Router menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF1 ‘Router.’
The status area shows the device names to be assigned to the S-Bus space, the
matrix size, source address, destination address, and level.
Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to S-Bus space
1
In the <Device> group of the Router/Tally >Router menu, select the device
to which the settings apply.
SWR1: Settings apply to switcher 1.
SWR2: Settings apply to switcher 2.
Note
When there are two switchers on the same network, the SWR2 (second
switcher) settings are required. If there is only one switcher, the settings
are not required.
2
In the <Matrix Size> group, select the matrix size.
Standard (136 × 138): Assign the switcher S-Bus space at full size. You
can assign all switcher inputs and outputs to the S-Bus space, but this
causes some waste of S-Bus space.
Compact (128 × 128): Assign the switcher S-Bus space at compact size.
It is not possible to assign all switcher inputs and outputs to the S-Bus
space, but the S-Bus space can be used efficiently.
3
Turn the knobs to set the parameters for the following items.
Source: Specify the start address of the matrix source.
Destination: Specify the start address of the matrix destination.
Level: Specify the level in the S-Bus space.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
452 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
a) When the matrix size is Standard, the maximum value is 889. For the Compact size, the
maximum value is 897.
b) When the matrix size is Standard, the maximum value is 887. For the Compact size, the
maximum value is 897.
Making an external box setting
1
In the Router/Tally >Router menu, press [External Box Assign].
The External Box Assign menu appears.
The status area shows the external box size, address, and other settings.
2
In the <Device> group, select what the setting applies to (External Box 1
to 4).
3
In the <Matrix Size> group, select the number of inputs.
No Assign: Do not use.
8×1: Select an external box with 8 inputs and 1 output.
16×1: Select an external box with 16 inputs and 1 output.
32×1: Select an external box with 32 inputs and 1 output.
4
Turn the knobs to make adjustments.
a) When Matrix Size is 8×1
b) When Matrix Size is 16×1
c) When Matrix Size is 32×1
To couple external boxes
By coupling a number of external boxes, the number of inputs can be increased.
Here the example of coupling External Box1 and External Box2 is described.
1
In the Router/Tally >Router >External Box Assign menu, select [External
box1] from the <Device> group.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source Source start address 1 and upwards a)
2 Destination Destination start address 1 and upwards b)
3 Level Level 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source Source start address 1 to 1017 a)
1 to 1009 b)
1 to 993 c)
2 Destination Destination start address 1 to 1024
3 Level Level 1 to 8
453Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
In the <Matrix Size> group, select [8×1].
3
Turn the knobs to make adjustments.
4
In the <Device> group, select [External box2].
5
In the <Matrix Size> group, select [32×1].
6
Turn the knobs to make adjustments.
At this point make the settings of Destination and Level the same as in step
3.
This automatically couples External Box1 and External Box2, forming an
external box with 40 (8+32) inputs.
To set the group number of an S-Bus description name
1
In the <Alias Name Gp> group of the Router/Tally >Router menu, press
[Gp No].
2
Turn the knob to set the following parameter.
a) When setting values 1 to 7 are selected: If the name is not set, the description name for 0
appears. If the description name for 0 is not registered either, the Type and No values
appear.
3
In the <Alias Name Gp> group, press [Set].
This confirms the setting, which is reflected in the status area.
Note
Transmit the description name selected here from the router.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Source Source start address 1 to 1017
2 Destination Destination start address 1 to 1024
3 Level Level 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Gp No Group number of S-Bus
description name 0 to 7 a)
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
454 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Tally Group Settings (Group Tally Menu)
With the S-Bus protocol, tally control is possible for groups 1 to 8, but in this
system you can use either groups 1 to 4 or groups 5 to 8.
You can also select whether or not to transfer the tally information over the S-
Bus.
To select the tally groups, use the Router/Tally >Group Tally menu.
To display the Group Tally menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF2 ‘Group
Tally.’
Setting the tally groups
1
To select a consecutive sequence of groups from each of groups 1 to 4 and
groups 5 to 8, set [All Group Enable] to On in the Group Tally menu.
2
In the <Tally Group> group, select the desired groups.
Wiring Settings (Wiring Menu)
When configuring a system in which the switcher inputs and outputs are
connected to a router, it is necessary to set this connection configuration
(referred to as “wiring”) in the S-Bus space.
To make the wiring settings, use the Router/Tally >Wiring menu. The settings
are common to the parallel and serial tallies.
To display the Wiring menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF3 ‘Wiring.’
The status area shows the wiring settings.
Making new wiring settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, press [New].
The New menu appears.
2
With a knob or menu operation, set the destination.
When switcher inputs and outputs are connected to the router in a group,
you can specify the start and end destination addresses.
455Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Destination From: Specify the start destination address for the wiring
configuration.
Destination To: When the wiring configuration is multiple, specify the
end destination address. For a single wiring connection, this setting is
not required.
Destination Level: Specify the destination level of the wiring
configuration.
3
Set the source.
Source From: Specify the source start address for the wiring
configuration.
Source Level: Specify the source level for the wiring configuration.
4
Press [Execute].
This makes the wiring setting according to the specifications in steps 2 and
3.
Changing the wiring settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, press [Modify].
The Modify menu appears.
2
Referring to steps 2 and 3 in the preceding section “Making new wiring
settings,” change the parameters as required. In this case, however, it is not
possible to specify multiple destinations in a single operation, and a single
“Destination Address” must be specified.
3
Press [Execute].
This updates the wiring settings.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Destination (From) Destination start address 1 to 1024
2 Destination (To) Destination end address From start address to
1024
3 Destination (Level) Destination level 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Source (From) Source start address 1 to 1024
5 Source (Level) Source level 1 to 8
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
456 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Deleting wiring settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, using either of the following methods,
select the wiring whose settings you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
2
Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected wiring entry.
Sorting wiring settings
In the Router/Tally >Wiring menu, press [Sort].
The sorting of wiring settings are executed in the following order.
Destination level order (ascending)tDestination address order
(ascending)tSource level order (ascending)
Tally Generation Settings (Tally Enable Menu)
For settings relating to tally generation, use the Router/Tally >Tally Enable
menu. The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies.
To display the Tally Enable menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF4 ‘Tally
Enable.’
The status area shows the tally generation settings.
Making new tally generation settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu, press [New].
The New menu appears.
2
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.
a) 1:R1, 2:G1, 3:R2, 4:G2, 5:R3, 6:G3, 7:R4, 8:G4, 9:R5, 10:G5, 11:R6, 12:G6, 13:R7,
14:G7, 15:R8, and 16:G8. (R is an abbreviation of “Red Tally,” and G of “Green Tally.”)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Destination Address Destination address 1 to 1024
2 Destination Level Destination level 1 to 8
3 Tally Type Tally type 1 to 16 a)
457Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
3
In the <Tally Enable> group, specify the tally generation mode.
Enable: Always generate a tally.
Disable: Never generate a tally.
Tally Input: Generate a tally from the tally input state.
4
When you selected Tally Input as the tally generation mode in step 3,
select either of the following in the <Tally Input> group.
DCU1: Generate tally with reference to signal input to DCU1 port. Set the
port number with the knob.
DCU2: Generate tally with reference to signal input to DCU2 port. Set the
port number with the knob.
5
Turn the knob to select the tally input port number.
6
Press [Execute].
This sets the settings made in steps 2 to 5 as the settings for tally
generation.
Modifying tally generation
1
In the Router/Tally >Tally Enable menu, press [Modify].
The Modify menu appears.
2
With reference to steps 2 to 5 in the preceding section “Making new tally
generation settings,” change the parameters as required.
3
Press [Execute].
This modifies the tally generation settings.
Deleting tally generation settings
1
Using either of the following methods in the Router/Tally >Tally Enable
menu, select the tally generation entry you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
2
Press [Delete].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
5 Input No Tally input port number 1 to 102
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
458 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
This deletes the selected tally generation entry.
Tally Copy Settings (Tally Copy Menu)
For settings relating to the tally copy function, use the Router/Tally >Tally
Copy menu. The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies.
To display the Tally Copy menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF5 ‘Tally
Copy.’
The status area shows the tally copy status.
Making new tally copy settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Tally Copy menu, select [New].
The New menu appears.
2
Turn the knob to select the copy-from source.
When setting more than one tally copy, you can specify the copy-from
source start and end addresses.
3
Specify the copy-to source address.
4
Press [Execute].
This makes the tally copy setting according to the specifications in steps 2
and 3.
Modifying tally copy settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Tally Copy menu, press [Modify].
The Modify menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Copy From (From) Copy-from source start address 1 to 1024
2 Copy From (To) Copy-from source end address 1 to 1024
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Copy To (From) Copy-to source (start) address 1 to 1024
4 Copy To (To) Copy-to source (end) address 1 to 1024
459Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
2
Use the knobs to select the copy source and copy destination.
3
Press [Execute].
This updates the tally copy settings.
Deleting tally copy settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Tally Copy menu, using any of the following
methods, select the tally copy whose settings you want to delete.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected tally copy entry.
Parallel Tally Settings (Parallel Tally Menu)
For settings relating to parallel tally, use the Router/Tally >Parallel Tally
menu.
To display the Parallel Tally menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF6 ‘Parallel
Tally.’
The status area shows the parallel tally settings.
Making or modifying parallel tally settings
1
In the <Device> group of the Router/Tally >Parallel Tally menu, select
DCU1 or DCU2.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the slot number and port
number.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Copy From Copy-from source 1 to 1024
2 Copy To Copy-to source 1 to 1024
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Copy No Tally copy setting selection for deletion 1 and upwards
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
460 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
a) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 36 for
the port.
b) When the MKS-2700 is connected, select a value in the range 1 to 36.
3
Press [Set].
The Set menu appears.
4
In the <Source/Destination> group, select the tally type.
Src: Return a tally to all sources output to the destination.
Dest: Return a tally to the destination outputting the source to which a
source tally is returned.
5
Set the destination address and level.
The level setting is only required when in step 4 you selected Destination.
6
When setting the tally type, set the following parameter.
a) 1:R1, 2:G1, 3:R2, 4:G2, 5:R3, 6:G3, 7:R4, 8:G4, 9:R5, 10:G5, 11:R6, 12:G6, 13:R7,
14:G7, 15:R8, and 16:G8. (R is an abbreviation of “Red Tally,” and G of “Green Tally.”)
7
Press [Execute].
This makes the parallel tally settings, in accordance with the settings in
steps 1 to 6.
Deleting parallel tally settings
1
In the Router/Tally >Parallel Tally menu, using any of the following
methods, select the parallel tally whose settings you want to delete.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Slot No Parallel tally slot number 2 to 6 a)
2 Port No Parallel tally port number 1 to 54 b)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Address Destination address 1 to 1024
2 Level Destination level 1 to 8
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Type Tally type 1 to 16 a)
461Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
2
Press [Clear].
This deletes the selected parallel tally entry.
Serial Tally Settings (Serial Tally Menu)
To make serial tally settings, display the Router/Tally >Serial Tally menu.
To display the Serial Tally menu
In the Engineering Setup menu, select VF6 ‘Router/Tally’ and HF7 ‘Serial
Tally.’
The serial tally settings appear in the status area.
Setting or changing the serial tally settings
1
In the <Serial Tally Port> group of the Router/Tally >Serial Tally menu,
select the port to which the setting applies.
2
In the <Tally Goup> group, select the tally group.
3
In the <Tally Type> group, press the tally types to select. (You can select
up to four.)
Note
The selectable tally types depend on the settings in step 2.
Making the serial tally source address settings
To set the serial tally source address for each port, use the following procedure.
1
In the Router/Tally >Serial Tally menu, press [Source Assign].
The Source Assign menu appears.
In the status area, the tally types and source address set for the serial tally
port appear.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Slot No Parallel tally slot number 2 to 6
2 Port No Parallel tally port number 1 to 54
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
462 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
2
In the <Serial Tally Port> group, select the port to which the setting
applies.
3
Using any of the following methods, select the port bit number.
• Press directly on the list on the left of the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Turn the knob to select the source address.
5
Press [Source Address Set].
This confirms the setting.
Clearing a source address setting
To clear a source address setting for a particular bit
In the Router/Tally >Serial Tally >Source Assign menu, select the serial tally
port and bit number (see steps 2 and 3 in the previous item), then press [Clear].
This clears the source address setting for the selected bit.
To clear all source address settings
In the Router/Tally >Serial Tally >Source Assign menu, select the serial tally
port, then press [All Clear].
A confirmation message appears.
• If you select “Yes,” this clears all source address settings for the selected
serial tally port.
• If you select “No,” the clear operation is canceled.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Bit No Bit selection 1 to 128
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 Source Addr Source address selection 1 to 1024
463Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082
AUX Bus Remote Panel
Procedure for Simple Connection
To carry out simple connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote
Panel, use the following procedure.
For settings on the MKS-8080/8082, refer to the section “Making the Setting
With Buttons (Setup Function)” in the Operation Manual for the MKS-8080/
8082.
1
Carry out initialization of the MKS-8080/8082 settings.
This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082 separately.
2
Set the MKS-8080/8082 station number in the range 2 to 17.
This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082 separately.
3
Set the S-Bus data link primary station to the CCP-8000 Center Control
Panel.
• For MKS-8010, set the STATION ID switches S903 on the front of the
CA-45 board in the SCU SLOT 1 to 001 (switch 1 only to the OPEN
position).
• For MKS-8010A, set the STATION ID switches S108 on the front of the
FP-141 board in the SCU SLOT 1 to 001 (switch 1 only to the OPEN
position).
4
In the Engineering Setup >System >Initialize menu, select PNL, and carry
out a reset.
This carries out a restart, and when the restart is completed connection to
the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.
5
In the Engineering Setup >Router/Tally > Router menu, set the position of
the MVS-8000 system in S-Bus space.
Select the setting from SWR1 and SWR2, and set each of Source,
Destination, and Level to 1.
Chapter 16 Engineering Setup
464 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel
Setting Status of the MKS-8080/8082 in Simple
Connection
As a result of making the simple connection, the MKS-8080/8082 operates in
AUX bus mode, and the settings are the following factory defaults.
With regard to the meaning of the following settings, refer to the section “Menu
Operations” in the Operation Manual for the MKS-8080/8082.
C: SET SWITCHER ID (for AUX mode)
This is set to 001, which is the station number of the CCP-8000.
D: SET AUX DESTINATION/SOURCE (for AUX mode)
The source is set to IN001 and following, and destination is set to OUT001 and
following.
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE (for Router mode)
This is unset, since the unit does not operate in router mode.
N: SET PANEL TABLE (for Router mode)
The source is set to IN001 and following, and destination is set to OUT001 and
following. However, since the unit does not operate in router mode, these
settings are not used.
R: SET ROUTE
Since when using the simple connection the switcher and router cannot be
connected in cascade, no route setting is required, and this is unset.
O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION
Set the source and destination ranges so that the MVS-8000 inputs and outputs
can be selected.
Y: SET DISPLAY MODES
The DISPLAY MODES/PANEL FUNCTION setting is set to NORMAL. The
TALLY GROUP setting is set to be the same as the setting in Engineering
Setup >Router/Tally >Tally Group on the MVS-8000.
Z: SET PANEL STATUS
The various settings are the same as the factory default settings.
Chapter 17 Files
Operations on Individual Files ................................................................466
Displaying the Individual File Operation Menus ..............................466
Viewing Detailed File Information ...................................................466
Selecting Regions ..............................................................................468
Selecting a Device for Operations .....................................................468
Saving Files .......................................................................................469
Loading Files .....................................................................................470
Copying Files ....................................................................................472
Renaming Files ..................................................................................473
Deleting Files ....................................................................................475
Converting Between Frame Memory Clips and Extended Clips ......476
File Batch Operations ...............................................................................479
Displaying the Batch Operation Menu ..............................................479
Batch Saving Files .............................................................................479
Batch Loading Files ...........................................................................480
Batch Copying Files ..........................................................................481
Importing and Exporting Files ................................................................482
Displaying the Import/Export Menu .................................................482
Importing Frame Memory Data ........................................................482
Exporting Frame Memory Data ........................................................483
Directory Operations ................................................................................485
Displaying the Directory Menu .........................................................485
Creating a New Directory ..................................................................485
Renaming a Directory .......................................................................486
Deleting a Directory ..........................................................................486
Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs .............................................487
Saving Files Recalled by Autoload ..........................................................489
Chapter 17 Files
466 Operations on Individual Files
Operations on Individual Files
You can save or load the contents of an individual file or register. Carry out
these operations in the File menu.
Displaying the Individual File Operation Menus
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [FILE].
2
Depending on the type of file to be manipulated, select the following ‘VF’
and ‘HF’ combination.
The following description refers to the example of carrying out operations on
snapshot files, but the procedure is similar in the other menus.
Viewing Detailed File Information
As an example, to view detailed snapshot file information, carry out the
following procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
The Snapshot menu appears.
The status area shows the device status, and a list of files present on the
device.
Button HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4
VF1 Setup Initial Status Key Memory Video Proc
Memory
VF2 Effect 1-99 Effect 101-199 Effect 201-299 Effect 301-399
VF3 Snapshot Wipe Snapshot DME Snapshot Key Snapshot
VF4 Shotbox Macro Macro
Attachment
–
VF5 Frame Memory – – –
467Operations on Individual Files
Chapter 17 Files
2
Press [File Edit].
The file details appear (reference region file name, creation date, regions
including data) in table form.
File Edit buttons
Device selection area
Detail display area
Region selection area
Chapter 17 Files
468 Operations on Individual Files
Selecting a particular file displays more detailed information about that file
in the detail display area at the top right of the file list.
In the Frame Memory menu, the following items are also shown.
Pair: In the case of a pair file, “P” is shown.
Ext: In the case of an extended clip file, “Ext” is shown.
Selecting Regions
You can carry out a file operation on a number of regions simultaneously.
However, a region selection is not required for the following files.
• Key memory
• Video process memory
• Shotbox
• Macro
• Macro attachment
• Frame memory
•Setup
• Initial status
In the above list, for frame memory in Dual Simul mode you can select the
switcher to be used for the operation in a way similar to the region selection.
For setup and initial status, you can similarly separate the files to be operated
on by device.
To make a region selection
1
Press the region selection area at the top right of the screen (see page 467).
The region selection window appears.
2
Press the region names you do not want to select, turning them off.
3
Press [OK].
Selecting a Device for Operations
To carry out file operations, you need to specify the device holding the data (or
file), as one of the following: register, hard disk, memory card, and so on. You
can then further select a directory.
469Operations on Individual Files
Chapter 17 Files
Notes
• Files saved on the hard disk may be lost if the hard disk fails. Always keep
separate backup copies of important files on a memory card.
• Format a memory card (see page 316) before using it for the first time.
As an example, to select a memory card, use the following procedure.
1
In the File menu, press the device selection indication above the file list
(default is [HDD] (hard disk)).
(If [Memory Card] appears, then since the memory card is already
selected, steps 1 and 2 are not necessary.)
A pull-down menu appears.
2
Press [Memory Card].
A list of directories on the memory card appears. (Maximum 40 per page)
The maximum number of directories is 120 on a memory card, or 200 on
an internal hard disk.
3
As required, press the b or B button, to switch directory pages.
4
Press the name of the directory you want to use.
This selects the specified directory on the memory card to be manipulated.
Saving Files
As an example, to save snapshot register data to hard disk or memory card, use
the following procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
2
In the device selection area on the left, select [Register].
3
In the device selection area on the right, select [HDD] or [Memory Card],
then select a directory.
See “Selecting a Device for Operations” (page 468).
4
Using either of the following methods, select the data to be saved, and the
file in which to save it.
• To select all files within the list, press [ALL] below the list.
• To select multiple files, turn the knobs to select in the following ranges.
Chapter 17 Files
470 Operations on Individual Files
• To select a single file, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor, or press directly on the list in the status area.
5
Press [t Save].
This saves the selected register data in the specified location.
If there is already data in the specified location, a confirmation message
appears.
• Select “Yes” to overwrite the data.
• Select “No” to cancel saving all of the data.
Saving frame memory files
Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure above, “Saving Files,” do as follows.
1
To select the frame memory folder, press [Default] in the device selection
in the list on the left.
A pull-down menu appears.
2
Press the required folder name.
3
Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right.
4
Select the type of data to be displayed.
• To display still image files, press [Still].
• To display clip files, press [Clip].
• To display extended clip files, press [Ext Clip].
• To display all types of file, press [All].
Loading Files
As an example, to load a snapshot file from hard disk or memory card to a
register, use the following procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Select the first register whose data is to
be saved
1 to 99
2 List R Select the first file to which data is to be
saved
1 to 99
3 Num Number of registers to be selected 1 to 99
471Operations on Individual Files
Chapter 17 Files
2
In the device selection area on the left, select [Register].
3
In the device selection area on the right, select where the file is held
([HDD] or [Memory Card]), and then specify a directory.
See “Selecting a Device for Operations” (page 468).
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register to which you want
to load, and the file to be loaded.
• To select all files within the list, press [ALL] below the list.
• To select multiple files, turn the knobs to select in the following ranges.
• To select a single file, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor, or press directly on the list in the status area.
5
Press [T Load].
This loads the contents of the selected file from the specified location.
(Setup data is first loaded.)
Loading frame memory files
Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure above, “Loading Files,” do as follows.
1
To select the frame memory folder, press [Default] in the device selection
in the list on the left.
A pull-down menu appears.
2
Press the required folder name.
3
Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right.
4
Select the type of data to be displayed.
• To display still image files, press [Still].
• To display clip files, press [Clip].
• To display extended clip files, press [Ext Clip].
• To display all types of file, press [All].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Select the first register into which the data
is to be loaded
1 to 99
2 List R Select the first file in which data is held 1 to 99
3 Num Number to be selected 1 to 99
Chapter 17 Files
472 Operations on Individual Files
Copying Files
You can copy files either within a directory or between directories, on the hard
disk, or memory card.
As an example, to copy a snapshot file from memory card to hard disk, use the
following procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
2
In the device selection area on the left, specify the location of the file to be
copied (in this case [Memory Card] and a directory). (See page 468.)
3
In the device selection area on the right, select the destination of the copied
file (in this case [HDD] and a directory).
4
Using any of the following methods, select the source and destination files.
• To select all files within the list, press [ALL] below the list.
• To select multiple files, turn the knobs to select in the following ranges.
• To select a single file, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor, or press directly on the list in the status area.
5
Press [t Copy].
This copies the selected file or files to the specified destination.
If there is already data in the specified location, a confirmation message
appears.
• Select “Yes” to overwrite the data.
• Select “No” to cancel copying all of the files.
Copying frame memory files
Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure above, “Copying Files,” do as follows.
1
To select the frame memory folder, press [Default] in the device selection
in the list on the left.
A pull-down menu appears.
2
Press the required folder name.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Select the first copy source file 1 to 99
2 List R Select the first destination file 1 to 99
3 Num Number to be selected 1 to 99
473Operations on Individual Files
Chapter 17 Files
3
Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right.
4
Select the type of data to be displayed.
• To display still image files, press [Still].
• To display clip files, press [Clip].
• To display extended clip files, press [Ext Clip].
• To display all types of file, press [All].
Renaming Files
You can rename a file on the hard disk or memory card and a register. As an
example, to rename a snapshot file, use the following procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
The Snapshot menu appears. The status area shows the device status, and
a list of files present on the device.
2
Press [File Edit].
A detailed list appears. Here too, you can select a device or specify a
directory. (See page 468.)
3
Using any of the following methods, select the file you want to rename.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
4
Press [Rename].
The keyboard window appears. (See “Menu Operations” in Chapter 2
(Volume 1).)
5
Enter a name of not more than eight characters, and press [Enter].
The name you have entered is reflected in the status area.
Notes
• Within the switcher, the names for Initial Status and Setup data are fixed.
You can change the file names on the hard disk or memory card, but the next
time they are reloaded they will revert to the default names.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List File selection 1 to 99
Chapter 17 Files
474 Operations on Individual Files
• The following names cannot be used.
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9, LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4,
LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
Renaming frame memory files
1
In the File menu, select VF5 ‘Frame Mem’ and HF1 ‘Frame Memory.’
The Frame Memory menu appears. The status area shows the device
status, and a list of files present on the device.
2
Press [File Edit].
3
Select the type of data to be displayed.
• To display still image files, press [Still].
• To display clip files, press [Clip].
• To display extended clip files, press [Ext Clip].
• To display all types of file, press [All].
4
Using any of the following methods, select the file you want to rename.
(When you selected [Clip] or [Ext Clip] in step 3, you cannot select
multiple files.)
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
5
Press [Rename].
The keyboard window appears.
6
Depending on the selections of steps 3 and 4, enter a name as follows and
press [Enter].
• When you selected a single file with [Still] or [All]: Enter a name of not
more than eight characters.
• When you selected more than one file with [Still] or [All]: Enter a name
of not more than four characters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L File selection in the left list 1 and upwards
2 List R File selection in the right
list
1 and upwards
3 Num Number to be selected 1 and upwards
475Operations on Individual Files
Chapter 17 Files
• When you selected a clip file or an extended clip file: Enter a name of
not more than four characters.
The name you have entered is reflected in the status area.
Notes
• If you select [Register] in the operation device selection block, then with
[Still] or [All] select multiple files and change a file name, these still images
are converted to a clip.
• It is not possible to simultaneously select a file for which the Ext field in the
status area is empty and a file for which the Ext field shows “Ext” to change
the name.
Deleting Files
You can delete data from the hard disk or memory card and snapshot or effect
data from a register. As an example, to delete a snapshot file, use the following
procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
The Snapshot menu appears. The status area shows the device status, and
a list of files present on the device.
2
Press [File Edit].
A detailed list appears. Here too, you can select a device or specify a
directory. (See page 468.)
3
Using any of the following methods, select the file you want to delete.
• To select all files within the list, press [All] below the list.
• To select multiple files, turn the knobs to select in the following ranges.
• To select a single file, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor, or press directly on the list in the status area.
4
Press [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to delete.
• Select “No” to cancel the deletion.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List Select the first file 1 to 99
3 Num Number to be selected 1 to 99
Chapter 17 Files
476 Operations on Individual Files
Deleting frame memory files
Between steps 2 and 3 of the procedure above, “Deleting Files,” do as follows.
1
To select the frame memory folder, press [Default] in the device selection
in the list.
A pull-down menu appears.
2
Press the required folder name.
3
Select the type of data to be displayed.
• To display still image files, press [Still].
• To display clip files, press [Clip].
• To display extended clip files, press [Ext Clip].
• To display all types of file, press [All].
Converting Between Frame Memory Clips and
Extended Clips
1
In the File menu, select VF5 ‘Frame Mem’ and HF1 ‘Frame Memory.’
The Frame Memory menu appears. The status area shows the device status
and a list of files on the device.
2
Press [File Edit].
3
In the device selection section of the list, select where the file is held
([HDD] or [Memory Card]), and specify the directory, and frame memory
folder.
4
Press either of the following at the top of the list, to select the type of data
displayed.
• To display clip files, press [Clip].
• To display extended clip files, press [Ext Clip].
5
Using any of the following methods, select the files you want to convert.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L File selection in the left list 1 and upwards
477Operations on Individual Files
Chapter 17 Files
6
Carry out either of the following.
• To convert clips to extended clips, press [Clip -> Ext Clip].
• To convert extended clips to clips, press [Ext Clip ->Clip ]
Creating a frame memory folder on the device (HDD or Memory
Card)
1
In the File menu, press VF5 ‘Frame Mem’ and HF2 ‘Frame Memory
Folder’.
The Frame Memory Folder menu appears. The status area shows the
device status, and a list of files present on the device.
2
In the pull-down menu of the device selection section, select [HDD] or
[Memory Card], and then specify the directory.
3
Press [New].
A keyboard window appears. (See the section “Menu Operations” in
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).)
4
Enter a name of up to eight characters, and press [Enter].
The name entered appears in the status area as a frame memory folder.
Notes
• The following names cannot be used.
Default, Flash1, Flash2
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9, LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4,
LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
• It is not possible to create 12 or more directories in the frame memory folder.
To rename a frame memory folder
1
Using any of the following methods, select the folder.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
2 List R File selection in the right list 1 and upwards
3 Num Number of files selected 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Chapter 17 Files
478 Operations on Individual Files
2
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears. (See the section “Menu Operations” in
Chapter 2 (Volume 1).)
3
Enter a name of up to eight characters, and press [Enter].
The name entered appears in the status area as a frame memory folder.
To delete a frame memory folder
1
With the same operations as in step 1 of the procedure “To rename a frame
memory folder,” select the folder.
2
Press [Delete].
A confirmation message appears; select “Yes” to carry out the deletion.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Folder selection 1 and upwards
479File Batch Operations
Chapter 17 Files
File Batch Operations
You can batch process all files or registers. Carry out these operations using the
File>All, External File>All menu.
Displaying the Batch Operation Menu
1
Press the top menu selection button [FILE].
2
Select VF6 ‘All, External File’ and HF1 ‘All.’
The All menu appears.
Batch Saving Files
To save the data of all registers to hard disk or memory card, use the following
procedure.
Notes
• Files saved on the hard disk may be lost if the hard disk fails. Always keep
separate backup copies of important files on a memory card.
• Format a memory card (see page 316) before using it for the first time.
1
In the device selection area of the All menu, select the destination for
saving the files ([HDD] or [Memory Card] and directory). (See page 468.)
2
If there are registers you do not want to save, in the <Category> group,
exclude them from the operation. To select all registers, press [All Select].
For details of the data to which operations apply, see “Files” in Chapter
1 (Volume 1).
Note
The frame memory is not selected when you press [All Select]. To apply
the setting to frame memory, press [Frame Memory], turning it on. When
frame memory is selected, it is not possible to apply settings to the
<Category> group data.
Chapter 17 Files
480 File Batch Operations
3
Press [t Save].
A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to carry out the batch save.
• Select “No” to cancel the batch save.
Batch Loading Files
To load files from hard disk or memory card, use the following procedure.
1
In the device selection area of the All menu, select where the files are held
([HDD] or [Memory Card] and directory). (See page 468.)
2
If there are files you do not want to load, in the <Category> group, exclude
them from the operation. To select all files, press [All Select].
For details of the data to which operations apply, see “Files” in Chapter
1 (Volume 1).
Note
The frame memory is not selected when you press [All Select]. To apply
the setting to frame memory, press [Frame Memory], turning it on. When
frame memory is selected, it is not possible to apply settings to the
<Category> group data.
3
Press [T Load].
A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to carry out the batch load. (Setup data is first loaded.)
• Select “No” to cancel the batch load.
To execute the load after clearing the data in the destination
regions
Before pressing [T Load], press [CLR Before Load], turning it on.
The following categories of data can be cleared before execution of the load.
Effect, Snapshot, Wipe Snapshot, DME Wipe Snapshot, Key Snapshot,
Shotbox, and Macro
Note
When frame memory is selected for the setting, the data is always deleted
before recalling.
481File Batch Operations
Chapter 17 Files
Batch Copying Files
To copy files between the hard disk and a memory card, use the following
procedure.
1
In the operating device selection section to the left of the All menu, select
the storage location ([HDD] or [Memory Card] and directory) of the
source files (see page 468).
2
In the operating device selection section to the right of the All menu, select
the destination storage location ([HDD] or [Memory Card] and directory)
(see page 468).
3
If there are files you do not want to copy, remove them from the selection
in the <Category> group. To select all files, press [All Select].
For details of the data to which the operation applies, see “Files” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The frame memory is not selected when you press [All Select]. To apply
the setting to frame memory, press [Frame Memory], turning it on. When
frame memory is selected, it is not possible to apply settings to the
<Category> group data.
4
Press [t Copy].
This copies the selected files to the specified destination.
If there is already data present in the destination location, a confirmation
message appears.
• Select “Yes” to overwrite.
• Select “No” to cancel copying all of the files.
Chapter 17 Files
482 Importing and Exporting Files
Importing and Exporting Files
You can import or export frame memory image data from or to external media.
Import: to transfer a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card
to frame memory as image data.
Export: to change the file format of register data and save the data on hard disk
or memory card.
To carry out these operations, use the File >All,External File >Import/Export
menu.
For details of the formats supported for import and export, see “Files” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Displaying the Import/Export Menu
In the File menu, select VF6 ‘All, External File’ and HF2 ‘Import/Export.’
The list on the left shows the frame memory registers, and the list on the right
shows the content of the external recording media.
Importing Frame Memory Data
As an example, to import data in a bitmap format from a memory card to a
frame memory register, use the following procedure.
About the points you should take note of when importing data, see “Files” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
The imported file is created in the “Default” folder.
1
In the Import/Export menu, press the device selection area on the left to
select [Frame Memory (.BMP)].
2
Press the device selection section in the list on the left, and press either of
[Still/Clip] and [Ext Clip].
All of the selected type of frame memory data appears.
3
Press the device selection area on the right to select [Memory Card].
It is not possible to select a directory.
483Importing and Exporting Files
Chapter 17 Files
4
Using any of the following methods, select the register into which the data
is to be imported and the file.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
5
Press [T Import].
This transfers the external file to the frame memory register.
Exporting Frame Memory Data
As an example, to save image data from frame memory in a bitmap format on
a memory card, use the following procedure.
1
In the Import/Export menu, press the device selection area on the left to
select [Frame Memory (.BMP)].
2
Press the device selection section in the list on the left, and press either of
[Still/Clip] and [Ext Clip].
All of the selected type of frame memory data appears.
3
Press the device selection area on the right to select [Memory Card].
It is not possible to select a directory.
4
Using any of the following methods, select the data you want to export
from the list on the left.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
5
Press [t Export].
This adds the image data from the frame memory in a bitmap format on the
memory card.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Register selection 1 and upwards
2 List R File selection 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Register selection 1 and upwards
2 List R File selection 1 and upwards
Chapter 17 Files
484 Importing and Exporting Files
Executing export creates a file in the MVS_EXP directory immediately
under root directory. If the directory does not exist, it is automatically
created.
If the specified destination file name already exists, an overwriting
confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to overwrite the data.
• Select “No” to cancel the whole file export operation.
485Directory Operations
Chapter 17 Files
Directory Operations
You can create a new directory on hard disk or memory card, rename, or delete
a directory.
To carry out these operations, use the File >Configure >Directory menu.
Displaying the Directory Menu
In the File menu, select VF7 ‘Configure’ and HF1 ‘Directory.’
The Directory menu appears.
Creating a New Directory
You can create a maximum of 120 directories on a memory card, or 200 on an
internal hard disk.
1
In the device selection pull-down menu, select [HDD] or [Memory Card].
(See page 468.)
2
Press [New].
The keyboard window appears. (See “Menu Operations” in Chapter 2
(Volume 1).)
3
Enter a name of not more than eight characters, and press [Enter].
A new directory with the name you have entered appears in the status area.
Note
The following names cannot be used for directories:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, and NUL
COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7,
COM8, and COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, and
LPT9
Chapter 17 Files
486 Directory Operations
Renaming a Directory
1
In the device selection pull-down menu, select [HDD] or [Memory Card].
(See page 468.)
2
Using any of the following methods, select the directory.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Rename].
The keyboard window appears. (See “Menu Operations” in Chapter 2
(Volume 1).)
4
Enter a new name of not more than eight characters, and press [Enter].
The new name appears in the status area.
Deleting a Directory
1
In the device selection pull-down menu, select [HDD] or [Memory Card].
(See page 468.)
2
Using any of the following methods, select the directory.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to delete the directory.
• Select “No” to cancel the deletion.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List Directory selection 1 and upwards
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List Directory selection 1 and upwards
487Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs
Chapter 17 Files
Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs
Switcher and DME files on the hard disk or a memory card are handled
separately for each unit ID.
With the normal file copy operation, it is not possible to copy files between
different unit IDs. To copy files between different unit IDs, use the following
procedure.
For details of unit IDs, see “Setup for the Whole System” (page 289) in
Chapter 16.
Displaying the Unit ID Copy menu
In the File menu, select VF7 ‘Configure’ and HF2 ‘Unit ID Copy.’
The Unit ID Copy menu appears.
Copying files between different unit IDs
To copy files between different unit IDs, grouped by category, use the
following procedure.
1
In the Unit ID Copy menu, press the category selection section at the top
right of the screen.
2
Press the categories you do not want to select, turning them off.
3
Press [OK].
4
In the operating device selection section on the left list, select the storage
location of the source files, and in the operating device selection section on
the right list, specify the destination storage location (see “Selecting a
Device for Operations” (page 468)).
5
Using either of the following methods, select the copy source and copy
destination unit IDs.
• Press directly on the list for the copy source on the left of the status area,
and on the right for the copy destination.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Selection of copy source unit ID 1 to 4
2 List R Selection of copy desitination unit ID 1 to 4
Chapter 17 Files
488 Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs
6
Press [tCopy].
A confirmation message appears.
• Select “Yes” to carry out the copy to the specified destination of the
selected file categories.
• Select “No” to cancel the copy.
Note
If there is already data present in the copy destination, note that this will
overwrite all of the data.
489Saving Files Recalled by Autoload
Chapter 17 Files
Saving Files Recalled by Autoload
If you save effect setting data, frame memory image files and so on in the
PWON_LD directory on the hard disk, then when the system is powered on this
data is recalled automatically. This is known as the autoload function.
To save the data to be recalled by the autoload function, use the menu for
operations on individual files.
For the data recalled by the autoload function, see “Files” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
For the setting enabling or disabling the autoload function, see “Setting
automatic loading of register data at power on (autoload function)” (page
298).
For example, to save snapshot data, use the following procedure.
1
In the File menu, select VF3 ‘Snapshot’ and HF1 ‘Snapshot.’
The Snapshot menu appears.
2
In the device selection area on the left, select [Register].
3
In the device selection area on the right, select [HDD].
Be sure to select [HDD] as the saving destination.
4
Select the PWON_LD directory.
The PWON_LD directory is automatically created when [Power On File
Load] is set to On in the System >Start Up menu. If set to Off, the directory
does not appear.
5
Using any of the following methods, select the data to be saved, and the
file in which to save it.
• To select all files within the list, press [ALL] below the list.
• To select multiple files, turn the knobs to select in the following ranges.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 List L Select the first register whose data
is to be saved
1 to 99
2 List R Select the first file to which data is to
be saved
1 to 99
3 Num Number of registers to be selected 1 to 99
Chapter 17 Files
490 Saving Files Recalled by Autoload
• To select a single file, press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video
cursor, or directly press on the list in the status area.
6
Press [tSave].
The data from the selected registers is saved in the specified destination.
If the specified destination already contains data, a confirmation message
appears.
• Select “Yes” to overwrite the existing data.
• Select “No” to cancel the entire saving operation.
Chapter 18 Macros
Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the
Keyframe Control Block ...............................................................492
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro .........................494
Creating and Editing a Macro ...........................................................495
Saving a Macro ..................................................................................502
Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block .....503
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro .........................504
Creating and Saving a Macro ............................................................507
Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block .........511
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro .........................512
Creating and Editing a Macro ...........................................................513
Saving a Macro ..................................................................................516
Macro Editing Using Menus ....................................................................517
Macro Register Editing .....................................................................517
Online Editing of Macro Events ........................................................517
Offline Editing of Macro Events .......................................................523
Macro Attachment Assigning ..................................................................529
Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment ......................................529
Displaying the Macro Attachment List .............................................533
Executing a Macro by Macro Attachment .........................................534
Menu Macros ............................................................................................536
Recalling a Menu Macro Register and Executing a Menu Macro ....536
Recalling a Menu Macro Register .....................................................536
Menu Macro Creation and Editing ....................................................538
Menu Macro Register Editing ...........................................................544
Macro Timeline .........................................................................................546
Creating and editing a macro timeline ..............................................546
Chapter 18 Macros
492 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad
Control Block and the Keyframe Control
Block
This section describes macro operations carried out in the numeric keypad
control block and the keyframe control block.
Note
For a macro take operation (see “Macro Execution” under “Macros” in
Chapter 1 (Volume 1)), the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control
block are not used. Use the [Take] button in the Flexi Pad control block.
For an overview of macros, see “Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
For macro operations in the numeric keypad control block, use the following
buttons. (See the figure on next page.)
493Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
For macro operations in the keyframe control block, use the following buttons.
(See the following figure.)
EFF
M/E
1
USER
1
DME
1
DME
5
SNAP
SHOT
M/E
2
USER
2
DME
2
DME
6
SHOT
BOX
M/E
3
USER
3
DME
3
DME
7
MCRO
P/P
USER
4
DME
4
DME
8
TRANS
RATE
RTR
DEV
1
DEV
2
UNDO
TC
STORE
STATS
MASTR ALL P-BUS GP1
STORE
RCALL
789
456
123
0
+/-
EFF
TRIM
CLR
AUTO
DISS
TRANS
ENBL
GPI
ENTER
MCRO button
UNDO button
STORE STATS button
Display
STORE button
RCALL button Numeric keypad
Chapter 18 Macros
494 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro
To carry out a macro operation, recall a macro register. Recalling an empty
register allows you to carry out macro editing operations. Recalling a register
holding a macro executes the macro immediately.
To recall a macro register, use the following procedure.
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [MCRO] button, turning it
on.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block to macro operations, and
the [RCALL] button lights.
2
Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad
buttons.
To search for an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button.
The display shows the corresponding register number. A letter “E” after
the number indicates that the corresponding register is empty.
STOP
NEXT
KF
NORM REV
NORM
/REV
EFF
LOOP
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
DELAY
EFF
DUR
COPY PASTE
DEL
SHIFT INS PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MOD UNDO
CONST
DUR
TURN
OVER
KF
LOOP
GO TO
TC
AUTO
INS
PAUSE
GO TO
KF
ALL FROM
TO
FF
RE
WIND
RUN
Editing buttons
EDIT ENBL button
PAUSE button
AUTO INS button
Edit point specification buttons
495Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
This recalls the specified register.
When you recall an empty register
This assigns the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block to
macro editing.
For details of macro editing, see “Creating and Editing a Macro” (see below).
When you recall a register holding a macro
This immediately executes the macro. While the macro is executed, the
[RCALL] button flashes.
Notes
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time.
• During macro execution, recalling the same register again stops the macro
being executed.
• Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in
setup. If you change the settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the
expected effect.
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel to macro editing
mode, the macro being executed stops.
• During macro editing it is not possible to execute a macro.
• If you start execution of a macro by operating a Flexi Pad control block or a
button for which a macro attachment is set, then before the end of execution
of that macro you cannot recall and execute a separate macro from the
numeric keypad control block.
Creating and Editing a Macro
Use the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block to create and
edit a macro.
After carrying out creation and editing, be sure to carry out a save operation
(see page 502), using the numeric keypad control block.
Switching auto insert mode on or off for macro creation/editing
In the auto insert mode, when creating or editing a macro, an operation carried
out on the control panel is automatically registered as an event.
When this mode is off, it is necessary to press the [INS] button in the keyframe
control block for each operation to register the event.
To switch auto insert mode on or off, press the [AUTO INS] button in the
keyframe control block.
Chapter 18 Macros
496 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Note
When you start macro editing using the numeric keypad control block with the
macro execution mode set to “Normal” (see page 380), the auto insert mode is
automatically on. When “Step” is selected as the macro execution mode, the
auto insert mode is automatically off.
Creating a new macro
1
Recall an empty register.
For details of the method of operation, see “Recalling a Macro Register
and Executing a Macro” (page 494).
This assigns the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block
to macro editing, and the [MCRO] button in the numeric keypad control
block and the [EDIT ENBL] button in the keyframe control block light red.
The [STORE] button in the numeric keypad control block flashes red.
2
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button in the keyframe control block to
toggle the auto insert mode on or off.
3
Create the events (carry out the control panel operations to be registered as
events in the macro).
You can include pause events (see page 501).
For details of events that can be registered, see “Macros” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
• When auto insert mode (see page 495) is on, execution of a control panel
operation automatically registers an event in the macro.
• When auto insert mode is off, proceed to step 4.
Notes
• During macro editing, if you press any of the mode selection buttons in
the numeric keypad control block other than the [MCRO] button
([TRANSRATE] button, and so on), the executed operation is also
registered as an event. In this case, the [MCRO] button stays lit red.
• Even during macro editing, you can carry out keyframe operations using
the fader lever in the keyframe control block and the following buttons:
[EFF LOOP], [STOP NEXT KF], [NORM], [REV], [NORM / REV],
[FF], [REWIND], [RUN]
• During macro editing, if you press a button for which a macro
attachment is set, the outcome is as described in the next item.
497Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
4
When auto insert mode is off, press the [INS] button in the keyframe
control block to register the event.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to register the required events in the macro.
This registers the events in the macro, in the order the operations were
carried out on the control panel.
6
Press the [STORE] button.
Macro editing finishes, and the [MCRO] button and [STORE] button in the
numeric keypad control block light amber. The keyframe control block
returns to the state before starting macro editing.
Note
While carrying out macro editing in the numeric keypad control block and
keyframe control block, no macro operation other than macro recalling is
possible in the Flexi Pad control block.
Merging a macro for which a macro attachment is set
While creating/editing a macro, if you press a button for which a macro
attachment is set, the macro in the register assigned to the button is recalled,
and the following occurs.
• When auto insert mode is on, it is merged with the macro being edited.
However, the macro assigned to the button is not executed.
• When auto insert mode is off, it is copied to the paste buffer. Pressing the
[PASTE] button in the keyframe control block merges it with the macro
being edited.
Specifying an edit point
To specify an edit point with the numeric keypad control block and keyframe
control block, use the following procedure.
1
Recall the register of the macro you want to edit.
For details of the method of operation, see “Recalling a Macro Register
and Executing a Macro” (page 494).
2
In the numeric keypad control block, hold down the [MCRO] button, and
press the [STORE] button.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block
to macro editing, and the [MCRO] button in the numeric keypad control
block and the [EDIT ENBL] button in the keyframe control block light red.
The [STORE] button in the numeric keypad control block flashes red.
Chapter 18 Macros
498 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
3
Using any of the following methods, specify the edit point.
• To move the edit point to the event immediately following the current
macro event, press the [NEXT KF] button in the keyframe control block.
• To move the edit point to the event immediately preceding the current
macro event, press the [PREV KF] button in the keyframe control block.
• To move to an edit point by specifying an event number (the number
showing the position of the event in the macro execution sequence),
press the [GO TO KF] button in the keyframe control block, then in the
numeric keypad control block, enter the target number and confirm with
the [ENTER] button.
Inserting an event
1
Specify the edit point. (See page 497.)
2
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button in the keyframe control block to
toggle the auto insert mode on or off.
3
Create the event.
• When auto insert mode (see page 495) is on, the event is automatically
added to the macro.
• When auto insert mode is off, proceed to step 4.
4
When auto insert mode is off, press the [INS] button in the keyframe
control block.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to insert the required events in the macro.
Modifying a single event
1
Specify the edit point. (See page 497.)
2
If the [AUTO INS] button is lit, press it to turn off the insert mode.
3
Create the event.
4
Press the [MOD] button in the keyframe control block.
Modifying a particular range of events
1
Carry out steps 1 to 3 of the procedure in “Modifying a single event” (the
previous item).
499Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
2
Press the [FROM TO] button in the keyframe control block, turning it on.
The numeric display in the numeric keypad control block shows the
current event number and the indication “TO.”
3
To set the start of the range to other than the current event number, press
the [CLR/AUTO TRANS] button in the numeric keypad control block,
then enter the desired event number with the numeric keypad and press the
[ENTER] button. (This operation is not required when using the current
event number.)
4
Enter the event number for the end of the range and press the [ENTER]
button.
5
Press the [MOD] button in the keyframe control block.
This modifies the specified range of events simultaneously.
Modifying all events at the same time
1
Carry out steps 1 to 3 of the procedure in “Modifying a single event” (page
498).
2
Press the [ALL] button in the keyframe control block, turning it on.
3
Press the [MOD] button.
This modifies all events in the specified range simultaneously.
Deleting an event
1
Specify the edit point. (See page 497.)
2
To delete multiple events simultaneously, carry out either of the following
operations. (This operation is not required to delete the event at the edit
point only.)
• To specify a range to be deleted, press the [FROM TO] button in the
keyframe control block, then enter the event numbers from the numeric
keypad control block.
• To delete all events within this macro, press the [ALL] button, turning it
on.
3
Press the [DEL] button.
This deletes the specified events.
Chapter 18 Macros
500 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Moving events
1
Specify the edit point for the start of the range to be moved. (See page 497.)
2
To move multiple events simultaneously, press the [FROM TO] button in
the keyframe control block, then specify the range in the numeric keypad
control block.
3
Press the [DEL] button.
This temporarily deletes the specified events from the macro, and copies
them to the paste buffer.
4
Move to the edit point which is the destination within the macro to which
you want to move the events.
5
To paste the contents of the paste buffer after the edit point, press the
[PASTE] button in the keyframe control block.
To paste before the edit point, hold down the [SHIFT] button in the
keyframe control block and press the [PASTE] button.
This pastes the events from the paste buffer.
Copying events
1
Specify the edit point for the start of the range to be copied.
2
To copy multiple events simultaneously, press the [FROM TO] button or
[ALL] button in the keyframe control block, then specify the range in the
numeric keypad control block.
3
Press the [COPY] button.
This copies the specified events into the paste buffer.
4
Move to the edit point which is the destination within the macro to which
you want to copy the events.
5
To paste the contents of the paste buffer after the edit point, press the
[PASTE] button in the keyframe control block.
To paste before the edit point, hold down the [SHIFT] button in the
keyframe control block and press the [PASTE] button.
This copies the events from the paste buffer.
501Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
Inserting a pause event
1
Press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control block, lighting it green.
The indication “PAUSE” appears in the numeric keypad control block
display.
2
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button in the keyframe control block to
toggle the auto insert mode on or off.
3
Enter the pause duration with the numeric keypad control block (0 or 1 to
999 (frames)).
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
• If auto insert mode is on, this sets the pause duration, and inserts the
pause event.
• When auto insert mode is off, continue to step 5.
5
When auto insert mode is off, press the [INS] button in the keyframe
control block to insert the pause event.
Merging macro register data
1
Specify the edit point. (See page 497.)
2
Press the [RCALL] button in the numeric keypad control block, lighting it
amber.
3
Enter the number of the macro register you want to copy using the numeric
keypad buttons.
The display shows the register number.
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
The [RCALL] button goes off, and the specified register data is copied to
the paste buffer.
• When auto insert mode is on, the data from the specified register is
included after the edit point.
• When auto insert mode is off, continue to step 5.
5
When auto insert mode is off, to include after the edit point, press the
[PASTE] button in the keyframe control block.
To include before the edit point, hold down the [SHIFT] button in the
keyframe control block, and press the [PASTE] button.
Chapter 18 Macros
502 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Keyframe Control Block
In place of steps 2 to 4, you can specify the register with the Flexi Pad control
block. (See “Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro” (page 504)).
The same effect is obtained if you use a button which has a macro attachment
set. In this case, the data from the assigned macro register is copied into the
paste buffer.
Undoing a macro editing operation with the numeric keypad
control block
Immediately after inserting, modifying, deleting, or pasting an event, you can
undo the operation by pressing the [UNDO] button in the numeric keypad
control block.
Saving a Macro
Use the following procedure to save the register after creating or editing/
modifying a macro.
1
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [MCRO] button, turning it
on.
This assigns the numeric keypad control block to macro operations.
2
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.
3
Enter the number of the register in which you want to save the macro with
the numeric keypad buttons.
To search for an empty register, instead of entering a number, press the [.]
(period) button.
The display shows the corresponding register number. A letter “E” after
the number indicates that the corresponding register is empty.
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
This saves the macro data in the specified register, and the [STORE] button
goes off.
The [RCALL] and [STORE STATS] buttons light.
To cancel the saving of a macro
To cancel the saving of a macro immediately after performing it, hold down the
[STORE STATS] button and press the [UNDO] button.
503Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
Macro Operations in the Standard Type
Flexi Pad Control Block
This section describes how to carry out macro operations in a standard type
Flexi Pad control block.
For an overview of macros, see “Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Using the <Flexi Pad Edit Mode> group buttons in the Engineering Setup
>Panel >Operation >Macro menu, you can set the macro execution mode to
Pause Only or Full Editing (see page 380).
The display of the standard type Flexi Pad control block changes as follows,
depending on the selected mode of macro execution.
When entering macro editing mode with “Pause Only” selected
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
STOR
/12
PAUS
Numeric display
UNDO button
Bank selection buttons
Memory recall section
MCRO button
STORE STATS button
Chapter 18 Macros
504 Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
When entering macro editing mode with “Full Editing” selected
About operations in Full Editing mode, see “Macro Operations in the Simple
Type Flexi Pad Control Block” (page 511).
Banks and registers
To allow operations on the 99 registers, the standard type Flexi Pad control
block treats the registers in groups. These groups are called banks, and there
are 10 banks, numbered from 0 to 9.
For details of the correspondence between banks and registers, see “Banks
and Registers” (page 254).
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro
Carrying out a macro operation in the normal mode
Use the following procedure to recall a macro register.
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button, turning it on.
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
EXIT AUTO
INS STOR ??
PAUS ALL
INS MOD DEL
> NEXT< PREV
Numeric display
UNDO button
Bank selection buttons
Memory recall section
MCRO button
STORE STATS button
505Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations.
The numeric display shows the previously selected bank number and the
last recalled register number.
2
Use any of the following operations to select the bank for recall.
To select bank 0: Press the [BANK0] button.
To select bank 1: Press the [BANK1] button.
To select any of banks 0 to 9: Press the [BANK SEL] button, changing
the memory recall section display as in the following figure; select a
number from 0 to 9.
The selected bank number appears in the numeric display.
Each button in the memory recall section shows the corresponding register
name and register status for the selected bank.
Note that in the Setup menu, you can select whether to display register
names or register numbers.
Lit orange: Register holding macro data
Lit yellow: Last recalled register
Off: Empty register
3
Press the button in the memory recall section showing the name of the
register to be recalled.
The button you pressed lights yellow, the macro register is recalled, and
the macro is executed.
During macro execution, the button you pressed remains yellow, but
flashes. When macro execution completes, it returns to permanently on.
The numeric display shows the bank name followed by the selected
register number.
Notes
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time.
789
456
123
0
Example:
Chapter 18 Macros
506 Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
• During macro execution, recalling the same register again stops the
macro being executed.
• Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the
settings in setup. If you change the settings in setup, a saved macro may
not have the expected effect.
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel to macro editing
mode, the macro being executed stops.
• During macro editing it is not possible to execute a macro.
• If you start execution of a macro by operating the Flexi Pad control block
for an M/E or PGM/PST bank, the numeric keypad control block or a
button for which a macro attachment is set, then before the end of
execution of that macro you cannot recall and execute a separate macro
from the Flexi Pad control block for a different bank.
Executing a macro in normal execution mode (with pause events
set)
When execution of a macro is paused, the [Take] button is assigned to the
memory recall section.
To restart the macro execution, press the [Take] button.
You can switch the normal execution mode and step execution mode in the
Setup menu. See “Setting the macro execution mode” (page 380).
Executing a macro in step execution mode
To recall a macro register and execute the macro in step execution mode, use
the following procedure.
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, recall the macro register.
For details of recalling macro registers, see “Recalling a Macro Register
and Executing a Macro” (page 504).
The Flexi Pad control block memory recall section is assigned to the
display of the [Take] button and macro execution status, as in the following
figure.
507Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
2
Press the [Take] button.
This executes one event within the macro, then stops.
The number of events executed, as shown in the memory recall section
status display, is incremented by one.
3
Repeat step 2, executing the macro event by event.
When all events in the macro have been executed, the [Take] button goes
off.
Creating and Saving a Macro
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button, turning it on.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations.
2
Select the bank of the register in which you want to save the macro.
For details of the method of operation, see step 2 in the previous item
“Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro” (page 504).
3
Hold down the [MCRO] button in the Flexi Pad control block, and press
the button in the memory recall section showing the desired register name.
7
WIPE
DME
SNAP
SHOT
EFF
MCRO
SHOT
BOX
UNDO
STORE
STATS
TRANS
RATE
BNAK
0
BANK
1
BANK
SEL
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
10 Take
1
/6
Take button
Status display
(Number of events executed/
total number of events)
Chapter 18 Macros
508 Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro editing, and the auto
insert function is enabled. The [MCRO] button lights red.
As an example, when register 12 is specified, the buttons in the memory
recall section appear as in the following figure.
4
In the same way as in the numeric keypad control block, create the events
you want to save in the macro.
For details, see step 2 (page 496) of “Creating a new macro.”
5
Repeat step 4 to save the desired events in the macro.
The operations you carry out on the control panel are saved as a sequence
of events in the macro.
The numeric display appears as follows.
6
Press the [STORE XX] button in the memory recall section (where XX is
the register number).
The [STORE STATS] button lights amber.
This saves the created macro in the register, and macro editing ends.
The Flexi Pad control block returns to the state before macro editing began.
The [MCRO] button lights amber.
Notes
• During macro editing, you can press a mode selection button in the Flexi Pad
control block other than the [MCRO] button (for example, the [WIPE] button
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0STOR
/12
PAUS
Example:
Press to set a pause length.
“12” is the number of the currently
recalled register. Pressing this button
saves the macro, and the Flexi Pad
section switches back from macro
editing mode to the recall operation
mode.
Position of last saved event
Example: Total number of events
509Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
or [DME] button) to record the executed operation as an event. In this case,
the [MCRO] button remains lit red.
• During macro editing, if you press a button for which a macro attachment is
set, the macro within the register assigned to the button is merged into the
macro being edited. However, the macro assigned to the button is not
executed.
• While carrying out macro editing in the Flexi Pad control block, absolutely
no macro operations are possible in the Flexi Pad control blocks for other M/
E and PGM/PST banks. Macro operations from the numeric keypad control
block are also not possible.
To cancel the saving of a macro
To cancel the saving of a macro immediately after performing it, hold down the
[STORE STATS] button and press the [UNDO] button.
Inserting a pause event
1
Press the [PAUS] button in the memory recall section.
The buttons in the memory recall section change as follows.
2
Enter the length of pause you want to set (0 to 999 frames).
3
Press the [PAUS ENTR] button.
This sets the pause length, and inserts the pause event.
The memory recall section display returns to its former state.
Deleting a macro
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations.
The numeric display shows the previously selected bank number and the
number of the last recalled register.
789
456
123
0PAUS
ENTR
CLR
Chapter 18 Macros
510 Macro Operations in the Standard Type Flexi Pad Control Block
2
Select the bank of the register holding the macro you want to delete.
For details of the method of operation, see step 2 (page 505) of “Recalling
a Macro Register and Executing a Macro.”
3
Hold down the [STORE STATS] button, and then press the button in the
memory recall section showing the corresponding register number.
The button you pressed in the memory recall section goes off, and this
deletes the macro. The [STORE STATS] button lights amber.
511Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi
Pad Control Block
This section describes the macro operations carried out in the simple type Flexi
Pad control block.
Use the following buttons.
To use the MCRO button
To enable the [MCRO] button for use as in the above figure, it is necessary in
the Setup menu to switch the [UNDO] button to the [MCRO] button.
For more details, see “Setting the assignment of macro operation buttons” in
Chapter 16 (page 333).
Note
In a simple type Flexi Pad control block, only registers 1 to 6 can be used for
operations. There are no “bank” operations.
For registers 7 to 99, use the numeric keypad control block.
XPT HOLD
A B
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4
1
DME
SNAP
SHOT
2
3 4
5 6
Take
1
/10
MCRO
WIPE
Memory recall section
MCRO button Take button
Numeric display
Status display
(Number of events executed/
total number of events)
Chapter 18 Macros
512 Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro
Executing a macro in normal execution mode
1
In the simple type Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button,
turning it on.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation.
The numeric display shows the number of the last recalled register.
The buttons of the memory recall section show the selected register status.
Lit orange: register holding macro data
Lit yellow: last recalled register
Off: empty register
2
Press the button in the memory recall section showing the register to be
recalled.
The button you pressed lights yellow, the macro register is recalled, and
the macro is executed.
During the macro execution, the button pressed remains yellow, but
flashes, and when the macro execution completes it changes to
permanently lit.
The numeric display shows the selected register number.
Notes
• Only one macro can be executed at a time.
• During macro execution, if you recall the same register again, execution
of the macro stops.
• Individual events registered in a macro are executed according to the
setup settings. If you change the setup settings, the content of the macro
may not be played back.
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel to macro editing
mode, the macro currently being executed stops.
• It is not possible to execute a macro during macro editing.
Executing a macro in normal execution mode (with pause events
set)
When the macro execution is paused, the [Take] button is assigned to the
simple type Flexi Pad memory recall section.
Press the button to restart macro execution.
513Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
Executing a macro in step execution mode
After recalling the macro register, to execute a macro in step execution mode,
use the following procedure.
Note
To execute a macro in step execution mode requires setting the step execution
mode in the Setup menu.
For details of the method of setting, see “Setting the macro execution mode”
(page 380).
1
In the simple type Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button,
turning it on.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation.
2
Press the button in the memory recall section showing the register to be
recalled.
3
Press the [Take] button.
This executes one event within the macro, then stops.
The number of events executed, as shown in the memory recall section
status display, is incremented by one.
4
Repeat step 3, executing the macro event by event.
When all events in the macro have been executed, the [Take] button goes
off.
Creating and Editing a Macro
Creating a macro
1
In the simple type Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button,
turning it on.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation.
2
While holding down the [MCRO] button in the Flexi Pad control block,
press the button in the memory recall section showing the desired register
name.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro editing.
Chapter 18 Macros
514 Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block
As an example, when register 1 is specified, the memory recall section
buttons appear as in the following figure.
3
Carry out the control panel operation to be registered as an event in the
macro.
For details of the events that can be registered, see “Overview” under
“Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Note
In the Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to set a pause event. To set
a pause event, use the numeric keypad control block.
4
Press the [INS] button.
This registers the operation carried out in step 3 as an event within the
macro.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to register the required events in the macro.
The numeric display shows the last registered event position, and the total
number of events.
6
Press the [STOR 1] button in the memory recall section.
This saves the created macro in the register and ends the macro editing
mode; the [MCRO] button lights amber.
Notes
• During macro editing, if you press any of the mode selection buttons in the
Flexi Pad control block other than [MCRO] button (the [WIPE] button,
[DME] button, and so on), the executed operation is also registered as an
event. In this case, the [MCRO] button stays lit red.
• While carrying out macro editing in the Flexi Pad control block, pressing a
button to which a macro attachment is set does not execute the macro.
EXIT STOR
1
ALL DEL
INS MOD
NEXT
PREV
“1” is register number
515Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Chapter 18 Macros
• In the simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to undo a macro
save.
Specifying an edit point
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO] button, turning it on.
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation.
2
While holding down the [MCRO] button in the Flexi Pad control block,
press the button in the memory recall section showing the desired register
name.
3
Specify the edit point by the following operation.
• To move the edit point to the event immediately following the current
macro event (the macro event specified as the current edit point), press
the [NEXT] button.
• To move the edit point to the event immediately preceding the current
macro event, press the [PREV] button.
Inserting an event
To add an event to an already created macro, use the following procedure.
1
Specify the edit point. (See above.)
2
Carry out the event to be added on the control panel.
For details of events that can be registered, see “Overview” under
“Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
3
In the memory recall section, press the [INS] button.
This adds the new event after the event specified in step 1.
Modifying an event
1
Specify the edit point. (See above.)
2
Carry out the event you want to modify on the control panel.
3
Press the [MOD] button.
This modifies the event at the specified edit point as carried out in step 2.
Chapter 18 Macros
516 Macro Operations in the Simple Type Flexi Pad Control Block
Deleting an event
1
Specify the edit point. (See page 515.)
2
Press the [DEL] button.
This deletes the event specified in step 1.
Deleting all events within a macro register
1
Specify the edit point. (See page 515.)
2
Press the [ALL] button, lighting it green.
3
Press the [DEL] button.
This deletes all events within the register.
Saving a Macro
In the memory recall section, press the [STOR X] (X=register number) button
to save the edited macro in a register.
To return to the state before editing, without saving the macro
editing results
Press the [EXIT] button to recall the same register again. This returns to the
state before editing, without saving the macro editing results.
517Macro Editing Using Menus
Chapter 18 Macros
Macro Editing Using Menus
Using any of the menus in the following table, you can edit macro registers and
macro events.
Macro Register Editing
You can display the current state of a macro register using the Macro >Register
menu.
The items displayed are the same as under “Effect Status Display” (see page
239), with the exception that the region name is not displayed and that the total
number of macro events saved in the register is displayed.
In the Macro >Register menu, you can do the following editing operations on
macro registers.
•Lock: Write-protect the contents of the register.
•Copy: Copy the contents of one register to another register.
•Delete: Delete the contents of a register.
•Name: Attach a name to a register.
The operations for macro register editing are the same as those for effect
register editing (see page 239) except the region selection operation, which is
not necessary for macro register editing.
Online Editing of Macro Events
Using the On Line Edit menu, you carry out online editing of macro events.
Menu Function Operations
Register menu (macro
register editing)
Carry out macro register editing. • Locking a register
• Copying a register
• Deleting a register
• Naming a register
On Line Edit menu
(online editing of
macro events)
Edit events in a macro register, using
the control panel and menus.
• Inserting an event
• Deleting an event
• Modifying an event
Off Line Edit menu
(offline editing of
macro events)
Edit events in a macro register, on
the hard disk, or on a memory card,
using the menus.
• Inserting an event
• Adding an event
• Deleting an event
• Creating a new
macro
Chapter 18 Macros
518 Macro Editing Using Menus
In the On Line Edit menu, you can check the control panel operating sequence
in the menu. You can also carry out editing using the control panel and menu.
To display the On Line Edit menu
1
Recall the macro register you want to edit with the control panel, and select
the macro editing mode 1).
1) With the numeric keypad control block, keyframe control block, or Flexi Pad control block
assigned to macro editing (see step 2 in “Specifying an edit point” (page 497), step 3 in
“Creating and Saving a Macro” (page 507), and step 2 in “Creating a macro” (page
513))
2
In any of the following menus, select the same register as the register
recalled in step 1, and press [On Line Edit] in the button area.
• Macro >Register >Lock menu
• Macro >Register >Delete menu
• Macro >Register >Rename menu
• File >Shotbox, Macro >Macro >File Edit menu
The On Line Edit menu appears, and you can now carry out online editing
of the events held in the recalled register. Meanwhile, the control block of
the control panel operated in step 1 is assigned to control editing
operations.
Note
In the following cases, [On Line Edit] is disabled, and it is not possible to
display the On Line Edit menu.
• When the recalled register and the register selected in the menu are
different.
• When a device other than [Register] is selected ([HDD] or [Memory
Card]) in the File >Shotbox, Macro >Macro >File Edit menu.
• If the recalled register is locked.
519Macro Editing Using Menus
Chapter 18 Macros
On Line Edit menu
aRegister number
Shows the number of the register being edited.
bRegister name
Shows the name of the register being edited.
1 Register number
2 Register name
3 Event number
5 Macro register listing
4 Remaining Memory
6 ALL button
7 Macro creation event list
8 Insert Before button
9 Insert After button
0 Delete button
qa Modify button
qs <Prev button
qd >Next button
Chapter 18 Macros
520 Macro Editing Using Menus
cEvent number
Shows the current event number. When the [FROM TO] button in the
keyframe control block is pressed to select a range of events, this appears as a
range, “From X To Y.”
The event number reflects the position of the cursor in the macro register
listing.
dRemaining Memory
Shows the percentage of memory still available for recording events.
eMacro register listing
When a macro is stored in the register, this shows a list of the macro events.
Each macro event consists of the following components, which you can check
in the list.
•Contents: Identifies this as an Event statement, Continue statement, or event
number
•Symbol: Type of event (ASCII character string)
•Data: Event details in the form of parameters and data
For details of the event components, see “Macro File Editing Rules” (page
601).
The cursor shows the current event in the list, in reverse video. You can turn
knob 1 to scroll the list, but this does not change the cursor position. Depending
on the switcher status, the cursor color changes as follows.
•Yellow: in macro editing mode
•Gray: when the editing mode is exited by a control panel operation
•Blue: during macro execution
fALL button
Selects all events in the macro register listing.
gMacro creation event list
Shows the event being created or executed in the control panel.
hInsert Before button
Inserts a created event immediately before the selected event in the macro
register listing.
iInsert After button
Inserts a created event immediately after the selected event in the macro
register listing.
jDelete button
Deletes the selected event in the macro register listing.
521Macro Editing Using Menus
Chapter 18 Macros
kModify button
Replaces the selected event in the macro register listing with a created event.
l<Prev button
Moves the cursor to the event immediately before the selected event in the
macro register listing.
m>Next button
Moves the cursor to the event immediately after the selected event in the macro
register listing.
Carrying out online editing of macro events
In the On Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing operations
on the events in the macro register.
•Insert: Insert a macro event.
•Delete: Delete a macro event.
•Modify: Modify a macro event.
Note
It is not possible to save editing results using this menu alone. Carry out the
necessary control panel operations to save the edited register.
To insert an event
1
On the control panel, if auto insert mode is on, switch it off.
2
On the control panel, create a macro event.
The created event appears in the macro creation event list.
For more details of the display, see “Macro File Editing Rules” (page
601).
3
In the macro register listing, press [<Prev] or [>Next] to select the position
where you want to insert the created event.
4
Carry out either of the following.
To insert before the event selected in the list: Press [Insert Before].
To insert after the event selected in the list: Press [Insert After].
This inserts the created event either before or after the specified event.
Note
In the following cases, [Insert Before] and [Insert After] are disabled, and
it is not possible to insert the event.
Chapter 18 Macros
522 Macro Editing Using Menus
• If the memory or register is full.
• The size of the created macro event is larger than the memory or register
space available.
• When multiple events are selected.
• When the number of events has reached 99.
• When not in macro editing mode. 1)
1) While a macro is being executed on the control panel, when macro saving has been
executed, or when the [EXIT] button in the Flexi Pad control block has been pressed
5
Operate the control panel to save the editing result.
To delete an event
1
In the macro register listing, press [<Prev] or [>Next] to select the event
you want to delete.
To select all events in the register
Press [All].
2
Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected event.
Note
If not in macro editing mode 1), [Delete] is disabled, and it is not possible
to delete the selected event.
1) While a macro is being executed on the control panel, when macro saving has been
executed, or when the [EXIT] button in the Flexi Pad control block has been pressed
3
Operate the control panel to save the editing result.
To modify an event
1
On the control panel, if auto insert mode is on, switch it off.
2
In the macro register listing, press [<Prev] or [>Next] to select the event
you want to modify.
3
On the control panel, modify the macro event.
The modified event appears in the macro creation event list.
For more details of the display, see “Macro File Editing Rules” (page
601).
4
Press [Modify].
523Macro Editing Using Menus
Chapter 18 Macros
This modifies the event selected in the list.
Note
If not in macro editing mode 1), [Modify] is disabled, and it is not possible
to modify the event.
1) While a macro is being executed on the control panel, when macro saving has been
executed, or when the [EXIT] button in the Flexi Pad control block has been pressed
5
Operate the control panel to save the editing result.
Offline Editing of Macro Events
Using the Off Line Edit menu, you carry out offline editing of macro events.
In the Off Line Edit menu, you can carry out editing in the menu only, unrelated
to operation of the control panel.
To display the Off Line Edit menu
In any of the following menus, select the register or device holding the macro
you want to edit, and press [Off Line Edit] in the button area.
• Macro >Register >Lock menu
• Macro >Register >Delete menu
• Macro >Register >Rename menu
• File >Shotbox, Macro >Macro >File Edit menu
This recalls the selected macro register or macro file, and offline editing is now
possible.
Note
If the selected register is locked, [Off Line Edit] is disabled, and it is not
possible to display the Off Line Edit menu.
Chapter 18 Macros
524 Macro Editing Using Menus
Off Line Edit menu
aRegister or file number
Shows the number of the register or file being edited.
bRegister or file name
Shows the name of the register or file being edited.
1 Register or file number
2 Register or file name
3 Macro listing 4 Editing button group
5 Macro editing candidate list
6 Insert Before button
7 Append button
8 Delete button
9 Set button
0 Store button
qa Exit button
525Macro Editing Using Menus
Chapter 18 Macros
cMacro listing
Lists the macro events that are saved in the register or file. The cursor moves
to the selected event. Each macro event consists of the following components,
which you can check in the list.
•Contents: Event statement, Continue statement, comment (#), or event
number, as selected in the editing button group [Contents]
•Symbol: Event type (ASCII character string), as selected in the editing
button group [EVNT]
•Data: Parameters and data as set in the editing button group
For more details of the event components, see “Macro File Editing Rules”
(page 601).
dEditing button group
This row of buttons shows the components of an event. To carry out event
editing: (1) press an editing button, then (2) select an item from the list of
macro editing candidates, and repeat this process as required.
eMacro editing candidate list
Shows the list of editing candidates for the selection from the editing button
group.
fInsert Before button
Inserts immediately before the event selected in the macro listing.
gAppend button
Adds an empty row at the end of the macro listing.
hDelete button
Deletes the event selected in the macro listing.
iSet button
Reflects the item selected in the macro editing candidate list, in the macro
listing and editing buttons.
jStore button
Saves the results of the macro register or macro file editing.
kExit button
Closes the Off Line Edit menu without saving the results of the macro register
or macro file editing, and returns to the File Edit menu.
Carrying out offline editing of macro events
In the Off Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing operations
on the events in the macro register or macro file.
•Insert: Insert a macro event.
Chapter 18 Macros
526 Macro Editing Using Menus
•Add: Add a macro event.
•Delete: Delete a macro event.
You can also create a new macro.
To insert an event
1
In the macro listing, select the event immediately after the position where
you want to insert an event.
2
Press [Insert Before].
This inserts a blank row before the event selected in step 1.
3
Press [Contents] in the editing button group.
The following event types appear in the macro editing candidate list.
•Event: Event
•Continue: Event continuation
•#: Comment
For details of the items, see “Macro File Editing Rules” (page 601).
4
Select the desired item from the macro editing candidate list, and press
[Set].
The selected item appears at the event insertion position in the macro
listing, as an event component. Additionally, in the leftmost blank position
of the editing button group (to the right of [Contents]), a button appears,
corresponding to the item in the macro editing candidate list. For example,
if “Event” is selected, an [EVNT] button appears.
5
In the editing button group, press the button that has just appeared.
The item corresponding to the button appears in the macro editing
candidate list.
If you press the [EVNT] button, the symbol indicating the event contents
appears.
For details of symbols, see “Correspondence Between Events and
Symbols” (page 604).
527Macro Editing Using Menus
Chapter 18 Macros
6
Select the desired item from the macro editing candidate list, and press
[Set].
At the event insertion position of the macro listing, the selected item is
added as an event component. Additionally, in the next blank position of
the editing button group, a button appears, corresponding to the item in the
macro editing candidate list. For example, if “MEAutoTransition” is
selected, a button for the parameters and data for the MEAutoTransition
appears.
Note
If you select an item from the macro editing candidate list, be sure to press
[Set]. If [Set] is not pressed, the selection is not confirmed.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6, to edit the event components.
At the event insertion position of the macro listing, the confirmed item is
added as an event component.
To further add an event
Repeat steps 1 to 7.
To close the Off Line Edit menu without saving the editing results
Press [Exit] to return to the menu that was on the screen immediately
before the offline editing.
8
Press [Store].
The numeric keypad window appears.
9
Enter the register number as required, and press [Enter].
The current macro is stored in the register.
The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately
before the offline editing.
To append an event
This adds an event at the end of the macro.
1
Press [Append].
A blank row is added at the end of the macro listing.
Chapter 18 Macros
528 Macro Editing Using Menus
2
Carry out steps 3 to 8 of the previous item, “To insert an event,” to edit an
event.
To delete an event
1
In the macro listing, select the event you want to delete.
2
Press [Delete].
This deletes the selected event.
If a deleted Event statement is followed by a Continue statement, the
Continue statement is converted to an Event statement.
To close the Off Line Edit menu without saving the editing results
Press [Exit] to return to the File Edit menu.
3
Press [Store].
This saves the results of the macro register or macro file editing, and
returns to the File Edit menu.
To create a new macro
1
From the list in any of the following menus, select an empty register or file,
and press [Off Line Edit] in the button area.
• Macro >Register >Lock menu
• Macro >Register >Delete menu
• Macro >Register >Rename menu
• File >Shotbox, Macro >Macro >File Edit menu
The Off Line Edit menu appears.
2
Carry out steps 3 to 8 of the procedure “To insert an event” (page 526), to
create an the event.
529Macro Attachment Assigning
Chapter 18 Macros
Macro Attachment Assigning
The term “macro attachment” refers to the assignment of a macro register to a
control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever, so that the macro
execution is linked to the normal function of the button or the operation of the
fader lever.
For an overview of macro attachment, see “Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment
Setting a macro attachment to a button
This section describes the example of setting a macro attachment for the
background A row cross-points.
See “Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1) for the buttons for which a macro
attachment can be set.
1
Recall the macro register you want to assign to the button.
For details of recall from the numeric keypad control block, see page 494.
For details of recall from the Flexi Pad control block, see page 504.
2
To set in pre macro mode, hold down the [PRE MCRO] button in the cross-
point control block, and to set in post macro mode, hold down the [POST
MCRO] button, and then press the desired button in the background A row.
Chapter 18 Macros
530 Macro Attachment Assigning
The cross-point button you pressed flashes amber, and the register you
recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button.
If you make both pre macro and post macro settings for the same
button
The later setting is valid.
To set a macro attachment without changing cross-points
When you set a macro attachment to a cross-point button, you can make the
setting without changing the bus cross-points. Carry out this selection in the
Engineering Setup >Panel >Operation menu. For details, see “Setting the
macro execution mode” (page 380).
To make a macro attachment setting in macro only mode
Note
To carry out this operation, it is first necessary to assign the “Macro Only Set”
function to the user preference buttons in the menu control block or the utility/
shotbox control operation. Carry out this assignment in the Eng Setup >Panel
>Prefs/Utility menu. (For details, see “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/
Utility Menu)” (page 356).)
To make a macro attachment in macro only mode, use the following procedure.
M/E
1
M/E
1
SHIFT
SHIFT XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD
PRE
MCRO
KEY3
KEY4
POST
MCRO
XPT
HOLD
XPT
HOLD UTIL
M/E
1
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
M/E
3
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
MCRO
ATTCH
ENBL
PRE MCRO button
POST MCRO button
Background A row
Background B row MCRO ATTCH ENBL button
531Macro Attachment Assigning
Chapter 18 Macros
1
Recall the macro register you want to assign to the button.
For details of recall from the numeric keypad control block, see page 494,
and for details of recall from the Flexi Pad control block, see page 504.
2
Press the button to which [MCRO ONLY SET] is assigned, turning it on.
3
Hold down the cross-point control block [PRE MCRO] button or [POST
MCRO] button, and press the desired button in the background A row.
The cross-point button you pressed flashes green, and the register you
recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button. The [MCRO ONLY SET]
button goes off.
Without switching to macro only mode in step 2, if you hold down the
[PRE MCRO] and [POST MCRO] buttons together and press the desired
button, it is possible to set a macro attachment in macro only mode for that
button.
To check macro attachment settings
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or [POST MCRO] button. While it is held
down, buttons for which macro attachments are set flash as follows.
While the [PRE MCRO] button is held down:
• Buttons set in pre macro mode: flash amber
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green
While the [POST MCRO] button is held down:
• Buttons set in post macro mode: flash amber
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green
Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever
You can set a macro attachment to any particular position of a fader lever in the
transition control block.
Notes
• In macro only mode it is not possible to set a macro attachment.
• It is not possible to set a macro attachment to a fader lever in the keyframe
control block or downstream key control block.
• For a split fader, you can set a macro attachment to the main split fader.
For details of split faders, see Chapter 3, “Split Fader” (Volume 1).
1
Recall the macro register that you want to assign to the fader lever.
For details of recall from the numeric keypad control block see page 494,
and for recall from the Flexi Pad control block see pages 504 and 512.
Chapter 18 Macros
532 Macro Attachment Assigning
2
Move the fader lever to the position where you want to set the macro
attachment.
3
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] or [POST MCRO] button 1) in the cross-
point control block, and press the [LIMIT SET] or [PRIOR SET] button in
the control block containing the fader lever operated in step 2.
1) Only when setting a macro attachment to the start point or end point of fader lever
operation, use [PRE MCRO] and [POST MCRO] in distinction, as follows.
To set the operation start point (0%): hold down [PRE MCRO] for the operation.
To set the operation end point (100%): hold down [POST MCRO] for the operation.
This assigns the register recalled in step 1 to the fader lever position
selected in step 2.
To check a macro attachment setting
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] or [POST MCRO] button in the cross-point
control block. While it is held down, the fader lever position where the macro
attachment is set appears in the following places.
•Transition indicator in the transition execution section: The indicator
lights at the position where the macro attachment is set.
•Transition rate indication in the transition execution section: This shows
the fader lever position where the macro attachment is set, as a percentage
value. (Fader lever start position as 0%, end position 100%)
Removing macro attachment settings
To cancel a macro attachment to a button
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or [POST MCRO] button, and press a
button that is flashing in the background A row. The button for which the
macro attachment is set stops flashing and goes off, and this removes the
setting.
To cancel a macro attachment to a fader lever
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] or [POST MCRO] button in the cross-point
control block, and press the [LIMIT SET] or [PRIOR SET] button in the
control block containing the fader lever having the macro attachment set.
To remove all macro attachment settings in a single operation
You can remove all macro attachment settings in a single operation.
1
In the Macro menu, select VF2 ‘Attachment.’
2
Press [All Clear].
A confirmation message appears.
533Macro Attachment Assigning
Chapter 18 Macros
3
Select [Yes].
This deletes all macro attachment setting data.
Displaying the Macro Attachment List
In the Macro >Attachment menu, you can display the macro attachment list to
check the macro attachment settings.
The macro attachment list includes the following columns.
•Block: Shows the names of control panel blocks.
•Button: Shows the names of macro attachment assigned buttons (of up to 30
characters).
•Reg: Shows the names of assigned registers.
•Name: Shows the names of macro registers.
•Mode: Shows the names of macro modes (Pre/Post/Only/--- 1)).
Above the list is shown the names of the block and macro attachment assigned
button currently selected in the list.
1) When no macro mode is set
For details of the macro modes, see “Macro Attachment” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
For details of the macro attachment list display, see “About the Macro
Attachment List Display” in the Appendix (page 613).
Moving quickly within the macro attachment list from one block
to another
When you are viewing the macro attachment settings for a block in the macro
attachment list, you can move quickly from the current block to another block
to check the settings for that block by pressing the following buttons in the
<Block Select> group.
•P/P: Move to a block in the PGM/PST bank.
•M/E-1: Move to a block in the M/E-1 bank.
•M/E-2: Move to a block in the M/E-2 bank.
•M/E-3: Move to a block in the M/E-3 bank.
•Aux: Move to a section in the auxiliary bus control block.
•Others: Move to a block/section in a location other than the PGM/PST bank,
M/E-1 to M/E-3 banks, and the auxiliary bus control block.
Chapter 18 Macros
534 Macro Attachment Assigning
Scrolling the list
To scroll the macro attachment list, do one of the following.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
Executing a Macro by Macro Attachment
Note
For execution on any of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, use the [MCRO
ATTCH ENBL] button in the cross-point control block. To execute a macro
according to a macro attachment set elsewhere, assign “MCRO ATTCH
ENBL” to a utility/shotbox control block or user preference button, then use
that button.
Executing a macro assigned to a button
1
Depending on the location of the button you want to use, press the [MCRO
ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Press the desired button for which a macro attachment has been set.
This recalls the macro register assigned to the button, and the macro is
executed as follows, according to the operation mode.
Pre macro mode: The macro is executed first, and then the button
function is executed.
Post macro mode: The button function is executed first, and then the
macro is executed.
Macro only mode: The button function is not executed, and the macro
only is executed.
During macro execution, the button you pressed flashes.
Notes
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time. Therefore, even
if you simultaneously press multiple buttons for which macro attachments
are set, only one macro is executed.
• During macro execution, recalling the same register again stops the macro
being executed. Therefore, pressing twice a button for which a macro
attachment is set stops the macro being executed.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Macro attachment settings scrolling 1 and upwards
535Macro Attachment Assigning
Chapter 18 Macros
• Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in
setup. If you change the settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the
expected effect.
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel to macro editing
mode, the macro being executed stops.
• During macro editing, pressing a button for which a macro attachment is set
does not execute the macro.
To disable macro attachment settings
Depending on the location of the button you want to disable, press the [MCRO
ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it off.
In this state, pressing a button for which a macro attachment is set does not
execute the macro.
Executing a macro assigned to a fader lever
1
In the cross-point control block for the fader lever on which you want to
execute the macro, press the [MCRO ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it on.
2
Move the fader lever from the start position to the end position.
When the fader lever passes the position at which the macro attachment is
set, the macro register is recalled, and the macro is executed.
Notes
• Unless you move the fader lever to the end position (completing the travel),
it is not possible to execute the macro again.
• When the preset color mix stroke mode is Normal (see page 406), the first
lever operation executes the macro, but the second lever operation does not.
• During macro execution, it is not possible to execute another macro.
• Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in
setup. If you change the settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the
expected effect.
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel to macro editing
mode, the macro being executed stops.
• During macro editing, even if you operate a fader lever with a macro
attachment set, the macro is not executed.
To disable a macro attachment setting
In the cross-point control block for the fader lever on which you want to disable
the macro, press the [MCRO ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it off.
In this state, operating a fader lever with a macro attachment set does not
execute the macro.
Chapter 18 Macros
536 Menu Macros
Menu Macros
This section describes menu macro operation.
For an outline of menu macros, see “Menu Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Using any of the menus in the following table, you can edit menu macro
registers and menu macro events.
Recalling a Menu Macro Register and Executing a Menu
Macro
Menu macro operation is carried out by recalling a menu macro register.
Notes
• Menu macros and macros recalled with a control panel button operate
independently. Therefore, to synchronize these, adjustment of the execution
timing is required.
• Events saved in a menu macro are executed according to the settings in setup,
and therefore if you change the setup settings, it may not be possible to replay
an event.
• When two menu macros are recalled successively, the later coming macro is
ignored as far as the first macro is being executed.
Recalling a Menu Macro Register
1
In the Macro menu, select VF3 ‘Menu Macro Register’ and HF1 ‘Recall
& Run.’
Menu Function Operations
Menu Macro Register
menu (menu macro
register editing)
• Carry out menu macro register
editing.
• Recall a menu macro register and
execute a menu macro.
• Recalling a register
and executing a
menu macro
• Locking a register
• Copying a register
• Deleting a register
• Naming a register
Menu Macro Edit
menu (editing of menu
macro events)
Edit events in a menu macro register. • Inserting an event
• Deleting an event
• Modifying an event
537Menu Macros
Chapter 18 Macros
The Recall & Run menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the register to be recalled.
• Press directly on the menu macro register list.
• Press the arrow keys on the right list to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
3
Press [Recall & Run x] or [Recall x ] (x is the number of the register
selected in the menu macro register list).
• To execute the menu macro at the same time as recalling the register,
press [Recall & Run x].
• To recall the register only, press [Recall x].
Register number and name
L/E indication: “L” indicates “the register is
locked.” “E” indicates an empty register.
Selected event number / total number of events
Menu macro configuration list
Currently recalled
register
Number of register selected on the menu
macro register list
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Menu Macro
Register
Register selection 1 to 99
Chapter 18 Macros
538 Menu Macros
Executing a menu macro
In the Macro >Menu Macro Register >Recall & Run menu, check that you are
not in macro editing mode, then use the following procedure.
1
Using any of the following methods, specify the event from which you
want to execute.
• Press directly on the menu macro register configuration list.
• Press the arrow keys on the right list to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
2
Press [Run].
This executes the menu macro from the specified event.
To stop execution of a macro
Press [Stop].
To move to the start of a menu macro event
Press [Rewind].
Recalling a menu macro register from a macro register
Menu macro recall and execution operations can be saved as events in a control
panel macro, and then recalled.
If with the control panel in macro editing mode you execute a menu macro,
then this operation is recorded as an event.
For details of recording operations, use the following references, depending
on the control panel or menu used.
• Using the numeric keypad control block and the keyframe control block:
page 494
• Using the standard type Flexi Pad control block: page 504
• Using the simple type Flexi Pad control block: page 512
• Using menus: page 523
Menu Macro Creation and Editing
Create or edit menu macro registers.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 No Select start event 1 and upwards
539Menu Macros
Chapter 18 Macros
Note
It is not possible to execute a menu macro during editing. To run the macro,
first press the [Store] button to end editing.
Creating a new menu macro
1
In the Macro >Menu Macro Register >Recall & Run menu, select an
empty register in the menu macro register list.
For details of the method of operation, see “Recalling a Menu Macro
Register” (page 536).
2
Press [Menu Macro Edit].
The menu macro register is recalled, and the system is now in menu macro
editing mode.
The Menu Macro Edit menu appears.
3
If required, press [Auto Insert] to switch the auto insert mode on or off.
Menu macro register
number Event number
Menu macro
register name Remaining Memory
Menu macro creation event list
Menu macro register
configuration list
Chapter 18 Macros
540 Menu Macros
In the auto insert mode, when you carry out a menu operation, this is
automatically recorded as an event in the menu macro.
4
Create an event (carry out the menu operation you want to record as an
event in the menu macro).
For details of menus that can be recorded, see “Menu Macros” in Chapter
1 (Volume 1).
• When auto insert mode (see page 495) is on, carrying out a menu
operation automatically saves the event in a menu macro.
• When auto insert mode is off, skip to step 5.
5
When auto insert mode is off, press [Insert Before] or [Insert After] to save
the event.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5, to record the required events in the menu macro.
7
Press the [Store] button.
The numeric keypad window appears.
8
Enter the menu macro register number as required, and press [Enter].
The menu macro is saved with the specified number.
The menu returns to the state in step 1.
To set a pause duration
During menu macro editing, use the following procedure.
1
Enter the pause duration with the knob.
2
Press [Pause Set].
• When auto insert mode (see page 495) is on, this sets the pause duration,
and inserts the pause event.
• When auto insert mode is off, use the same operations as in step 5 of
“Creating a new menu macro” (page 539) to save the event.
Editing a menu macro
To edit the content of a menu macro, use the following procedure.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
4 Pause Time (Sec) Pause duration 0.1 to 99.9 (sec)
541Menu Macros
Chapter 18 Macros
1
In the Macro >Menu Macro Register >Recall & Run menu, select the
desired register on the menu macro register list.
For details of the menu macro register list, see “Recalling a Menu Macro
Register” (page 536).
2
Press [Menu Macro Edit].
The Menu Macro Edit menu (see previous figure) appears. The menu
macro register is recalled, and the system is now in menu macro editing
mode.
3
Select the event you want to edit.
• Press directly on the menu macro register configuration list.
• Press the arrow keys on the right list to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob.
• To select all events, press [All Event Select].
4
If required, press [Auto Insert] to switch the auto insert mode on or off.
• When auto insert mode (see page 495) is on, a new menu is
automatically inserted after the event selected in step 3.
• When auto insert mode is off, skip to step 5.
5
Carry out the editing, using any of the following methods.
• To delete the selected event, press the [Delete] button.
• To overwrite the selected event, carry out the new menu operation, then
press the [Modify] button.
• To insert an event before the selected event, carry out the new menu
operation, then press the [Insert Before].
• To insert an event after the selected event, carry out the new menu
operation, then press the [Insert After].
6
With the same operation as steps 7 and 8 of “Creating a new menu macro,”
save the register.
Exiting the Menu Macro Edit menu without saving the results of
editing
In the Menu Macro Edit menu, press [Exit].
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 No Event number 1 and upwards
Chapter 18 Macros
542 Menu Macros
Scrolling event display using the menu macro listing
1
Move the cursor to the event you want to display.
2
Turn the knob.
About the menu macro editing mode display
If while in menu macro editing mode you switch to another menu, the display
is as shown in the following figure.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
2 H Scroll Scroll the characters in the
“Data” field.
1 and upwards
543Menu Macros
Chapter 18 Macros
Screen when the keyframe status is displayed
The keyframe status section appears as follows.
• Menu macro register number
• Menu macro register name
• Current event number / total number of events
• Remaining memory
The Previous page button shows one of the following:
• When [Auto Insert] is on, “Menu Macro Auto Insert”
appears.
• When [Auto Insert] is off, “Menu Macro Insert After”
appears, but operates as [Insert After].
Menu shortcut button to Menu Macro Edit menu
Chapter 18 Macros
544 Menu Macros
Screen when the keyframe status is not displayed
Menu Macro Register Editing
You can display the current state of a menu macro register using the Menu
Macro menu.
The items displayed are the same as under “Effect Status Display” (see page
239), with the exception that the region name is not displayed.
In the Menu Macro menu, you can do the following editing operations on menu
macro registers.
•Lock: Write-protect the contents of the menu macro register.
•Copy: Copy the contents of one menu macro register to another menu macro
register.
•Delete: Delete the contents of a menu macro register.
•Name: Attach a name to a menu macro register.
The Previous page button shows one of
the following:
• When [Auto Insert] is on, “Menu
Macro Auto Insert” appears.
• When [Auto Insert] is off, “Menu
Macro Insert After” appears, but
operates as [Insert After].
The Default Recall button shows the
following.
Menu shortcut button to Menu
Macro Edit menu
545Menu Macros
Chapter 18 Macros
The operations for menu macro register editing are the same as those for effect
register editing (see page 239) except the region selection operation, which is
not necessary for menu macro register editing.
Chapter 18 Macros
546 Macro Timeline
Macro Timeline
Timeline operations are carried out on a macro timeline in the same way as for
normal effects.
For details of timeline operations, see “Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects” (page
191).
Note
When using a macro timeline, note the following.
• To use a macro timeline, the Macro region must be assigned to a region
selection button in the numeric keypad control block. For details of region
assignment operations, see “Assigning a region to a region selection button
in the numeric keypad control block” (page 328).
• On a macro timeline, only macro recall and execution actions are stored. The
data for a macro to be recalled on the macro timeline is not held on the
timeline. It is necessary to create the macro data first.
• A macro timeline can be saved and recalled on the master timeline or a
shotbox register, but cannot be saved as a snapshot.
Creating and editing a macro timeline
This section describes how to set actions, and add keyframe points. Note that
path settings are not needed on the macro timeline.
For details of keyframe operations, see “Creating and Editing Keyframes”
(page 207).
Saving a keyframe
For the operations, use the Macro Timeline menu and the [INS] button in the
keyframe control block.
1
Press the [EDIT ENBL] button, turning it on.
This enables timeline editing in the keyframe control block.
2
In the Macro menu, select VF4 ‘Timeline’ and HF1 ‘Timeline’.
The Macro Timeline menu appears.
3
Select “Recall-1” that appears on the right.
As required, turn the knob to select the number of the macro register.
547Macro Timeline
Chapter 18 Macros
4
Press the [Set] button.
“Recall-1” appears in the Action column on the left.
5
Press the [INS] button in the keyframe control block.
This creates the keyframe “Recall-1” on the macro timeline.
To set the action for a rewind operation
On the macro timeline, when the [REWIND] button in the keyframe control
block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed; when the
[RUN] button is pressed, then the first keyframe action is executed.
To execute an action when the [REWIND] button is pressed, it is necessary to
set this action (Rewind Action). To carry out this setting, in the Macro
>Timeline >Timeline menu, press [Rewind Action] to recall the Rewind
Action menu. In this setting screen, use the same setting method as in the
screen for setting an action on the macro timeline.
Alternatively, you can select the reverse arrangement, whereby when the
[REWIND] button is pressed, this executes the action set for the first keyframe,
and when the [RUN] button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed.
In this case, the Rewind Action setting is still valid.
For details of the setting, see “Setting the first keyframe when a rewind is
executed” (page 375).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
3 Recall No Selection of macro register 1 to 99
Chapter 18 Macros
548 Macro Timeline
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
Preparations ..............................................................................................550
Overall Color Corrector Operations ......................................................553
Enabling Color Corrector ..................................................................553
Copy and Swap Operations ...............................................................553
Color Corrector Functions ......................................................................555
Input Video Processing Operations ...................................................555
Primary Color Correction Operations ...............................................555
Secondary Color Correction Operations ...........................................559
RGB Clip Operations ........................................................................559
Luminance Processing Operations ....................................................560
Spot Color Adjustment ......................................................................562
Output Video Processing Operations ................................................564
YUV Clip Operations ........................................................................565
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
550 Preparations
Preparations
Note
To use the color corrector on the MVS-8000A, the MKS-8420M Color
Corrector Board is required. To use the color corrector on the MVS-8000G
requires the MKS-8442G Frame Memory Board and BZS-8420 Color
Corrector Software. To use the software, you are required to input an install
key.
For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup
(Install/Unit Config Menu)” (page 299) in Chapter 16.
Note on using a format other than 720P
When using the color corrector on a 4M/E system or a 3M/E system with
a board with multi-format support: It is not possible to use an M/E
reentry signal in an overlaid manner on the key bus or utility 1 bus.
Example 1: When M/E-1 is selected on the M/E-2 background A bus (or
background B bus, key bus, utility 1 bus, or utility 2 bus), it is not
possible to select M/E-2 on the M/E-3 key bus or utility 1 bus.
Example 2: When M/E-2 is selected on the M/E-3 background A bus (or
background B bus, key bus, utility 1 bus, or utility 2 bus), it is not
possible to select M/E-3 on the PGM/PST key bus or utility 1 bus.
In the case of a 3M/E system with a board with multi-format support, by setting
bit 1 of switch S101 on the CA-44 or CA-54 board to the “Off” position, you
can remove this restriction. Note, however, that, in the case of 480i or 576i, this
slightly reduces the input window.
Note on using 720P format
The following restrictions apply depending on the system configuration.
Restriction 1: M/E reentry signals cannot be selected on the key bus and utility
1 bus. For example, you cannot select M/E-1 on the M/E-2 key bus or
utility 1 bus.
Restriction 2: It is not possible to use an M/E reentry signal in an overlaid
manner on the key bus or utility 1 bus.
Example 1: When M/E-1 is selected on the M/E-2 background A bus (or
background B bus, key bus, utility 1 bus, or utility 2 bus), it is not
possible to select M/E-2 on the M/E-3 key bus or utility 1 bus.
Example 2: When M/E-2 is selected on the M/E-3 background A bus (or
background B bus, key bus, utility 1 bus, or utility 2 bus), it is not
possible to select M/E-3 on the PGM/PST key bus or utility 1 bus.
551Preparations
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
• When using the color corrector on a 3M/E system with a board with
multi-format support
The above restriction 1 applies.
By setting bit 1 of switch S101 on the CA-44 or CA-54 board to the “Off”
position, you can remove this restriction for M/E reentry signals unless they are
overlaid triply or more. Note, however, that this slightly reduces the input
window.
• When using the color corrector on a 3M/E system with an HD dedicated
board
The above restriction 2 applies.
• When not using the color corrector on a 3M/E system with a board with
multi-format support
The above restriction 2 applies.
By setting bit 1 of switch S101 on the CA-44 or CA-54 board to the “Off”
position, you can remove this restriction. Note, however, that this slightly
reduces the input window.
• When using the color corrector on a 4M/E system
The above restriction 1 applies.
• When not using the color corrector on a 4M/E system
The above restriction 2 applies.
Assigning the color corrector input buses to AUX delegation
buttons
There are two inputs for capturing material to the color corrector: the CCR1
bus and the CCR2 bus.
For details of the input assignment operation, see “Auxiliary Bus Control
Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)” (page 351).
Selecting the color correction input signal
After assigning CCR1 and CCR2 to AUX buses, use the following procedure.
1
In the auxiliary bus control block, press the AUX delegation buttons
assigned to CCR1 (or CCR2).
2
In the cross-point button row, select the signal to which you want to apply
color correction.
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
552 Preparations
Note
The signals you can select on the CCR1 and CCR2 buses are limited to the
primary inputs and frame memory outputs (FM1 to FM8). However you
can make all the internal signals of the switcher selectable by a setting in
the Setup menu. For details, see “Setting the mode in which all signals can
be selected for input to the color corrector” (page 410).
Selecting the color corrector output signal
By assigning the signal output from the color corrector to a cross-point button,
you can make that signal available on that button.
For details of the assignment process, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
Menu)” (page 342).
Accessing the CCR menu
For color correction operations, use the CCR menu.
To access the CCR menu, in the menu control block, press the top menu
selection button [CCR].
The following description uses CCR1 as an example. To apply color correction
to CCR2, replace VF1 ‘CCR1’ by VF2 ‘CCR2,’ and follow the same
procedure.
553Overall Color Corrector Operations
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
Overall Color Corrector Operations
Enabling Color Corrector
To enable the functions of color corrector 1, for example, use the following
procedure.
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and any HF.
2
In the <CCR> group, press [CCR], turning it on.
This enables the functions of color corrector 1.
Returning all color corrector settings to their defaults
1
In the <CCR> group, press [Unity].
A confirmation message appears.
2
Press [Yes].
This returns all color corrector settings to their defaults, whether [CCR] is
on or off.
Copy and Swap Operations
Copying color corrector data
1
In the CCR menu, press VF3 ‘Copy/Swap.’
The Copy/Swap menu appears.
The status area shows a copy source list on the left and a copy destination
list on the right.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the copy source data and copy
destination data.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
554 Overall Color Corrector Operations
3
Press [Copy].
This carries out the copy.
Swapping color corrector data
Refer to the procedure described in the previous item “Copying color corrector
data.” In step 3, press [Swap] instead of [Copy].
To undo copy or swap
In the Copy/Swap menu, press [Undo].
The state before carrying out the copy or swap is restored.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Left No Select copy source data 1 or 2
2 Right No Select copy destination
data
1 or 2
555Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
Color Corrector Functions
This section describes the color corrector functions.
Input Video Processing Operations
To apply input video processing effects, use the following procedure.
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF1 ‘Input Process.’
The Input Process menu appears.
2
In the <Input Process> group, press [Input Process], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
To return the parameters to their default settings
Press [Unity] in the <Input Process> group.
Primary Color Correction Operations
Applying primary color correction
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF2 ‘Primary CCR.’
The Primary CCR menu appears.
2
In the <Primary CCR> group, press [Primary CCR], turning it on.
3
In the <Primary CCR Adjust> group, select the setting item.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –116.90 to +116.90
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
556 Color Corrector Functions
Black: black balance adjustment
White: white balance adjustment
Gamma: gamma correction
Knee: knee correction
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, adjust the following parameters.
• When Black or Gamma is selected
• When White is selected
• When Knee is selected
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Primary CCR> group, press [Unity].
Masking a part of the primary color correction
Here the procedure for mask 1 operation is described by way of example. You
can carry out mask 2 operation in a similar way.
1
In the <Primary Mask> group of the Primary CCR menu, press [Mask1],
turning it on.
2
Press [Mask1 Adjust].
The Mask1 Adjust menu appears.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Red Red signal adjustment –100.00 to +100.00
2 Green Green signal adjustment –100.00 to +100.00
3 Blue Blue signal adjustment –100.00 to +100.00
4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment Red value is shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Red Red signal adjustment 0.00 to 200.00
2 Green Green signal adjustment 0.00 to 200.00
3 Blue Blue signal adjustment 0.00 to 200.00
4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment Red value is shown
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Red Red signal adjustment 20.00 to 75.00
2 Green Green signal gain 20.00 to 75.00
3 Blue Blue signal gain 20.00 to 75.00
4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment Red value is shown
557Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
3
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.
Box: signal from dedicated box generator
Pattern: signal from dedicated pattern generator
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, adjust the following parameters.
• When Box is selected
• When Pattern is selected
For the pattern selection, you can also press [Mask Ptn Select] in the
Mask1 Adjust menu, then use the Mask Ptn Select menu.
Press any of the displayed patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) to
select it, then you can adjust the following parameters.
5
When selecting the pattern as a mask source, set the pattern modifiers as
required.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
a) See “Positioner” under “Wipes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Top Top position –100.00 to +100.00
2 Left Left position –100.00 to +100.00
3 Right Right position –100.00 to +100.00
4 Bottom Bottom position –100.00 to +100.00
5 Soft Degree of softness of box 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Degree of softness of pattern
edge
0.00 to 100.00
5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00
2 Soft Degree of softness of pattern
edge
0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
2 Position V Vertical position –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
558 Color Corrector Functions
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the same pattern
a) See “Pattern replication (“Multi”)” under “Wipes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
a) See “Aspect ratio” under “Wipes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
• When turning the [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting
the pattern
a) See “Rotation” under “Wipes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a fixed rate
a) See “Rotation” under “Wipes” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
6
To invert the mask source, return to the Primary CCR menu and press
[Mask Invert], turning it on.
Note
The mask function is common to the primary color correction, secondary color
correction luminance processing, and spot color adjustment functions. For
example, if in primary color correction you set mask 1 to a box, then in
secondary color correction set mask 1 to a pattern, this also changes the setting
in primary color correction to the pattern.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Aspect aspect ratio –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation –100.00 to +100.00 a)
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern –100.00 to +100.00 a)
559Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
Secondary Color Correction Operations
Note
When spot color adjustment is enabled in the setup settings, this function is
disabled. (See “Switching the color correction function” (page 312).) On the
MVS-8000G, secondary color correction and spot color adjustment can be
enabled at the same time.
Applying secondary color correction
1
In the CCR menu, select VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF3 ‘Secondary CCR.’
The Secondary CCR menu appears.
2
In the <Secondary CCR> group, press [Secondary CCR], turning it on.
3
In the <Secondary CCR Adjust> group, select the color for which you
want to make the setting.
4
Adjust the following parameters.
To return the parameter settings to their default values
In the <Secondary CCR> group press [Unity].
Masking a part of the secondary color correction
In the <Secondary Mask> group, press [Mask1] or [Mask2], turning it on, then
carry out the same operation as described under “Masking a part of the primary
color correction” (page 556).
RGB Clip Operations
Making RGB clip adjustments
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF4 ‘RGB Clip.’
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance –100.00 to +100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 200.00
3 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
560 Color Corrector Functions
The RGB Clip menu appears.
2
In the <RGB Clip> group, press [RGB Clip], turning it on.
3
In the <RGB Clip Adjust> group, select the item you want to adjust.
Dark: dark clip adjustment
White: white clip adjustment
4
Adjust the following parameters.
a) When Dark is selected
b) When White is selected
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <RGB Clip> group, press [Unity].
Luminance Processing Operations
Applying luminance processing
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF5 ‘Luminance Process.’
The Luminance Process menu appears.
2
In the <Luminance Process> group, press [Luminance Process], turning it
on.
3
In the <Mode> group, specify the adjustment mode.
Tint: add a specified color to the original video signal.
Color Modify: adjust the original video signal.
Y Modify: adjust the output levels of the input luminance signal.
When tint mode or color modify mode is selected, skip to step 4.
When Y modify mode is selected, adjust the following parameters.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Red Red signal adjustment –50.00 to +149.99 a)
–49.99 to +150.00 b)
2 Green Green signal adjustment –50.00 to +149.99 a)
–49.99 to +150.00 b)
3 Blue Blue signal adjustment –50.00 to +149.99 a)
–49.99 to +150.00 b)
4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment Red value is shown
561Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
For details of the adjustments, see “Color Corrector” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
4
In the <Bound> group, make the settings for the three regions (Dark,
Middle, and Bright).
• [Level] parameters: set the boundaries of the three regions.
• [Soft] parameters: set the degree of boundary softness of the three
regions.
For details of the adjustments, see “Color Corrector” in Chapter 1
(Volume 1).
5
In the <Luminance Process Adjust> group, press [Dark], [Mid], or
[Bright], and adjust the following parameters for the three regions.
• In tint mode
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 White White balance adjustment 0.00 to 200.00
2 Black Black balance adjustment –100.00 to +100.00
3 Y Lift Curvature of curve –100.00 to +100.00
4 Y Dark Position of maximum point of
curve
–7.31 to +109.59
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Over B Level Luminance level of the Over
Bright point
50.00 to 150.00
2 Mid B Level Luminance level of the Bright/
Middle point
10.00 to 120.00
3 Dark Mid
Level
Luminance level of the Middle/
Dark point
–20.00 to +90.00
4 Under D
Level
Luminance level of the Under
Dark point
–50.00 to +50.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Over B Soft Degree of softness at Over Bright
point
15.00 to 70.00
2 Mid B Soft Degree of softness at Bright/
Middle point
15.00 to 42.50
3 Dark Mid
Soft
Degree of softness at Middle/Dark
point
15.00 to 42.50
4 Under D Soft Degree of softness at Under Dark
point
15.00 to 70.00
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
562 Color Corrector Functions
• In color modify mode
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Luminance Process> group, press [Unity].
Masking a part of luminance processing
In the <Luminance Mask> group, press [Mask1] or [Mask2], turning it on, then
carry out the same procedure as in “Masking a part of the primary color
correction” (page 556).
Spot Color Adjustment
Note
When secondary color correction is enabled in the setup settings, this function
is disabled. (See “Switching the color correction function” (page 312).) On the
MVS-8000G, secondary color correction and spot color adjustment can be
enabled at the same time.
Adjusting the color of the specified region (key)
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF6 ‘Spot CCR/Output.’
The Spot CCR/Output menu appears.
2
In the <Spot CCR> group, press [Spot CCR], turning it on.
3
In the <Auto> group, press [Sample Mark], turning it on.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance –100.00 to +100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance –100.00 to +100.00
2 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 0.00 to 200.00
3 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
563Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
Note
When [Sample Mark] is on, the effects of color adjustment outside the
region of spot color adjustment (see page 564) and output video processing
(see page 564) are temporarily disabled.
Turning [Sample Mark] off restores the former state.
4
Adjust the parameters so that the color you want to change is included
within the sample mark.
5
In the <Auto> group, press [Auto Start], to adjust the key automatically.
Note
This automatic adjustment does not carry out key gain adjustment. If
required, adjust the key gain as shown in step 6.
6
Press [Key Adjust], and adjust the following parameters.
7
Press [Window], turning it on, to adjust the key detection range for spot
color adjustment.
8
In the <Spot CCR> group, press [Spot CCR] to display the parameters, and
adjust the replacement color.
.
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Position H Horizontal position –100.00 to +100.00
2 Position V Vertical position –100.00 to +100.00
3 Size Size 1.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance –7.31 to +109.59
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
4 Gain Key gain –100.00 to +100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 0.00 to 100.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Luminance Luminance 0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
564 Color Corrector Functions
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Spot CCR> group, press [Unity].
Masking a part of the spot color adjustment
In the <Spot CCR Mask> group, press [Mask1] or [Mask2], turning it on, then
carry out the same procedure as in “Masking a part of the primary color
correction” (page 556).
Adjusting the color outside the spot color adjustment region
1
In the Spot CCR/Output menu, press [Outer Out Proc] in the <Outer Out
Proc> group, turning it on.
2
Adjust the following parameters.
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Outer Out Proc> group, press [Unity].
Output Video Processing Operations
Applying output video processing effects
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF6 ‘Spot CCR/Output.’
The Spot CCR/Output menu appears.
2
In the <Output Process> group, press [Output Process], turning it on.
3
Adjust the following parameters.
2 Saturation Saturation 0.00 to 100.00
3 Hue Hue 359.99 to 0.00
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –116.90 to +116.90
565Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Output Process> group, press [Unity].
YUV Clip Operations
Applying YUV clip processing
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF7 ‘YUV Clip.’
The YUV Clip menu appears.
2
In the <YUV Clip> group, press [YUV Clip], turning it on.
3
In the <YUV Clip Adjust> group, select the target for adjustment.
Luminance: settings for the luminance signal.
Chroma: settings for the color difference signal.
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, adjust the following parameters.
• When Luminance is selected
• When Chroma is selected
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 Video Gain Video signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
2 Y Gain Y signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00
4 Hue Delay Hue delay –180.00 to +180.00
5 Black Level Black level –116.90 to +116.90
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 White Clip White clip adjustment –6.85 to +109.13
2 Dark Clip Dark clip adjustment –6.85 to +109.13
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
1 U Posi Clip Positive clip adjustment for U
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
2 U Nega Clip Negative clip adjustment for U
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
3 V Posi Clip Positive clip adjustment for V
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
Chapter 19 Color Corrector
566 Color Corrector Functions
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <YUV Clip> group, press [Unity].
4 V Nega Clip Negative clip adjustment for V
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values
Chapter 20 DIAGNOSIS
Checking the Communications Status ....................................................568
Communications Status Display .......................................................568
Chapter 20 DIAGNOSIS
568 Checking the Communications Status
Checking the Communications Status
In the Diagnosis menu, you can check the communications status of the control
LAN and data LAN within the system.
Communications Status Display
To display the communications status, in the Diagnosis menu select VF3
‘System Info’ and HF1 ‘LAN Status’.
The following communications status screen appears.
Devices constituting the system only appear if they are connected.
You can check connection information in the Engineering Setup >System
>System Config menu (See “System Settings (System Config Menu)” (page
290)).
Even if a DCU is connected, if there is a communications error, it does not
appear.
The LAN communications status is shown as follows.
• Control LAN (CTRL LAN)
When connected: White
When not connected: Red and white flashing
• Data LAN (DATA LAN)
When connected: Blue
569Checking the Communications Status
Chapter 20 DIAGNOSIS
When not connected: Red and blue flashing
• Peripheral LAN (PERIPH LAN)
When connected: Amber
When not connected: Not shown
If the connection between the menu panel and another panel is broken, it does
not appear.
Chapter 20 DIAGNOSIS
570 Checking the Communications Status
Appendix (Volume 2)
SpotLighting ..............................................................................................573
Texture Patterns .................................................................................573
Shape Patterns ...................................................................................574
Functional Differences With Models of DME ........................................575
Menu Tree .................................................................................................578
Recalling Menus ................................................................................578
M/E-1 to M/E-3 Menus .....................................................................578
PGM/PST Menu ................................................................................581
Frame Memory Menu ........................................................................583
Color Bkgd Menu ..............................................................................584
AUX/MON Menu ..............................................................................584
CCR Menu .........................................................................................585
Copy/Swap Menu ..............................................................................586
Misc Menu .........................................................................................586
Status Menu .......................................................................................587
DME Menu ........................................................................................588
Global Effect Menu ...........................................................................589
Device Menu .....................................................................................589
Macro Menu ......................................................................................590
Key Frame Menu ...............................................................................591
Effect Menu .......................................................................................592
Snapshot Menu ..................................................................................593
Shotbox Menu ...................................................................................594
File Menu ..........................................................................................595
Engineering Setup Menu ...................................................................596
Diagnostic Menu ...............................................................................600
Macro File Editing Rules .........................................................................601
Macro File Syntax .............................................................................601
Syntax of Event and Continue Statements ........................................602
File Name ..........................................................................................603
Saving and Recalling a File ...............................................................603
Errors .................................................................................................604
Correspondence Between Events and Symbols ................................604
Symbols and Parameters ...................................................................605
Example of File Contents ..................................................................612
About the Macro Attachment List Display ............................................613
M/E and PGM/PST Banks ................................................................613
Auxiliary Bus Control Block .............................................................616
Other Blocks ......................................................................................618
Error Messages .........................................................................................619
Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status/Error Log Menu .......619
Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box ...................................624
Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu ....................637
Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define] .....................641
Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro ...............................651
573SpotLighting
Appendix (Volume 2)
SpotLighting
Texture Patterns
Material provided by Digital Archive Japan, INC
5678
9101112
1234
13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
29 30
Appendix (Volume 2)
574 SpotLighting
Shape Patterns
12
575Functional Differences With Models of DME
Appendix (Volume 2)
Functional Differences With Models of DME
Function Menu
number
MVE-8000 MVE-8000A MVE-9000 See page
Selection of signal to insert
in the border
4111 Flat Color only Flat Color only Flat Color
Ext Video
Mix Color
27
Key Border 4113 No No Cannot be turned
on when Glow is
on.
33
Art Edge 4114 No No Yes 34
Flex Shadow 4115 No No Yes 44
Wipe Crop 4116 No No Yes 51
Color Mix 4117 No No Yes 56
Defocus/Blur 4121 Yes Cannot be
turned on
when Glow is
on.
Ye s 5 8
Mask 4127 No Ye s a) Ye s 7 6
Switching the freeze timing
during execution of a
freeze
4131 No Yes Yes 79
Wave 4141.1 No with the
720P/59.94
format
Yes Yes 83
Adjustment of entire image
brightness in Lighting/
Spotlighting (parameter
Total Ambient)
4151
4156
No No Yes 110
126
Setting the bar mode of the
highlight area
4151 No No Yes 113
Adjustment of color of the
diffuse light area
(parameter Bar Diffuse
Color)
4151 No No Yes 114
Number of channels for
applying a trail effect
4152 Maximum 2
channels
Without
limitation
Without limitation 115
Selection of signal to insert
in the trail afterimage
portion
4152 Freeze Video
Flat Color
Hue Rotate
Freeze Video
Flat Color
Hue Rotate
Without limitation 116
Combine process for Trail 4152 No No Yes 118
Defocus function for Trail 4152 No No Yes 118
Appendix (Volume 2)
576 Functional Differences With Models of DME
Combine process for
Keyframe Strobe
4154 No No Yes 123
Wind 4155 No No Yes 123
Spotlighting 4156 No No Yes 126
Selection of signal to insert
in the background
4161 Flat Color only Flat Color only Flat Color
Ext Video
Mix Color
137
Key source selection 4162 Ext Key
Int Key Ext Key b)
Int Key
Lum Key b)
Ext Key b)
Int Key
Lum Key b)
141
Shaped Video 4162 No Yes only when
SDI interface is
used
Yes only when
SDI interface is
used
138
Interpolation settings 4163 Yes only for
SD
Yes only for SD Yes both for SD
and HD
142
Anti-moire filter 4163 Yes only for
HD
Yes only for
HD
No 144
Flex shadow axis settings 4164 No No Yes 22
Outputting graphics to the
monitor
4164 No Yes only when
SDI interface is
used
Ye s 2 2
Sketch 4171 No Yes Yes 69
Metal 4172 No Yes Yes 72
Dim and Fade 4173 No No Yes 73
Glow 4174 No Cannot be
turned on
when Defocus/
Blur is on.
Cannot be turned
on when Key
Border is on.
74
Combiner depth settings
(three-dimensional
crossing function)
(parameter Depth)
4211 No No Yes 149
Signal format: 720P/50 7313.1 No Yes Yes 293
Adding user texture
patterns (for Spotlighting)
7316.9 No No Yes 305
Setting the interface
between DME and switcher
7337.6 No Yes Yes 423
Setting AUX bus output/re-
entry input
7337.7 – It is not
possible to
make settings
for DME 1 to 8
Ext In.
When using the
DME dedicated
interface, it is not
possible to make
settings for DME
1 to 8 Video/Key.
424
Function Menu
number
MVE-8000 MVE-8000A MVE-9000 See page
577Functional Differences With Models of DME
Appendix (Volume 2)
a) Effect groups 1 and 2 cannot be selected at the same time. Pattern 304 (round corner) is not
supported.
b) When Shaped Video is off.
c) It is not possible to make settings for external input signals.
TBC window center
position
7341.1 No Yes only when
SDI interface is
used. c)
Yes only when
SDI interface is
used.
427
Adjustment of monitor
output video clip level
7343 No Yes only when
SDI interface is
used.
Yes only when
SDI interface is
used.
428
Monitor output signal
settings
7343.1 No Yes only when
SDI interface is
used.
Yes 428
Settings relating to usage
of editor port
7344 Fixed to
Common
Yes Yes 430
Function Menu
number
MVE-8000 MVE-8000A MVE-9000 See page
Appendix (Volume 2)
578 Menu Tree
Menu Tree
Recalling Menus
This section details the menu structure, and shows the top menu selection
buttons in the menu control block which are used to access the menus.
Menu control block
Some menus can also be accessed by pressing other buttons twice in rapid
succession.
For more details, see “Menu Organization” in Chapter 2 (Volume 1).
Note
Some menus may not appear, depending on the model.
M/E-1 to M/E-3 Menus
The functions in the M/E-1, M/E-2, and M/E-3 menus are the same, but the
menu page numbers are distinguished as follows.
M/E-1 menus: 11xx, M/E-2 menus: 12xx, M/E-3 menus: 13xx
EXT
DISPL
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
P/P
MENU
COPY
FRAME
MEM
COLOR
BKGD
AUX
/MON
COPY
SWAP
MISC
DME GLB
EFF
RTR DEV
KEY
FRAME
SNAP
SHOT
SHOT
BOX
MCRO
FILE USER
SETUP
ENG
SETUP
DIAG
PREFS
1
PREFS
2
PREFS
3
PREFS
4
PREFS
5
PREFS
6
PREFS
7
PREFS
8
Top menu selection buttons
579Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
In this section, the numbers for the M/E-1 menus are given as examples.
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E-1
HF1: Type (1111)
HF2: Edge (1112)
HF3: Main Mask (1113)
HF4: Sub Mask (1114)
HF5: Processed Key (1115)
HF6: Transition (1116)
HF7: Video Process (1117)
Chroma Adjust (1111.1)
Matte Adjust (1111.2)
Key Priority (1173)
Matte Adjust (1112.1)
Zabton Adjust (1112.3)
Key Delay Mode (1112.4)a)
Mask Ptn Select (1113.1)
Main Pattern(1151)
Monitor (1115.1)
Border/Crop (1115.2)
Resizer Process (1115.3)a)
Enhanced Effect (1115.4)a)
Wipe Adjust (1116.1)
DME Wipe Adjust (1116.3)
Mix Ptn Select (1112.2)
Pattern Select (1116.2)
Matte Adjust (1112.1)
Wipe Adjust (1116.1)
Mix Ptn Select (1112.2)
Pattern Select (1116.2)
Mix Ptn Select (1112.2)
Main Mask(1113)
Matte Adjust (1112.1)
Wipe Adjust (1116.1)
Mask (1115.5)a)
Pattern Select (1116.2)
1ch Pattern Select
(1116.4)
2ch Pattern Select
(1116.5)
Remove From Begin
(1116.7)
VF1: Key1
VF2: Key2
VF3: Key3
VF4: Key4
VF5: Wipe
VF6:
DME Wipe
VF7: Misc
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], and [M/E 3] buttons
The functions in the Key 2 to Key 4 menus are the
same as those in the Key 1 menu, with the following
menu page numbers.
Key 2 menu: 112x, Key 3 menu: 113x, Key 4 menu:
114x
to next page
a) For MVS-8000G only
Appendix (Volume 2)
580 Menu Tree
VF1: Key1
VF2: Key2
VF3: Key3
VF4: Key4
VF5: Wipe
VF6:
DME Wipe
VF7: Misc
HF1: Main Pattern (1151)a)
HF2: Pattern Mix (1152)
HF3: Sub Pattern (1153)
HF4: Edge/Direction (1154)a)
HF5: Main Modify (1155)a)
HF6: Sub Modify (1156)
HF7: Wipe Snapshot (1157)a)
Matte Adjust (1154.1)
Multi Adjust (1155.1)
Multi Adjust (1156.1)
Mix Pattern Select (1154.2)
HF1: 1ch (1161)a)
HF2: 2ch (1162)a)
HF3: 3ch (1163)a)
HF4: Edge/Direction (1164)a)
HF5: Modify (1165)a)
HF7:
DME Wipe Snapshot
(1167)a)
Remove From Begin (1165.1)a)
Clip (1176.1)a)
Transition (1171)a)
Snapshot (1177)a)
HF1: Transition (1171)a)
HF2: Video Process (1172)
HF3: Key Priority (1173)
HF4: Next Key Priority (1174)
HF5: Key Assign (1175)
HF6: Clip Transition (1176)a)
HF7: Snapshot (1177)
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
M/E-1
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], and [M/E 3] buttons
a) In Multi Program 2 mode, the menus for
sub are displayed with 400 higher
numbers than the aboves for main.
to previous page
581Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
PGM/PST Menu
HF1: Type (1411)
HF2: Edge (1412)
HF3: Main Mask (1413)
HF4: Sub Mask (1414)
HF5: Processed Key (1415)
HF6: Transition (1416)
HF7: Video Process (1417)
Chroma Adjust (1411.1)
Matte Adjust (1411.2)
Key Priority (1473)
Matte Adjust (1412.1)
Zabton Adjust (1412.3)
Key Delay Mode (1412.4)a)
Mask Ptn Select (1413.1)
Main Pattern(1451)
Monitor (1415.1)
Border/Crop (1415.2)
Resizer Process (1415.3)a)
Enhanced Effect (1415.4)a)
Wipe Adust (1416.1)
DME Wipe Adjust (1416.3)
Pattern Select (1416.2)
Mix Ptn Select (1412.2)
Matte Adjust (1412.1)
Wipe Adjust (1416.1)
Mix Ptn Select (1412.2)
Pattern Select (1416.2)
Mix Ptn Select (1412.2)
Main Mask(1413)
Matte Adjust (1412.1)
Wipe Adjust (1416.1)
Mask (1415.5)a)
Pattern Select (1416.2)
1ch Pattern Select
(1416.4)
2ch Pattern Select
(1416.5)
Remove From Begin
(1416.7)
PGM/PST
P/P
VF1: DSK1
VF2: DSK2
VF3: DSK3
VF4: DSK4
VF5: Wipe
VF6:
DME Wipe
VF7: Misc
[P/P] button
The functions in the DSK 2 to DSK 4 menus are the same as those in the DSK
1 menu, with the following menu page numbers.
DSK 2 menu: 142x, DSK 3 menu: 143x, DSK 4 menu: 144x
to next page
a) For MVS-8000G only
Appendix (Volume 2)
582 Menu Tree
HF1: Main Pattern (1451)a)
HF2: Pattern Mix (1452)
HF3: Sub Pattern (1453)
HF4: Edge/Direction (1454)a)
HF5: Main Modify (1455)a)
HF6: Sub Modify (1456)
HF7: Wipe Snapshot (1457)a)
HF1: 1ch (1461)a)
HF2: 2ch (1462)a)
HF3: 3ch (1463)a)
HF4: Edge/Direction (1464)a)
HF5: Modify (1465)a)
HF7:
DME Wipe Snapshot
(1467)a)
HF1: Transition (1471)a)
HF2: Video Process (1472)
HF3: Key Priority (1473)
HF4: Next Key Priority (1474)
HF5: Key Assign (1475)
HF6: Clip Transition (1476)a)
HF7: Snapshot (1477)a)
Matte Adjust (1454.1)
Multi Adjust (1455.1)
Multi Adjust (1456.1)
Remove From Begin (1465.1)a)
Clip (1476.1)a)
Transition (1471)a)
Snapshot (1477)a)
Mix Pattern Select (1454.2)
PGM/PST
VF1: DSK1
VF2: DSK2
VF3: DSK3
VF4: DSK4
VF5: Wipe
VF6:
DME Wipe
VF7: Misc
P/P [P/P] button
a) In Multi Program 2 mode, the menus for sub
are displayed with 400 higher numbers than
the aboves for main.
to previous page
583Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
Frame Memory Menu
Frame Memory
FRAME
MEM
VF1: Still
VF2: Clip
VF3: Reposition/Lock
VF4: File
VF5: Folder (2551)
VF6:
External HDD
HF1: Recall (2511)
HF2: Freeze/Store (2512)
HF3: Composite (2513)
HF4: Animation Record (2514)
HF5: Create Key Frame (2515)
HF7: Field Invert (2517)
HF1: Recall (2521)
HF2: Play (2522)
HF3: Record (2523)
HF4: Ancillary Enable (2525)
HF1: Reposition (2531)
HF2: Lock (2532)
HF1: Pair Recombination (2541)
HF4: Move (2544)
HF5: Delete (2545)
HF6: Rename (2546)
HF7: Backup/Restore (2547)
HF1: Format (2561)
HF2: Backup/Restore (2562)
Input Adjust (2513.1)
Pattern Adjust (2513.2)
Pattern Select (2513.3)
[FRAME MEM] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
584 Menu Tree
Color Bkgd Menu
AUX/MON Menu
Color Bkgd
VF1: Color Bkgd1 (2210)
VF2: Color Bkgd2 (2220)
Mix Pattern Select (2210.1)
Mix Pattern Select (2220.1)
COLOR
BKGD [COLOR BKGD] button
AUX
MON
Aux/Mon
VF1: Aux Bus (2311)
[AUX MON] button
585Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
CCR Menu
HF1: Input Process (2411)
HF2: Primary CCR (2412)
HF3: Secondary CCR (2413)
HF4: RGB Clip(2414)
HF5: Luminance Process (2415)
HF6: Spot CCR/Output (2416)
HF7: YUV Clip (2417)
HF1: Input Process (2421)
HF2: Primary CCR (2422)
HF3: Secondary CCR (2423)
HF4: RGB Clip(2424)
HF5: Luminance Process (2425)
HF6: Spot CCR/Output (2426)
HF7: YUV Clip (2427)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
VF1: CCR1
VF2: CCR2
VF3: Copy/Swap
(2431)
CCR
CCR
[CCR] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
586 Menu Tree
Copy/Swap Menu
Misc Menu
HF1: M/E (3111)
HF2: Key (3112)
HF3: Wipe (3113)
HF4: DME Wipe (3114)
HF5: Matte (3115)
HF6: Color (3116)
HF7: DME (3117)
HF1: Format Converter (3121)a)
VF1: Copy/Swap
VF2: Copy
COPY
SWAP
Copy/Swap
[COPY SWAP] button
a) For MVS-8000G only
VF1: Enable
VF2: Safe Title (3221)
VF3: Transition (3231)
MISC
Misc
HF1: Port Enable (3211)
HF2: Plug-In Editor (3212)
HF3: Side Flags (3213) Side Flags (7331.7)
Side Flags Button Assign (7322.10)
[MISC] button
587Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
Status Menu
VF1: DME Status (3311)
STATS
Status
[STATS] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
588 Menu Tree
DME Menu
DME
VF1: Edge
VF2: Video Modify
VF3: Freeze
VF4: Non-Linear
VF5: Light/Trail
VF6: Input/Output
VF7: Enhanced
Video Modify
HF1: Defocus/Blur (4121)
HF2: Multi Move (4122)
HF3: Color Modify (4123)
HF4: Mosaic (4124)
HF7: Mask (4127)
HF1: Border/Crop (4111)
HF2: Beveled Edge (4112)
HF3: Key Border (4113)
HF4: Art Edge (4114)
HF5: Flex Shadow (4115)
HF6: Wipe Crop (4116)
HF7: Color Mix (4117)
Pattern Select (4116.1)
Mix Pattern Select (4117.1)
HF1: Freeze (4131)
HF1: Lighting (4151)
HF2: Trail (4152)
HF3: Motion Decay (4153)
HF4: KF Strobe (4154)
HF5: Wind (4155)
HF6: Spot Lighting (4156)
HF1: Bkgd (4161)
HF2: Video/Key (4162)
HF3: Process (4163)
HF4: Graphic (4164)
HF1: Sketch (4171)
HF2: Metal (4172)
HF3: Dim & Fade (4173)
HF4: Glow (4174)
Mask(4127)
Mask(4127)
Mask(4127)
HF1: Type (4141)
DME
Wave (4141.1)
Mosaic Glass (4141.2)
Flag (4141.3)
Twist (4141.4)
Ripple (4141.5)
Rings (4141.7)
Broken Glass (4141.8)
Flying Bars (4141.9)
Blind (4141.10)
Split (4141.11)
Split Slide (4141.12)
Mirror (4141.13)
Multi Mirror (4141.14)
Texture Ptn Select (4156.1)
Copy/Swap (4156.2)
Light1 (4156.3)
Light2 (4156.5)
Light3 (4156.7)
Color Mix (4117)
Mix Pattern Select (4117.1)
Light Color Adjust (4156.4)
Light Color Adjust (4156.6)
Light Color Adjust (4156.8)
Kaleidoscope (4141.15)
Lens (4141.16)
Circle (4141.17)
Panorama (4141.18)
Page Turn (4141.19)
Roll (4141.20)
Cylinder (4141.21)
Sphere (4141.22)
Explosion (4141.25)
Swirl (4141.26)
Melt (4141.27)
Character Trail (4141.28)
Mask (4127)
Mask (4127)
Mask (4127)
[DME] button
589Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
Global Effect Menu
Device Menu
Global Effect
VF1: Ch1-Ch4
VF2: Ch5-Ch8
HF1: Combiner Priority (4221)
HF2: Brick (4222)
HF3: Shadow (4223)
HF7: Combine Gp Select (4227)
HF1: Combiner Priority (4211)
HF2: Brick (4212)
HF3: Shadow (4213)
HF7: Combine Gp Select (4217)
GLB
EFF [GLB EFF] button
VF1: GPI Timeline
VF2: P-Bus Timeline
VF3: DDR/VTR
HF1: GPI Timeline (5311)
HF1: P-Bus Timeline (5321)
HF1: Cueup & Play (5331)
HF2: Timeline (5332)
HF3: File List (5333)
Device
DEV
Rewind Action (5311.1)
Rewind Action (5321.1)
Rewind Action (5332.1)
[DEV] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
590 Menu Tree
Macro Menu
MCRO
Macro
VF1: Register
VF2: Attachment (5421)
VF3: Menu Macro Register
VF4: Timeline
HF2: Lock (5412)
HF3: Copy (5413)
HF6: Delete (5416)
HF7: Rename (5417)
HF1: Recall & Run (5431)
HF2: Lock (5432)
HF3: Copy (5433)
HF6: Delete (5436)
HF7: Rename (5437)
HF1: Timeline (5441)
On Line Edit (7142.2)
Off Line Edit (7143.2)
Menu Macro Edit (7144.2)
Rewind Action (5441.1)
[MCRO] button
591Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
Key Frame Menu
Key Frame HF1: Time Line (6111)
HF3: Path (6113)
HF4: DME User PGM (6114)
HF5: Timeline Assign (6115)
HF7: Region Select (6117)
KEY
FRAME
M/E-1 (6113.1)
M/E-2 (6113.2)
M/E-3 (6113.3)
P/P (6113.4)
User1 (6113.5)
User2 (6113.6)
User3 (6113.7)
User4 (6113.8)
User5 (6113.9)
User6 (6113.10)
User7 (6113.11)
User8 (6113.12)
DME 3D Trans Local (6113.13)
DME 3D Trans Global (6113.14)
DME Effect (6113.15)
DME Global Effect (6113.16)
10 Key Region Assign (7321.7)
[KEY FRAME] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
592 Menu Tree
Effect Menu
HF1: Attribute (6221)
HF2: Lock (6222)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6223)
HF4: Move (6224)
HF5: Swap (6225)
HF6: Delete (6226)
HF7: Rename (6227)
HF1: Attribute (6231)
HF2: Lock (6232)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6233)
HF4: Move (6234)
HF5: Swap (6235)
HF6: Delete (6236)
HF7: Rename (6237)
HF1: Attribute (6241)
HF2: Lock (6242)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6243)
HF4: Move (6244)
HF5: Swap (6245)
HF6: Delete (6246)
HF7: Rename (6247)
HF1: Attribute (6251)
HF2: Lock (6252)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6253)
HF4: Move (6254)
HF5: Swap (6255)
HF6: Delete (6256)
HF7: Rename (6257)
EFF HF1: Store (6211)
HF2: Lock (6212)
HF3: Copy (6213)
HF4: Move (6214)
HF5: Swap (6215)
HF6: Delete (6216)
HF7: Rename (6217)
Edit (6211.1)
VF1: Master Timeline
VF2: Effect 1-99
VF3: Effect 101-199
VF4: Effect 201-299
VF5: Effect 301-399
Status (6200)
Effect
[EFF] button
593Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
Snapshot Menu
Status (6300)
Xpt Hold (6321.1)
Clip Event (6321.2)
HF1: Attribute (6321)
HF2: Lock (6322)
HF3: Copy (6323)
HF4: Move (6324)
HF5: Swap (6325)
HF6: Delete (6326)
HF7: Rename (6327)
Snapshot
VF1: Master Snapshot
VF2: Snapshot
VF3: Wipe Snapshot
VF4: DME Snapshot
VF5: Key Snapshot
SNAP
SHOT Edit (6311.1)
HF2: Lock (6332)
HF3: Copy (6333)
HF4: Move (6334)
HF5: Swap (6335)
HF6: Delete (6336)
HF7: Rename (6337)
HF1: Store (6311)
HF2: Lock (6312)
HF3: Copy (6313)
HF4: Move (6314)
HF5: Swap (6315)
HF6: Delete (6316)
HF7: Rename (6317)
HF2: Lock (6342)
HF3: Copy (6343)
HF4: Move (6344)
HF5: Swap (6345)
HF6: Delete (6346)
HF7: Rename (6347)
HF1: Attribute (6351)
HF2: Lock (6352)
HF3: Copy (6353)
HF4: Move (6354)
HF5: Swap (6355)
HF6: Delete (6356)
HF7: Rename (6357)
[SNAPSHOT] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
594 Menu Tree
Shotbox Menu
Shotbox
VF1: Register HF1: Store/Recall (6411)
HF2: Lock (6412)
HF3: Copy (6413)
HF4: Move (6414)
HF5: Swap (6415)
HF6: Delete (6416)
HF7: Rename (6417)
SHOT
BOX
Edit (6411.1)
[SHOTBOX] button
595Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
File Menu
HF1: Setup (7111)
HF2: Initial Status (7112)
HF3: Key Memory (7113)
HF4: Video Proc Memory (7114)
HF1: Effect 1-99 (7121)
HF2: Effect 101-199 (7122)
HF3: Effect 201-299 (7123)
HF4: Effect 301-399 (7124)
HF1: Snapshot (7131)
HF2: Wipe Snapshot (7132)
HF3: DME Snapshot (7133)
HF4: Key Snapshot (7134)
HF1: Shotbox (7141)
HF2: Macro (7142)
HF3: Macro Attachment (7143)
HF4: Menu Macro (7144)
HF1: Frame Memory (7151)
HF2: Frame Memory Folder (7152)
HF1: All (7161)
HF2: Import / Export (7162)
HF1: Directory (7171)
HF2: Unit ID Copy (7172)
HF3: Group ID Copy (7173)
File
VF1: Setup, Init, VK Mem
VF2: Effect
VF3: Snapshot
VF4: Shotbox, Macro
VF5: Frame Mem
VF6: All, External File
VF7: Configure
FILE
File Edit (7111.1)
File Edit (7112.1)
File Edit (7113.1)
File Edit (7114.1)
File Edit (7121.1)
File Edit (7122.1)
File Edit (7123.1)
File Edit (7124.1)
File Edit (7131.1)
File Edit (7132.1)
File Edit (7133.1)
File Edit (7134.1)
File Edit (7141.1)
File Edit (7142.1)
File Edit (7143.1)
File Edit (7144.1)
File Edit (7151.1)
On Line Edit (7142.2)
Off Line Edit (7142.3)
Menu Macro Edit (7144.2)
[FILE] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
596 Menu Tree
Engineering Setup Menu
HF1: Network Config (7311)
HF2: System Config (7312)
HF3: Format (7313)
HF4: Start Up (7314)
HF5: Initialize (7315)
HF6: Install/Unit Config (7316)
HF7: Maintenance (7317)
Panel Assign (7312.1)
Switcher Assign (7312.2)
Aspect (7313.1)
Detail Information (7316.1)
License (7316.6)
Unit Config (7316.8)
Texture Package (7316.9)
Install (7316.10)
Setup Operation Lock (7317.1)
Switcher Aspect (7313.2)
DME Aspect (7313.3)
License Management (7316.7)
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
VF2: Panel
VF3: Switcher
VF4: DME
VF5: DCU
VF6: Router/Tally
ENG
SETUP [ENG SETUP] button
to following pages
597Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
Table Assign (7323.3)
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
VF2: Panel
VF3: Switcher
VF4: DME
VF5: DCU
VF6: Router/Tally
HF1: Config (7321)
HF2: Xpt Assign (7322)
HF3: Aux Assign (7323)
HF4: Pref/Utility (7324)
HF5: Device Interface (7325)
HF6: Operation (7326)
HF7: Maintenance (7327)
ENG
SETUP
Link Table Adjust (7321.5)
Link Matrix Adjust (7321.4)
Link Bus Adjust (7321.6)
DSK Fader Assign (7321.1)
10 Key Region Assign (7321.7)
Link/Program Button (7321.8)
MP2 Main/Sub Assign (7321.11)
Compact Key Module Assign (7321.15)
M/E Operation Inhibit (7321.18)
Table Button Assign (7322.1)
Main,V/K Pair Assign (7322.5)
Src Name/LCD Color (7322.6)
Table Copy (7322.8)
Name Export (7322.9)
Side Flags Button Assign (7322.10)
Mixer Xpt Assign (7322.11)
RTR Mode Setting (7323.1)
Utility Module Assign (7324.1)
Key 2/4 Bus Button Assign (7324.2)
GPI Input (7325.1)
GPI Output (7325.3)
DCU Serial Port Assign (7325.4)
Effect Mode (7326.2)
Flexi Pad Mode (7326.3)
Custom Button (7326.4)
Sensitivity (7326.5)
Macro (7326.6)
Button Tally (7326.9)
Key Trans Link (7321.2)
External Bus Link (7321.3)
Transition Module (7321.9)
Flexi Pad Module (7321.10)
Xpt Module (7321.12)
Fade To Black Module (7321.13)
DSK/FTB Module (7321.14)
Device Control Module (7321.16)
Joystick/Trackball Module (7321.17)
Menu Panel (7321.19)
Main, V/K Pair Assign (7322.5)
Src Name/LCD Color (7322.6)
Main,V/K Pair Assign (7322.5)
Source Table Assign (7323.2)
Level Button Assigh (7323.4)
H/L Set (7325.2)
CCP-8000 Button (7326.7)
CCP-9000 Button (7326.8)
to following
pages
to previous pages
Appendix (Volume 2)
598 Menu Tree
HF1: Config (7331)
HF2: Input (7332)
HF3: Output (7333)
HF4: Transition (7334)
HF5:
Key/Wipe/FM/CCR
(7335)
HF6: Link (7336)
HF7: Device Interface (7337)
M/E Output Assign (7331.1)
PGM Config (7331.2)
K-PVW Config (7331.3)
User 1-8 Config (7331.4)
Logical M/E Assign (7331.5)
DME Config (7331.6)
Side Flags (7331.7)
Switching Timing (7331.8)
Video Process (7332.1)
FC Adjust (7332.2) a)
Output Assign (7333.1)
Video Clip (7333.2)
V Blank/Through (7333.3)
Safe Titile (7333.4)
4:3 Crop (7333.5)
FC Adjust (7333.6) a)
FC Output Assign (7333.7) a)
Preset Color Mix (7334.1)
Transition Curve (7334.2)
Show Key (7335.1)
Key Auto Drop (7335.2)
Internal Bus Link (7336.1)
GPI Link (7336.4)
M/E Link (7336.6)
Key Transition Link (7336.7)
Remote Assign (7337.1)
GPI Input (7337.2)
GPI Output (7337.4)
Aux Control (7337.5)
DME Type Setting (7337.6)
Editor I/F (7337.8)
Side Flags (3213)
Side Flags Button Assign (7322.10)
Link Bus Select (7336.2)
Link Table Select (7336.3)
GPI Link Adjust (7336.5)
H/L Set (7337.3)
DME SDI I/F (7337.7)
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
VF2: Panel
VF3: Switcher
VF4: DME
VF5: DCU
VF6: Router/Tally
ENG
SETUP
to previous pages
[ENG SETUP] button
to next page
a) For MVS-8000G with the optional board installed only
599Menu Tree
Appendix (Volume 2)
HF1: Input (7341)
HF3: Output (7343)
HF4: Device Interface (7344)
HF1: Input Config (7351)
HF2: GPI Input Assign (7352)
HF3: Output Config (7353)
HF4: GPI Output Assign (7354)
HF5: Serial Port Assign (7355)
HF1: Router (7361)
HF2:Group Tally (7362)
HF3:Wiring (7363)
HF4: Tally Enable (7364)
HF5: Tally Copy (7365)
HF6: Parallel Tally (7366)
HF7: Serial Tally (7367)
TBC Center (7341.1)
Monitor Output (7343.1)
DME1 GPI Input (7344.1)
DME1 GPI Output (7344.3)
DME2 GPI Input (7344.4)
DME2 GPI Output (7344.6)
H/L Set (7352.1)
P-Bus Setting (7355.1)
VTR Setting (7355.2)
DDR SD9P Setting (7355.3)
DDR VDCP Setting (7355.4)
Extended VTR Setting (7355.5)
External Box Assign (7361.1)
New (7363.1)
Modify (7363.2)
New (7364.1)
Modify (7364.2)
New (7365.1)
Modify (7365.2)
Set (7366.1)
Source Assign (7367.1)
H/L Set (7344.2)
H/L Set (7344.5)
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
VF2: Panel
VF3: Switcher
VF4: DME
VF5: DCU
VF6: Router/Tally
ENG
SETUP
to previous pages
[ENG SETUP] button
Appendix (Volume 2)
600 Menu Tree
Diagnostic Menu
Diagnostic
VF1: Error Info
VF3: System Info
HF1: Error Status (7411)
HF2: Error Log (7412)
LAN Status (7431)
DIAG [DIAG] button
601Macro File Editing Rules
Appendix (Volume 2)
Macro File Editing Rules
When editing a macro file, follow the rules described below.
Macro File Syntax
The macro file syntax is as follows.
File format
The file is in CSV (comma-separated value) format.
Newline code
CR (ASCII code 0D), LF (ASCII code 0A), or CRLF may be used.
Statement syntax
There are four types of statement, each terminated by a newline code.
File header: This must always appear as the first line of the file. It comprises
28 characters, as follows.
Example: PNL (space) 0001PNL_rrrr.PMRnnnnnnnn
rrrr: macro register number (0001 to 0099)
nnnnnnnn: In a file created on the switcher, this is a register name
automatically set by the switcher.
When creating a new file, it is recommended to set this to be the same as
the file name (see page 603).
The name is limited to eight characters.
The following characters may not be used.
space, \, /, :, ;, , (comma), . (dot), <, >, *, ?, “ ”
Comment: Begins with “#”. The content of the line following the “#” up to the
next newline has no effect on macro execution, and can be used as a
comment.
Note
You can only use comments in files saved to the hard disk or a memory
card. When you load a macro file into a register, the comments are
discarded.
Event statement: Begins with “Event?”, and defines the macro event. (See
next item, “Syntax of Event and Continue Statements.”)
Continue statement: Begins with “Continue?”, and defines the macro event.
(See next item, “Syntax of Event and Continue Statements.”)
Appendix (Volume 2)
602 Macro File Editing Rules
Some events cannot be used. (See “Correspondence Between Events and
Symbols” (page 604).)
Syntax of Event and Continue Statements
An event can be written with an Event statement only, or with an Event
statement followed by any number of Continue statements. The Event
statements and Continue statements have the following syntax.
Word separator character
Use “,” (comma).
Ignored
Spaces and tabs are ignored. There is no distinction between lowercase and
uppercase. If two or more separator characters appear consecutively, later ones
are ignored. Separator characters at the beginning of a line are also ignored.
Content of line
Must begin with “Event?” or “Continue?”, followed by symbols and
parameters.
Event?,[symbol], [parameter], [parameter], ...
Continue?,[symbol], [parameter], [parameter], ...
symbol: ASCII character string showing the type of event (See
“Correspondence Between Events and Symbols” (page 604))
parameter: Shows details of an event. Consists of parameter names and
arguments, and these must appear in pairs. The number and type of
parameters depends on the event. (See “Symbols and Parameters” (page
605))
If the same parameter appears twice or more, the last occurrence is valid.
How to use Continue statements
When a single parameter has more than one argument, use a Continue
statement. The following example is of a snapshot event.
An event to recall a snapshot in region M/E-1 is written as:
Event?,Snapshot,Region?,ME1,Register?,1,Attribute?,Off,Time?,Current
In the Event statement, only one region can be specified.
To specify both regions M/E-1 and DME1, use a Continue statement, thus:
Event?,Snapshot,Region?,ME1,Register?,1,Attribute?,Off,Time?,Current
Continue?,Snapshot,Region?,DME1,Register?,1,Attribute?,Off,Time?,Current
603Macro File Editing Rules
Appendix (Volume 2)
To specify more than one argument for a region parameter, follow the Event
statement by a Continue statement on the next line.
File Name
Set the file name as follows.
Example: nnnnnnnn.PNL_rrrr.PMR
nnnnnnnn: In a file created on the switcher, this is a register name
automatically set by the switcher.
The name is limited to eight characters.
The following characters may not be used.
space, \, /, :, ;, , (comma), . (dot), <, >, *, ?, “ ”
rrrr: macro register number (0001 - 0099)
Saving and Recalling a File
For a newly created file, if you create a directory on the memory card (see
figure below), and move the file to the prescribed location, you can then recall
it in the File >All, External File menu.
Note
When amending a file saved on the switcher, be sure to save it in the original
directory.
Path example: Memory Card\Sample\MACRO\CTRLCPU\
nnnnnnnn.PNL_rrrr.PMR
Memory card Any directory
MACRO
CTRLCPU
nnnnnnnn.PNL_rrrr.PMR
Appendix (Volume 2)
604 Macro File Editing Rules
Errors
If any of the following problems occur, it is not possible to recall the file.
Attempting to recall the file will produce an error message.
• If there is a syntax error.
• If a required parameter is not present.
For details of error messages, see page 619.
Correspondence Between Events and Symbols
For details of events, see “Overview” under “Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume
1).
Event Symbol Using Continue
Cross-point selection in the auxiliary
bus control block
AuxXpt No
Cross-point selection in the auxiliary
bus control block in router control
mode
RouterXpt Yes
Cross-point selection in the cross-
point control block
MEXpt Yes
Auto transition and take in the
transition execution section
MEAutoTransition Yes
Cut in the transition execution section MECut No
Transition type selection TransitionType No
Next transition setting NextTransition No
Pattern limit on/off PatternLimit No
Fade-to-black execution FadeToBlack No
Auto transition and take in the
independent key transition execution
section
KeyAutoTransition Yes
Key insertion and deletion in the
independent key transition execution
section
KeyCut Yes
Independent key transition type
selection
KeyTransitionType No
VTR/DDR/clip start point setting StartTc Yes
VTR/DDR/clip playback Play Yes
VTR/DDR/clip stop Stop Yes
VTR/DDR/clip cue-up Cue Yes
VTR/DDR/clip fast forward FF Yes
605Macro File Editing Rules
Appendix (Volume 2)
a) For details of pause events, see “Macro Execution” under “Macros” in Chapter 1 (Volume 1).
Symbols and Parameters
n: indicates a numeral 0 to 9.
x: indicates an alphanumeric character.
VTR/DDR/clip rewind Rewind Yes
Disk recorder/Extended VTR file recall DiskFileLoad No
Recall snapshot Snapshot Yes
Recall key snapshot KeySnapshot Yes
Recall wipe snapshot WipeSnapshot Yes
Recall DME wipe snapshot DMEWipeSnapshot Yes
Recall shotbox Shotbox No
Recall master snapshot MasterSnapshot No
Recall master timeline MasterTimelineRecall No
Recall effect TimelineRecall Yes
Execute effect TimelineRun Yes
Rewind keyframe TimelineRewind Yes
Fast forward effect TimelineFF Yes
Effect execution direction selection
(normal)
TimelineDirectionNormal Yes
Effect execution direction selection
(reverse)
TimelineDirectionReverse Yes
Effect execution direction selection
(normal/reverse on)
TimelineNormalReverseOn Yes
Effect execution direction selection
(normal/reverse off)
TimelineNormalReverseOff Yes
Pause a) Pause No
Recall of function assigned to memory
recall button/user preference button
UtilityButton No
Recall of function assigned to the key
2 row cross-point buttons
Key Bus Utility Button No
Frame memory clip loop on/off FMLoop Yes
Menu macro recall and execution MenuMacroRun No
Recall of frame memory clip ClipRecall No
Record with device DeviceRecord Yes
Event Symbol Using Continue
Appendix (Volume 2)
606 Macro File Editing Rules
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
MEXpt ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
MEBus? A, B, Key1 to Key4,
Key1Source to
Key4Source, Utility1,
Utility2,
DMEExternalVideo
Applicable bus
Xpt? 1 to 128 Main table cross-point
button number set in the Xpt
Assign menu
VideoKey? Video, Key Signal type selected on the
applicable bus (video signal
or key signal)
AuxXpt AuxBus? EditPreview, AUX1 to
AUX48, Monitor1 to
Monitor8,
FrameMemory1,
FrameMemory2,
DME1Video to
DME8Video,
DME1Key to
DME8Key,
DME1Video2nd to
DME8Video2nd (a),
DME1Key2nd to
DME8Key2nd (b),
DMEUtility1,
DMEUtility2, CCR1,
CCR2
Applicable AUX bus
(a): DMEnVideo2nd= Bus for
selecting back video signal
of DMEn channel (n=1 to 8),
(b): DMEnKey2nd= Bus for
selecting back key signal of
DMEn channel (n=1 to 8)
Xpt? 1 to 128 Cross-point button number
in the main table set in the
Xpt Assign menu
VideoKey? Video, Key Type of signal (video signal
or key signal) to be selected
on the applicable bus
607Macro File Editing Rules
Appendix (Volume 2)
MEAutoTransition ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Time? Current (a), 0 to 999 Transition rate (number of
frames)
(a): Mode in which the
current value set on the
transition control block is
used
ABusXpt? Current (a), 1 to 128 A bus or B bus cross-point
button number. Use the
button number of the main
table set in the Xpt Assign
menu.
(a): Mode in which the cross-
point number set for the
current A bus or B bus is
used
BBusXpt? Current (a), 1 to 128
MECut ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
KeyAutoTransition ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Key? Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable
independent key transition
control block
Time? Current (a), 0 to 999 Transition rate (number of
frames)
(a): Mode in which the
current value set on the
independent key transition
control block is used
Direction? ToOn (a), ToOff (b),
Any (c)
Transition execution mode
(a): Key is inserted
(b): Key is deleted
(c): Transition is always
executed
KeyCut ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Key? Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable
independent key transition
control block
Direction? ToOn (a),
ToOff (b),
Any (c)
Transition execution mode
(a): Key is inserted
(b): Key is deleted
(c): Transition is always
executed
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
608 Macro File Editing Rules
Play Device? 1 to 12,
FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable device
Mode? Normal (a),
Recue (b),
Loop (c)
Playback mode
(a): Normal mode
As for Frame Memory 1 Clip
to Frame Memory 8 Clip,
settings are ignored and
operation mode is fixed to
“Normal.”
(b): Recue mode
(c): Loop mode
Cue Device? 1 to 12,
FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable device
Timecode? Current (a),
hh:mm:ss:ff
Start point timecode
hh=hours (00 to 23)
As for Frame Memory 1 Clip
to Frame Memory 8 Clip, hh
is fixed to “01.”
mm=minutes (00 to 59)
ss=seconds (00 to 59)
ff=frames (00 to 29)
(a): Mode in which the
currently set timecode is
used
Stop Device? 1 to 12,
FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable device
FF Device? 1 to 12,
FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable device
Rewind Device? 1 to 12,
FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable device
DiskFileLoad Device? 1 to 12 Applicable device
FileName? FileName Name of file being set (max.
23 characters)
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
609Macro File Editing Rules
Appendix (Volume 2)
Snapshot Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
Router
Applicable region
Register? 1 to 99 Applicable register number
Attribute? Off, Dissolve,
AutoTransiton,
Dissolve&AutoTransiti
on
Applicable snapshot
attributes
Time? Current (a), 0 to 999 Duration of effect dissolve
(number of frames)
(a): Mode in which the
currently set value is used
KeySnapshot ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Key? Key1 to Key4 Applicable key
Register? 1 to 4 Applicable register number
WipeSnapshot ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Register? 1 to 10 Applicable register number
DMEWipeSnapshot ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Register? 1 to 10 Applicable register number
TimelineRecall Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI
Applicable region
Register? 1 to 399 Applicable register number
TimelineRun Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
TimelineRewind Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
TimelineFF Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
610 Macro File Editing Rules
Shotbox Register? 1 to 99 Applicable register number
Pause Time? 0 to 999 Time for which macro is
paused (number of frames)
StartTc Device? 1 to 12,
FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable device
MasterSnapshot Register? 1 to 99 Applicable register number
MasterTimelineRecall Register? 1 to 99 Applicable register number
RouterXpt DestinationButton? 1 to 128 Router cross-point button
Source? 1 to 1024 Router source number
Level? 1 to 8 Router level selection
PatternLimit ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Status? ToOn (a), ToOff (b),
Any (c)
Pattern limit status
(a): Pattern limit applies
(b): Pattern limit does not
apply
(c): The pattern limit status
always changes
TransitionType ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
TransitionType? Mix, NAM, SuperMix,
PresetColorMix,
Wipe, DMEWipe
Transition type
KeyTransitionType ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
Key? Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable
independent key transition
control block
Direction? On (a), Off (b), Any
(c)
Independent key transition
execution mode
(a): Key is inserted
(b): Key is deleted
(c): Transition is always
executed
KeyTransitionType? Mix, Wipe, DMEWipe,
Cut
Transition type of the
independent key transition
control block
NextTransition ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
All? On, Off Applicable next transition
KeyPriority? On, Off Applicable next transition
BKGD? On, Off Applicable next transition
Key1? to Key4? On, Off Applicable next transition
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
611Macro File Editing Rules
Appendix (Volume 2)
FadeToBlack Time? Current (a), 1 to 999 Transition rate (number of
frames)
(a): Mode in which the
current value set on the fade
to black control block is used
TimelineDirectionNormal Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
TimelineDirectionReverse Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
TimelineNormalReverseOn Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
TimelineNormalReverseOff Region? ME1 to ME3, PP,
User1 to User8,
DME1 to DME8,
PBus, Device1 to
Device12, GPI,
Current (a)
Applicable region
(a): Mode in which operation
takes place in the region
currently specified in the
numeric keypad control
block
UtilityButton UtilityModule? UserPrefs, UtilityBox Applicable control block
Button? 1 to 96 Applicable button
UtilityStatus? On, Off, Current (a) Status of function assigned
to button
(a): Operates according to
currently assigned function
FMLoop Device? FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable clip
FMLoopMode? On (a), Off (b) Frame memory clip loop on/
off
(a): Loop is enabled
(b): Loop is disabled
MenuMacroRun Register? 1 to 99 Applicable register number
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
612 Macro File Editing Rules
Example of File Contents
KeyBusUtilityButton ME? ME1 to ME3, PP Control blocks on the
applicable bank
BANK? Bank1 to Bank5 Applicable bank
KeyBusUtilityButto
n?
1 to 32 Applicable button
UtilityStatus? On, Off, Current (a) Status of function assigned
to button
(a): Operates according to
currently assigned function
ClipRecall Device? FrameMemory1Clip
to
FrameMemory8Clip
Applicable clip
ClipType? Pair, Single File type of clip (pair/single)
Clip? Clip Name Name of clip (up to four
characters)
Device Record Device? 1 to 12 Applicable device
Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description
Line Content Description
1 PNL 0001PNL_0000.PMRMACROREG File header
2 #,Sample, Comment
3 Event?,Snapshot,Region?,ME1,Register?,1,Attribute?,Off,Time?,Current Simultaneously
recall snapshots
from register
number 1 in the
M/E-1 and
DME1 regions.
4 Continue?,Snapshot,Region?,DME1,Register?,1,Attribute?,Off,Time?,Current
5 Event?,MEXpt,ME?,ME2,MEBus?,A,Xpt?,121,VideoKey?,Video Select button
number 121 on
the M/E-2 A
bus.
613About the Macro Attachment List Display
Appendix (Volume 2)
About the Macro Attachment List Display
The Button column in the macro attachment list displayed in the status area of
the Macro >Attachment menu screen shows character strings which identify
macro attachment assigned buttons. Each of these character strings is in fact a
combination of characters shown in the Button(1), Button(2), and Button(3)
columns in the following tables.
For example, if Block and Button(1) to Button(3) are combined as:
Block: P/P XPT
Button(1): UTIL1 Bus
Button(2): V
Button(3): XPT2
The Button column in the macro attachment list in the Macro >Attachment
menu screen shows “UTIL1 Bus V XPT2,” which means “utility 1 bus, video
signal, cross-point number 2.”
M/E and PGM/PST Banks
The following table shows only the macro attachment assignable buttons in the
PGM/PST bank.
For the M/E-1 (M/E-2 or M/E-3) bank, “P/P” in the Block Select and Block
columns changes to “M/E-1” (“M/E-2” or “M/E-3”) and “DSK” in the
Button(1) and Button(2) columns changes to “KEY.” The contents of the
Button(3) column do not change.
Appendix (Volume 2)
614 About the Macro Attachment List Display
Block Select Block Button(1) Button(2) Button(3)
P/P P/P XPT A Bus
B Bus
DSK1 Bus
:
DSK4 Bus
DSK1 Src Bus
:
DSK4 Src Bus
Sub A Bus
Sub B Bus
Sub DSK1 Bus
:
Sub DSK4 Bus
Main&Sub A Bus
Main&Sub B Bus
Main&Sub DSK1 Bus
:
Main&Sub DSK4 Bus
Sub DSK1 Src Bus
:
Sub DSK4 Src Bus
Main&Sub DSK1 Src
Bus
:
Main&Sub DSK4 Src
Bus
(nothing)
Shift
XPT 1
:
XPT 128
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
P/P
UTIL1 Bus
UTIL2 Bus
EXT DME Bus
DMEUtility1
DMEUtility2
Sub UTIL1 Bus
Sub UTIL2 Bus
Sub EXT DME Bus
Main&Sub UTIL1 Bus
Main&Sub UTIL2 Bus
Main&Sub EXT DME
Bus
V
K
V Shift
K Shift
Dual A Bus
Dual B Bus
Sub Dual A Bus
Sub Dual B Bus
Main&Sub Dual A Bus
Main&Sub Dual B Bus
V Shift
615About the Macro Attachment List Display
Appendix (Volume 2)
P/P P/P XPT Utility/Shotbox
Sub Utility/Shotbox
Main&Sub Utility/
Shotbox
Bank 1-1
:
Bank 1-32
Bank 2-1
:
Bank 2-32
Bank 3-1
:
Bank 3-32
Bank 4-1
:
Bank 4-32
Bank 5-1
:
Bank 5-32
(nothing)
P/P Trans (blank)
DSK1
:
DSK4
Sub
Sub DSK1
:
Sub DSK4
Main&Sub
Main&Sub DSK1
:
Main&Sub DSK4
MIX d)
NAM d)
SUPER MIX d)
PST COLOR MIX d)
WIPE d)
DME d)
TA K E b)
AUTO TRANS a)
CUT a)
DSK_ON a)
ALL a)
KEY PRIOR a)
BKGD a)
DSK1 a)
:
DSK4 a)
NORM (PLAY) a)
NORM/REV (STOP) a)
REV (CUEUP) a)
PTN LIMIT (PLAY) c)
LIMIT SET (STOP) c)
KF (CUEUP) c)
PTN LIMIT
Fader
P/P Key
Trans
DSK1
:
DSK4
Sub DSK1
:
Sub DSK4
Main&Sub DSK1
:
Main&Sub DSK4
MIX
WIPE
DME
CUT
TA K E
DSK_ON
Block Select Block Button(1) Button(2) Button(3)
Appendix (Volume 2)
616 About the Macro Attachment List Display
a) For the standard type or compact type transition control block.
b) For the simple type transition control block.
c) For the standard type transition control block.
d) These buttons can be assigned with their functions in the setup menu. The assignable functions
include four clip transition functions (FM1&2, FM3&4, FM5&6, FM7&8) besides the above
functions (MIX, NAM, SUPER MIX, PST COLOR MIX, WIPE, DME).
Auxiliary Bus Control Block
Block Select Block Button(1) Button(2) Button(3)
Aux AUX-1
AUX-2
EDIT PVW
AUX 1
:
AUX 48
Mon1
:
Mon8
FM1
FM2
V
K
V Shift
K Shift
V 2nd Row
K 2nd Row
V 2nd Row Shift
K 2nd Row Shift
XPT 1
:
XPT 128
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
P/P
DME1V
:
DME8V
DME1K
:
DME8K
(nothing)
Shift
2nd Row
2nd Row Shift
DMEUtility1
DMEUtility2
V
K
V Shift
K Shift
V 2nd Row
K 2nd Row
V 2nd Row Shift
K 2nd Row Shift
DME1V2nd
:
DME8V2nd
DME1K2nd
:
DME8K2nd
(nothing)
Shift
2nd Row
2nd Row Shift
CCR1
CCR2
V
K
V Shift
K Shift
V 2nd Row
K 2nd Row
V 2nd Row Shift
K 2nd Row Shift
P/P UTIL1
P/P UTIL2
M/E-1 UTIL1
M/E-1 UTIL2
M/E-2 UTIL1
M/E-2 UTIL2
M/E-3 UTIL1
M/E-3 UTIL2
617About the Macro Attachment List Display
Appendix (Volume 2)
Aux AUX-1
AUX-2
DSK1
:
DSK4
M/E-1 KEY1
M/E-1 KEY2
M/E-1 KEY3
M/E-1 KEY4
M/E-2 KEY1
M/E-2 KEY2
M/E-2 KEY3
M/E-2 KEY4
M/E-3 KEY1
M/E-3 KEY2
M/E-3 KEY3
M/E-3 KEY4
(nothing)
Shift
2nd Row
2nd Row Shift
XPT 1
:
XPT 128
M/E 1
M/E 2
M/E 3
P/P
DSK1 Src
:
DSK4 Src
M/E-1 KEY1 Src
M/E-1 KEY2 Src
M/E-1 KEY3 Src
M/E-1 KEY4 Src
M/E-2 KEY1 Src
M/E-2 KEY2 Src
M/E-2 KEY3 Src
M/E-2 KEY4 Src
M/E-3 KEY1 Src
M/E-3 KEY2 Src
M/E-3 KEY3 Src
M/E-3 KEY4 Src
V
K
V Shift
K Shift
V 2nd Row
K 2nd Row
V 2nd Row Shift
K 2nd Row Shift
P/P EXT DME
M/E-1 EXT DME
M/E-2 EXT DME
M/E-3 EXT DME
Block Select Block Button(1) Button(2) Button(3)
Appendix (Volume 2)
618 About the Macro Attachment List Display
Other Blocks
Block Select Block Button(1) Button(2) Button(3)
Others Keyframe RUN
REWIND
FF
NORM
REV
NORM/REV
(nothing) (nothing)
Joystick
Trackball
DEV CLR WORK BUFR (CUEUP)
Y (PLAY)
TRGT (STOP)
AXIS LOC (START TC)
Device Control (nothing) CUE UP
PLAY
STOP
START TC
Utility Box 1
Utility Box 2
Menu
Utility 1
:
Utility 96
(nothing)
DSK/FTB Key1
Key2
AUTO TRANS
KEY_ON
FTB
FTB (blank) FTB
DSK Fader 1
:
DSK Fader 4
P/P
M/E1
M/E2
M/E3
KEY1
:
KEY4
MIX
WIPE
DME
CUT
TA K E
KEY_ON
619Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
Error Messages
Error messages appear in the following three formats.
• A list display in the Error Status menu (7411)/Error Log menu (7412)
• Message boxes
• List based on the Error Information menu (9900)
Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status/Error Log
Menu
When an error occurs, the word “ERROR” appears in red on the menu title
button.
When “ERROR” is displayed, pressing the menu title button displays the Error
Status menu or Error Log menu.
When an error is current effective: the Error Status menu appears (see page
620).
When an error has already been cleared: the Error Log menu appears (see
page 622).
You can select whether or not to indicate the occurrence of an error by the
word “ERROR” shown on the menu title button, by setting [Error Popup] in
the Error Status menu or Error Log menu. For details, see “Error Status
menu” (page 620) or “Error Log menu” (page 622).
To display the error status or error log regardless of whether there
is currently an error
1
Carry out either of the following.
• Press the [DIAG] button of the top menu selection buttons.
Menu title button
Appendix (Volume 2)
620 Error Messages
• Press the menu page number button at the upper left of the menu screen,
to display the top menu window, then enter 7411 or 7412, and press
[Enter].
The Diagnostic menu appears.
2
Press VF1 ‘Error Info.’
The error information menu appears.
3
Press either of the following buttons.
HF1 ‘Error Status’: display the Error Status menu
HF2 ‘Error Log’: display the Error Log menu
Error Status menu
The Error Status menu lists currently occurring error information, listed with
the most recent information at the top.
When an error has been cleared, the error disappears from the list.
621Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
aNo
This is a sequential number assigned to the error status.
bDate/Time
This shows the date and time the error occurred.
cDevice
This shows the device on which the error occurred.
dStatus
This shows the details of the error.
eRefresh Status button
This refreshes the list display.
1 No
2 Date/Time
3 Device
4 Status
5 Refresh Status button
6 Error Popup button
Appendix (Volume 2)
622 Error Messages
fError Popup button
This selects whether or not to display “ERROR” on the menu title button when
an error occurs. This button is linked to the Error Popup button in the error log
menu.
On: if a device error occurs, display “ERROR” on the menu title button.
Off: if a device error occurs, do not display “ERROR” on the menu title button.
Error Log menu
The Error Log menu lists changes in the error status from the time that the
menu display in the menu operating section is started up, listed with the most
recent information at the top.
A maximum of 1024 error status changes appear, and when the number
exceeds 1024, the oldest items disappear from the list.
623Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
aNo
This is a sequential number assigned to the items in the error log.
bDate/Time
This shows the date and time the status change occurred.
cDevice
This shows the device on which the status change occurred.
dStatus
This shows the details of the status change.
1 No
2 Date/Time
3 Device
4 Status
5 Clear button
6 Plural button
7 All button
8 Error Popup button
Appendix (Volume 2)
624 Error Messages
If you press on the list, this switches the display to reverse video, and selects
the item. You can also select items in the error log by turning the knob.
eClear button
This deletes the selected error log item from the list.
fPlural button
When this is on, you can select more than one error log. To cancel the selection,
press once again to return to the normal display.
gAll button
When this is on, all error log items are selected. To cancel the selection, press
once again to return to the normal display.
hError Popup button
This selects whether or not to display “ERROR” on the menu title button when
an error occurs. This button is linked to the Error Popup button in the error
status menu.
On: if a device error occurs, display “ERROR” on the menu title button.
Off: if a device error occurs, do not display “ERROR” on the menu title button.
Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box
Corresponding to the content of the message, an icon appears.
625Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
Icon Title
Message
Icon Title Message Description
Activate
License
The license key you entered is
invalid.
Please check and enter again.
7316.7: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >License >License Management
In the above menu, since the entered
information was incorrect, the Activate License
procedure failed. Check the license key, and
enter again.
Activate
License
License key was successfully
entered.
The license will be activated
after rebooting your system.
7316.7: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >License >License Management
In the above menu, the Activate License
procedure completed successfully.
Appendix (Volume 2)
626 Error Messages
Append
Key Frame
[Append Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
FMx is not assigned to a user
region.
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Append Key Frame], but it failed
because the frame memory output (FMx) is not
assigned to a user region.
7331.4: Make the assignment in the
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >User1-8
Config menu, and try again.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is locked.
(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Append Key Frame] using a locked
register (UserX region). Unlock the register.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is busy.
(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
(UserX region) into which files are being
loaded. Try again after file loading has finished.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is being
edited. (UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
(UserX region) with which a keyframe creating
or editing operation is proceeding. Try again
after the keyframe operation has finished.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is full.
(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
(UserX region) in which no keyframe remains.
[Append Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is not
active.(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Append Key Frame] using a register
for which the appropriate region selection
button in the numeric keypad control block is
not selected. Try again after you select the
region selection button [UserX] in the numeric
keypad control block.
Backup Success!! 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, saving files into the external
hard disk completed successfully.
Icon Title Message Description
627Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
Backup No external HDD was found
(–2).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the external hard disk
could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Cannot access the partition
(–12).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the logical drives of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory
(–20).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the directory of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Cannot access the directory
(–21).
The external HDD is busy
(–22).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] to the external hard disk
which was busy and could not be accessed. Try
again after you check that the access lamp of
the hard disk or the indicator of the menu is
turned off.
The external HDD is full (–32). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] to the external hard disk
which does not have enough capacity.
Backup operation failed (–33) 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Backup] but the file storing process
was not completed correctly.
Backup operation failed (–34).
Change
Password
The password has been
successfully changed.
7317.1: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock
In the above menu, the password was
successfully changed.
Change
Password
Failed.
The password was not
changed.
7317.1: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock
In the above menu, the password was not
changed.
Icon Title Message Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
628 Error Messages
Create
Key Frame
[Create Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
FMx is not assigned to a user
region.
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Create Key Frame], but it failed
because the frame memory output (FMx) is not
assigned to a user region.
7331.4: Make the assignment in the
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >User1-8
Config menu, and try again.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is locked.
(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Create Key Frame] using a locked
register (UserX region). Unlock the register.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is busy.
(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
[Create Key Frame] using a register (UserX
region) into which files are being loaded. Try
again after file loading has finished.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is being
edited. (UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Create Key Frame] using a register
(UserX region) with which a keyframe creating
or editing operation is proceeding. Try again
after the keyframe operation has finished.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
There is no free Key Frame.
(UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Create Key Frame] for a UserX region
with insufficient usable keyframes.
[Create Key Frame] cannot be
executed.
Key Frame Register is not
active. (UserX)
2515: Frame Memory >Still >Create Key Frame
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Create Key Frame] using a register for
which the appropriate region selection button in
the numeric keypad control block is not
selected. Try again after you select the region
selection button [UserX] in the numeric keypad
control block.
Deactivate
License
The license will be deactivated
after rebooting your system.
7316.7: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >License >License Management
In the above menu, the Deactivate License
procedure completed successfully.
Disk
Format
Success!! 7317: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance
In the above menu, removable disk formatting
procedure completed successfully.
Failure.
Make sure of the memory card.
7317: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance
In the above menu, removable disk formatting
procedure failed. Check that the memory card
is correctly inserted.
Icon Title Message Description
629Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
Error This operation is cancelled,
because the register is locked.
Please change the register
status to be unlocked first.
6211.1: Effect >Master Timeline >Store >Edit
6311.1: Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store
>Edit
6411.1: Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall >Edit
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
assign to a register that is locked. Unlock the
register before carrying out the assignment.
The file was not able to be
read.
7142.1: File >Shotbox, Macro >File Edit
In the above menu, [Off Line Edit] was pressed
but the selected file could not be read.
Select the file again, and press [Off Line Edit]
once more.
It was not possible to make a
file.
7142.3: File >Shotbox, Macro >File Edit >Off
Line Edit
In the above menu, when storing, the file could
not be written.
Try the store once more.
Failed... 7162: File >All, External File >Import/Export
In the above menu, importing a file failed.
Check the format of the original file, and try
again.
The Source and the target are
the same directory.
Please change the source or
the target directory.
7172: File >Configure >Unit ID Copy
In the above menu, the same directory and ID
were selected for source and target.
Select a different directory and ID.
File Auto
Convert
Can’t convert file. It is not
supported version.
7316.8: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Unit Config
This appears when in the above menu, even
though the automatic data conversion function
is enabled, an attempt was made to read the
data of which version is not supported by the
conversion engine, and the data read therefore
failed.
File Frame
Memory
Some requests are skipped.
Following operation is not
permitted.
— Loading that will cause
duplicate register name.
7151: File >Frame Memory
7162: File >All, External File >Import/Export
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
load a file of a name already existing in the
register.
File Open
Status
ERROR (01) 533X: Device >DDR/VTR menu
When an error is returned from the DDR/VTR,
one of these messages appears, depending on
the error number.
Use Menu7355:Engineering Setup >DCU
>Serial Port Assign or
Menu7325.4:Engineering Setup >Panel
>Device Interface >Serial Port Assign to check
the device settings.
ERROR (02)
ERROR (FF): No target device
has been assigned
Format Success!! 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, formatting the external hard
disk completed successfully.
Icon Title Message Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
630 Error Messages
Format No external HDD was found
(–2).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but the external hard disk
could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Format operation failed (–10). 2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but formatting the external
hard disk was not completed correctly.
Format operation failed (–11).
Cannot access the partition
(–12).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but the logical drives of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory
(–20).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] but the directory of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Cannot access the directory
(–21).
The external HDD is busy
(–22).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Format] of the external hard disk which
was busy and could not be accessed. Try again
after you check that the access lamp of the hard
disk or the indicator of the menu is turned off.
GPI Input Please set Target. 7325.1/2: Engineering Setup >Panel >Device
Interface >GPI Input
7344.1/2: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Interface >DME1 GPI Input
7344.5/6: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Interface >DME2 GPI Input
7352/7352.1: Engineering Setup >DCU >GPI
Input Assign
In the above menus, when making a setting, a
parameter setting value was incorrect. Check
the settings, and try again.
Please set Trigger Type.
Please set Reg No.
Please set Aux Bus No.
Please set Src No.
Please set Pulse Width.
Please set Pulse Timing.
GPI
Output
Please set Target. 7325.3/4: Engineering Setup >Panel >Device
Interface >GPI Output
7337.2/3: Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >GPI Output
7337.4/5: Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >GPI Output
7344.3/4: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Interface >DME1 GPI Output
7344.7/8: Engineering Setup >DME >Device
Interface >DME2 GPI Output
7354/7354.1: Engineering Setup >DCU >GPI
Output Assign
In the above menus, when making a setting, a
parameter setting value was incorrect. Check
the settings, and try again.
Please set Trigger Type.
Please set Reg No.
Please set Aux Bus No.
Please set Src No.
Please set Pulse Width.
Please set Pulse Timing.
Icon Title Message Description
631Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
HDD
Format
Failure.
HDD device is busy.
In order to complete HDD
format, System needs to be
restarted and formatted again.
System will be restarted, then
please execute HDD format
again.
7317: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance
In the above menu, the hard disk formatting
procedure failed.
If the hard disk is functioning correctly, or in
some cases when there is damage to the disk,
it may not be possible to format the disk
correctly in a single attempt. In such cases, it is
necessary to restart the system, and then carry
out formatting again.
Press [OK] to restart the system.
HDD
Format
Success!!
System will be restarted.
7317: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance
In the above menu, the hard disk formatting
procedure completed successfully.
Press [OK] to restart the system.
Initial
Read
Initializing now... This popup message appears during menu
startup, while system information is being read
in.
Install No Task.
Select a package on the list.
7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, the package for installation
was not selected. Select a package to be
installed.
Install (1) Please select the MKS-
8010A package on the list
(2) Please select the MKS-
8010 package (not MKS-
8010A) on the list.
7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, the menu software
installation package does not match the model
on which it is to be installed.
(1) When the MKS-8010 installation package is
selected on the MKS-8010A
(2) When the MKS-8010A installation package
is selected on the MKS-8010
Some files are skipped. 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, some program files were
not installed, for example because the
hardware is not present. Check the skipped
files against the hardware configuration, to
confirm that the installation was completed
correctly.
Not Found.
The software package does not
exist on the removable disk.
7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, the software package to be
installed was not found. Check that the memory
card is correctly inserted, and try the installation
once more.
Install All processes have succeeded. 7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, the installation procedure
completed successfully.
Icon Title Message Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
632 Error Messages
Install
Error
Target: MENU
Error code:
(1) INSTALL_RPM_ERROR
(2) INSTALL_DPKG_ERROR
Program file: XXXXX
An error occurred during software installation
on (1) the MKS-8010A or (2) the MKS-8010.
Target: MENU
Error code:
INSTALL_RCVDA_ERROR
Program file: XXXXX
An error occurred during recovery data
installation. a)
Target: MENU
Error code:
INSTALL_UNCOMPRESS_ER
ROR
Program file: XXXXX
During software installation, an attempt to
uncompress a file failed.
Target: MENU
Error code:
Error message received from
the Switcher/DME/Panel
Processor
Program file: XXXXX
During software installation, an error occurred
on the Switcher/DME/Panel Processor.
The displayed message is the same as shown
in “Error Messages Shown in the Error
Information Menu”
(page 637)
.
Icon Title Message Description
633Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
Install
error
Target: XXXXX
Error code: XXXXX
Program file: XXXXX
7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, if an error occurs during
installation, this shows:
1. Target: Target device for installation
2. Error code: Message returned by device
3. Program file: Program file name where error
occurred
Check the following, and try the installation
once more.
•Are you using the correct software package?
•Has it been downloaded correctly? (Retry
download)
Target: XXXXX
Error code:
INSTALL_ERR_NOCONFIG
No config file is found.
7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, when installing, an
installation settings file could not be read in
correctly.
Download another set of installation files, and
try the installation once more.
Target: XXXXX
Error code:
INSTALL_ERR_NOPROGRAM
No program file is found.
7316.10: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Install
In the above menu, when installing, a program
file included in the installation settings file could
not be read in correctly.
Download another set of installation files, and
try the installation once more.
Internal
Error:
Data HDD
The user data partition of hard
disk drive is damaged, and all
data is lost. The hard disk drive
needs to be reformatted.
Please execute HDD format on
Page 7317.
When starting up the menu system, an error
was found on the hard disk.
In the 7317: Engineering Setup >System >
Maintenance menu, execute [HDD Format].
Internal
Error:
HDD is
incorrect
Hard disk is incorrect or not
formatted.
To format the hard disk, please
execute “HDD Format” on Page
7317.
Internal
Error:
Recovery
HDD
The recovery data partition of
hard disk is damaged, and all
data is lost.
The data needs to be
recovered.
Please execute Restore Data
on Page 9999.
During menu startup, an error was found in the
recovery data partition of the hard disk.
Restore the recovery data using menu 9999. a)
Icon Title Message Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
634 Error Messages
Internal
Error:
Temporary
HDD
The system data partition of
hard disk drive is damaged.
The hard disk drive needs to be
reformatted. Please execute
HDD format on Page 7317.
Please make sure to save all
data in the user data partition
of hard disk drive to any other
device or media, before
reformatted.
When starting up the menu system, an error
was found on the hard disk.
In the 7317: Engineering Setup >System >
Maintenance menu, execute [HDD Format].
Invalid
Name
Empty... 2512: Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store
In the above menu, a Store was carried out
without specifying a name.
Alternatively:
71XX: File Menu
7171: File >Configure >Directory
In the above menu, when renaming a file or
creating a directory, the name was not entered.
Enter the name correctly.
The file exists already... 2512: Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store
In the above menu, the file name specified for a
store operation already exists in the switcher.
Specify a different name.
Loading
Texture
Pattern
Target File: XXXXX
Failed to load target bmp file./
Illegal Name.
This operation is canceled.
7316.9: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Texture Package
In the above menu, an error occurred when
loading a texture file. Delete texture files with an
illegal size or illegal file name, then try again.
Target File: XXXXX
Failed to load target bmp file./
Illegal Size.
This operation is canceled.
Make
Package
Texture file: XXXXX
Not Found.
This texture file does not exist
on the removable disk.
7316.9: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Texture Package
In the above menu, when loading an already
created texture package, a texture file within the
texture package was not found.
This oparation is cancelled,
because capacity is full.
Please clear texture pattern.
7316.9: Engineering Setup >System >Install/
Unit Config >Texture Package
In the above menu, when making a texture
package, there was insufficient space on a
memory card.
Password Password Incorrect 7317.1: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance >Setup Operation Lock
In the above menu, the wrong password was
entered.
Enter the correct password.
Record Cannot be executed.Maximum
number of clips are created.
2523: Frame Memory >Clip >Record
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Rec Start] but the number of recorded
clips had already reached its upper limit.
Icon Title Message Description
635Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
Recovery
Complete
System disk has been
damaged, and then recovered.
Shutdown and restart the
system is recommended to exit
from recovery mode.
Corruption has been detected in the flash
memory for starting the menu CPU, but this has
been recovered. Since the system is operating
in recovery mode, shut down and restart as
soon as practicable. a)
Refresh
Status
No external HDD was found
(–2).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the external hard
disk could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Cannot access the partition
(–12).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the logical drives
of the external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory
(–20).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the directory of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Cannot access the directory
(–21).
The external HDD is busy
(–22).
2561: Frame Memory >External HDD >Format
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
execute [Refresh Status] but the external hard
disk was busy and could not be accessed. Try
again after you check that the access lamp of
the hard disk or the indicator of the menu is
turned off.
Rename This operation is inhibited
because of the illegal
combination in the selected
files.
7151.1: File >Frame Memory > Frame Memory
>File Edit
This appears if you press [Rename] when files
of different types are selected in the above
menu. Check that all selected files are of the
same type.
Restore Success!! 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, recalling a file from the
external hard disk was correctly done.
Icon Title Message Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
636 Error Messages
Restore No external HDD was found
(–2).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the external hard disk
could not be recognized. Check that the
external hard disk is correctly connected.
Cannot access the partition
(–12).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the logical drives of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Check that the external hard disk is correctly
formatted.
Cannot access the directory
(–20).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the directory of the
external hard disk could not be accessed.
Cannot access the directory
(–21).
The external HDD is busy
(–22).
2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the external hard disk
was busy and could not be accessed. Try again
after you check that the access lamp of the hard
disk or the indicator of the menu is turned off.
No file was found (–40). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the file to be written into
the external hard disk was not found.
Restore operation failed (–42). 2562: Frame Memory >External HDD >Backup/
Restore
In the above menu, an attempt was made to
execute [Restore] but the recalling file from the
external hard disk was not completed correctly.
Restore operation failed (–43).
Restore
Data
Restoring... Appears while restoring recovery data using
Menu 9999. a)
Success!! Appears when recovery data has been
successfully restored using Menu 9999. a)
Recovery binary on the USB
storage device is not found.
Recovery data for restoring using Menu 9999
cannot be found on the memory card. Check
that the recovery data has been correctly
copied to the memory card, and restart the
system to retry. a)
Restore
Data
Failure.
Copying recovery data hasn’t
finished.
Restoring recovery data using Menu 9999
failed. Check that the recovery data has been
correctly copied to the memory card, and
restart the system to retry. a)
Icon Title Message Description
637Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
a) MKS-8010A only
Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu
If a file transfer related error occurs, the Error Information menu appears to the
following error messages.
Error messages displayed when an error is detected by the
switcher processor
The following messages (except message a)) indicate data error; load or save
the data again. If the message still appears, contact your Sony service
representative.
Set Time/
Date
Error: Wrong Format. 7317: Engineering Setup >System
>Maintenance
In the above menu, an incorrect date and time
was specified. Specify the date and time
correctly.
Warning No Switcher information
available.
Please confirm “Network
Configuration” on Page 7311.
When starting up the menu system, the
switcher is not present in the system
information. Check the Data LAN connections,
and in the 7311:Engineering Setup >System
>Network Config menu, retry [Auto Config].
Warning This operation will be
cancelled, because the register
is locked.
Please change the register
status to be unlocked first.
6211.1: Effect >Master Timeline >Store >Edit
6311.1: Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store
>Edit
6411.1: Shotbox >Register >Store>Edit
In the above menus, an attempt was made to
store in a locked register. Unlock the register
before carrying out the store.
Warning
(System
Config)
Illegal Network Config
Information (Page 7311)
When starting up the menu system, if the
system information read from the control panel
is not correct, one of these messages, that
corresponds to the situation appears.
Following the message, use 7311:Engineering
Setup >System >Network Config or
7312:Engineering Setup >System >System
Config to retry the operation.
Illegal Panel Assign
Information for Dual Simul
Operation (Page 7312)
No Panel Assign Information
(Page 7312)
No Switcher Assign
Information (Page 7312)
No System Operation Mode
Information (Page 7312)
No DME Channel Information
Icon Title Message Description
Appendix (Volume 2)
638 Error Messages
a) This occurs if the User Region Config state is different for save and load. Make the User Region
Config the same as when the data was saved before carrying out a load operation.
Error messages when an error is detected displayed by the
control panel
When one of the following messages (except messages a) and b)) appears, load
or save the data again. If the message still appears, contact your Sony service
representative.
Messages relating
to loading
Messages relating
to saving
PUT CLOSE (0x1) GET OPEN (0x1)
PUT CLOSE (0x2) GET OPEN (0x2)
PUT CLOSE (0x3) GET OPEN (0x3)
PUT CLOSE (0x4) GET OPEN (0x4)
PUT CLOSE (0x5) GET OPEN (0x5)
PUT CLOSE (0x6) GET OPEN (0x6)
PUT CLOSE (0x7) GET OPEN (0x7)
PUT CLOSE (0x8) GET OPEN (0x8)
PUT CLOSE (0x9) GET OPEN (0x9)
PUT CLOSE (0xA) GET OPEN (0xA)
PUT CLOSE (0xB) a) GET OPEN (0xB) a)
PUT CLOSE (0xC) GET OPEN (0xC)
Message
ERROR: NOT SUPPORTED
ERROR: DESTINATION NG
ERROR: OUT OF MEMORY
ERROR: ILLEGAL BLOCK ID
ERROR: CANNOT PROCESS
ERROR: CLF CHECK SUM ERROR a)
ERROR: SEQUENCE ERROR
ERROR: OUT OF BUFFER
ERROR: PACKET FORMAT NG
ERROR: UPLOAD DATA SIZE OVER
ERROR: CANNOT CREATE HEADER
ERROR: INVALID REG NO
ERROR: DOWNLOAD FILE SIZE OVER
ERROR: INVALID VERSION
639Error Messages
Appendix (Volume 2)
a) This occurs if a problem in the data makes normal load or save operation impossible. Either
create the register data again, or resave.
b) This appears if an attempt is made to load from a locked register. Release the lock, and repeat
the load.
Error messages displayed by the DME processor
When one of the following messages (except message a)) appears, load or save
the data again. If the message still appears, contact your Sony service
representative.
a) Even if operation such as batch deletion of snapshot or effect registers appears from the menu
to have completed, if internal processing is still being carried out when an attempt is made to
carry out another operation, then this message appears. Wait a short time, then retry.
Error messages displayed when an error is detected by the menu
CPU
When one of the following messages (except messages a) to d)) appears, load
or save the data again. If the message still appears, contact your Sony service
representative.
ERROR: INVALID FORMAT
ERROR: INVALID MODEL
ERROR: INVALID CATEGORY
ERROR: WRONG FILE SIZE
ERROR: UNCOMPRESS ERROR
ERROR: CHECK SUM ERROR a)
ERROR: BROKEN DATA a)
ERROR: LOCK REGISTER b)
Message
Message
<filename>:ERROR:File size is zero
<filename>:ERROR:Not complete
<filename>:ERROR:Timeout
<filename>:ERROR:UnKnown
<filename>:ERROR:Can’t Rename
<filename>:ERROR:Can’t Copy
<filename>:ERROR:Busy, try later a)
Message
ERROR: CONNECT ERROR
ERROR: GET CONF FILE
Appendix (Volume 2)
640 Error Messages
a) If there is no response at all from the processor on the Data LAN, this message appears. Check
the Network Config, Data-LAN connections, and processor power supply.
b) This appears if the memory card cannot be accessed normally.
Check whether the memory card is damaged, whether it is correctly connected to the memory
card slot, and whether the USB Primary settings are correct.
c) This appears if there is insufficient free space on the memory card or hard disk.
d) This appears if an attempt is made to transfer a frame memory file whereas another file with the
same name already exists on the switcher. Change the name, or delete the file on the switcher,
then repeat the transfer.
ERROR: SERVER BUSY
ERROR: NO RESULT FILE
ERROR: SERVER NOT RESPOND a)
ERROR: SRC FILE OPEN
ERROR: DST FILE OPEN
ERROR: SRC FILE READ
ERROR: DST FILE READ
ERROR: SRC FILE WRITE
ERROR: DST FILE WRITE
ERROR: MAKE DIRECTORY
ERROR: FILE DELETE
ERROR: LOCAL STORAGE ACCESS
ERROR: COMMAND RESULT
ERROR: VERIFY ERROR b)
ERROR: NO FREE SPACE c)
ERROR: SAME FILE ALREADY EXIST d)
Message
641Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Appendix (Volume 2)
Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial
Status Define]
This section lists the data saved in the Engineering Setup >System >Start Up
menu, by each of [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define].
Appendix (Volume 2)
642 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Data saved by [Setup Define]
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in
Panel Setup
0022 Home >Favorites >Group Edit All data relating to Group Edit
menu
0023 Home >Favorites >Button Edit All data relating to Button Edit
menu
7321 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config
All data relating to Config menu
7321.1 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >DSK Fader Assign
All data relating to DSK Fader
Assign menu
7321.2 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >Link/Program Button
>Key Trans Link
All data relating to Key Trans Link
menu
7321.3 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >Link/Program Button
>External Bus Link
All data relating to External Bus
Link menu
7321.7 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >10 Key Region Assign
All data relating to 10 Key Region
Assign menu
7321.8 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >Link/Program Button
All data relating to Link/Program
Button menu
7321.11 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign
All data relating to MP2 Main/Sub
Assign menu
7321.15 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >Compact Key Module
Assign
All data relating to Compact Key
Module Assign menu
7321.18 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Config >M/E Operation Inhibit
All data relating to M/E Operation
Inhibit menu
7322.1 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt
Assign >Table Button Assign
All data relating to Table Button
Assign menu
7322.5 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt
Assign >Main,V/K Pair Assign
<Xpt Shift Mode> And <Display
Shift Mode> Group Data
7322.10 Engineering Setup >Panel >Side
Flags Button Assign
All data relating to Side Flags
Button Assign menu
7323 Engineering Setup >Panel >Aux
Assign
Data relating to bus assignment to
AUX delegation buttons
7323.1 Engineering Setup >Panel >Aux
Assign >RTR Mode Setting
All data relating to RTR Mode
Setting menu
7324 Engineering Setup >Panel >Prefs/
Utility
All data relating to function
assignment to user preference
buttons
643Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Appendix (Volume 2)
Included in
Panel Setup
7324.1 Engineering Setup >Panel >Prefs/
Utility >Utility Module Assign
All data relating to function
assignment to utility/shotbox
control block
7324.2 Engineering Setup >Panel >Prefs/
Utility >Key 2/4 Bus Button Assign
All data relating to utility/shotbox
assignment to cross-point buttons
in the key 2 row
7325 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Device Interface
All data relating to Device
Interface menu
7325.1 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Device Interface >GPI Input
All data relating to GPI Input
menu
7325.3 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Device Interface >GPI Output
All data relating to GPI Output
menu
7325.4 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Device Interface >DCU Serial
Port Assign
All data relating to DCU Serial
Port Assign menu
7326 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation
All data relating to Operation
menu
7326.2 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Effect Mode
All data relating to Effect Mode
menu (excluding [Default KF
Duration] setting values)
7326.3 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Flexi Pad Mode
All data relating to Flexi Pad Mode
menu
7326.4 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Custom Button
All data relating to Custom Button
menu
7326.5 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Sensitivity
All data relating to Sensitivity
menu
7326.6 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Macro
All data relating to Macro menu
7326.7 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation>Custom Button
>CCP-8000 Button
All data relating to CCP-8000
Button menu
7326.8 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Custom Button
>CCP-9000 Button
All data relating to CCP-9000
Button menu
7327 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Maintenance
• Setting data for the following
buttons:
- [Screen Saver]
- [LCD Brightness]
- [LED Brightness]
- [Switch Brightness]
- [Touch Beep]
• Setting data for Initial Menu
7351 to 7355 Engineering Setup >DCU All data relating to DCU
7361 to 7367 Engineering Setup >Router/Tally All data relating to router interface
and tally interface
— — Data of Color Palette window
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Appendix (Volume 2)
644 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Included in
Switcher
Setup
7331
7331.1
7331.2
7331.3
• Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config
• Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >M/E Output Assign
• Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >PGM Config
• Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >K-PVW Config
• <M/E Config> group setting
data
• All data relating to M/E Output
Assign menu
• All data relating to PGM Config
menu
• All data relating to K-PVW
Config menu
7331.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >User1-8 Config
All data relating to User1-8 Config
menu
7331.5 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >Logical M/E Assign
All data relating to Logical M/E
Assign menu
7331.6 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >DME Config
All data relating to DME Config
menu
7331 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config
Setting data for knob 3 (Phase)
7331 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config
Setting data for <Switching
Timing> group
7331 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >
Settings of the following items:
• [Recall M/E Config]
• [DME Wipe Sub Inhibit]
7331.7 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Config >Side Flags
All data relating to Side Flags
menu
7332 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Input
Settings of [Input Phase Adj],
[Through Mode] and [Matte Illeg
Col Limit]
7332.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Input >Video Process
All data relating to Video Process
menu
7333 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Output
Settings of the following reference
outputs:
• Knob 1 (Output No)
• Knob 2 (Line)
• Knob 3 (Time)
7333.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher >
Output >Output Assign
All data relating to Output Assign
menu
7333.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Output >Video Clip
All data relating to Video Clip
menu
7333.3 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Output >V Blank/Throuh
Setting of [V Blank Mask], and
[Through Mode] setting data for
each output
7333.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Output >Safe Title
All data relating to Safe Title
menu
7333.5 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Output >4:3 Crop
All data relating to 4:3 Crop menu
7333.7 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Output >FC Output Assign
All data relating to FC Output
Assign
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
645Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Appendix (Volume 2)
Included in
Switcher
Setup
7334 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Transition
Following setting data in the
Transition menu:
• <Transition Preview> group
• <Key Transition> group
• [Bus Toggle], [Split Fader]
• <FTB> group
7334.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Transition >Preset Color Mix
All data relating to Preset Color
Mix menu
7334.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher >
Transition >Transition Curve
Setting data for <Fader Curve>
group
7335 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Key/Wipe/FM
All data relating to Key/Wipe/FM/
CCR menu
7335.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Key/Wipe/FM/CCR >Show Key
All data relating to Show Key
menu
7335.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Key/Wipe/FM/CCR >Key Auto
Drop
All data relating to Key Auto Drop
menu
7336.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Link >Internal Bus Link
All data relating to Internal Bus
Link menu
7336.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Link >GPI Link
All data relating to GPI Link menu
7336.6 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Link >M/E Link
All data relating to M/E Link menu
7336.7 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Link >Key Transition Link
All data relating to Key Transition
Link menu
7337.1 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >Remote
Assign
All data relating to Remote Assign
menu
7337.2 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >GPI Input
All data relating to GPI Input
menu
7337.4 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >GPI Output
All data relating to GPI Output
menu
7337.5 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >AUX Control
All data relating to AUX Control
menu
7337.6 Engineering Setup >Switcher
>Device Interface >DME Type
Setting
All data relating to DME Type
Setting menu a)
7322.5 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt
Assign >Main,V/K Pair Assign
Cross-point assignment settings
(excluding <Xpt Shift Mode> and
<Display Shift Mode> groups)
7322.6 Engineering Setup >Panel >Xpt
Assign >Src Name/LCD Color
• Names of source signals
• Color of source name display
for each source signal
7326.2 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Effect Mode
Setting of [Default KF Duration]
for switcher keyframes
3221 Misc >Safe Title All data relating to Safe Title
menu
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Appendix (Volume 2)
646 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
a) For MVE-9000 only
b) Only when using the MVE-8000A/9000 SDI interface
Included in
DME Setup
7341 Engineering Setup >DME >Input All data relating to Input menu
7341.1 Engineering Setup >DME >Input
>TBC Center
All data relating to TBC Center
menu b)
7343 Engineering Setup >DME
>Output
Video clip level adjustment values
for DME1 and DME2 outputs b)
7343.1 Engineering Setup >DME
>Output >Monitor Output
All data relating to Monitor Output
menu a)
7344 Engineering Setup >DME
>Device Interface
All data relating to Device
Interface menu
7344.1 Engineering Setup >DME
>Device Interface >DME1 GPI
Input
All data relating to DME1 GPI
Input menu
7344.3 Engineering Setup >DME
>Device Interface >DME1 GPI
Output
All settings relating to DME1 GPI
Output menu
7344.4 Engineering Setup >DME
>Device Interface >DME2 GPI
Input
All settings relating to DME2 GPI
Input menu
7344.6 Engineering Setup >DME
>Device Interface >DME2 GPI
Output
All settings relating to DME2 GPI
Output menu
7326.2 Engineering Setup >Panel
>Operation >Effect Mode
• Settings relating to [Default KF
Duration] for DME keyframes
• Setting data for [Effect Auto
Save] button
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
647Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Appendix (Volume 2)
Data saved by [Initial Status Define]
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Included in
Panel
— — Setting data and LCD displays for the
following panel buttons
• Key Control Block:
Delegation buttons, [AUTO DELEG]
• Numeric Keypad Control Block:
Mode selection buttons, [TC], [RCALL],
[STORE]
• Menu Control Block:
User preference buttons assigned for
Plug-in Editor Enbl and System
Manager Enbl functions
• [SUB MENU SITE]
• Utility/Shotbox Control Block:
[BANK1] to [BANK4], memory recall
button
• Downstream Key Control Block:
[DSK1] to [DSK4], [K-SS], key source
name display/key snapshot buttons
• Cross-Point Control Block:
[KEY3], [KEY4], [SHIFT], [UTIL],
[MCRO ATTCH ENBL], [DUAL BKGD
BUS], [UTIL/SBOX]
• Keyframe Control Block:
[EDIT ENBL]
• Auxiliary Bus Control Block:
Cross-point buttons, [SHIFT], [DEST],
[2ND], [KEY], [RTR], [LEVEL1] to
[LEVEL4]
• Transition Control Block (standard
type):
[KEY1] to [KEY4], [K-MOD ENBL], [K-
TR ENBL], [K-SS], key source name
display/key snapshot buttons
• Flexi Pad Control Block:
[WIPE], [DME], [SNAP SHOT], [EFF],
[SHOT BOX], [MCRO], [TRANS RATE],
[BANK0], [BANK1], memory recall
buttons
• Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad
Control Block (simple type):
[WIPE], [DME], [SNAP SHOT], [INH],
memory recall section
• Independent Key Transition Control
Block (simple type):
[K-SS], key source name display/key
snapshot buttons
• Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black
Control Block:
[DSK1], [DSK2], [K-SS], key source
name display/key snapshot buttons,
Edit PVW Shift ON/OFF
• Device Control Block: [RSZR], [ASP],
[LOC]
Appendix (Volume 2)
648 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Included in
Panel
3211 Misc >Enable >Port
Enable >System Manager
All data relating to System Manager
menu
3212 Misc >Enable >Plug-In
Editor
All data relating to Plug-In Editor menu
6351 Snapshot >Key Snapshot
>Attribute
Settings of <Recall Mode> group
Included in
Switcher
(Same as
data saved in
Snapshots) a)
— — • For each M/E, setting data relating to
the following:
cross-points, transitions, Key1 to Key4
(including settings in the independent
key transition control block), wipes,
DME wipes, video processing
• Color backgrounds 1/2
• Frame memory
• AUX bus (including video processing
settings)
• Monitor bus
3213 Misc >Enable >Side Flags All data relating to Side Flags menu
3211 Misc >Enable >Port
Enable
Setting data for <Switcher> group
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
649Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
Appendix (Volume 2)
Included in
DME
4100 DME >Status Three-dimensional transformation data
4111 DME >Edge >Border/
Crop
All data relating to Border/Crop menu
4112 DME >Edge >Beveled
Edge
All data relating to Beveled Edge menu
4121 to 4124 DME >Video Modify All data relating to Video Modify menu
4131 DME >Freeze >Freeze All data relating to Freeze menu
4141 (4141.1
to 4141.28)
DME >Non Linear All data relating to Non Linear menu
4151 DME >Light/Trail >Lighting All data relating to Lighting menu
4152 DME >Light/Trail >Trail All data relating to Trail menu
4153 DME >Light/Trail >Motion
Decay
All data relating to Motion Decay menu
4154 DME >Light/Trail >KF
Strobe
All data relating to KF Strobe menu
4161 DME >Input/Output
>Bkgd
All data relating to Bkgd menu
4162 DME >Input/Output
>Video/Key
All data relating to Video/Key menu
4163 DME >Input/Output
>Process
All data relating to Process menu
4164 DME >Input/Output
>Graphic
All data relating to Graphic menu
4211, 4221 Global Effect >Ch1-Ch4
>Combine Priority
Global Effect >Ch5-Ch8
>Combine Priority
All data relating to Combine Priority menu
4212, 4222 Global Effect >Ch1-Ch4
>Brick
Global Effect >Ch5-Ch8
>Brick
All data relating to Brick menu
4213, 4223 Global Effect >Ch1-Ch4
>Shadow
Global Effect >Ch5-Ch8
>Shadow
All data relating to Shadow menu
4113 DME >Edge >Key Border All data relating to Key Border menu b)
4114 DME > Edge> Art Edge All data relating to Art Edge menub)
4115 DME >Edge >Flex
Shadow All data relating to Flex Shadow menu b)
4116 DME >Edge >Wipe Crop All data relating to Wipe Crop menu b)
4117 DME >Edge >Color Mix All data relating to Color Mix menu b)
4127 DME >Video Modify
>Mask All data relating to Mask menu b)
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
Appendix (Volume 2)
650 Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
a) In Multi Program 2 mode, M/E Config settings are saved in a snapshot when [Recall M/E
Config] is set to ON, but are not saved by [Initial Status Define].
b) For MVE-9000 only
Included in
DME
4156 DME >Light/Trail >Spot
Lighting All data relating to Spot Lighting menu b)
4155 DME >Light/Trail >Wind
All data relating to Wind menu b)
4171 DME >Enhanced Video
Modify >Sketch All data relating to Sketch menu b)
4172 DME >Enhanced Video
Modify >Metal All data relating to Metal menu b)
4173 DME >Enhanced Video
Modify >Dim & Fade All data relating to Dim & Fade menu a)
4174 DME >Enhanced Video
Modify >Glow All data relating to Glow menu b)
3211 Misc >Enable >Port
Enable
<DME1> and <DME2> group data
Type Menu number Menu path Saved data
651Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro
Appendix (Volume 2)
Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu
Macro
The menu operations not recorded in a menu macro comprise some operations
common to all menus and some operations inhibited in individual menus.
Operations not recorded in menu macros, common to all menus
• Recalling a menu
• Delegation operations: region selection, channel delegation, operations
assigning a parameter to a knob, and so forth
• Parameter setting operations using the knobs, trackball, or joystick (value
input operations from the numeric keypad are recorded)
Operations not recorded in menu macros, in individual menus
Menu number Menu including operations not recorded
0011 to 0023 All menus under Home
2141 FrameMemory >File >Delete Thumbnail
2142 FrameMemory >File >Delete List
2143 FrameMemory >File >Rename Thumbnail
2144 FrameMemory >File >Rename List
2145 FrameMemory >File >Backup/Restore
2544 FrameMemory >File >Move
2545 FrameMemory >File >Delete
2546 FrameMemory >File >Rename
2547 FrameMemory >File >Backup/Restore
2551 FrameMemory >File >Folder
2561 FrameMemory >External HDD >Format
2562 FrameMemory >External HDD >Backup/Restore
5333 Device >DDR/VTR >File List
5412 to 5437 All menus under Macro
7111 to 7172 All menus under File
7311 to 7317.1 All menus under Engineering Setup >System
7327 All menus under Engineering Setup >Panel >Maintenance
652 Index
Index
Index
A
Abekas A53 protocol 158
Action setting 159
for rewind 161, 165, 185
Alarm adjustment 382
Anti-moire filter 144
Art edge settings 34
Autoload function 298, 489
Aux bus control enable/disable
422
AUX bus remote panel 463
AUX delegation button
settings 351
shift operation 352
AUX/MON menu 584
B
Background
settings 136
transition flip-flop mode
405
Banks and registers 504
Beveled edge settings 31
Blind settings 95
Blur settings 60
Border
processing order 409
settings 24
Brick settings 150
Brightness adjustment 382
Broken glass settings 94
Button
assignment settings 356
operation mode 378
C
Calibration 382
CCR menu 585
Character Trail settings 109
Circle settings 102
Color Bkgd menu 584
Color correction
switching the function
312
Color corrector 549
Color Mix settings 56
Combiner settings 145
Communications status 568
Contrast settings 67
Control panel settings 321
Copy/Swap menu 586
Copying 240
Crop settings 28
Cross-point
assign tables 342
button shift operation 346
settings 342
Cross-point assign tables 348
Cueup & Play 172
automatic execution 175
settings in a menu 177
Cylinder settings 105
D
Date and time 315
DCU
serial port settings 372
setup 433
Default wipe edge softness
410
Defocus settings 58
Delay setting 222
Destination names 376
Device
interface 367, 417, 429
menu 589
setup 299
Diagnosis 567
Diagnostic menu 600
Dim and fade settings 73
Direct store 161
Directory operations 485
creating a directory 485
deleting a directory 486
renaming a directory 486
Disk recorder
control 166
Cueup & Play 172
file operations 186
information check 171
recording to 170
settings 446, 448
timeline 180
timeline editing 182
DME 13
menu 588
setup 426
special effects 24
Double-click sensitivity 380
Dual background bus mode
333
Duration mode setting 218
E
Edit points 203
setting 205
Editing keyboard 372
Effect
attribute settings 238
duration setting 221
execution 227
execution direction 229
menu 592
repeating 229
saving 231
settings 375
status display 239
653Index
Index
Effect register
copy/move/swap 240
data deletion 242
editing 239
merge 241
naming 243
write-protecting 240
Engineering setup 287
Engineering Setup menu 596
Error messages 619
Error Information menu
637
error status/log 619
message box 624
Explosion settings 105
Extended VTR 166, 449
External
box setting 452
device control 158
F
Fader lever operations 406
Fade-to-black function 405
File menu 595
File operations 186
autoload function 489
batch operations 479
copying 472, 487
deleting 475
directory operations 485
displaying menus 466
import/export 482
individual files 466
loading 470, 480
renaming 473
saving 469, 479
selecting a device 468
selecting regions 468
viewing detailed
information 466
Film effect 81
Fine mode 18
Flag settings 88
Flex shadow settings 44
Flexi Pad
settings 377
Flying bar settings 95
Format converter
inputs 392
outputs 403
Formatting a memory card
316
Formatting the hard disk 317
Frame
memory data export 483
memory data import 482
Memory menu 583
Frame memory folder 477
Freeze settings 79
Function
assignment user
preference buttons 356
links 410
Functions assignable to
trackball/Z-ring 18
G
Global
Effect menu 589
effect operations 145
Glow settings 74
GPI
device control 163
output port settings 163
timeline creation/editing
163
GPI input settings
for control panel 367
for DCU 434
for DME 430
for switcher processor
418
GPI output settings
for control panel 370
for DCU 439
for DME 432
for switcher processor
420
Graphics
outputtting to the monitor
22
Graphics display 21
H
Hard freeze effect 80
I
Illegal color limiter 391, 427
Initialization 299
hard disk 317
Input reference signal 294
Installation 299
Interpolation settings 142
Invert settings 140
J
Joystick sensitivity 380
K
Kaleidoscope settings 100
Key
auto drop 407
border settings 33
delegation assign 323
density settings 141
Frame menu 591
memory mode 409
priority operation mode
409
settings 407
snapshot attributes 265
source selection 141
Keyframe 207
copying 214
creation 207
delay setting 222
deletion 212
duration setting 220
insertion 208
loop 215
modification 208
moving 213
operations 193
path setting 223
pause 214
register operations 238
654 Index
Index
strobe settings 121
L
Lens settings 101
Lighting settings 110
Link
cross-point buttons 410,
413
key transition 416
M/E banks 414
Locking the setup data 317
M
M/E-1 to M/E-3 menus 578
Macro
assignment of operation
buttons 333
attachment removal 532
attachment setting 529
auto insert mode 495
creation/editing 495
creation/saving 507
execution 494, 504
execution by attachment
534
execution mode 380
file editing rules 601
menu 590
menu macro 536
offline editing 523
online editing 517
register recalling 494, 504
saving 502
Macro attachment list 533
Macro operations
in Flexi Pad control block
503
in keyframe control block
492
in numeric keypad control
block 492
Macro register
editing 517
recalling 494
Macro timeline 546
Mask processing order 409
Mask settings 76
Master snapshot creation/
saving 265
Master timeline creation/
saving 233
with the menu 235
with the numeric keypad
control block 233
Melt settings 108
Memory card formatting 316
Menu macro 536
creation/editing 538
editing a register 544
executing 536
recalling a register 536
Menu shortcut assignment
memory recall button 365
user preference buttons
361
Menu tree 578
Merging 241
Metal settings 72
Mirror settings 98
Mixing images 147
MKS-8080/8082 463
setting status 464
simple connection 463
Monitor output 428
graphics 22
Mono settings 65
Mosaic
glass settings 87
settings 68
Motion decay settings 119
Moving 240
Multi
mirror settings 99
move settings 62
N
Nega settings 66
Network settings 289
Nonlinear effects settings 81
O
On-air tally 374
Operation mode setting 384
Operation settings 374
P
Page turn
settings 103
Panorama settings 103
Parallel
input settings 433
output settings 438
tally settings 459
Path setting 223
Path type
for Curve 224
for Hue 225
for Xpt 225
Pattern limit 409
Pause
event 509
insertion 509
P-Bus
action setting 159
timeline creation/editing
159
trigger 162
P-Bus devices 158
control 159
control mode setting 372
PGM/PST
logical assignment to M/E
388
menu 581
Posterization 66
Preset color mix setting 406
Primary setting 316
R
Recording to VTR/disk
655Index
Index
recorders 170
Reference
output setting 402
phase adjustment 384
Region
assigning 328
selecting 203
Register
displaying list 244, 267
menu macro 536
operations in the menus
238
recalling 198
Register editing
menu macro 544
Reset 299
Ripple settings 89
Router interface settings 451
Run mode setting 228
S
Safe title settings 401
Screen
saver 381
SCU editor panel port 372
Search dial 168
Separate sides settings 137
Sepia settings 64
Serial
port settings 441
tally setting 461
Setup
for DCU 433
for DME 426
for operations from the
control panel 321
for router interface/tally
451
for switcher unit 384
for the whole switcher
system 289
locking the data 317
Shadow settings 154
Shaped video settings 138
Shotbox execution
in the Flexi Pad control
block 282
in the utility/shotbox
control block 284
Numeric Keypad Control
Block 281
Shotbox menu 594
Shotbox register creation
in the numeric keypad
control block 276
using the menus 278
Shotbox register editing 286
Show key function 407
Side flags 350
adjusting the width 389
aspect ratio 389
assigning a cross-point
button 350
auto crop 389
auto side flags 389
cropping 389
Signal format setting 293
Signal input settings
for DME 426
for switcher processor
390
Signal output settings 398
Simple connection 463
Sketch settings 69
Snapshot
banks/registers 254
menu 593
register editing 266
saving/recalling 248, 256
status display 263
Snapshot operations
from the numeric keypad
control block 248
in the Flexi Pad control
block 254
in the menus 260
Software
installation 300
setting required 301
Solarization 66
Source name 376
Source signal name 346
Sphere settings 105
Split
fader setting 405
settings 97
slide settings 97
Spotlighting settings 126
user texture patterns 305
Start-up state 297
Status menu 587
Swapping 240
Swirl settings 107
Switcher configuration 384
System
maintenance 315
settings 290
T
Tally
copy settings 458
generation settings 456
group settings 454
Tape transport control 166
TBC window center position
427
Three-dimensional parameters
display 19
entering 20
values 20
Three-dimensional
transformation 15
Through mode settings 400
Time
settings 220
strobe effect 80
Timeline menu 194, 196
main parts 194
recalling 194
Touch panel calibration 382
Trackball sensitivity 380
Trail settings 115
Transition
mode 405
preview mode setting 404
Twist settings 88
U
USB driver reloading 317
User programmable DME
transition mode 219
656 Index
Index
User region setting 387
User-defined settings 298
Utility execution 272
in the utility/shotbox
control block 273
with user preference
buttons 272
V
Vertical blanking interval
adjustment 400
Video
clip adjustment 400
switching settings 404
switching timing 384
Video disk communications
protocol 158
Video process memory 407
Virtual image cancellation 23
VTR
control 166
Cueup & Play 172
information check 171
Loop 179
operation button
assignment 331
recording to 170
Recue 179
timeline 180
timeline editing 182
W
Wave settings 83
Wind settings 123
Wipe
settings 407
Wipe Crop settings 51
Wiring settings 454
Working buffer clearing 21
Wrap Around 23
Write-protecting 240
X
XPT HOLD button operation
mode 409
The material contained in this manual consists of infor-
mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equip-
ment described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur-
pose other than the operation or maintenance of the
equipment described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
MVS-8000/8000SF
System (SY)
3-206-017-12 (1)
Printed in Japan
2008.05.13
©2001
Sony Corporation
Printed on recycled paper

Navigation menu